P. 1
TutorialsStructureImpENU

TutorialsStructureImpENU

|Views: 1,634|Likes:
Published by mariondon

More info:

Published by: mariondon on Mar 31, 2011
Copyright:Attribution Non-commercial

Availability:

Read on Scribd mobile: iPhone, iPad and Android.
download as PDF, TXT or read online from Scribd
See more
See less

05/04/2012

pdf

text

original

Sections

  • Using the Tutorials
  • Accessing Training Files
  • Understanding the Basics
  • Navigating the Revit Structure User Interface
  • Performing Common Tasks in Revit Structure
  • Structural Modelling
  • Creating a New Project
  • Adding New Levels
  • Importing/Linking a DWG File
  • Adding Column Grids
  • Adding Structural Walls
  • Adding Structural Columns
  • Adding Structural Beams
  • Adding Structural Beam Systems
  • Adding a Structural Slab
  • Copying Elements to Multiple Levels
  • Adding Foundations
  • Structural Detailing
  • Using a Detail Drawing as a Section View
  • Placing a Detail in a Sheet
  • Adjusting Line Weights of Imported Details
  • Creating a New Details Sheet from a Detail Library
  • Preparing Views for Detailing in a Section
  • Adding a Cantilever to a Slab
  • Coping Beam Connections
  • Adding Detail Components
  • Adding Final Annotation and Detailing
  • Modifying System Settings
  • Modifying General System Options
  • Specifying File Locations
  • Specifying Spelling Options
  • Modifying Snap Settings
  • Modifying Project Settings
  • Creating and Applying Materials
  • Creating and Applying Fill Patterns
  • Controlling Object Styles
  • Modifying Line Patterns and Styles
  • Modifying Annotations
  • Specifying Units of Measurement,Temporary Dimensions, and Detail Level Options
  • Modifying Project Browser Organization
  • Creating a Structural Template
  • Choosing the Base Template
  • Loading and Modifying Families and Groups
  • Modifying Views and View Templates
  • Modifying Structural Settings
  • Modifying Import/Export Settings
  • Setting up Shared and Project Parameters
  • Creating Named Print Settings
  • Create named print settings
  • Starting a New Project
  • Importing/Linking Drawing Files
  • Importing/Linking a 2D AutoCAD File
  • Importing /Linking an AutoCAD Architecture File
  • Linking a Revit Architecture File
  • Link a Revit Architecture file
  • Creating a Structural Model
  • Creating a Structural Model
  • Adding Grid Lines to the Imported Drawing
  • Adding Horizontal Framing
  • Adding Beam Systems
  • Adding a Composite Deck
  • Adding Bracing
  • Adding Shear Walls
  • Adding Isolated Foundations
  • Place isolated foundations
  • Completing the Structural Model
  • Completing the Steel Framing of Level 2
  • Adding Cantilevered Beams
  • Adding a Concrete Slab with Metal Deck
  • Adding Shafts
  • Duplicating Framing
  • Adding a Shape-Modified Slab
  • Adding a Shape-Modified Curved Slab
  • Adding Miter Joins
  • Adding Curved Beams
  • Adding an Opening
  • Adding an Opening in a Beam
  • Adding an Opening to a Beam Family
  • Adding Foundation Walls
  • Adding Piers or Pilasters
  • Framing Ground and Parking Garage Levels
  • Placing a Wall Foundation
  • Precast Concrete
  • Creating a Precast Beam System
  • Adding a Beam System to the Structure
  • Changing the Beam System Properties
  • Changing the Beam System Clear Spacing
  • Modifying the Precast Beam Family
  • Adding a Chamfer to the Beam
  • Creating Drawings
  • Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project
  • Creating a Drawing Sheet
  • Adding a Sheet to the Project
  • Creating New Views to Add to Sheets
  • Creating a Detail Library
  • Creating a Drafting View Detail Library
  • Importing Details from the Library
  • Using Legends
  • Creating a Symbol Legend
  • Scheduling
  • Scheduling Beam Quantities
  • Creating a Structural Framing Schedule
  • Creating Shared Parameters
  • Creating a Type Schedule
  • Customizing the Type Schedule
  • Creating an Instance Schedule
  • Creating a Graphical Column Schedule
  • Create the Graphical Column Schedule
  • Change the Schedule Appearance
  • Creating Multiple Sheets for the Graphical Column Schedule
  • Exporting Project Information with ODBC
  • Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access
  • Steel Details
  • Setting Up Section Views on Sheets
  • Cutting Sections and Adding Views to Sheets
  • Detailing Steel
  • Creating a Welded Bracing Detail
  • Creating a Bolted Angle Detail
  • Creating a Facade Support Detail
  • Creating a Drafting View Detail
  • Creating a Deck Span Transition Detail
  • Concrete Reinforcement Modelling
  • ■ Reinforcement in a Beam
  • Concrete Modelling Examples
  • Reinforcement in a Beam
  • Reinforcement in a Column
  • Area Reinforcement in a Structural Wall
  • Area Reinforcement in a Slab
  • Path Reinforcement in a Slab
  • Sketch Reinforcement in a Footing
  • Sketch Reinforcement in a Structural Wall
  • Annotating and Dimensioning
  • Dimensioning
  • Creating Dimensions
  • Controlling Witness Line Location
  • Modifying Dimension Properties
  • Working with Alignments and Constraints
  • Creating Automatic Linear Wall Dimensions
  • Working with Spot Dimensions
  • Annotating
  • Tagging Beams
  • Creating a Custom Beam Tag
  • Worksets
  • Using Worksharing in a Project
  • Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets
  • Assigning Worksets
  • Making the Entire Workset Editable
  • Using Worksets with Multiple Users
  • Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users
  • Project Coordination
  • Coordination Review
  • Opening the Modified Revit Architecture file
  • Interference Check
  • Using Revision Tracking
  • Setting Up a Revision Table
  • Sketching Revision Clouds
  • Add Remaining Revisions
  • Tagging Revision Clouds
  • Working with Revisions
  • Structural Analytical Modelling
  • Applying the Analytical Model to the Design Process
  • Analytical Checks
  • Load Cases
  • Adding Loads to the Model
  • Load Combination
  • Transfer Project Standards
  • Documenting the Analytical Model
  • Examples of Analytical Adjustment and Reset in the Model
  • Examples of Automatic Adjustment in the Analytical Model
  • Boundary Conditions
  • Preparing the Analytical Model to be Calculated in Third Party Analysis Software
  • Exporting Revit Structure Files
  • Exporting CAD Formats
  • Exporting the 3D Model to AutoCAD Architecture 2007
  • Exporting a 2D view to AutoCAD
  • Exporting Sheets
  • Using Families and the Family Editor
  • Introduction to Families
  • Creating Components in the Family Editor
  • Creating Custom Families
  • Creating a Custom Metal Deck Family
  • Customizing a Castellated Beam
  • Creating a Custom Reinforcement Layout
  • Creating In-Place Families
  • Creating a Step Footing In-Place Family
  • Creating a Titleblock Family
  • Drawing Linework for a Titleblock Sheet
  • Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock
  • Adding the Titleblock to a New Project
  • Working with Trusses
  • Adding Trusses to a Project
  • Customizing Truss Parameters
  • Modifying the Shape of a Truss
  • Creating a Custom Truss Family
  • Building a Truss with Drafting Tools
  • Creating Multiple Design Options in a Project
  • Creating the Structural Design Options
  • Creating the Roof System Design Options
  • Managing Design Options
  • Linking Building Models
  • Linking Building Models from Different Project Files
  • Repositioning Linked Building Models
  • Controlling Linked Building Model Visibility
  • Managing Linked Building Models
  • Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models
  • Acquiring and Publishing Coordinates
  • Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates
  • Working with a Linked Building Model
  • Managing Shared Locations
  • Scheduling Components of Linked Files
  • Using Phasing
  • Phasing Your Model
  • Creating Phase-Specific Structural Schedules
  • Rendering an Exterior View
  • Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model
  • Adding Trees to the Site
  • Creating a Perspective View
  • Creating the Exterior Rendering
  • Rendering an Interior View
  • Adding RPC People
  • Creating the Interior Perspective View
  • Creating the Interior Rendering
  • Creating and Recording Walkthroughs
  • Creating a Walkthrough
  • Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position
  • Recording the Walkthrough
  • Creating Roofs
  • Creating an Extruded Roof
  • Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint
  • Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint
  • Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint
  • Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint
  • Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof
  • Aligning Roof Eaves
  • Creating a Mansard Roof
  • Creating a Low Slope Roof
  • Creating Fascia, Gutters, and Soffits
  • Creating Roof Fascia
  • Creating Gutters
  • Creating Soffits
  • Creating, Modifying, and Nesting Groups
  • Creating and Placing a Group
  • Modifying a Group
  • Nesting Groups
  • Working with Detail Groups
  • Creating a Detail Group
  • Using Attached Detail Groups
  • Saving and Loading Groups

Revit Structure 2009

Imperial Tutorials

April 2008

©

2008 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Except as otherwise permitted by Autodesk, Inc., this publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose. Certain materials included in this publication are reprinted with the permission of the copyright holder. Disclaimer THIS PUBLICATION AND THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IS MADE AVAILABLE BY AUTODESK, INC. "AS IS." AUTODESK, INC. DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS. Trademarks The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and other countries: 3DEC (design/logo), 3December, 3December.com, 3ds Max, ActiveShapes, Actrix, ADI, Alias, Alias (swirl design/logo), AliasStudio, Alias|Wavefront (design/logo), ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, Autodesk, Autodesk Envision, Autodesk Insight, Autodesk Intent, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk Map, Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk Streamline, AutoLISP, AutoSnap, AutoSketch, AutoTrack, Backdraft, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, CAiCE, Can You Imagine, Character Studio, Cinestream, Civil 3D, Cleaner, Cleaner Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Combustion, Communication Specification, Constructware, Content Explorer, Create>what's>Next> (design/logo), Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignKids, DesignProf, DesignServer, DesignStudio, Design|Studio (design/logo), Design Your World, Design Your World (design/logo), DWF, DWG, DWG (logo), DWG TrueConvert, DWG TrueView, DXF, EditDV, Education by Design, Exposure, Extending the Design Team, FBX, Filmbox, FMDesktop, Freewheel, GDX Driver, Gmax, Heads-up Design, Heidi, HOOPS, HumanIK, i-drop, iMOUT, Incinerator, IntroDV, Inventor, Inventor LT, Kaydara, Kaydara (design/logo), LocationLogic, Lustre, Maya, Mechanical Desktop, MotionBuilder, Mudbox, NavisWorks, ObjectARX, ObjectDBX, Open Reality, Opticore, Opticore Opus, PolarSnap, PortfolioWall, Powered with Autodesk Technology, Productstream, ProjectPoint, ProMaterials, Reactor, RealDWG, Real-time Roto, Recognize, Render Queue, Reveal, Revit, Showcase, ShowMotion, SketchBook, SteeringWheels, StudioTools, Topobase, Toxik, ViewCube, Visual, Visual Bridge, Visual Construction, Visual Drainage, Visual Hydro, Visual Landscape, Visual Roads, Visual Survey, Visual Syllabus, Visual Toolbox, Visual Tugboat, Visual LISP, Voice Reality, Volo, Wiretap, and WiretapCentral The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk Canada Co. in the USA and/or Canada and other countries: Backburner, Discreet, Fire, Flame, Flint, Frost, Inferno, Multi-Master Editing, River, Smoke, Sparks, Stone, and Wire All other brand names, product names or trademarks belong to their respective holders. Third Party Software Program Credits ACIS Copyright© 1989-2001 Spatial Corp. Portions Copyright© 2002 Autodesk, Inc. Flash ® is a registered trademark of Macromedia, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. International CorrectSpell™ Spelling Correction System© 1995 by Lernout & Hauspie Speech Products, N.V. All rights reserved. InstallShield™ 3.0. Copyright© 1997 InstallShield Software Corporation. All rights reserved. PANTONE® Colors displayed in the software application or in the user documentation may not match PANTONE-identified standards. Consult current PANTONE Color Publications for accurate color. PANTONE Color Data and/or Software shall not be copied onto another disk or into memory unless as part of the execution of this Autodesk software product. Portions Copyright© 1991-1996 Arthur D. Applegate. All rights reserved. Portions of this software are based on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. RAL DESIGN© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 RAL CLASSIC© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 Representation of the RAL Colors is done with the approval of RAL Deutsches Institut für Gütesicherung und Kennzeichnung e.V. (RAL German Institute for Quality Assurance and Certification, re. Assoc.), D-53757 Sankt Augustin. Typefaces from the Bitstream® typeface library copyright 1992. Typefaces from Payne Loving Trust© 1996. All rights reserved. Printed manual and help produced with Idiom WorldServer™. WindowBlinds: DirectSkin™ OCX © Stardock® AnswerWorks 4.0 ©; 1997-2003 WexTech Systems, Inc. Portions of this software © Vantage-Knexys. All rights reserved. The Director General of the Geographic Survey Institute has issued the approval for the coordinates exchange numbered TKY2JGD for Japan Geodetic Datum 2000, also known as technical information No H1-N0.2 of the Geographic Survey Institute, to be installed and used within this software product (Approval No.: 646 issued by GSI, April 8, 2002). Portions of this computer program are copyright © 1995-1999 LizardTech, Inc. All rights reserved. MrSID is protected by U.S. Patent No. 5,710,835. Foreign Patents Pending. Portions of this computer program are Copyright ©; 2000 Earth Resource Mapping, Inc. OSTN97 © Crown Copyright 1997. All rights reserved. OSTN02 © Crown copyright 2002. All rights reserved. OSGM02 © Crown copyright 2002, © Ordnance Survey Ireland, 2002. FME Objects Engine © 2005 SAFE Software. All rights reserved. ETABS is a registered trademark of Computers and Structures, Inc. ETABS © copyright 1984-2005 Computers and Structures, Inc. All rights reserved. RISA is a trademark of RISA Technologies. RISA-3D copyright © 1993-2005 RISA Technologies. All rights reserved.

Portions relating to JPEG © Copyright 1991-1998 Thomas G. Lane. All rights reserved. This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. Portions relating to TIFF © Copyright 1997-1998 Sam Leffler. © Copyright 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. All rights reserved. The Tiff portions of this software are provided by the copyright holders and contributors “as is” and any express or implied warranties, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties or merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose are disclaimed. In no event shall the copyright owner or contributors of the TIFF portions be liable for any direct, indirect, incidental, special, exemplary, or consequential damages (including, but not limited to, procurement of substitute goods or services; loss of use, data, or profits; or business interruption) however caused and on any theory of liability, whether in contract, strict liability, or tort (including negligence or otherwise) arising in any way out of the use of the TIFF portions of this software, even if advised of the possibility of such damage. Portions of Libtiff 3.5.7 Copyright © 1988-1997 Sam Leffler. Copyright © 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that (i) the above copyright notices and this permission notice appear in all copies of the software and related documentation, and (ii) the names of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics may not be used in any advertising or publicity relating to the software without the specific, prior written permission of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics. Portions of Libxml2 2.6.4 Copyright © 1998-2003 Daniel Veillard. All Rights Reserved. Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the “Software”), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: The above copyright notices and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. Government Use Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software), as applicable.

Contents

Chapter 1

Understanding the Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Using the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Accessing Training Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Understanding the Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Navigating the Revit Structure User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Performing Common Tasks in Revit Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

Chapter 2

Express Workshops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Structural Modelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a New Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding New Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Importing/Linking a DWG File . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Column Grids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Structural Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Structural Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Structural Beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Structural Beam Systems . . . . . . . . . . Adding a Structural Slab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Copying Elements to Multiple Levels . . . . . . . . Adding Foundations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Structural Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Importing/Linking a DWG File . . . . . . . . . . . Using a Detail Drawing as a Section View . . . . . . Placing a Detail in a Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adjusting Line Weights of Imported Details . . . . Creating a New Details Sheet from a Detail Library . Preparing Views for Detailing in a Section . . . . . Adding a Cantilever to a Slab . . . . . . . . . . . . Coping Beam Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Detail Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Final Annotation and Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 . 19 . 20 . 21 . 24 . 27 . 32 . 35 . 47 . 49 . 55 . 59 . 62 . 63 . 65 . 66 . 70 . 73 . 75 . 79 . 82 . 84 . 98

v

Chapter 3

Modifying Project and System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Modifying System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying General System Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying File Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying Spelling Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Snap Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Project Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying Fill Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Object Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Line Patterns and Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying Units of Measurement, Temporary Dimensions, and Detail Level Options . Modifying Project Browser Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Structural Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Choosing the Base Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Project Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loading and Modifying Families and Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Views and View Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Structural Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Import/Export Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting up Shared and Project Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Named Print Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 . 107 . 109 . 112 . 113 . 115 . 115 . 118 . 120 . 122 . 125 . 127 . 128 . 130 . 130 . 131 . 137 . 139 . 142 . 143 . 144 . 146

Chapter 4

Starting a New Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Importing/Linking Drawing Files . . . . . . . . . . Importing/Linking a 2D AutoCAD File . . . . Importing /Linking an AutoCAD Architecture Linking a Revit Architecture File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 . 149 . 151 . 154

Chapter 5

Creating a Structural Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Creating a Structural Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Grid Lines to the Imported Drawing . Adding Structural Columns . . . . . . . . . . Adding Horizontal Framing . . . . . . . . . . Adding Beam Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding a Composite Deck . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Bracing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Shear Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Isolated Foundations . . . . . . . . . . Completing the Structural Model . . . . . . . . . . Completing the Steel Framing of Level 2 . . . Adding Cantilevered Beams . . . . . . . . . . Adding a Concrete Slab with Metal Deck . . . Adding Shafts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Duplicating Framing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding a Shape-Modified Slab . . . . . . . . . Adding a Shape-Modified Curved Slab . . . . . Adding Miter Joins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Curved Beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding an Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding an Opening in a Beam . . . . . . . . . Adding an Opening to a Beam Family . . . . . Adding Foundation Walls . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Piers or Pilasters . . . . . . . . . . . . Framing Ground and Parking Garage Levels . . Placing a Wall Foundation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 . 162 . 167 . 171 . 173 . 180 . 182 . 184 . 186 . 188 . 188 . 194 . 196 . 199 . 201 . 205 . 216 . 224 . 229 . 236 . 239 . 241 . 246 . 249 . 250 . 257

vi | Contents

Chapter 6

Precast

Concrete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 . 261 . 263 . 264 . 265 . 265

Creating a Precast Beam System . . . . . . . . . Adding a Beam System to the Structure . . Changing the Beam System Properties . . . Changing the Beam System Clear Spacing . Modifying the Precast Beam Family . . . . . . . Adding a Chamfer to the Beam . . . . . .

Chapter 7

Creating

Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275 . 275 . 280 . 280 . 284 . 284 . 287 . 292 . 292

Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project . . . . . Creating a Drawing Sheet . . . . . . . . Adding a Sheet to the Project . . . . . . Creating New Views to Add to Sheets . . Creating a Detail Library . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Drafting View Detail Library . Importing Details from the Library . . . Using Legends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Symbol Legend . . . . . . . .

Chapter 8

Scheduling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Scheduling Beam Quantities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Structural Framing Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Shared Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Type Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Customizing the Type Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Instance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Graphical Column Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create the Graphical Column Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . Change the Schedule Appearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Multiple Sheets for the Graphical Column Schedule . Exporting Project Information with ODBC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297 . 297 . 299 . 302 . 307 . 313 . 316 . 316 . 320 . 324 . 326 . 326

Chapter 9

Steel Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Setting Up Section Views on Sheets . . . . . . . . . Cutting Sections and Adding Views to Sheets . Detailing Steel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Welded Bracing Detail . . . . . . . Creating a Bolted Angle Detail . . . . . . . . . Creating a Facade Support Detail . . . . . . . Creating a Drafting View Detail . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Deck Span Transition Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329 . 329 . 333 . 333 . 339 . 341 . 344 . 345

Chapter 10

Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Concrete Modelling Examples . . . . . . . . . . Reinforcement in a Beam . . . . . . . . . . Reinforcement in a Column . . . . . . . . Area Reinforcement in a Structural Wall . . Area Reinforcement in a Slab . . . . . . . . Path Reinforcement in a Slab . . . . . . . Sketch Reinforcement in a Footing . . . . Sketch Reinforcement in a Structural Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351 . 351 . 359 . 364 . 373 . 378 . 382 . 393

Chapter 11

Annotating and Dimensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
Dimensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403 Creating Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403

Contents | vii

Controlling Witness Line Location . . . . . . Modifying Dimension Properties . . . . . . . Working with Alignments and Constraints . . Creating Automatic Linear Wall Dimensions . Working with Spot Dimensions . . . . . . . . Annotating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tagging Beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Custom Beam Tag . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. 411 . 414 . 415 . 420 . 421 . 428 . 428 . 435

Chapter 12

Worksets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
Using Worksharing in a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets . . . . Assigning Worksets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Making the Entire Workset Editable . . . . . . . . . . . Using Worksets with Multiple Users . . . . . . . . . . . Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439 . 439 . 445 . 448 . 453 . 457

Chapter 13

Project Coordination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461
Coordination Review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Opening the Modified Revit Architecture Interference Check . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Revision Tracking . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting Up a Revision Table . . . . . . . Sketching Revision Clouds . . . . . . . . Add Remaining Revisions . . . . . . . . Tagging Revision Clouds . . . . . . . . . Working with Revisions . . . . . . . . . . . . file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461 . 461 . 468 . 474 . 474 . 475 . 476 . 480 . 481

Chapter 14

Structural Analytical Modelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485
Applying the Analytical Model to the Design Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Analytical Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Load Cases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Loads to the Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Load Combination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transfer Project Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Documenting the Analytical Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Examples of Analytical Adjustment and Reset in the Model . . . . . . . . . . . . Examples of Automatic Adjustment in the Analytical Model . . . . . . . . . . . . Boundary Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing the Analytical Model to be Calculated in Third Party Analysis Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485 . 486 . 494 . 496 . 505 . 507 . 509 . 512 . 514 . 531 . 534

Chapter 15

Exporting Revit Structure Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535
Exporting CAD Formats . . . . . . . . . . Exporting the 3D Model to AutoCAD Exporting a 2D view to AutoCAD . . Exporting Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Architecture 2007 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535 . 535 . 539 . 540

Chapter 16

About Families and the Family Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545
Using Families and the Family Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545 Introduction to Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545

Chapter 17

Creating Components in the Family Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551
Creating Custom Families . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Custom Metal Deck Family . . . Customizing a Castellated Beam . . . . . . Creating a Custom Reinforcement Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551 . 551 . 563 . 565

viii | Contents

Creating In-Place Families . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Step Footing In-Place Family . . Creating a Titleblock Family . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing Linework for a Titleblock Sheet . Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock . Adding the Titleblock to a New Project . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. 573 . 574 . 581 . 581 . 584 . 592

Chapter 18

Truss Building . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 595
Working with Trusses . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Trusses to a Project . . . . . . Customizing Truss Parameters . . . . Modifying the Shape of a Truss . . . Creating a Custom Truss Family . . . Building a Truss with Drafting Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 595 . 595 . 604 . 608 . 611 . 616

Chapter 19

Creating Multiple Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 625
Creating Multiple Design Options in a Project . Creating the Structural Design Options . . Creating the Roof System Design Options . Managing Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 625 . 626 . 636 . 643

Chapter 20

Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 647
Linking Building Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Linking Building Models from Different Project Files . Repositioning Linked Building Models . . . . . . . . Controlling Linked Building Model Visibility . . . . . Managing Linked Building Models . . . . . . . . . . . Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models . . . . . . . Acquiring and Publishing Coordinates . . . . . . . . Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates . . . . . Working with a Linked Building Model . . . . . . . . Managing Shared Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Components of Linked Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 648 . 648 . 657 . 660 . 662 . 665 . 665 . 667 . 670 . 672 . 673

Chapter 21

Project Phasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 677
Using Phasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 677 Phasing Your Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 679 Creating Phase-Specific Structural Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 688

Chapter 22

Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 693
Rendering an Exterior View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model . Adding Trees to the Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Perspective View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating the Exterior Rendering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rendering an Interior View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding RPC People . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating the Interior Perspective View . . . . . . . . . . . Creating the Interior Rendering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Recording Walkthroughs . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Walkthrough . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position . . Recording the Walkthrough . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 693 . 694 . 701 . 705 . 709 . 713 . 714 . 717 . 721 . 726 . 727 . 730 . 732

Chapter 23

Roofs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 733
Creating Roofs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 733

Contents | ix

Creating an Extruded Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint . Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Aligning Roof Eaves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Mansard Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Low Slope Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Fascia, Gutters, and Soffits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Roof Fascia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Gutters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Soffits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. 733 . 738 . 741 . 743 . 746 . 748 . 750 . 751 . 754 . 762 . 762 . 764 . 765

Chapter 24

Grouping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 769
Creating, Modifying, and Nesting Groups . Creating and Placing a Group . . . . Modifying a Group . . . . . . . . . . Nesting Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . Working with Detail Groups . . . . . . . . Creating a Detail Group . . . . . . . Using Attached Detail Groups . . . . Saving and Loading Groups . . . . . . . . Saving and Loading Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 769 . 769 . 777 . 781 . 784 . 784 . 787 . 790 . 790

x | Contents

Understanding the Concepts

1

In this tutorial, you learn the fundamental concepts of Revit® Structure 2009. You learn how Revit Structure works, the terms used when working with the product, and how to navigate the user interface. This introduction helps you get started with the Revit Structure tutorials and presents the fundamental concepts of the product, including:
■ ■ ■ ■

how Revit Structure works. the terms used when working with the product. how to navigate the user interface. how to perform some common tasks in the product.

1

Using the Tutorials
In this lesson, you learn how to use the Revit Structure tutorials, including where to find the training files and how to create a new Revit Structure project from a template file. The Contents tab of the Revit Structure Tutorials window displays the available tutorial titles. Expand a title for a list of lessons in the tutorial. Expand a lesson title for a list of exercises in the lesson. NOTE You may find it helpful to print a tutorial to make it easier to reference the instructions as you work in Revit Structure. The tutorials are also available in PDF format by clicking Help menu ➤ Documents on the Web in Revit Structure.

Accessing Training Files
Training files are Revit Structure projects, templates, and families that were created specifically for use with the tutorials. In this exercise, you learn where the training files are located, as well as how to open and save them.

Where are the training files located?
Training files, by default, are located in C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RST 2009\Training. Training files are grouped into 3 folders within the training folder:

Common: generic files often used to teach a concept. These files are not dependent on imperial or metric units. Common file names have a c_ prefix. Imperial: files for users working with imperial units. Imperial file names have an i_ prefix. Metric: files for users working with metric units. Metric file names have an m_ prefix.

■ ■

NOTE Depending on your installation, your training folder may be in a different location. Contact your CAD manager for more information. IMPORTANT Content used in the tutorials, such as templates and families, is located and accessed in the training files location. Although this content may be installed in other locations on your system, all content used in the tutorials is included in the training files location to ensure that all audiences access the correct files.

What is a training file?
A training file is a Revit Structure project that defines a building information model and views of the model that are used to complete the steps in a tutorial. Many tutorials include a Training File section that references the training file to be used with the tutorial. In other tutorials, you create a project from a template, rather than opening an existing training file. Open a training file 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog, scroll down, and click the Training Files icon. 3 In the right pane, double-click Common, Imperial, or Metric, depending on the type of training file.

2 | Chapter 1 Understanding the Concepts

4 Click the training file name, and click Open. Save a training file 5 To save a training file with a new name, click File menu ➤ Save As. In many cases, the work you do in a project during a tutorial exercise becomes the starting point for the next exercise. In many tutorials, you create a project or modify an existing project, save the changes, and use the saved version of the file to begin the next exercise or lesson. 6 Complete the information in the Save As dialog:

For Save in, select the folder in which to save the new file. You can save the file in the appropriate Training Files folder or in another location. Note where you save the file so you can open it for additional exercises as required. For File name, enter the new file name. A good practice is to save the training file with a unique name after you have made changes. For example, if you open c_settings.rvt and make changes, you should save this file with a new name such as c_settings_modified.rvt. For Files of type, verify that Project Files (*.rvt) is selected, and then click Save.

Create a project from a template 7 To create a project from a template, rather than using an existing training file, click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project.

8 In the New Project dialog, under Create new, select Project. 9 Under Template file, verify the second option is selected, and click Browse.

Accessing Training Files | 3

10 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\Templates. 11 In the Choose Template dialog, review the Revit Structure templates. Each template contains predefined settings and views appropriate for the corresponding structure type. For most tutorial projects, you will use the default template, and customize the project as necessary. 12 Select Structural Analysis-Default.rte, and click Open. 13 Click OK.

Understanding the Basics
In this lesson, you learn what Revit Structure is and how its parametric change engine benefits you and your work. You begin with the fundamental concepts on which Revit Structure is built. You learn the terminology, the hierarchy of elements, how to navigate the user interface, and how to perform some common tasks in the product.

What is Revit Structure 2009?
The Revit Structure platform for building information modelling is a design and documentation system that supports the design, drawings, and schedules required for a building project. Building information modelling (BIM) delivers information about project design, scope, quantities, and phases when you need it. In the Revit Structure model, every drawing sheet, 2D and 3D view, and schedule is a presentation of information from the same underlying building model database. As you work in drawing and schedule views, Revit Structure collects information about the building project and coordinates this information across all other representations of the project. The Revit Structure parametric change engine automatically coordinates changes made anywhere—in model views, drawing sheets, schedules, sections, and plans.

What is meant by parametric?
The term parametric refers to the relationships among all elements of the model that enable the coordination and change management that Revit Structure provides. These relationships are created either automatically by the software or by you as you work. In mathematics and mechanical CAD, the numbers or characteristics that define these kinds of relationships are called parameters; hence, the operation of the software is parametric. This capability delivers the fundamental coordination and productivity benefits of Revit Structure: Change anything at any time anywhere in the project, and Revit Structure coordinates that change through the entire project. The following are examples of these element relationships:

Pilasters are spaced equally across a given elevation. If the length of the elevation is changed, the relationship of equal spacing is maintained. In this case, the parameter is not a number but a proportional characteristic. The edge of a roof is related to the exterior wall such that when the exterior wall is moved, the roof remains connected. In this case, the parameter is one of association or connection.

How does Revit Structure keep things updated?
A fundamental characteristic of a building information modeling application is the ability to coordinate changes and maintain consistency at all times. You do not have to intervene to update drawings or links. When you change something, Revit Structure immediately determines what is affected by the change and reflects that change to any affected elements. Revit Structure uses 2 key concepts that make it especially powerful and easy to use. The first is the capturing of relationships while the designer works. The second is its approach to propagating structural changes. The

4 | Chapter 1 Understanding the Concepts

result of these concepts is software that works like you do, without requiring entry of data that is unimportant to your design.

Element behavior in a parametric modeler
In projects, Revit Structure uses 3 types of elements:

Model elements represent the actual 3D geometry of the structure. They display in relevant views of the model. For example, structural walls, slabs, ramps, and roofs are model elements. Datum elements help to define project context. For example, column grids, levels, and reference planes are datum elements. View-specific elements display only in the views in which they are placed. They help to describe or document the model. For example, dimensions, tags, and 2D detail components are view-specific elements.

There are 2 types of model elements:

Hosts (or host elements) are generally built in place at the construction site. For example, structural walls and roofs are hosts. Model components are all the other types of elements in the structural model. For example, beams, structural columns, and 3D rebar are model components.

There are 2 types of view-specific elements:

Annotation elements are 2D components that document the model and maintain scale on paper. For example, dimensions, tags, and symbols are annotation elements. Details are 2D items that provide details about the structural model in a particular view. Examples include detail lines, filled regions, and 2D detail components.

This implementation provides flexibility for designers. Revit Structure elements are designed to be created and modified by you directly; programming is not required. If you can draw, you can define new parametric elements in Revit Structure. In Revit Structure, the elements determine their behavior largely from their context in the structure. The context is determined by how you draw the component and the constraint relationships that are established with other components. Often, you do nothing to establish these relationships; they are implied by what you do and how you draw. In other cases, you can explicitly control them, by locking a dimension or aligning 2 walls, for example.

Understanding the Basics | 5

Understanding Revit Structure 2009 terms
Most of the terms used to identify objects in Revit Structure are common, industry-standard terms familiar to most engineers. However, some terms are unique to Revit Structure. Understanding the following terms is crucial to understanding the software. Project: In Revit Structure, the project is the single database of information for your design—the building information model. The project file contains all information for the structural design, from geometry to construction data. This information includes components used to design the model, views of the project, and drawings of the design. By using a single project file, Revit Structure makes it easy for you to alter the design and have changes reflected in all associated areas (plan views, elevation views, section views, schedules, and so forth). Having only one file to track also makes it easier to manage the project. Level: Levels are infinite horizontal planes that act as a reference for level-hosted elements, such as roofs, slabs, and beams. Most often, you use levels to define a vertical height or story within a structure. You create a level for each known story or other needed reference of the structure; for example, first floor, top of wall, or bottom of foundation. To place levels, you must be in a section or elevation view.
South Elevation View of Structure

Element: When creating a project, you add Revit Structure parametric building elements to the design. Revit Structure classifies elements by categories, families, and types. Category: A category is a group of elements that you use to model or document a structural design. For example, categories of model elements include columns and beams. Categories of annotation elements include tags and text notes. Family: Families are classes of elements in a category. A family groups elements with a common set of parameters (properties), identical use, and similar graphical representation. Different elements in a family may have different values for some or all properties, but the set of properties—their names and meaning—is the same. For example, a truss could be considered one family, although the web supports that compose the family come in different sizes and materials. Families are either component families or system families:

Component families can be loaded into a project and created from family templates. You can determine the set of properties and the graphical representation of the family. System families include slabs, dimensions, roofs, and levels. They are not available for loading or creating as separate files.
■ ■

Revit Structure predefines the set of properties and the graphical representation of system families. You can use the predefined types to generate new types that belong to this family within the project. For example, the behavior of a structural wall is predefined in the system. However, you can create different types of walls with different compositions. System families can be transferred between projects.

6 | Chapter 1 Understanding the Concepts

Instance: Instances are the actual items (individual elements) that are placed in the project and have specific locations in the structure (model instances) or on a drawing sheet (annotation instances). The Revit Structure window is arranged to make navigation easy. making it easy to understand what each button represents. This creates a new project based on the default template. A type can also be a style. In the steps that follow. Start a new project 1 On the Standard toolbar. Navigating the Revit Structure User Interface | 7 . click . the user interface is labeled. such as default aligned or default angular style for dimensions. A type can be a specific size of a family.Type: Each family can have several types. If you have used any other product that follows these conventions. you will soon feel comfortable learning this interface. specifically its clear user interface. Revit Structure uses standard Microsoft® Windows® conventions. In the following illustration. Even the toolbar buttons are labeled. such as a 30” X 42” title block. Navigating the Revit Structure User Interface One of the advantages of Revit Structure is its ease of use. The Title Bar 2 Place your cursor at the top of the user interface and notice the Title Bar contains the name of the project and the view that is currently open. you navigate and become familiar with the user interface.

You then click the command name to run the command. There are 6 toolbars across the top of the window just beneath the Menu Bar. You can choose commands by placing the cursor over the menu name and clicking. You can control the visibility of the toolbars and turn the toolbar text labels on or off within the Window ➤ Toolbar menu. Many of the commands also have shortcut keys to speed up the design process. 8 | Chapter 1 Understanding the Concepts . the Level 2 structural plan view is the default open view. and View. In addition.By default. TIP The project template determines which view is opened and the view names as well. click Toolbar. You can use the toolbar grips to resize and move each toolbar. The Toolbar 4 On the Window menu. Edit. The context menu changes depending on the function you are performing and what is currently selected. The Menu Bar 3 Click View menu ➤ Zoom. These shortcut keys are listed next to the command on the menu. The Menu Bar across the top of the window includes standard menu names such as File. Another timesaving tool for selecting commands is to place the cursor in the drawing area and right-click. TIP For example. the shortcut key for Zoom To Fit is ZF. you simply type the required keystrokes to run the command. new projects are numbered consecutively until saved with a new name. While working in the drawing area. The buttons on the toolbar represent some of the more common commands.

9 In the Type Selector. The list of components in the Type Selector is identical to the components listed in the Families branch of the Project Browser under the respective category. Notice the design options available on the Options Bar are now applicable to beams. First. The Type Selector 7 The drop-down list on the left side of the Options Bar is called the Type Selector. You can also use the Type Selector to change a component type after it has been added to the structural model. If you select the Beam tool. you can select a component type before you add it to the structural model. Within the drawing area. click Beam. click Structural Wall. On the left side of the Options Bar. you can select any component and then change the type using the Type Selector. click Structural Column. For example. if you intend to add a beam. You use the Type Selector in 2 ways. click Design Bars. 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Select the drop-down list to view the list of beams. Notice the bar beneath the toolbars contains design options used to draw the structural wall. The Type Selector is a context-sensitive drop-down list. the Type Selector displays a list of beams available within the project. 6 On the Design Bar. notice a beam type is specified. the beam type active in the Type Selector is the beam type that is added when you insert it into the structural model. The Show Design Bars dialog box is displayed. The Design Bar 10 On the Window menu. The Options Bar is context-sensitive and varies depending on the tool or selected component. notice the list of columns that are available.The Options Bar 5 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Navigating the Revit Structure User Interface | 9 .

There are 9 tabs in the Design Bar. immediately below the Type Selector. 11 Click OK. ■ ■ ■ ■ Basics tab — commands for creating most basic structural model components View tab — commands for creating different views in the project Architectural tab — commands for adding architectural components to your project Drafting tab — commands for both adding annotation symbols and creating the sheet details for the project construction documents Rendering tab — commands for creating rendered 3D images Site tab — commands for adding site components and producing site plans Massing tab — commands for executing conceptual massing commands Modelling tab — all the commands to create structural model elements Construction tab — commands for creating construction industry information ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ To access the commands within a tab. Each tab contains frequently used commands that are also available from the Menu Bar. and the respective commands are displayed on the Design Bar. containing buttons grouped by function. TIP You can turn the visibility of each tab on and off by right-clicking on the Design Bar and selecting the tab from the context menu.The Design Bar is located on the left side of the interface. click the tab. 10 | Chapter 1 Understanding the Concepts . You can control which tabs display by selecting them in the Show Design Bars dialog box.

Navigating the Revit Structure User Interface | 11 .The Project Browser 12 To the right of the Design Bar is the Project Browser. In the Project Browser. select Views (all).

scroll through the sorting available for the Project Browser. and groups of your current project. families. reports. columns. 12 | Chapter 1 Understanding the Concepts .You can use the Project Browser to quickly manage the views.sign next to the name. 13 In the Type Selector. family category (beams. and groups. walls). double-click the name. schedules. families. and group name. making it easy to add a family or group to the project or add a view to a sheet. 3D). so you can position it wherever you want by dragging the Project Browser title bar to a new location. To open a view. 14 On the Settings menu. You can right-click in the browser to add. delete. sheets. click Browser Organization. You can also drag and drop from the browser into the drawing area. You can expand or compress the browser list by clicking the + or . and rename views. The browser is also dockable. elevations. The browser is conveniently organized by view type (structural plans.

Navigating the Revit Structure User Interface | 13 . The cursor is displayed as a pencil. you can instantly change the sorting within the Project Browser by selecting the scheme in the Type Selector. notice the Status Bar provides information regarding what you should do next." TIP The cursor tooltip that displays is identical to the note on the Status Bar. it tells you to "Click to enter wall start point. click Modify. The Status Bar 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 15 In the Browser Organization dialog box. 17 Place the cursor near the center of the drawing area. 18 On the Design Bar.You can create and modify Project Browser organization schemes for both views and sheets. In the bottom left corner of the window. click Structural Wall. Do not click. After you create a browser organization scheme. click Cancel. In this case.

Performing Common Tasks in Revit Structure In this exercise. the main symbol and the elevation directional arrows. regarding selected components within a view. Click the Help button. You can use this tri-pane. and notice that the preselected component switches to the main elevation symbol. ■ ■ ■ 22 Close the Revit Structure Help window. Toolbar: From the Toolbar. You can also press SHIFT+F1. There are several tools that help you find information. In the Status Bar. and click to get the topic associated with the window. use the Tab key to alternate between nearby components. Windows: From any window. 19 Place the cursor over the elevation symbol at the bottom of the drawing area. press SHIFT+F1. you learn to perform some of the common Revit Structure tasks that are included in the tutorials. The Status Bar also provides information. Make sure you place the cursor over the arrow portion of the symbol so that it is highlighted. 20 Press TAB. and then click on a specific menu command or command button for Help. rest the cursor over the Toolbar button until the tooltip displays. in conjunction with tooltips. After you are familiar with these tasks. The elevation symbol consists of two parts. or save commonly used pages on the Favorites tab. You can select a topic on the Contents tab. Tooltips: To see tooltips. it will be easier to work in Revit Structure and focus on the lessons of each tutorial. Revit Structure Help 21 Click Help menu ➤ Revit Structure 2009 Help. TIP You can control the level of tooltip assistance from the Settings ➤ Options menu. TIP When attempting to select a specific component in a crowded or detailed view. click . Be sure to have the Standard toolbar displayed. You can access Help in the following ways: ■ Dialogs: Dialog include Help buttons. press F1 to get help on that dialog. 14 | Chapter 1 Understanding the Concepts . Context-sensitive help is also available to provide instant help on any menu command. search for all instances of a word or phrase on the Search tab. If there is no Help button displayed. it highlights and the status bar displays the component name. find a keyword on the Index tab. When you place the cursor over a component.You can turn the Status Bar visibility on or off from the Window menu. Help is available online at all times during a Revit Structure session. notice that the name of the preselected component is Views: Elevation: Building Elevation. HTML help window to search for information and quickly display it to read or print. and the topic specific to the dialog opens.

In the drawing area. The 3D isometric view displays: 4 Click View menu ➤ Zoom to display the zoom menu. the view zooms out from the structural model.rvt. In the following steps. Performing Common Tasks in Revit Structure | 15 . and open Common\c_STR_Project_Phasing. you may be asked to zoom to a specific region of a view or to zoom to fit the entire structure or plan view in the view. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. you open a training file and practice adjusting the view with the different zoom commands. Understanding how to adjust the view will make it easier to work with the structural model in the window.Use zoom commands to adjust the view There are several ways to access zoom options. 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. click 3DViews ➤ 3D. 3 In the Project Browser. you are instructed to use a zoom command to adjust the viewable area in the window. In the tutorials. 5 Click Zoom Out (2x). The zoom menu lists the zoom options and their shortcut keys. click Training Files. For example.

click the drop-down menu next to the Zoom command to display the zoom options. and type the shortcut ZR to zoom in on a region. 9 Click the upper left corner and lower right corner of the region to magnify. If you do not have a wheel mouse. use a zoom menu command or the toolbar option to zoom out. the view zooms in on the selected area. NOTE As you zoom in and out. When you release the mouse button. 7 Click Zoom To Fit. To modify or add snap increments.6 On the View toolbar. 8 Click in the drawing area. NOTE Clicking the Zoom icon itself activates the Zoom In Region command. this is referred to as a crossing selection. 10 If you use a mouse that has a wheel as the middle button. you can roll the wheel to zoom the view. The view of the structural model is sized to fit the available window. Zoom is also available using SteeringWheels. click Settings menu ➤ Snaps. 16 | Chapter 1 Understanding the Concepts . Revit Structure uses the largest snap increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. The cursor becomes a magnifying glass. SteeringWheels provide 2D and 3D navigation tools. Use the wheel mouse to zoom out to see the entire structure again.

. Performing Common Tasks in Revit Structure | 17 . click The Full Navigation wheel displays in the drawing area. You can change the pivot point by releasing the mouse button. The Undo command allows you to reverse the effects of one or more commands. press ESC. 15 Drag the cursor up or right to zoom in. 16 To exit the wheel. click the pull-down menu on the Full Navigation wheel. In this example. All changes you make to a project are tracked. and then using the Zoom tool again. and click Help. Undo commands 17 On the Standard toolbar. As you move the mouse. 13 Click and hold the mouse button. 12 Move the cursor over the Zoom wedge of the wheel so that it highlights. on the View toolbar. you decide that you prefer the table in its original position.11 To display SteeringWheels. Move. moving the wheel to the desired location. For more information about SteeringWheels. 14 Drag the cursor down or left to zoom out. click Settings menu ➤ Options. To define settings for SteeringWheels. and click the SteeringWheels tab. select the second item in the list. The cursor displays a pivot point for the Zoom tool. 18 On the Undo menu. the wheel follows the cursor around the drawing area. click the drop-down menu next to (Undo).

End a command 19 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and click again to end it. click Modify. such as the Lines command. NOTE To quickly undo the previous action. on the Standard toolbar. On the Design Bar. The table and plant are returned to their original locations. stay active or current until you choose another command or end the current command. use one of the following methods: ■ ■ ■ Choose another command. click the Undo command. click Lines.Selecting the second item in the list will undo the last 2 actions. 22 Close the file without saving your changes. 21 To end the command. 20 Click in the drawing area to start the line. Some commands. or press CTRL+Z. 18 | Chapter 1 Understanding the Concepts . All commands are canceled up to and including the selected command. Notice that the Lines command is still active and you could continue to draw lines. Press ESC twice.

Express Workshops 2 The Express Workshop tutorials focus on specific areas of Revit Structure 2009 functionality. you will have a basic understanding of both the Revit Structure design and documentation tools. You then add structural walls. columns. beam systems. you will create and name a new steel project. When you finish these tutorials. Finally. You start by linking a 2-dimensional architectural file into Revit Structure and using the drawing as a background template for grid and column locations. Creating a New Project In this first exercise. beams. Structural Modelling In this lesson. highlighting powerful features that are integral to the most common structural workflows. You will also learn some of the practices that can help you efficiently design and develop a structural project. and a concrete slab to the model. Each tutorial demonstrates tools that you can use to complete tasks that are common to an overall workflow. using the modelling tools provided in Revit Structure. you create a 5-story steel structure. you copy the elements to multiple levels on the model. 19 .

and double-click North. click the Level 2 reference line. 2 In the New Project dialog. open the Imperial Templates folder. 20 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . 2 Click the value (10' 0") for the Level 2 elevation. This is the project training file that is used for all remaining exercises in this tutorial. Save the new project 5 Click File menu ➤ Save As. enter 12' 0". On the Options Bar.rte. you create additional levels for your structure. click Level. click (Pick Lines). click OK. 3 In the Choose Template dialog. 7 Proceed to the next exercise. and click Open. 3 Create additional levels as follows: ■ On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.rvt. enter 12' 0". click to create Level 3. Adding New Levels on page 20. select Structural Analysis-Default . and press ENTER.rvt. and for Offset. click Browse. Adding New Levels In this exercise. 4 In the New Project dialog. Training File Continue to use the project training file saved in the previous exercise. Add levels 1 In the Project Browser. 6 Navigate to a folder of your preference. expand Elevations (Building Elevations). i_RST_EW_Modelling. ■ ■ In the drawing area. and save the new project as i_RST_EW_Modelling. when a dashed line displays.1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project.

each with the offset value set to 12' 0". 5 Press ESC. you import and link a 2-dimensional (2D) architectural drawing (DWG format) to use as a background for creating your structure. Importing/Linking a DWG File | 21 . 7 Proceed to the next exercise. Importing/Linking a DWG File In this exercise. and Level 5).4 Repeat the previous step to create 2 new levels (Level 4. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save. Importing/Linking a DWG File on page 21.

Reposition elevation symbols 4 On the View toolbar. For Positioning. Click Open. and select Imperial\i_RST_EW_Arch_floor_plan. and draw a zoom box around the West elevation 22 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . Notice that Level 2 is bold. and click in the drawing area to display the architectural file. For Colors. click symbol as shown. Import/Link an architectural file 1 In the Project Browser. 3 In the Import/Link dialog. ■ ■ ■ ■ You can ignore the Revit Warning. do the following: ■ In the left pane of the Import/Link dialog.Training File Continue to use the project training file saved in the previous exercise. click Training Files. (Zoom In). select Auto . select Views (all) ➤ Structural Plans ➤ Level 2. i_RST_EW_Modelling. This is the active view that displays in the drawing area.rvt. Select Current view only.dwg. 2 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. select Black and White.Center to Center.

Hide elements in the imported drawing 7 On the View toolbar. click Hide in View. 6 Use the same method to relocate the remaining elevation symbols. and click to place the symbol. Importing/Linking a DWG File | 23 . click drawing. and on the Options Bar. select a single column. . 9 In the drawing area. and draw a zoom box around the upper-left corner of the 8 Select the imported drawing.5 Click the elevation symbol. drag it beyond the dimensions. click Query. and in the Import Instance Query dialog.

Adding Column Grids on page 24. (Undo).Notice that all columns disappear. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Notice that it is labeled 2. 12 Proceed to the next exercise. Training File Continue to use the project training file saved in the previous exercise. Adding Column Grids In this exercise. Place horizontal grids 1 Enter ZF (Zoom to Fit). Notice that the grid line is highlighted.rvt. click . click Grid. 5 Select the next horizontal grid line above grid line 1. 3 On the Options Bar. and a value of 1 appears within the grid bubble. click 11 Click File menu ➤ Save. 24 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . 10 On the Toolbar. you use the imported drawing as a background for creating both vertical and horizontal grids. 4 Select the first horizontal grid line. i_RST_EW_Modelling.

enter A. 11 Select the first vertical grid line. click . Notice that the grid line is highlighted. click Grid.6 Select the remaining horizontal grid lines using the zoom controls as needed. and a value of 7 appears within the grid bubble. 10 On the Options Bar. 7 On the Design Bar. Make sure that all the grid bubbles are displayed on the right side of the drawing. click Modify. labels display in numerical sequence. As you select subsequent grid lines. Place vertical grids 8 Enter ZF. and press ENTER. Click the check box near the bubble (as shown) to turn the bubble display on or off. NOTE When you select a grid line. the bubble might display at the opposite end of the grid. Adding Column Grids | 25 . 12 Click the value within the grid bubble. The last horizontal grid line is labeled 6. 9 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.

13 Select the next grid line to the right of grid A. and then OK. Click Apply. 15 On the Design Bar. Change drawing visibility 16 Enter ZF. 17 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 26 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . The last grid line is labeled G. Under Halftone. 19 Enter ZF. Notice that the sequencing has changed from numeric to alphabetical. 14 Select the remaining vertical grid lines. select i_EW_RST_Arch_floor_plan. The halftone of the imported drawing is used as a background for placing additional structural elements. click Modify.dwg file. 18 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Click the Imported Categories tab.

Adding Structural Walls | 27 . Setup views 1 In the Project Browser. 21 Proceed to the next exercise.rvt. For the remainder of this tutorial. select Views (all) ➤ Structural Plans ➤ Level 2. Adding Structural Walls In this exercise.20 Click File menu ➤ Save. Adding Structural Walls on page 27. this view is referred to as the plan view. Training File Continue to use the project training file saved in the previous exercise. i_RST_EW_Modelling. you add structural walls around the elevator shafts located in the center of the structure.

click the sketch line that represents the exterior face of the top elevator shaft. For the remainder of this tutorial. and place the first structural wall as shown. this view is referred to as the 3D view. Place structural walls around the top elevator shaft 5 Click inside the plan view. and draw a zoom box around the elevator shafts located in he 7 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 8 In the Type Selector. 9 On the Options Bar. and enter ZF. click Structural Wall. select Basic Wall : Generic . 3 Click Window menu ➤ Tile. click center of the drawing. select Finish Face: Exterior. 28 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops .8" Masonry. click . 4 Close any additional windows that may have been opened accidentally. 11 Click the north exterior face of the elevator shaft to place the second structural wall. The plan view and the 3D view are now displayed in separate windows in the drawing area. 6 On the View toolbar. and for Loc Line. 10 Using the drawing as a guide. . click (3D).2 On the View toolbar.

15 On the View Control Bar.12 Using the same method. and click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading w/Edges. 13 On the Design Bar. View the structural walls in 3D 14 Click inside the 3D view and enter ZF. click Modify. click Detail Level ➤ Fine. place the remaining structural walls around the top elevator shaft. Adding Structural Walls | 29 .

place structural walls for the middle and bottom elevator shafts on the west side of the structure.Complete the elevator shafts on the west side of the structure 16 Using the same method and wall type used to place the first elevator shaft walls. and using the architectural drawing as a guide. Mirror the west elevator shafts 17 Click inside the plan view. 18 Draw a selection box around all 3 elevator shafts. 30 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops .

19 On the Toolbar. Adding Structural Walls | 31 . The elevator shafts from the west side of the structure are now mirrored on the east side. click 20 Click grid D. (Mirror).

Adding Structural Columns In this exercise. you add columns at specific grid intersections. 32 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . click Modify. Adding Structural Columns on page 32.21 On the Design Bar. 23 Proceed to the next exercise. These columns extend from Level 1 to Level 2. Notice the completed elevator shafts are displayed in the 3D view. 22 Click File menu ➤ Save.

and draw a zoom box around the upper-left corner of the 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click structure. click Structural Column. 2 On the View toolbar. place a column at the following grid locations: ■ ■ B6 A5. .Training File Continue to use the project training file saved in the previous exercise. select W-Wide Flange-Column : W14X43.rvt. Press the SPACEBAR to rotate the column so that it is perpendicular with grid line 6 as shown. B5 Adding Structural Columns | 33 . 5 Click grid location A6 to place the first column. Place columns at specific grid intersections 1 Click inside the plan view. i_RST_EW_Modelling. 4 In the Type Selector. 6 Using the same method.

11 On the Options Bar. click (Grid Intersection). Columns are placed at each grid intersection. 9 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.7 On the Design Bar. 10 In the Type Selector. 34 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . click Finish. and enter ZF. Place remaining columns using the grid intersection tool 8 Click inside the plan view. select W-Wide Flange-Column : W14X43. and enter ZF. click Modify. 12 Draw a selection box around the entire view to select all grid lines. 14 Click inside the 3D view. 13 On the Toolbar. click Structural Column.

Adding Structural Beams | 35 . 2 On the View toolbar.rvt. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. you add structural beams to level 2 to form the steel framework of the structure. click structure. Adding Structural Beams on page 35. 5 On the Options Bar. 4 In the Type Selector. You also set the offset value of the steel beams to allow for the concrete slab that will be added in a later exercise. Training File Continue to use the project training file saved in the previous exercise. click Beam. and draw a zoom box around the upper-left corner of the 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. select W-Wide Flange : W12X26. Add beams using the chain tool 1 Click inside the plan view.15 Click File menu ➤ Save. Adding Structural Beams In this exercise. click Chain. . i_RST_EW_Modelling.

and select the beam between A6 and A5. The triangle indicates the midpoint of the column. press CTRL.6 Move the cursor over the column at grid location A6 until a triangle is displayed. A5. and A6. Create sloped beams 9 Select the beam between grid locations A6 and B6. and press ENTER. 7 Click the midpoint of the column at grid location B6 to specify the beam endpoint. and then click to enter the beam startpoint. enter 5' 0". 8 Using the same method. 36 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . that is. place additional beams in the upper-left bay of the structure. 10 Click the column at grid location A6. click the midpoints of the columns at grid locations B5.

click Beam.Notice the 3D view displays the sloped beams based on the new offset height. Adding Structural Beams | 37 . 16 Draw a selection box around the entire view to select all grid lines. NOTE The method used to create sloped beams is shown for demonstration purposes only. 14 In the Type Selector. 15 On the Options Bar. click . click . 13 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. and enter ZF. 11 On the Toolbar. This project does not require sloped beams. Add remaining beams using the grid intersection tool 12 Click inside the plan view. select W-Wide Flange : W12X26.

17 On the Options Bar. Delete beams outside the drawing floor extents Six beams that were placed at grid locations outside of the floor extents of the architectural drawing need to be deleted. Beams are placed within the grid. click through A5. 21 On the View toolbar. and enter ZF. 38 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . . and draw a zoom box around the beams at grid locations A2 22 Select each beam. 20 Click inside the plan view. Notice the beams are deleted in the 3D view. click Finish. and press DELETE. click Modify. 18 Click inside the 3D view. 19 On the Design Bar.

and draw a zoom box around the southeast side of the structure. delete the beams on grid locations G2 through G5. click the intersection of the beam on grid line 2 and the centerline of the wall to establish the beam startpoint. 29 Click the beam on grid line 3 to establish the beam endpoint. 24 Click inside the plan view. click . 28 Using the architectural drawing as a guide. Adding Structural Beams | 39 . 26 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 27 In the Type Selector. select W-Wide Flange : W12X26. click Beam.23 Using the same method. Add new beams within the drawing floor extents The new beams are placed within the floor extents of the architectural drawing. 25 On the View toolbar. between grid lines G2 and G5.

30 Using the same method. place 2 additional beams between grid lines 3 and 5. 40 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops .

Delete beams inside the northeast and southwest stair shafts 33 Click inside the plan view. click . and on the Toolbar. click . 34 On the View toolbar. and draw a zoom box around the northeast stair shaft. 32 Select grid line A for the center of the mirror reflection.31 Select the 3 new beams. and press DELETE. 35 Select the beam between grid lines G5 and G6. Notice the new beams are displayed in the 3D view. Adding Structural Beams | 41 .

37 Select the beam between grid lines A1 and A2. click . and press DELETE. 42 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . 38 Click inside the 3D view. and draw a zoom box around the southwest stair shaft.36 On the View toolbar. and enter ZF.

39 Click inside the plan view. 40 On the View toolbar. and draw a zoom box around the elevator shafts located in the 41 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Beam. This is the startpoint for the first beam. click center of the structure. Use the architectural drawing to locate the outline of the elevator shaft wall. 42 In the Type Selector. Adding Structural Beams | 43 . . 44 Click the existing beam on grid line 3. 43 Click the existing beam on grid line 2.Add 3 beams above the elevator shaft walls These beams will support a beam system that is added in the next exercise. select W-Wide Flange : W12X26. This is the endpoint for the first beam.

48 Click the beam on grid line D . and on the Toolbar. This is the endpoint for the third beam. Mirror the elevator shaft beams 49 Select the 3 new beams. This is the endpoint for the second beam. click Modify. 46 On the Design Bar. click . 47 Click the second beam to establish the startpoint for the third beam.45 Click the existing beam on grid line 4. Use the architectural drawing to locate the outline of the outside wall of the elevator shaft. 44 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops .

Notice the new beams are displayed in the 3D view. 51 Click inside the 3D view. Adding Structural Beams | 45 . 52 Draw a selection box around the entire model. Set the beam offset value The offset value for all beams is lowered to accommodate the slab that will be added in a future exercise.50 Select grid line D for the center of the mirror reflection.

select Other. do the following: Click Check None. and then click OK. 55 On the Options Bar.53 On the Options Bar. enter -0' 5". select Structural Framing (Joist). 46 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . Only the structural framing elements (girders and joists) are highlighted. do the following: For z-Direction Justification. For z-Direction Offset Value. Under Category. under Constraints. 54 In the Filter dialog. select Structural Framing (Girder). click ■ ■ ■ . click ■ ■ ■ ■ (Filter Selection). Click OK. Notice the beams have been lowered in the 3D view. Click Apply. 56 In the Element Properties dialog. Under Category.

and draw a zoom box around the bays on the northeast side 6 Select the beam between grid locations A5 and A6 to set the beam system direction. click of the structure. For Maximum Spacing. select 3D. select Maximum Spacing. enter 9' 0". Adding Structural Beam Systems In this exercise. click ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ .rvt. 3 On the Options Bar. i_RST_EW_Modelling. 58 Proceed to the next exercise. Training File Continue to use the project training file saved in the previous exercise. and enter ZF. Adding Structural Beam Systems | 47 . 4 In the Element Properties dialog: Under Constraints. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Beam System. Under Pattern. you add multiple structural beam systems to the steel frame on Level 2. select W-Wide Flange : W12X26. Click OK.57 Click File menu ➤ Save. 5 On the View toolbar. for Layout Rule. . Automatically create multiple beam systems 1 Click inside the plan view. Adding Structural Beam Systems on page 47. For Beam Type.

do not place a beam system in the bays for the stairs in the northwest and southeast corners of the structure. place a beam system in the remaining bays of the structure. 7 Click to place the beam system. 10 Click inside the 3D view. 9 On the Design Bar. Also.The beam system location displays with a blue dashed line. 8 Using the same settings and method. 48 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . NOTE Some beam systems might include 2 beams based on the size of the bay. and enter ZF. Notice the beam system displays in the 3D view. click Modify.

Adding a Structural Slab In this exercise. click Slab. Adding a Structural Slab | 49 . 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Training File Continue to use the project training file saved in the previous exercise. Trace the architectural drawing floor plan 1 Click inside the plan view.11 Click File menu ➤ Save. 12 Proceed to the next exercise. You are now in sketch mode. i_RST_EW_Modelling.rvt. click Lines. and enter ZF. and use the mirror tool to complete the sketch. You create the sketch lines for the left side of the slab. you sketch a concrete slab on Level 2 by tracing the outside edge of the architectural drawing. Adding a Structural Slab on page 49. 3 On the Design Bar.

6 Place the first sketch line along the exterior edge of the architectural drawing. When sketching the slab. zoom in and out as needed. 50 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . . and DELETE to remove unwanted lines and to clean up line intersections. click structure. 8 Continue sketching the slab until you reach grid line D.4 On the View toolbar. use (Trim/Extend) on the Options Bar. and draw a zoom box around the northwest corner of the 5 Click the edge of the floor outline to start the slab sketch. If necessary. 7 Continue sketching lines along the drawing perimeter using the exterior-most model lines of the imported drawing. and make sure there are no duplicate sketch lines.

11 On the Toolbar.Use the mirror tool to copy the slab sketch 9 Enter ZF. Adding a Structural Slab | 51 . 10 Draw a selection box around the left half of the view to select all sketch lines. 12 Select grid line D for the center of the mirror reflection. click .

16 On the Design Bar. 52 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . Complete the slab sketch 15 On the View toolbar.13 On the Design Bar. click Lines. and draw a zoom box around the top of the slab sketch at grid 17 Draw a single line to join the 2 halves of the slab sketch. click line D. . 14 Enter ZF. click Modify.

and draw a zoom box around the southeast corner of the Adding a Structural Slab | 53 . 21 Enter ZF. 22 On the View toolbar. click Lines. click Lines. and draw a zoom box around the bottom of the slab sketch at 20 Draw a single line to join the 2 halves of the slab sketch. 23 On the Design Bar.18 On the View toolbar. click grid line D. . 19 On the Design Bar. click structure. 24 Modify the slab sketch until it appears as shown. .

click structure. 31 On the Design Bar. 29 Modify the slab sketch until it appears as shown. . and draw a zoom box around the northeast corner of the 30 Enter ZF. 26 Enter ZF. click Finish Sketch. 27 On the View toolbar. 28 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 54 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . click Lines.25 On the Design Bar.

Notice the completed slab is displayed in the 3D view. and the slab from Level 2 to the remaining levels of the structure. Training File Continue to use the project training file saved in the previous exercise. you copy columns. i_RST_EW_Modelling. 32 Click File menu ➤ Save. Copying Elements to Multiple Levels In this exercise.In the Revit dialog. Copying Elements to Multiple Levels | 55 .rvt. Copying Elements to Multiple Levels on page 55. click No when asked if you would like walls that go up to this floor level to attach to its bottom. beam systems. beams. 33 Proceed to the next exercise.

click ■ ■ ■ (Filter Selection). do the following: Click Check None. do the following: For Top Constraint. Click Apply. 4 In the Filter dialog. select Up to level: Level 5. under Constraints. Click OK. 3 On the Options Bar. 2 Draw a selection box around the entire view. . Under Category. and then click OK. click ■ ■ 6 In the Element Properties dialog. Notice the elevator shaft walls are displayed in the 3D view. select Walls. and enter ZF. 5 On the Options Bar.Extend the elevator shaft walls up to Level 5 1 Click inside the plan view. 56 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops .

Notice the columns are extended to Level 5 in the 3D view. Under Category. under Constraints. click ■ ■ ■ . click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. 14 In the Select Levels dialog.Extend columns up to Level 3 7 Click inside the plan view. select Level 3. 13 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. do the following: Click Check None. select Structural Columns. Copying Elements to Multiple Levels | 57 . and then click OK. 10 On the Options Bar. Notice the columns are extended to Level 3 in the 3D view. 8 On the Options Bar. and then click OK. Click Apply. and draw a selection box around the entire view. enter 4' 0". . 9 In the Filter dialog. For Top Offset. Click OK. Copy columns up to Level 5 12 With the columns still selected. do the following: For Top Level. click ■ ■ ■ 11 In the Element Properties dialog. select Level 5.

Under Category. select Floors. click ■ ■ . 16 In the Element Properties dialog. 23 In the Select Levels dialog. enter 0' 0'. and Structural Framing (Joist). select Level 3 and Level 5. Click OK. do the following: Click Check None. 20 In the Filter dialog. 17 On the Design Bar. on the Options Bar. ■ 21 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. 19 On the Options Bar.Change the top and bottom offset values 15 With the columns still selected. while pressing CTRL. 22 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. Click Apply. and draw a selection box around the entire structure. and then click OK. click Modify. under Constraints. Structural Beam Systems. 24 Enter ZF 58 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . Copy remaining structural elements up to Level 5 18 Click inside the 3D view. do the following: For Base Offset. click ■ ■ ■ . and then click OK. enter 4' 0". For Top Offset. Structural Framing (Girder).

Adding Foundations In this exercise. 27 Proceed to the next exercise.25 On the Design Bar. under Structural Plans. Training File Continue to use the project training file saved in the previous exercise.rvt. i_RST_EW_Modelling. click Modify. Adding Foundations on page 59. and then you add a slab foundation under the elevator shafts. Place isolated foundations under each column 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Enter ZF. double-click Level 1. 26 Click File menu ➤ Save. Adding Foundations | 59 . you add an isolated foundation under each structural column.

60 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . click Finish. click . click (Structural Column). 7 On the Toolbar. Notice the footings located between the elevator shaft walls. 6 Draw a selection box around the entire structure. Delete 2 footings near the elevator shaft 9 On the View toolbar. 8 On the Design Bar. and draw a zoom box around the elevator shafts. The structural columns are now supported by isolated foundations. All the structural columns are highlighted. 5 On the Options Bar. 4 In the Type Selector. click Modify.3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Foundation ➤ Isolated. select Footing-Rectangular : 72" x 48" x 18".

click Finish Sketch. 13 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. The foundation is now displayed in 3-dimensions. click Lines. 12 On the Design Bar. Adding Foundations | 61 .10 Select both footings. click Foundation ➤ Slab. 15 On the Options Bar. click 19 Enter ZF. 14 On the Design Bar. click (Rectangle). Place a slab foundation under the elevator shafts 11 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 16 Click above the upper-left corner of the elevator shaft walls and sketch the slab so it surrounds the walls and columns as shown. You are now in sketch mode. (3D). and press DELETE. for Type. 18 On the View toolbar. select 12" Foundation Slab. 17 On the Design Bar. click Floor Properties.

and modify its line properties. Finally. you learn to import and modify an AutoCAD DWG file. Next. 21 Proceed to the next lesson. incorporating its line styles within the Revit Structure workflow. 62 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . Structural Detailing on page 62. you create and annotate model-based details in a section view.20 Click File menu ➤ Save. You have completed the Structural Modelling Express Workshop tutorial. You then import detail views from a Revit detail library project and place them in a new sheet. Structural Detailing In this lesson. you place it in an existing project sheet. You begin by importing an AutoCAD drawing as a reference section.

You begin by setting Revit Structure to associate line weights to the DWG/DXF color numbers of the imported AutoCAD file. ■ Click Save As. Create a new drafting view 4 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drafting View. Click OK. click Training Files. do the following: ■ Select the Link option. you import and link a 2-dimensional (2D) architectural AutoCAD drawing (DWG format) to use as a detail reference in a sheet. and select \Imperial\ i_RST_EW_Free_Standing_Wall_Section. 5 In the New Drafting View dialog. Select a scale of 1/4”= 1'-0". do the following: ■ ■ ■ Name the view Typical Wall Section.dwg. and open \Imperial\i_RST_EW_Working_with_AutoCAD. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Import the DWG file 6 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. 3 Save the Import Line Weight file as line. click Training Files. Specify the DWG/DXF Color Number 7 to a line weight of 9. 2 In the Import Line Weights dialog. Map line weights to DWG/DXF color numbers 1 Click File menu ➤ Import/Export Setting ➤ Import Line Weights DWG/DXF. but do not open it. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.Importing/Linking a DWG File In this exercise.txt in the Data folder of the Revit Structure installation directory. 7 In the left pane of the Import/Link CAD Formats dialog.rvt. Importing/Linking a DWG File | 63 . 8 In the Import/Link CAD Formats dialog. do the following: ■ ■ Specify the DWG/DXF Color Number 4 to a line weight of 5.

11 Navigate to a folder of your preference. 10 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 9 Enter ZF (Zoom to fit). and save the new project as i_RST_EW_Detailing. This is the project training file that is used for all remaining exercises in this tutorial. Using a Detail Drawing as a Section View on page 65. Notice the imported detail is linked into the Typical Wall Section drafting view with the mapped line weights. 64 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops .■ ■ For Colors. 12 Proceed to the next exercise.rvt. select Auto . select Black and White. ■ Click Open.Center to Center. For Positioning.

click Section. Training File Continue to use the project training file saved in the previous exercise. select Views (all) ➤ Structural Plans ➤ Level 1. you create a section that references an existing detail view. Using a Detail Drawing as a Section View | 65 . do the following: ■ ■ ■ For Scale. From the adjacent drop-down list of views. 3 On the View tab of the Design Bar. i_RST_EW_Detailing.Using a Detail Drawing as a Section View In this exercise. This is the active view that displays in the drawing area. Notice that Level 1 is bold.rvt. select Drafting View: Typical Wall Selection. select 1/4" = 1'-0". Select the Reference other view option. 2 On the View toolbar. and draw a zoom box around grid locations A2 and A3. click . 4 On the Options Bar. Create the section reference 1 In the Project Browser.

expand select Sheets (all). i_RST_EW_Detailing. 2 In the Project Browser. move the cursor down.1. 3 Enter WT (Tile Windows). 66 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . Add the detail view to a sheet 1 Close all views except for Level 1. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save.5 Click outside the wall between grid lines 2 and 3. Placing a Detail in a Sheet on page 66. 7 Proceed to the next exercise. Placing a Detail in a Sheet In this exercise. Training File Continue to use the project training file saved in the previous exercise.Unnamed. you place the imported detail view on an existing sheet.rvt. and click inside the north wall to place the section. and double-click S.

6 Release the mouse button. and drag Typical Wall Section onto the sheet view. expand Views (all) ➤ Drafting Views (Detail). click Level 1 on the sheet.Unnamed and the Level 1 structural plan views are now aligned horizontally in the drawing area. .Sheet S-1 . Placing a Detail in a Sheet | 67 . and draw a zoom box around the empty space to the right of 5 In the Project Browser. 4 On the View toolbar.

8 Click to place the detail. 68 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops .Notice the detail drawing outline. 7 Move the cursor to align the detail outline in the empty space of the sheet.

.In the structural plan view of Level 1. and click ENTER. notice the section callout has updated according to the detail and the sheet number. and draw a zoom box around the title block in the lower-right 10 Double-click the sheet number.0. Placing a Detail in a Sheet | 69 . change it to S-1. Change the sheet number in the title block 9 On the View toolbar. click corner of the sheet.

Adjusting Line Weights of Imported Details In this exercise.rvt. Adjusting Line Weights of Imported Details on page 70. i_RST_EW_Detailing. 12 Proceed to the next exercise. you change the line properties of the imported AutoCAD drawing to display differently in Revit Structure. Training File Continue to use the project training file saved in the previous exercise. 70 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . notice the section callout has updated according to the new sheet number.In the structural plan view of Level 1. 11 Click File menu ➤ Save.

Adjusting Line Weights of Imported Details | 71 . and double-click Typical Wall Section.Determine the drawing layer of the line 1 In the Project Browser. expand Views (all) ➤ Drafting Views (Detail). click . 3 On the Options Bar. 2 Click on the detail drawing. 4 Click one of the lines representing the exterior surface of the wall cross-section.

for Weight. 14 Click OK. 11 In the Line Graphics dialog. 13 Click Apply. 72 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . Change the weight of the line 7 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 6 Click OK. select 4.5 In the Import Instance Query dialog. 10 Click the Override button in the Lines column of the CONT5 row. notice the Layer value CONT5. 12 Click OK. 8 Click the Imported Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. 9 Click the CONT5 row.

TYPICAL CONCRETE FOOTING WITHOUT PIER OR PILASTER DETAIL Drafting View 007 . Creating a New Details Sheet from a Detail Library In this exercise. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. do the following: ■ ■ For Views. 3 In the Insert Views dialog.rvt. i_RST_EW_Detailing. 15 Click File menu ➤ Save.Notice that all lines associated with the CONT5 layer are now set to a line weight of 4.TYPICAL ELEVATION OF STEPPED WALL FOOTING DETAIL Drafting View 002 .TYPICAL SLOPE BETWEEN FOOTING DETAIL Drafting View 003 . 2 In the left pane of the Import/Link CAD Formats dialog. Training File Continue to use the project training file saved in the previous exercise. select Show all views and sheets.TYPICAL ELEVATION OF STEPPED WALL FOOTINGS AT UTILITY OPENING DETAIL Drafting View 004 .TYPICAL CONCRETE WALL CONTROL JOINT DETAIL ■ ■ ■ ■ Click OK. and select \Imperial\ i_RST_EW_Typ_slab_detail_library. Import detail views from a Revit Structure detail library 1 Click File menu ➤ Insert from File ➤ Views. click Training Files. Creating a New Details Sheet from a Detail Library on page 73. you import multiple detail views and place them on a new project sheet.TYPICAL PLAN OF HORIZONTAL REINFORCING OF CONCRETE WALLS DETAIL Drafting View 009 . Select the following views to insert: ■ ■ ■ Drafting View 001 .rvt. Creating a New Details Sheet from a Detail Library | 73 .

74 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . 6 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. Add the detail views to a sheet 8 In the Project Browser. 7 Click OK.TYPICAL ELEVATION OF STEPPED WALL FOOTING DETAIL onto the sheet view. 10 Move the cursor to position the detail outline on the sheet.4 In the Duplicate Types dialog. expand Views (all) ➤ Drafting Views (Detail). click OK. 12 Use the same method to place the remaining views that were imported earlier in this exercise. 9 Release the mouse button. and drag 001 . Notice the imported details are listed In the Project Browser under Views (All) ➤ Drafting Views (Detail) Create a new sheet 5 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Sheet. 11 Click to place the detail. select E1 30 x 42 Horizontal : E1 30x42 Horizontal.

click . and close all other views. double-click Level 3 . and draw a zoom box around grid locations C1 and D1.S.rvt. Prepare a section view 1 In the Project Browser. 2 On the View toolbar. Training File Continue to use the project training file saved in the previous exercise.13 Click File menu ➤ Save. Preparing Views for Detailing in a Section | 75 . expand Views (all) ➤ Structural Plans. i_RST_EW_Detailing.. 14 Proceed to the next exercise.T. Preparing Views for Detailing in a Section on page 75. you create a section view and crop it so that it can be displayed side by side with a related structural plan. Preparing Views for Detailing in a Section In this exercise.O.

3 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Section. 4 On the Options Bar, for Scale, select 3/4" = 1'-0". 5 Click outside the wall, halfway between grid lines C and D, move the cursor to the right, and click inside the west wall to place the section.

6 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all) ➤ Sections (Building Section), and double-click Section 1.

76 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops

7 In the section view:

Locate the double-arrow control at the top of the crop area, and drag it down to just above the Level 3 - T.O.S. elevation line.

Preparing Views for Detailing in a Section | 77

Click and drag the double-arrow control handle at the bottom of the crop area to just below the Level 3 - T.O.S. elevation line.

Click the double-arrow control handle to the left of the crop area, and drag it to the right to reduce white space.

78 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops

8 On the View Control Bar:
■ ■

Click Click

(Hide Crop Region). (Detail Level: Fine).

9 On the View toolbar, click wall.

, and draw a zoom box around the beam connection, slab, and

10 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all) ➤ Structural Plans, double-click Level 3 - T.O.S., and close all other views. 11 Enter WT. Level 3 - T.O.S. and Section 1 are now aligned horizontally in the drawing area. 12 Click File menu ➤ Save. 13 Proceed to the next exercise, Adding a Cantilever to a Slab on page 79.

Adding a Cantilever to a Slab
In this exercise, you add a cantilever to the existing slab using section and plan views. Training File Continue to use the project training file saved in the previous exercise, i_RST_EW_Detailing.rvt. Select a slab and enter sketch mode 1 In the section view to the right, select the slab.

Adding a Cantilever to a Slab | 79

Notice the slab is highlighted in the plan view to the left.

2 On the Options Bar, click 4 Click Open View.

.

3 In the Go to View dialog, select Structural Plan: Level 3 - T.O.S. Notice the plan view has entered sketch mode. Add the cantilever 5 In the plan view, while pressing CTRL, select the vertical and arc segments of the slab.

80 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops

6 On the Option Bar, for Cantilevers : Concrete, enter -9", for Steel, enter -2". 7 Press ENTER to apply the setting. 8 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch.

Notice that the cantilever now extends from the slab. 9 Click File menu ➤ Save. 10 Proceed to the next exercise, Coping Beam Connections on page 82.

Adding a Cantilever to a Slab | 81

Coping Beam Connections
In this exercise, you will cope a beam where it joins a perpendicular beam. Training File Continue to use the project training file saved in the previous exercise, i_RST_EW_Detailing.rvt. Extend the beam flush to the connection 1 In the section view, select the beam as shown.

2 Unpin the selected beam by clicking on the pin.

3 Drag the control at the left of the selected beam to the left so the end of the beam is flush to the center of the perpendicular beam, as shown.

82 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops

4 On the Toolbar, click

(Coping).

5 Select the newly extended beam, as shown.

6 Select the perpendicular beam, as shown.

Coping Beam Connections | 83

Notice the beam is coped to the shape of the beam it joins.

7 Click File menu ➤ Save. 8 Proceed to the next exercise, Adding Detail Components on page 84.

Adding Detail Components
In this exercise, you will add a shear connector, a structural angle, an expansion bolt, and an L-angle welded connection to the section view. Training File Continue to use the project training file saved in the previous exercise, i_RST_EW_Detailing.rvt.

84 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops

Add a shear connector 1 Close the Level 2 plan view, and maximize the Section 1 view. 2 On the View toolbar, click and slab. , and draw a zoom box around the top of the beam connection

3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click Detail Component. 4 In the Type Selector, select Shear Connectors-Side : 3/4”. 5 Move the cursor to the top center of the beam as shown.

6 Click to place the shear connector.

Adding Detail Components | 85

Add a structural angle 7 In the Type Selector, select AISC Angle Shapes-Section : L8x6x7/16. 8 Move the cursor to the empty space below and to the right of the beam as shown.

9 Press the SPACEBAR once to rotate the angle 90° counterclockwise. 10 Click to place the angle. 11 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click Modify. 12 Select the angle.

86 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops

13 Click the vertical flip control.

Adding Detail Components | 87

14 On the Toolbar, click

(Align).

15 Click the bottom segment of the beam, as shown.

88 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops

16 Click the angle, and then click the lock for the alignment.

Adding Detail Components | 89

17 Click the interior segment of the exterior wall, as shown.

90 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops

18 Click the angle, and then click the lock for alignment.

Adding Detail Components | 91

22 Press the SPACEBAR twice to rotate the bolt 180° counterclockwise. 21 Move the cursor into the drawing area near the angle. as shown.Add an expansion bolt 19 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 23 Align the bolt halfway along the left side of the angle. 20 In the Type Selector. 92 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . select Expansion Bolts-Side : 3/4”. click Detail Component.

25 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.24 Click to place the bolt. Adding Detail Components | 93 . click (Move). click Modify. 27 Click the center of the interior segment of the bolt head. as shown. 26 On the Toolbar.

as shown. 94 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops .28 Move the cursor to align with the outer segment of the angle.

Adding Detail Components | 95 .29 Click to move the bolt flush with the angle.

select L-Angle-Welded Connection-Elevation : L4x4x5/16. 31 In the Type Selector. 96 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . click Detail Component. 32 Move the cursor into the drawing area to the right of the beam connection.Add an L-angle connection 30 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.

35 Select the L-angle. Adding Detail Components | 97 . . 42 Click the left segment of the L-angle. click 38 Click OK.33 Click to place the L-angle. 39 Click on the L-angle and drag it to the middle of the beam. click (Align). click Modify. change the value for L to 10” 40 On the Toolbar. as shown. and then click the lock for the alignment. 34 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 41 Click the right segment of the perpendicular beam. 36 On the Options Bar. as shown. 37 In the Element Properties dialog.

43 Click File menu ➤ Save 44 Proceed to the next exercise. Add break lines 1 Enter ZF. i_RST_EW_Detailing. you will add break lines and annotation to the section view. Training File Continue to use the project training file saved in the previous exercise.rvt. 98 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . Adding Final Annotation and Detailing In this final exercise. Adding Final Annotation and Detailing on page 98.

as shown. 9 Move the cursor onto the slab. 7 Press the SPACEBAR twice to rotate the break line 180° counterclockwise. 5 Click to place the break line.2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 8 Click to place the break line. as shown. 6 Move the cursor onto the exterior wall. to the right of the coping detail. as shown. The crop area for the section view will be adjusted later. Adding Final Annotation and Detailing | 99 . select Break Line. 4 Move the cursor onto the exterior wall above the slab. below the structural angle and expansion bolt. Notice the white space beneath the break line and the continuation of the wall beyond it. click Detail Component 3 In the Type Selector.

13 On the View Control Bar. click ■ ■ (Show Crop Region). Drag the right double-arrow control to the left to obscure the slab and beam to the right of the break line. 12 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 100 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . 11 Click to place the break line. 14 Select the crop region and adjust it as follows: Drag the bottom double-arrow control upward to obscure the wall below the break line.10 Press the SPACEBAR 3 times to rotate the break line 270° counterclockwise. click Modify.

as shown. and do the following: Click on the top segment of the slab. Click to finish the second leader segment. click Text. 16 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. ■ Type STRUCTURAL SLAB (SEE PLAN). 17 On the Options Bar.15 On the View Control Bar. away from the text box. click ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ (Two Segments). click Add annotation (Hide Crop Region). 18 Click in the drawing area. Click to finish the first leader segment. Adding Final Annotation and Detailing | 101 . Move the cursor up and to the right. Move the cursor to the right.

22 Click on the leader. 20 Click on the bottom segment of the beam and do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Move the cursor down and to the right.19 Click the right drag handle and move it to the left to resize the text box. Type STL BEAM (SEE PLAN). as shown. 102 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . 23 On the Options Bar. Click to finish the first leader segment. 21 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. Move the cursor to the right. click (Add Left Leader). Click to finish the second leader segment.

24 Drag the dot control of the new leader down so that it meets the bottom segment of the beam. Adding Final Annotation and Detailing | 103 . 25 Drag the dot control at the right of the text box to the left to resize the box. as shown.

33 Click in the drawing area. Move the cursor down and to the right. away from the text box. 104 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . click Text.C. Move the cursor to the right. ANCHORED TO WALL USING 2-3/4” DIA. EXPANSION ANCHORS.26 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click 32 On the Options Bar. Type CMU WALL (SEE FOUND. click ■ ■ ■ ■ (Right). as shown. away from the text box. 27 On the Options Bar. and do the following: Click on the exterior segment of the wall. 28 Click in the drawing area. click Text. and do the following: Click on the bottom segment of the structural angle. Click to finish the first leader segment. SECTIONS FOR REINF. INFO). Click to finish the leader segment. click ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ (Two Segments). Type L8X6X3/16 (LLH) x ‘1-0” LONG CLIPS 2 4’-0” O. 29 Drag the dot control at the right of the text box and move it to the left to resize the box. (One Segment). 30 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Click to finish the second leader segment. Move the cursor to the left. 31 On the Options Bar.

35 Click File menu ➤ Save You have completed the Structural Detailing Express Workshop. Adding Final Annotation and Detailing | 105 . as shown.34 Drag the dot control at the left of the text box and move it to the right to resize the box.

106 .

selection default options. 6 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new Revit Structure project. you learn how to modify your Revit Structure 2009 working environment. click OK.rte. journal cleanup options. Set graphics settings 1 Open Revit Structure. 107 . Finally. and your username when using worksets. notification preferences. and open Imperial\i_Tutorial_Default. 5 Under Colors.Modifying Project and System Settings 3 In this tutorial. 7 In the New Project dialog. you modify the settings that control your local Revit Structure working environment. select Invert background color. you learn how to control the system settings within Revit Structure. and click OK. Modifying General System Options In this exercise. In the second lesson. Modifying System Settings In this lesson. System settings are local to each computer and applied to all projects. you create an office template. click the Graphics tab. Notice that the drawing area is black. they are not saved to project or template files. 9 In the New Project dialog. and set it as your default template. In the first lesson. 4 In the Options dialog. 3 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. which is independent of the project settings. you modify the system environment. you modify project settings to control the appearance of the components and subcomponents within that project. These settings control the graphics. 8 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. under Template file. 2 Click File menu ➤ Close to close all open projects. click Training Files. click Browse.

24 When prompted to save. 15 Under Notifications. 12 Under Colors. 17 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. select One hour. When an error occurs. the elements causing the error display using this color. 11 In the Options dialog. 13 In the Color dialog. Notice the selected wall is yellow rather than the default red. 26 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 20 On the Design Bar. click the Graphics tab. 22 Place the cursor over any of the icons on the toolbars. and select the wall. 16 Click OK.rvt. click Modify. 19 On the Design Bar. For Tooltip Assistance. Notice that a tooltip is displayed even though you set Tooltip Assistance to None. click the value for Selection Color. This setting controls only the tooltips that display within the drawing area. 23 Click File menu ➤ Close.10 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. Notice that the system settings apply to this project. 108 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . select None. click Structural Wall. click Training Files. 21 Place the cursor over the wall but do not select it. and click OK. Setting Options 25 Click File menu ➤ Open. click Modify. select One hour. and open Imperial\i_RST_Settings. 18 Sketch a simple straight horizontal wall in the center of the drawing area. For Save to Central Reminder Interval. 14 Click the General tab. Notice that a tooltip is not displayed. NOTE You can also specify the Alert Color. specify the following options: ■ ■ ■ For Save Reminder interval. click No. select yellow.

and select Normal for Tooltip Assistance. enter the name you want to use during worksharing. Specifying File Locations In this exercise.27 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. Set file locations 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. and click Browse to select a template. 6 In the Browse for Folder dialog. click the Graphics tab and make the following changes: ■ ■ Under Graphics. 31 Click File menu ➤ Close. If prompted. and click Open. click Browse. TIP To view a template. select the folder to save your files to by default. The path may vary depending on your operating system or where you installed Revit Structure. Notice that the drawing area background colors are no longer inverted and that tooltips display when you place the cursor over any building component. Specifying File Locations on page 109. 2 In the Options dialog. do not save the changes. you can start a new project with that template. Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. Your login name displays by default. Journal files are text documents that record each step during your Revit Structure sessions. 4 Click Cancel. 28 In the Options dialog. under Default path for family template files. NOTE Revit Structure Journal files are normally found in C:\Program Files\Autodesk Revit Structure\Journals. Specifying File Locations | 109 . They are saved at the termination of each Revit Structure session. Under Windows Username. click the File Locations tab. click Browse. click Browse. 32 Proceed to the next exercise. Notice that there are industry-specific templates that you can set as your default template. 5 Under Default path for user files. and the family template files. 29 Click the General tab and make the following changes: ■ Under Notifications. you specify your default file locations. Journal files are deleted automatically after their number exceeds the value you specify. as well as the material and rendering libraries. the family libraries. These settings control location of important Revit Structure files such as your default project template. 3 Under Default template file. Under Journal File Cleanup. ■ ■ 30 Click OK. Journals can be run in order to detect a problem or recreate lost steps or files. These files are used primarily in the software support process. For Selection Color. select Red. 7 In the Options dialog. select values for When number of journals exceeds and Delete journals older than (days). select your preferred Save Reminder interval. clear Invert background color.

click (Add Value). These are the family templates that you use to create new families. 12 Click in the Library Path column for My Library. notice that the libraries display as icons in the left pane. However. centralized. structural firm where customized templates reside on a network drive. and notice the list of library names. such as in a large. (Add Library Path) that displays 110 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . you can click on the library folder located in the left pane of the dialog. 8 Click Cancel. and click on the right-side of the field. or loading a Revit Structure file. In the following illustration. You can modify the existing library names and path. and change the name to My Library. click Place. saving. and you can create new libraries.This path is set automatically during the installation process. 10 Under Libraries. Specify library settings and create a new library 9 In the Options dialog. Each library path points Revit Structure to a folder of families or training files. there are some circumstances where you may need to modify the path. NOTE When you are opening. It is unlikely that you would ever want to modify this path. 11 Click in the Library Name field of the new library. The list is dependent on the options that you selected during installation.

21 Under Libraries. you may want to set up an office library on a network path in order to increase productivity and maintain office standards. click the My Library icon. 16 Click File menu ➤ Open. 22 Click (Remove Value) to delete the library. TIP You may want to create a new folder first. The new library displays in the left pane of all Revit Structure Open. 18 Click Cancel. Load. 20 Click the File Locations tab. select My Library. and click Open. If you work in a large office.13 Navigate to C:\My Documents or any other folder where you want to create a personal library of Revit Structure projects. and click OK. Specifying File Locations | 111 . Save. click My Library. 17 In the left pane of the Open dialog. templates. 19 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. TIP The library icons display in the order that they are listed in the Options dialog. 14 Under Library Name. Notice that Revit Structure navigates directly to the library path. and select it as the library path. and Import dialogs. or families. 15 Click (Move Rows Up) until My Library is at the top of the list.

4 Under Personal dictionary. click the Spelling tab. 2 In the Options dialog. click Restore Defaults. scroll down the list of building industry terms.23 Proceed to the next exercise. click Edit. and enter This is sheetmtl-Cu and SHTMTL-CU. you modify the spelling settings and the custom dictionaries for Revit Structure. click Text. This resets the spelling settings to their original configuration. 11 In the Options dialog. 3 Under Settings. 9 In the text editor. 18 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. 7 Click File menu ➤ Exit. 10 Click File menu ➤ Exit. 112 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . click the Spelling tab. Specifying Spelling Options on page 112. to open a new Revit Structure project using the default 13 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 5 In the text editor. Specifying Spelling Options In this exercise. click Edit. 12 On the Standard toolbar. Click File menu ➤ Exit. 15 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 22 In the text editor. Modify spelling settings 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. click OK. Notice that there is also a building industry dictionary. 19 In the Options dialog. Notice that the spell checker allowed sheetmtl-Cu because you added it to the custom dictionary. 23 In the Options dialog. Click File menu ➤ Save. 8 Under Building industry dictionary. 24 Click File menu ➤ Close. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. 20 Under Settings. If prompted. 16 Click Tools menu ➤ Spelling. click Edit. click template. 17 Click OK. enter sheetmtl-Cu. It allowed SHTMTL-CU because you set the spelling options to ignore words in uppercase. 21 Under Personal dictionary. do not save the changes. click Modify. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Delete sheetmtl-CU. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save. select Ignore words in UPPERCASE. click OK. 14 Click in the drawing area.

Modifying Snap Settings In this exercise. if you want to snap an object to a wall midpoint. Revit Structure uses the largest increment that represents less than 2 mm in the drawing area. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. 7 Under Object Snaps. Modifying Snap Settings on page 113. After you click to place the object at the midpoint. and enter 1. click Training Files. click in the Length dimension snap increments box following the value 4'. In this exercise. As you zoom in and out within a view. click OK. 8 In the Snaps dialog. snapping reverts to the system default settings. 5 Click Settings menu ➤ Snaps. click Browse.25 Proceed to the next exercise. notice the 2-letter acronyms next to each object snap option. 4 In the New Project dialog. You can turn snap settings on and off. You can add an increment by entering the value with a semicolon after it. 9 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Structural Wall. you modify snap increments. Modifying Snap Settings | 113 . or use the shortcut keys to force a particular snap method. Snap settings are system settings that are applied to all projects and not saved within a project file. enter SM and only midpoint snaps are recognized until you perform an action. under Template file. work with snapping turned off. These are shortcut keys that you can use at any time when working on the design. click OK. Notice that you can modify both length and angular snap increments. and open Imperial\i_Tutorial_Default. and use shortcut keys to control snapping on an instance basis. 2 In the New Project dialog.rte. 6 Under Dimension Snaps. you modify snap settings. For example. Modify snap increments 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new Revit Structure project..

The listening dimension reacts to the movement of your cursor and to numerical keyboard entries. and move the cursor to the right. Do not set the wall end point. zoom in until the listening dimension snap increment shifts to 1'. zoom out until it does so. If it does not. you can right-click and select a zoom option from the context menu. Sketch without snapping 12 While sketching the wall. the command is only active for one click of the mouse. and click Wall. 14 Click in the drawing area to start a second wall. Use snapping shortcut keys 15 On the Design Bar. Notice that the dimension snaps at 4' increments.10 Click in the center of the drawing area. 11 While sketching a generic straight wall. it refers specifically to the dimension that appears while you are in the act of sketching. If you do not have a wheel button. This kind of dimension is called a listening dimension. enter the shortcut key SO to turn snaps off. While sketching. When you use shortcut keys to control snapping. Notice that snapping is once again active. 16 Place the cursor over the horizontal wall you added previously. and move the cursor to the right. you can also use the zoom shortcut keys such as ZO to zoom out. click Modify. use the wheel button on your mouse. TIP To zoom while in the act of sketching. Notice that when snapping is turned off completely. This is the increment that you added previously. 114 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . the listening dimension reflects the exact length of the wall as you move the cursor to the left or right. 13 Click to set the wall endpoint.

you learn how to control the project environment by using the options available on the Settings menu. This list includes all materials available for use on model components. click Training Files. 20 Move the cursor downward.Notice that the cursor snaps to various points on the wall. and delete the value 1". Modifying Project Settings | 115 . you create a new material and apply it to a model component. Notice the materials listed on the left side of the dialog. and the wall edges. and select Concrete . 18 Notice that the cursor now snaps only to the midpoint of the wall. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you modify the way the Project Browser organizes the project. Using these options. it defines the appearance of that component in shaded and rendered views. 2 Scroll down. You create and modify materials. 21 Click Settings menu ➤ Snaps. you modify the appearance of components and their subcomponents within a project. fill patterns. the midpoint. Make sure you also delete the semicolon. and open Imperial\i_RST_Proj_Settings. Finally. Modifying Project Settings on page 115. and specify the wall endpoint. When a model component is loaded into a project. annotations. 22 Under Dimension Snaps. Well designed materials provide the foundation for photorealistic renderings. Creating and Applying Materials In this exercise.. Create a new material 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Materials. When you apply a material to a component. In the left pane of the Open dialog. If you cannot complete the exercises in their entirety. This is the snap shortcut key that restricts all snapping to midpoints.Precast Concrete for Name. 17 Enter SM. 19 Click to start the wall at the midpoint. 3 Click (Duplicate). If you move the cursor along the wall.rvt. save the project file with a unique name. and object styles. and do not save the file. lines. 23 Click OK. The exercises in this lesson should be done sequentially using the same project file. click in the Length dimension snap increments box. and use it to complete the exercises. 25 Proceed to the next lesson. all materials that are part of that component family are also loaded into the project. it will snap to the endpoints. Modifying Project Settings In this lesson. 24 Click File menu ➤ Close.

click This is the material you created previously. and double-click T. and click OK. click Edit/New. This layer represents the exterior finish of the wall. You have created a new material that can be applied to any model component in this project. select Concrete-Precast for Name. 12 On the right side of the Material field. click Modify. 13 In the Materials dialog.O. enter Concrete . All of the exterior walls of this project are now changed to the new type. you modify the material so that it displays correctly in a shaded or rendered view. 14 Click OK 3 times. Wall. 4 In the Duplicate Material dialog. 15 Select the left foundation wall. 8 Click Duplicate. 17 In the Type Selector. In the steps that follow. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. Notice that the material settings have not changed from the material that you duplicated. Fnd.This creates a new material using the selected material settings as the starting point. click Edit. 10 In the Value field for Structure. and select the remaining exterior walls. The lower wall now uses the Concrete texture when you render it.Precast. and click OK. 6 Select the lower exterior wall. and click OK. 11 Click in the Material field for Layer 2. It is currently assigned the material Concrete Cast-in-place concrete. 18 On the Design Bar. .Custom for the new wall name. 16 Press CTRL. select Basic Wall: Foundation-Custom. and click . Apply the new material 5 In the Project Browser. 9 Enter Foundation . 116 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . expand Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans.

you create a pattern and apply it to this material. NOTE If you want to see the material in greater detail. Click Render. right-click the Design Bar. This is because a surface pattern was not selected when the material was defined. 22 In the Rendering dialog. the material that you created is displayed.19 On the View Toolbar. Notice that the foundation walls are no longer gray and there is no material pattern applied in this view. click Rendering dialog. do the following: ■ ■ For Quality Setting. Creating and Applying Materials | 117 . click . Creating and Applying Fill Patterns on page 118. select Best. In the following exercise. 21 In the drawing area. draw a pick box around the entire 3D image. zoom into the model. and drag a zoom box around the area you want to render. 20 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. When it is finished. The rendering process begins. and select Rendering. TIP If the Rendering tab is not available on the Design Bar.

27 Proceed to the next exercise. TIP Drafting patterns represent materials in symbolic form. 5 Click New. Drafting patterns represent material in symbolic form. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. 25 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 118 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings .23 On the Rendering dialog. 26 Navigate to a folder of your preference. click Show Model. 6 In the Add Surface Pattern dialog. click Custom. There are 2 types of fill patterns: model and drafting. rotate. under Display. such as brick coursing or ceramic tile on a wall. 4 Scroll down the list of patterns.rvt. 3 Under Pattern Type. choose Model. Both pattern types are created and applied in a similar way. Model patterns represent actual element appearance on a structure. 24 Close the Rendering dialog. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns on page 118. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns In this exercise. Create a new fill pattern 1 In the Project Browser. such as steel. You can also dimension to model pattern lines. expand Elevations. 8 Navigate to the training folders installed with your Revit Structure software. and save the file as i_Settings-in progress. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. and double-click West. Drafting pattern density is fixed. You can align. Notice that no model surface pattern displays on the wall. which consists of a double-diagonal hatching pattern. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Fill Patterns. Notice that a concrete surface model pattern is not available. 7 Under Custom. Model patterns are fixed and scale with the model. i_Settings-in progress. you create a new pattern and apply it to the material you created in the previous exercise. click Import.rvt. Model patterns represent actual element appearance on a building. and move model patterns.

select Model.TIP Typically. 27 Zoom into the model until the fill pattern appears. click in the Material field for Layer 2. 18 In the Edit Assembly dialog. It is currently assigned the material Concrete-Precast. . to select a fill pattern. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns | 119 . 19 On the right side of the Materials field. 17 In the Value field for Structure. click Edit. click Edit/New. 9 Select Concrete_Surface. and click OK. and click Open. 15 On the Options Bar. 25 On the Design Bar. click . 22 Select the Concrete Surface model pattern. Apply the concrete surface pattern 13 On the View Control Bar. adjust your zoom settings as needed. select Model Graphics Style: Wireframe. click . 11 Enter Concrete Surface for Name. TIP If the pattern does not display. and click OK. 14 Select the wall. The west wall of the building displays as solid fill. 26 On the View Toolbar. click 20 Under Surface Pattern. click Modify. 12 Click OK. 16 In the Element Properties dialog. select Concrete and enter 30 for Import scale.pat from the Common folder. The location of these files can vary depending on the path you set during installation. 23 In the Materials dialog. This layer represents the exterior finish of the wall. 10 Under Custom. click OK. 21 In the Fill Patterns dialog. 24 Click OK 3 times. your training files can be found on C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RST 2009\Training. click . The new model pattern is available in the Name list in the Fill Patterns dialog. under Pattern Type.

Rather than continually modify the type properties of each truss. Object styles allow you to control the appearance of multiple components of the same type. 120 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . and double-click 3D.28 Click File menu ➤ Save. Object styles are applied in every view and can be overridden in a particular view by modifying the Visibility/Graphics settings. For example. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. Controlling Object Styles on page 120. 2 On the keyboard. you can change the type properties center chase width of one truss and then apply the change to all trusses. Controlling Object Styles You can use object styles to control the appearance of components and subcomponents. there are often multiple trusses within a project. Apply object styles 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. expand 3D Views. use the shortcut keys ZF (Zoom to Fit) so the entire model fits in the drawing area. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. 29 Proceed to the next exercise. i_Settings-in progress.

3 On the View Control Bar. expand Walls. 5 In the Object Styles dialog. under Custom Colors. 8 In the Color dialog. click Model Graphics Style. 9 In the Object Styles dialog. 11 Proceed to the next exercise. 6 Under Category. Notice the line color is applied to the wall. click Show categories from all disciplines. double-click the Line Color field. 10 Click File menu ➤ Save. and click OK. 7 Under the Walls category. Controlling Object Styles | 121 . 4 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. Modifying Line Patterns and Styles on page 122. select Blue. click OK. and click Hidden Line.

double-click T. Fnd. 122 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . Apply the new line pattern 7 In the Project Browser. i_Settings-in progress. enter Truss for Name. Wall. 9 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Patterns. and click Hidden Line. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. expand Structural Framing. you create a new line pattern and apply it to the truss in plan view. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. or you can use Object Styles to apply the change to all views. click Model Graphics Style. Under Line Pattern. under Floor Plans. Create a new line pattern 1 Verify the 3D view is active. select Truss. You then create a new line style to represent underslab drainage.Modifying Line Patterns and Styles In this exercise. 8 On the View Control Bar. There are 2 ways to apply the line style to the truss. You can use the Visibility/Graphics settings to modify the truss appearance in a specific view. click New. Click OK. and select Web Joist. 3 In the Line Patterns dialog. now you must apply it. 4 In the Line Pattern Properties dialog. 5 Enter the Types and Values shown in the following illustration: 6 Click OK twice. (example: plan view).O.rvt. 10 In the Object Styles dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Category. You have created a new line pattern.

Select Truss for Line Pattern. 12 Click the Model Categories tab.11 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 14 In the Select Line Style dialog. and select Web Joist for Visibility. select Override and specify the following options: ■ ■ ■ Select 2 for Line Weight. expand Structural Framing. This overrides the appearance of the truss only in the current view. 13 Click Override for Line Style Projection. 15 Click OK twice. Modifying Line Patterns and Styles | 123 . Select Blue for Line Color.

move the cursor to the bottom-right corner of the slab. 19 Enter Underslab Drainage for Name. . 22 In the Type Selector. under Floor Plans. Select Double Dash 5/8" for Line Pattern. 20 For the Underslab Drainage category. 18 In the Line Styles dialog. click New. 21 On the Modelling Tab of the Design Bar. double-click T. 23 In the Options Bar. specify the following: ■ ■ Click Click . Click . click Lines. Select Red for Line Color. 24 Click outside the upper-left corner of the slab to begin the rectangle. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Click . and click to set the rectangle endpoint. specify the following values: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select 6 for Line Weight Projection. under Modify Subcategories. and click OK. 25 In the Options Bar. 26 Draw 3 vertical lines. 17 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Styles. Slab. equally spaced as shown below. Enter 2' 0" for Offset. 124 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings .O. select Underslab Drainage.Create a new line style 16 In the Project Browser. Click OK.

Modifying Annotations In this exercise. double-click Level 1. Modifying Annotations on page 125.Imperial for name. under Floor Plans. expand Lines. 33 On the Model Categories tab. 29 On the Model Categories tab. 30 Click OK. and click OK. 35 Click File menu ➤ Save. expand Lines. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. 3 In the Type Properties dialog. 31 In the Project Browser. This turns off the visibility of the underslab drainage lines only in this view. 28 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 4 Enter Linear . and clear Underslab Drainage. 5 Under Text. Modifying Annotations | 125 . 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Dimensions ➤ Linear. click Duplicate. you create a new dimension style using units of measurement that differ from the project settings.rvt. You also load a new beam annotation symbol and apply it to show the beam instance number rather than the beam type number. 34 Click OK.27 On the View Toolbar. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. click the default value for Units Format. Notice the underslab drainage lines appear in this view. 32 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. click . and clear Underslab Drainage. 36 Proceed to the next exercise. i_Settings-in progress. Create a new dimension style 1 Verify the 3D View is active.

and select the drop-down arrow that displays. 17 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. The remaining untagged beams are tagged. 7 Click OK twice. 22 On the View Toolbar. click Training Files. Under Category. click 23 Click File menu ➤ Save. click Tag All Not Tagged. double-click T.Imperial dimension available.6 In the Format dialog: ■ ■ Clear Use project settings. Structural Framing Tag. . 14 In the Tags dialog. 21 Under Leader. click Tag ➤ By Category. 18 Click a beam. In the Type Selector. 126 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . Each tag category has a different loaded tag: one displays the type value. 9 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. 11 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags.O. Notice that you can choose between the 2 beam tag types loaded into this project. click Dimension. You have created a new dimension style. Fnd. A beam instance tag displays on the selected beam. Load a new beam tag 10 In the Project Browser. and click OK. click Structural Framing Tag. This tag is used when tagging using the Beams By Category option. scroll to Structural Framing Tag and notice that Structural Framing Tag is now the assigned tag. verify that Create is clear. 13 In the left pane of the Open dialog. Select Feet and fractional inches for Units. 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. notice that there is a Linear . 20 Select the structural framing tag category with the loaded tag. and open Imperial\Structural Framing Tag.rfa. 19 On the Design Bar. the other displays the instance value. notice the structural framing tag appears twice. 15 Under Loaded Tags. 16 Click OK. 12 Click Load. under Floor Plans. Wall.

under Length. Temporary Dimensions. 11 Between the columns Coarse and Medium. 12 Click OK. select Openings. Notice the 1/4" = 1' 0" view scale moved to the Medium column. you modify 3 settings that have a broad impact on the project. click the default value for Format.rvt. 5 In the Format dialog. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. In the final section. under Area. you use the arrows between the columns to move view scales from one detail level to another. 6 Click OK. select To the nearest 1/16" for Rounding. you specify the project units of measurement . select 0 decimal places for Rounding. Specifying Units of Measurement. i_Settings-in progress. Set units of measurement 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Units. and click OK. and Detail Level Options on page 127. dimension values display using this setting. the detail level is specified automatically according to the arrangement in the table. and Detail Level Options | 127 . temporary dimensions now snap to the centerline faces and to the openings. 2 In the Project Units dialog. 3 In the Format dialog. When you create a new view and specify its view scale.Temporary Dimensions. and Detail Level Options In this exercise. select SF for Unit suffix. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. Any new view created using this scale is automatically assigned the detail level Medium. you modify the temporary dimension settings. you modify the detail level assignments. Specify temporary dimension properties 7 Click Settings menu ➤ Temporary Dimensions. Unless there is an override. dimensions use these project settings.unless there is an override. and click OK. Specifying Units of Measurement. In the second section.Temporary Dimensions. 8 Under Walls. click the default value for Format. Specify detail levels 10 Click Settings menu ➤ Detail Level.24 Proceed to the next exercise. TIP You can override the detail level at any time by specifying the Detail Level parameter in the View Properties dialog. click . The view scale moves either from the bottom or the top of the column based on the direction. In this table. Specifying Units of Measurement. You do not select a view scale to move it. In the first section. select Centerlines 9 Under Doors and Windows. 4 In the Project Units dialog. Modifications to area rounding are displayed in schedules and area tags. In this project. and click OK.

you open a project that was created using Revit Architecture to better demonstrate different phases of construction. In this exercise. 2 In the Project Browser.13 Click File menu ➤ Save.Phase 3-Structure Completed Project-Structure Completed Structure w/ Roof&Floors 128 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . 14 Click File menu ➤ Close. you often produce multiple packages of related drawings. and double-click Completed Project. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Revit Structure project files do not include ceiling plans.Phase 2-Structure West Wing . and notice the progression of each view: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Main Bldg .Phase 1-Structure East Wing . Modifying Project Browser Organization on page 128. and open Common\c_Project_Browser. 3 Open each of the 3D views in the following order. NOTE In this exercise. Modifying Project Browser Organization In a typical project. Notice that the sheets are listed alphanumerically based on the sheet number. 15 Proceed to the next exercise. click Training Files.rvt. you modify the Project Browser organization and create new methods of grouping and sorting the views and sheets. expand Views (all) ➤ 3D Views. expand Sheets (all). you can use the Project Browser settings to instantly modify how the Project Browser groups and sorts. Organize the Project Browser by views 1 In the Project Browser. These drawings and sheets can become so numerous that navigating the lengthy Project Browser list is cumbersome. In order to organize the views and sheets into sets of deliverables.

14 In the Project Browser. 4 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. 6 In the Project Browser. In the Project Browser. 20 In the Browser Organization dialog. Create a new browser organization name 15 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. 18 In the Browser Organization Properties dialog. On the Project Browser. and click Apply. and notice that each is grouped by discipline. 17 Enter Phase/Type/Discipline. select Discipline.■ Completed Project Each of the 3D views varies by phase and discipline. expand Complete ➤ 3D Views and then expand Architectural and Structural. expand each view type. and click OK. 9 In the Browser Organization dialog. and click OK. Modifying Project Browser Organization | 129 . and click OK. and click New. select Phase/Type/Discipline as the current browser organization. under Sheets. and click OK. 10 In the Project Browser. 13 Select Sheet Prefix. under Views. 5 On the Views tab. 16 Click the Views tab. 12 Click the Sheets tab. 21 In the Project Browser. click the Folders tab. select Type/Discipline. and click OK. expand each sheet set. 7 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. expand both the Architectural and Structural category of views. Organize Project Browser by sheets 11 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. notice that Views are divided into Architectural and Structural disciplines. and specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Group by: Phase Then by: Type Then by: Discipline 19 Click OK. 8 Select Phase. notice that views are grouped based on phase.

22 Click File menu ➤ Close. You can save Project Browser organization schemes.Notice that the Project Browser has reorganized all the views within this project according to Phase. You can also save these settings in a template file. Even if you choose not to base that project on a template. you maintain consistent standards and reduce the amount of repetitive work. If you want to save this file. you create a Revit Structure template file and set it as your default template. Notice there are a number of different templates to choose from. For example. 130 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . In this lesson. In the lesson that follows. The lesson begins with choosing the right base template and progresses through many of the most common modifications that you would consider in order to make a template unique to your situation. 2 Under Template File. 3 Select the Structural Analysis-Default. the project template is used to provide the initial project settings such as materials. select Project for Create new. All the settings that you changed in this lesson are saved with the project. Creating a Structural Template In this lesson. such as structural or construction. you modified various project settings that affect project appearance and organization. It is mostly conceptual and is designed as a road map with options for your consideration. 4 In the New Project dialog. 5 Click OK. A well designed template will ensure office standards are maintained and will reduce repetitive work. When you create a new template based on an existing template. each is modified in a way to make it useful to a particular industry. 6 In the Project Browser. click Browse. and view names. levels.rte template. Although Revit Structure provides many templates to choose from. enter a unique file name. Review existing templates 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. Type. The template selection may vary depending on your installation. you create an office template. dimensions styles. This lesson is intended to provide you with a blueprint of how to create your structural template. you select the starting point for your structural template. you can select an existing template or begin the project with no template. and double-click Building Elevation. and Discipline. If your work requires a variety of templates. By saving these settings as a template and using it throughout the office. The first step in creating your structural template is deciding which template to use as your starting point. You can use an existing template as the baseline or use no template at all. and rendered scenes in a template. Whenever you create a new project or template. when you create a new project. When you create new projects. expand Views ➤ Elevations. Choosing the Base Template In this exercise. the same rules apply. you can modify one template and use Transfer Project Standards to copy the changes to other templates. choose the option that will help you develop the best template with the least amount of work. preloaded families. and click OK. named print settings. you may decide to modify one or more of these templates to the specific needs of your company. navigate to your preferred directory. Other than the default template. and click Open. certain baseline settings are still assigned to the new project. a group of settings are used to specify the project environment. Depending on your needs.

9 Click File menu ➤ Close. click Browse. you can dictate its appearance in all views and renderings. If you want to use a template other than the default. These settings control the appearance of components and their subcomponents within a project.7 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region and. 14 Under Create New. you can establish the settings that are common to most projects. In this exercise. 8 In the Project Browser. TIP This template is the starting point for your new template. you modify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Materials Fill patterns Object styles Line styles. 11 Under Template File. Modifying Project Settings on page 131. there are additional commands on the Settings menu that allow modifications that can be saved in a template. and click OK. In order to maintain office standards and reduce rework. Other templates. you can select it now. you modify the project settings for your new template. such as the structural template. The specifics regarding each of these are addressed at the end of this exercise. close them. navigate throughout the various views and schedules. 12 Select a default template. When you create the material. weights. in the drawing area. Modifying Project Settings In this exercise. are simple in respect to the predefined views and schedules. and patterns Annotations Project units Temporary dimensions Detail levels Project Browser organization View direction In addition to the list above. select Project Template. but the view properties have been modified to maximize the use of the structural tools. For example. 13 Click Open. 15 Proceed to the next exercise. If you have additional projects open. Notice that the structural analysis template is more complex than the default template. Notice that there are more predefined levels than you normally see in the default template. you can create the materials commonly used in most projects. Modifying Project Settings | 131 . drag a zoom region around the level heads. 10 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project.

and one for annotation symbol line styles. TIP When the material of a component is set to by category. line patterns. If there are materials that are commonly used within your office or industry. In the dialog. You are merely pointed to each area where you can adapt the template to your needs. RELATED See Modifying Project Settings on page 115 for more information on creating new fill patterns. 14 Click OK to close the Object Styles dialog. 2 Scroll down the Name list. create and modify them as needed. 13 Modify categories. 11 If necessary. You can align. Modify line weights 15 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Weights. For more details on modifying these settings. 5 Scroll through the list of model and drafting patterns. Observe the materials that are already defined. and move model patterns. one for perspective model line styles. and materials for different categories and subcategories of components or imported objects. and create new subcategories as needed. there are 3 tabs: one for model component line styles. The Line Weights command controls the display of line widths for each scale of a view. Model patterns represent actual element appearance on a structure. 12 Click the Annotation Objects tab.During this exercise. or refer to the Help documentation. it adopts the material assigned to its object styles category. such as beams and columns in orthographic views. You can add and delete view scales. Specify object styles 8 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. 7 Click OK when finished. You may want to rename or modify some of the existing materials. 132 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . specific modifications are not dictated. you can set line weights. 3 Click OK twice to close the Material Library and Materials dialogs. The widths are dependent on the scale of the design. Create and modify materials 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Materials. In the Object Styles dialog. 10 Modify the properties of any existing categories as needed. rotate. or modify existing patterns. line colors. You can define the widths of 16 different pens for 6 different drawing scales. create new subcategories. and scroll through the list of categories. Create and modify fill patterns 4 Click Settings menu ➤ Fill Patterns. The Model Line Weights tab controls the line width of structural components. see the previous lesson. 6 Create new fill patterns as needed. TIP Drafting patterns represent materials in symbolic form. Modifying System Settings on page 107. 9 Click the Model Objects tab.

41 Modify the properties of existing linear dimension styles if necessary. Modify arrowheads 33 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Arrowheads. The Annotation Line Weights tab controls the line width of annotation symbols. and click Edit. click Duplicate. 25 Scroll through the list of line patterns. and notice the list of existing linear dimension styles. To see the details of a particular style. 43 If you need to create a new linear dimension style. 16 Click the Model Line Weights tab. Modify line styles 29 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Styles. select it. and specify the properties. Modify line patterns 24 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Patterns. To see the details of a particular style. select it from this list. and radial dimensions are modified separately. The arrowheads configured within this dialog can be applied to text notes. 37 If you need to create a new arrowhead style. 26 To modify a line pattern. and notice the list of existing arrowhead styles. 40 Select the Type drop-down list. 34 Select the Type drop-down list. 30 For existing line categories. angular. and dimensions. 38 Click OK. select it from this list. such as section lines and dimension lines. 28 Click OK. modify the line weight. or line pattern as needed. 36 Click Rename if you want to rename an existing arrowhead. name the style. 35 Modify the properties of existing arrowhead styles if necessary.The Perspective Line Weights tab controls the line width of objects in perspective views. 22 Modify existing line weights as needed. and specify the properties. 27 Add and delete line patterns as needed. 31 If necessary. 42 Click Rename if you want to rename an existing style. line color. 20 Modify existing line weights as needed. name the style. Linear. Modifying Project Settings | 133 . Annotation line widths are independent of the view scale. tags. click Duplicate. 21 Click the Annotation Line Weights tab. create new line subcategories using line weights and line patterns previously modified or created. 32 Click OK. Modify Dimension Styles 39 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Dimensions ➤ Linear. 23 Click OK. 19 Click the Perspective Line Weights tab. 18 Add and delete view scales as needed. 17 Modify existing line weights as needed.

62 Review the table. click Format. the detail level of that view is automatically assigned using this table. When you create a new view. 52 Modify the unit settings if necessary. Volume. or Fine. 54 Repeat the previous 2 steps for the Area. The tag assignments in this dialog dictate the default tag for each category. You can override tag assignment using the Type Selector. Specify project units 50 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Units. 49 After you have loaded the necessary tags. specify where you want the temporary dimensions to measure from by default. The detail level is based on view scale. when you add a structural framing tag with the tag option selected. TIP In the drawing area. Specify temporary dimensions 57 Click Settings menu ➤ Temporary Dimensions. 51 Under Length. You can have multiple tags loaded for any category. and Angle settings. you can move view scales from one detail level to another. the last loaded tag becomes the default tag. 53 Click OK. Using the arrows between the columns. and move view scales as needed. 55 Specify the Slope option. In the Tags dialog. 59 Under Doors and Windows. make sure each category is assigned the desired tag. the beam is tagged using the tag assigned to the structural framing category in this dialog. and click OK. Modify loaded tags 46 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. ■ ■ Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Dimensions ➤ Angular. View scales are organized under the detail level headings Coarse. you can modify the location of temporary dimension witness lines. 134 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . 58 Under Walls. click Load. 60 Click OK. and choose a decimal symbol. When more than one tag has been loaded for a category. Notice many categories do not have loaded tags. 56 Click OK. 48 To load new annotation tags. 47 Scroll through the list of loaded tags. Medium. For example. 45 Repeat the previous 5 steps for angular and radial dimensions.44 Click OK. Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Dimensions ➤ Radial. you can override the assignment by selecting a different tag from the drop-down list. specify the default location for temporary dimensions. Specify detail levels 61 Click Settings menu ➤ Detail Level. You can override the detail level at any time by specifying the Detail Level parameter in the View Properties command.

This parameter makes it possible for you to select a different view direction. click View Direction. you can view the project from the slab looking up (up direction). The view scales move from the lower-left to the upper-right and vice-versa. 68 Click the Sheets tab. or Edit existing organization types. Rename. In certain projects. and select Properties. These drawings and sheets can become so numerous that navigating the lengthy Project Browser list is cumbersome. 63 Click OK. create new browser organization types. 69 Delete. click the arrows between columns. click the Views tab. or Edit existing organization types. click Edit/New.NOTE You cannot select specific scales in this dialog. you often produce multiple packages of related drawings. Modify project browser organization 64 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. engineers view plans using different orientations in different countries. 74 In the Type Properties dialog. To move the view scales. 67 If necessary. For example. 70 If necessary. or from the roof looking down (down direction). right-click any plan view of the Structural Plan Family. In order to organize the views and sheets into sets of deliverables. create new browser organization types. you can use the Project Browser settings to instantly modify how the Project Browser groups and sorts. Modifying Project Settings | 135 . 66 Delete. 65 In the Browser Organization dialog. 71 Click OK. 73 In the Element Properties dialog. Rename. Setting View Direction 72 In the Project Browser. In a typical project.

Links to associated tutorials are provided. You can find additional information in Help. Each of these areas is covered later in this lesson or in other tutorials. See Setting up Shared and Project Parameters on page 144. 136 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . However. For example.75 Use the down arrow to change the parameters to Up or Down. Each command is available on the Settings menu. you must decide if the time investment is offset later by the reduction in repetitive work. View Templates Create and modify the view templates to control the appearance of default views. you can save rendered scene settings to a template. Settings Menu Command Project Parameters Associated Tutorial Considerations This command is covered in an exercise later in this lesson. This could be useful for things such as title blocks. In such a case. and framing tags. Additional project settings 77 On the Settings menu. you can add project (and shared) parameters to a template. Although these settings can be saved within a template. you may only want to add generically named settings that would be applicable to most projects. If necessary. This command is covered in an exercise later in this lesson. See Modifying Views and View Templates on page 139. there are several additional commands that control the project environment. Use the table below as a checklist. 76 Click OK to exit the dialogs. and make modifications in each area as necessary. you should consider each carefully before applying changes to a template.

Make modifications. you can set the symbolic representation settings for cutback distance. and click OK. do so before starting this exercise. Modify type properties. Goal: Load new beam type Steps: In the Element Properties dialog. In the steps that follow. you do both. create. This would be cumbersome and counterproductive. Although this is possible. select Load. you could load detail components. 78 Proceed to the next exercise. If this selection is satisfactory. you would have to scroll through a lengthy list of beams every time you changed a beam within a project. Obviously. Use the instructions in the table below to perform these steps. you load and modify families or groups into the template started in the previous exercise. However. select Edit/New. and beams. You can load any family or group into a template. and click OK. or use the Project Browser to delete an existing type. 3 To modify. and click OK. For example. If necessary. click on the Options Bar. You should think very carefully about what families or groups to load and modify within a template. See Modifying Structural Settings on page 142. It is important to understand that you should not load every conceivable family into a template file.Settings Menu Command Structural Settings Associated Tutorial Considerations This command is covered in an exercise later in this lesson. you should only load components that tend to be used in every project and are not likely to change. Although the options are endless. click Beam. 2 In the Type Selector. it is not recommended because it would increase the file size significantly before the first component was added to the project. For example. You may want to modify slab types to add a more diverse selection within the template. if you loaded every beam type you could find. each component loaded will add to the length of the relative Type Selector list. select it. Depending on the intended use of this template. In the Element Properties dialog. select Edit/New. Navigate to the directory containing the beam type. In addition. there are some important thoughts to consider. and click Open. titleblocks. Load and modify families 1 Use the project started in the previous exercise. Click Duplicate. Loading and Modifying Families and Groups In this exercise. you may want to load families into the template to save time later or ensure consistency throughout the office. Loading and Modifying Families and Groups on page 137. notice the list of beams is already loaded. or load a new beam type. you may want to delete. If you have not completed the previous exercise. or add to this selection. you can move onto the next component type. and column symbols. and on the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Modify beam type Create new beam type Loading and Modifying Families and Groups | 137 . brace symbols. In the Element Properties dialog. You can do this in several ways: select a component type and click Properties to modify or add a new type. enter a name. modify.

click Preview. 12 Click OK. Notice that you have the option to Load Family or Load Group. and select the titleblock type. click Load. Notice that each family category is listed. You can also load families and groups from the File menu. This titleblock is currently part of the template. You may want to open other Design Bar tabs and make modifications to components not available on this tab.4 Click OK. Modifying Views and View Templates on page 139. 13 Using any of the techniques learned in previous steps. 10 In the Type Properties dialog. You can use the Project Browser to delete a component from the project/template. 8 Expand Annotation Symbols. You may want to load a titleblock applicable to your office and then delete this titleblock. expand Families. 5 Repeat the process for any component type that you want to modify. Use Project Browser to modify families 7 In the Project Browser. 14 Proceed to the next exercise. create. Loading from the library is quickest when you know exactly what families you want to load. 11 To load a titleblock. 6 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library. 138 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . right-click the component. You can use the Project Browser to modify family types. load. or modify any component families or groups as necessary.) 9 Expand the titleblock. Notice that there is a titleblock symbol loaded. Press ESC twice to return to the template. (The titleblock name may vary depending on the template you started with. Notice it has Revit in the upper-right corner. To do so. and click Delete.

Keep in mind that these settings are the default settings for this view type. Detail Level. 3 Specify each value as needed. you create and apply the underlying view templates that control the initial appearance of the views. In this exercise. you create the views required for your template. These settings are applied when you create a new plan view by adding a new level. View Range. 4 If necessary. rename or duplicate the view template. and you noticed that each template had a unique set of predefined views. you save time and increase consistency. and make modifications. In addition. 2 For Name. TIP To select the view template directly from the Project Browser. You can also apply a template to an existing view at any time using the Apply View Template command. expand Views ➤ Structural Plans. At any time. you will first modify view templates. 5 Repeat the steps above for each of the view templates in the Name drop-down list. Modifying Views and View Templates | 139 . By modifying the view templates according to your specific needs. In this exercise. These values represent the starting point for each plan view. Create and modify view templates 1 Click Settings menu ➤ View Templates. 6 Click OK. select the view. you can apply a view template to any view. right-click. and select Apply View Template. select Structural Framing Plan. and then create new views that will automatically use those templates. Discipline. Apply view templates 7 In the Project Browser. you created new projects using different templates. 8 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template.Modifying Views and View Templates At the beginning of this lesson. View templates help standardize the look of all views by providing the initial settings for a view. and double-click Level 1. and the visibility settings of categories and subcategories. The view inherits view properties such as View Scale.

If necessary. this view template will be used to set the initial view properties. You can rename this view. Black levels have no associated views. double-click Building Elevation. 9 Select the Structural Framing Plan template. the view is not linked to the template in any way. and click OK. and select Rename.Applying a view template to a view is a one-time action. expand 3D Views. Notice the level names have blue titles for the associated plan views. right-click {3D}. select Make Plan View. under Structural Plans. To do so. 21 In the Options Bar. and press Ctrl while selecting additional views. You can also duplicate or delete the view. click Level on the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 19 In the Project Browser. 140 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . right-click Level 1. click 26 In the Project Browser. and apply the appropriate template. click Apply. 24 Create additional levels as needed. nor is there a limit to the number of view templates that you can apply. Create 3D views 25 To add 3D views to the template. Make sure you are still in the Level 2 view. This option means that every time a new plan view is created. open the view from the Project Browser. duplicate. Then right-click and select Apply View Template. When the view template is applied the view properties of the target view are instantly reset to match those of the template. you may want to modify the view properties of any new views. review the existing floor plans. click View menu ➤ View Properties. under Structural Plans. 13 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. 27 In the Project Browser. 18 In the Project Browser. or delete them as needed. 22 Add the new level within the elevation view. under Floor Plans. and notice the context menu includes options to rename. Rename. and click OK. if desired. duplicate. 23 Rename and reposition the level as needed. Subsequent modifications to the view template do not affect any current views unless you reapply the view template. under Elevations. or delete this view. The associated floor plan will use the Structural Plan view template to set its initial view properties. on the View toolbar. There is no limit to the number of times you can apply a view template to a view. under 3D Views. 15 If you modified any other view templates. 14 Select the Structural Plan template. 28 Rename the 3D View. 12 In the Project Browser. 17 In the Project Browser. 10 Select Apply automatically to new views of same type. 11 Click Apply. Create and modify views 16 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 2. After the template is applied. review the Structural plans and elevations. 20 To add additional levels to the template. select the view in the Project Browser. TIP To apply the template to multiple views.

35 In the Schedule Properties dialog. You may want to add schedules to a template. This can save time and ensure office standards are maintained. The Steering Wheel is displayed in the drawing area. 34 If you want to add schedules to your template. click Dynamically Modify Views 30 On the View toolbar. assign filters. click . and click OK. click Schedule/Quantities. and modify their properties accordingly. This tool provides freeform navigation for exterior and interior viewing. 31 Click the arrow on the right side of the Dynamic View icon and select Options. modify settings. and click OK. Using this dialog. The view is listed in the Project Browser under Views ➤ 3D Views. make the following modifications as needed: ■ ■ ■ On the Fields tab. on the View toolbar. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. supply a view name. Modifying Views and View Templates | 141 . Create and modify schedules 33 On the View tab of the Design Bar. you can modify the Steering Wheel visibility and appearance. You may want to consider adding the schedules that you use most often. On the Filter tab. click . select the category type. Save the view 32 To save the view. select and order required fields.29 To create additional 3D views.

and columns. right-click the sheet in the Project Browser. You may want to consider adding the settings that you use most often. Modifying Structural Settings You can create custom cutback distances for braces. select the default titleblock. You may want to add symbolic settings to a template. You can still add views to the sheet. modify settings. Subsequent sheets are numbered consecutively based on the previous sheet. and click Rename. select the titleblock and delete it. click View menu ➤ New ➤ Place Titleblock. and click OK. click Sheet. Add sheets to the template 38 On the View tab of the Design Bar. modify settings. Create custom symbolic representations 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Structural Settings. 40 To rename or renumber the sheet. 41 Create new sheets as needed. To do so. You are prompted to select a titleblock. Modifying Structural Settings on page 142. TIP You can drag and drop views directly from the Project Browser onto the sheet. click the Symbolic Representation Settings tab. 37 Repeat the steps above for each schedule type you add to the template. and modify their properties accordingly. 2 In the Structural Settings dialog. beams.■ ■ On the Formatting tab. 36 Click OK. 42 Proceed to the next exercise. double-click the sheet number. If you have already loaded your titleblocks into the template. To later add a titleblock to a sheet. or on the sheet itself. TIP You can add sheets to the template and delete the titleblock. 142 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . select one. After the sheet is created. This can save time and ensure office standards are maintained. and click OK. You can also create custom brace symbols for use in plan views and for parallel line offset distances. On the Appearance tab. 39 Add views to the sheet by selecting Add View from the View tab of the Design Bar.

you modify the export layer settings for DWG/DXF and DGN. each layer in the file is assigned a line weight based on the pen number/line weight settings you created. 6 Proceed to the next exercise. When you import a DWG or DXF file. ■ 5 Click OK. enter the desired values for the following cutback distances: ■ Symbolic brace/beam cutback distance: Sets the distance from the center of the brace/beam to the center of the adjoining beam.3 Under General. ■ 4 Under Brace Symbols. You then set the import line weights for DWG/DXF.txt). Modify export layers for DWG and DXF 1 Click File menu ➤ Import/Export Settings ➤ Export Layers DWG/DXF. and are exported along with your project into the appropriate CAD program. Revit Structure presets the layer names to American Institute of Architects (AIA) industry standards. The layer names are stored in a text file (exportlayers. Modifying Import/Export Settings | 143 .) Parallel line offset: Enter the symbolic distance for the parallel line offset. The layer mapping files reside in the Data folder of the Revit Structure program installation directory. The Export Layers command maps Revit Structure categories and subcategories to specific layer names that are available after exporting to other CAD programs. specify the desired line representation and offset as follows: ■ Plan representation: Select the desired symbolic line type for plan representation (Line or Line with Angle. Symbolic column cutback distance: Sets the distance from the center of the column to the beam endpoint. Modifying Import/Export Settings In this exercise. Modifying Import/Export Settings on page 143.

match the pen (DWG/DXF Color Number) to the appropriate line weight (values from 1 . Set as many pen-line weight mappings as desired. you normally schedule a single category: rooms. and so on. 8 In the dialog. and unlike shared parameters.txt) for MicroStation. Their values may also be aggregated and reported using multi-category schedules. for example. and related multi-category tags and schedules. 10 Proceed to the next exercise. When you create a multi-category schedule. you can define additional parameters that are not included in either the pre-defined instance and type parameters within family components or within the project template. they become the set mappings for the project. therefore. name the file. 144 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . Modify export layers for DGN 4 Click File menu ➤ Import/Export Settings ➤ Export Layers DGN. click Save As. and then are exported along with your project into the appropriate CAD program. you refine the template further by setting up shared parameters. When you import a DWG or DXF file. and click Save. specify the following: ■ ■ Projection Layer Name and Color ID Cut Layer Name and Color ID 3 If you modified the settings in this dialog. 5 For each category. you do not need to worry about where the text file is saved. you could use shared parameters to add specific parameters to an existing family component for scheduling and tagging when those parameters are not initially present by default. they cannot be used to tag objects. Their definitions are stored in an external file ensuring consistency across families and projects. name the file. Multi-Category Tags employ shared parameters to permit tagging of any family component regardless of category. You can import pen numbers from a DWG or DXF file and map them to a Revit Structure line weight. Project parameters are those parameters (either instance or type) that are used within a single project for the purposes of scheduling information specific to that project. Pen Number 1 to Line Weight Number 1. project parameters. They cannot be shared with other projects. and click Save. When scheduling. name the file.16). and so on. These settings are retained within the project template. each layer in the file is assigned a line weight based on the pen number/line weight settings you created. You can add these shared parameters to any family regardless of category. For example. Pen Number 2 to Line Weight Number 2. Modify import line weights 7 Click File menu ➤ Import/Export Settings ➤ Import Line Weights DWG/DXF. windows. The layer mapping files reside in the Data folder of the Revit Structure program installation directory. 9 Click Save As. and click Save. it lists components regardless of category by using an external parameter as a filter. When you save these mappings to a text file. Setting up Shared and Project Parameters on page 144. Setting up Shared and Project Parameters In this exercise. doors. Using shared parameters. click Save As.2 For each category. specify the following: ■ ■ Projection Level Number and Color ID Cut Level Number and Color ID 6 If you modified the settings in this dialog. The layer names are stored in a text file (exportlayersdgn.

and specify the categories to which this parameter applies. 26 Specify whether you want the shared parameter to be an instance or a type parameter. select a group to which you want to add parameters. and specify the Type. and click OK. 16 Under Name. 12 Click OK when you have finished creating shared parameters. you may want to save the file to a network location. 5 Enter the group name. 4 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. enter a parameter name. 28 Add shared project parameters as needed. 7 Under Parameter group. If this template will be used by multiple people within an office. you can begin creating parameter groups. This allows you to name the external parameter file. 11 For each parameter group. and select Shared Parameter. 19 Specify whether the parameter is stored by instance or type. select a parameter value type. 21 Click OK. NOTE This procedure is for creating a new shared parameter file. click New. 20 Select the element categories to which this parameter applies. 18 Under Type. Setting up Shared and Project Parameters | 145 . you can browse to that file and modify it as needed. select Project parameter. 3 Name and save the file. and select a shared parameter. 23 To add a shared project parameter. 2 Click Create. detailed instructions are not supplied because each office has a unique set of needs. click New. 6 Create as many groups as needed. Creating Named Print Settings. and click OK when finished. 14 Click Add. 10 Click OK.In this exercise. you can create a list of parameters. Set up shared parameters 1 Click File menu ➤ Shared Parameters. you can skip this exercise and move on to the last exercise of this lesson. After the file is named. If a file already exists. Create and load multi-category tags 29 Create required multi-category tags in the Family Editor. add required parameters. select a parameter discipline type. 8 Under Parameters. For each parameter group. 25 Click OK. 27 Click OK. If you do not need to make changes to shared or project parameters. 9 Name the parameter. 22 Add project parameters as needed. click Add. 24 Click Select. 15 In the Parameter Properties dialog. under Groups. 17 Under Discipline. Set up project parameters 13 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Parameters.

Notice that the shared parameters created in previous steps are included under Available fields. Creating Named Print Settings on page 146. select the tag. see the tutorial referenced in the introduction of this exercise. 36 When you have completed the schedule. or consult the Help documentation. click OK. By creating named settings within the template. 38 Proceed to the final exercise. Creating Named Print Settings In this exercise. For each printer. 146 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . This can be beneficial if you have numerous printers in a large networked office. Create named print settings 1 Click File menu ➤ Print. 34 Under Name. and click OK. 35 Create the schedule as you did in the previous exercise. you can set options such as sheet sizes. and the percent of actual size. and print. You can also create named settings for printing to a DWF writer. After you have created the multi-category tags within the Family Editor. The tag is now part of the template. you can load them into the template. and add them to your default template file. enter a name for the schedule. click Schedule/Quantities. 37 Create additional multi-category schedules as needed. you create named print settings. 30 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. and click Open. paper placement. select the first printer for which you want to create named settings.For information on creating multi-category tags. 2 Under Name. you need only select a setting. Create multi-category schedules 32 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 33 Select <Multi-Category> for Category. 31 Navigate to the directory that contains the tag you want to load. make minor modifications if necessary.

4 Click Save As. Creating Named Print Settings | 147 . and create additional settings as needed. 8 Click OK when you have finished creating named settings for this printer. click Setup. click New.3 Under Settings. 6 Modify the printer settings. 7 If you want to have multiple settings for this printer. 5 In the New dialog. enter a name for the print setting and click OK.

Your template is complete. The only remaining task is to save it. and click Open. 21 Click the File Locations tab.9 In the Print dialog. If you need to share this file with others. 13 Navigate to the directory where you want to save the template. 10 Repeat these steps as needed. select a different printer. you can use the Transfer Project Standards tool to move standards from one project to another. loaded components. Use the template 16 To use the template. 11 Click OK when finished. Save the template 12 Click File menu ➤ Save. click Setup. 18 Select the template. 22 Next to Default template file. 23 Navigate to the template location. 19 Click OK. TIP You can also create named settings for your DWF writer. In this lesson. you modified settings. and navigate to the location where you saved the template. click Browse. click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. and click Save. Set the template as your default template file 20 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. 24 Click OK. you should save it to a network path. 148 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . and click Open. 14 Under Save as type. 15 Name the template. By investing the time to individualize your template. TIP Another way to create a template is to delete all model geometries from an existing project. and save it as a template file. You can also set this template as your default template. and create new settings for this printer. This can provide a good starting point for a template. The changes you made to the template are now the starting point for this project. select Template Files (*. select it. you help ensure the office standards are maintained and reduce repetitive work that would be done by each employee for each project. In addition. and saved them to a template.rte). 17 Select Browse.

by importing or linking an existing Autodesk architectural project created in AutoCAD. you use these columns to complete the structural framing. NOTE For training purposes. click Training Files.rvt. In the next tutorial Creating a Structural Model on page 161. Importing/Linking a 2D AutoCAD File In this lesson.dwg. select Views (all) ➤ Structural Plans. The imported file is used as a background template for creating the structural elements of the model. you learn how to import or link to files from different drawing programs. you learn how to import or link a 2-dimensional (2D) drawing created in AutoCAD for use as a background. click Training Files. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_1. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. This is the active view that displays in the drawing area. some structural columns were added to the model at off-grid locations in conjunction with architectural columns. 4 In the Import/Link dialog: ■ Select Link and Current view only.Starting a New Project 4 In this tutorial you begin your structural model in Revit Structure 2009. Importing/Linking Drawing Files In this lesson. 2 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. and select Imperial\i_STR_CSM_Level2. 149 . Notice that Level 2 is bold. 3 In the left pane of the Import/Link dialog. 1 In the Project Browser. AutoCAD Architecture. and Revit Architecture.

paste. to pin the drawing so that it cannot be moved within the 150 | Chapter 4 Starting a New Project . copy. and rotate the view as one object. select Black and White. 6 On the Options toolbar. Selecting Link (instead of import) allows you to view. Click Open. click the imported/linked file. For Positioning. and a few basic interior walls and doors display in the view. you cannot select individual elements in the linked model. The file becomes view specific and will behave like an annotation.NOTE Selecting Current View Only prevents the DWG file from appearing in all views. 5 In the drawing area. drag. select Auto . However. Exterior facade outlines. click drawing area. stairs and elevator opening symbols.Center to Center. ■ ■ ■ For Colors.

dwg. The halftone of the imported drawing is used as a background for placing columns. 1 In the Project Browser. Importing /Linking an AutoCAD Architecture File In this lesson. On the File menu. Before exporting the file from AutoCAD Architecture.7 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 10 Click File menu ➤ Close. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_1. In the next tutorial. click Training Files. you learn how to import a 3-dimensional (3D) drawing created in AutoCAD Architecture for use as a background.rvt. and click OK. and select Imperial\i_RST_Import_ADT. ■ Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. You can save the open file if you wish. the file should be prepared as follows: ■ ■ Proxy graphics should be enabled by setting the system variable to 1. you use these columns to complete the structural framing. expand Views (all). Bind all external reference files (xrefs) to make the architectural data visible to the engineer after export. 9 Select Halftone for the value of i_STR_CSM_Level2. 8 In the Visibility/Graphic dialog. some structural columns were added to the model at off-grid locations in conjunction with architectural columns. Notice that Level 2 is bold. NOTE For training purposes. In the Xref Manager dialog. This is the active view that displays in the drawing area. select the Imported Categories tab. and expand Structural Plans. 2 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats 3 In the left pane of the Import/Link dialog.dwg. In the next tutorial. a new training file is supplied. Creating a Structural Model on page 161. select each file and select Insert for Bind Type. Creating a Structural Model on page 161. select Export to AutoCAD. Importing /Linking an AutoCAD Architecture File | 151 . In the left pane of the Open dialog. and select the latest available format. click Training Files.

and a few basic interior walls and doors display in the view. For Positioning. click the Imported Categories tab. 152 | Chapter 4 Starting a New Project . select Auto . 5 In the drawing area. Exterior facade outlines. click the imported/linked file. select Invert. Click Open.4 In the Import/Link dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Colors. stairs. 8 In the Visibility/Graphic dialog. 6 On the Options toolbar. click Revit Structure drawing area.Origin to Origin. and elevator opening symbols. to pin the drawing so that it cannot be moved within the 7 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics.

10 On the View toolbar. and click OK. Click OK.dwg. click Partial Explode. and on the Option Bar. enter -1' 0' for Base Offset. The halftone of the imported drawing is used as a background for placing columns. Under Constraints. 12 On the Options toolbar. 11 In the drawing area. do the following: ■ ■ . click 14 In the Element Properties dialog. Importing /Linking an AutoCAD Architecture File | 153 .9 Select Halftone for the value of i_RST_Import_ADT. 13 Select any column. click the linked file. click .

select Project under Create New. Notice that Level 2 is bold.rvt. Creating a Structural Model on page 161. In the next tutorial. Linking a Revit Architecture File In this exercise. 15 Close the Element Properties dialog. Open a new project 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. select Auto . and click OK. 6 Click Open. for Positioning. 5 In the Add Link dialog. 16 Click File menu ➤ Close. click Training Files. select a template file. columns. Link a Revit Architecture file 3 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ Revit. and floors from the original design and monitor any changes made to those elements. 4 In the left pane of the Import/Link dialog. 2 In the New Project dialog. You also learn how to use the Copy/Monitor feature to provide project coordination between architects and structural engineers.Notice the column adjusts to the change. and open Imperial\i_STR_CSM_Revit.Origin to Origin. a new training file is supplied. You can save the open file if desired. walls. 154 | Chapter 4 Starting a New Project . you learn how to link to a 3-dimensional (3D) drawing created in Revit Architecture for use as a background. This is the active view that displays in the drawing area. You can copy grids. levels.

click the linked file. 11 Click the imported Revit drawing. Linking a Revit Architecture File | 155 . The Design Bar changes to Copy/Monitor mode Set options 12 On the Design Bar. click Options.Exterior facade outlines. 8 In the drawing area. 9 On the Options toolbar. to pin the drawing so that it cannot be moved within the 10 Click Tools menu ➤ Copy/Monitor ➤ Select Link. stairs and elevator opening symbols. This is the keyboard shortcut for Zoom to Fit. and a few basic interior walls and doors display in the view. 7 Enter ZF. click Revit Structure drawing area.

select Level 2. select Split Columns by Levels. Walls. and the New Type for the corresponding element available in the template selected. To select more than one grid. 18 Click the grid to be copied/monitored. A column may span from level 1 to level 10 of a structure and may present a problem when the analytical model is generated. Grids. columns need to be split at each level. 156 | Chapter 4 Starting a New Project . 17 On the Copy/Monitor Design Bar. click Multiple on the Options toolbar. click the Columns tab. Elements available for monitoring are separated into 5 categories (Levels. click Copy. and Floors). under Additional Copy Parameters. On each tab the Original Type column identifies the type for the Revit Architecture file. Also. NOTE Architectural columns typically extend through multiple layers of a model. Each tab provides various parameters that can be set for that specific element. Therefore.The Copy/Monitor Options dialog opens. you can exclude element types you do not want to copy. make selections. Columns. Copy grids 16 In the Project Browser. under Structural Plans. 15 Set the other parameter as desired. When finished. 14 In the Columns dialog. and while pressing CTRL. 13 In the Copy/Monitor Options dialog. click OK to close the Copy/Monitor Options Dialog.

The warning can be ignored. 21 Click the level to be copied/monitored. press CTRL. Copying levels 19 In the Project Browser. click OK. double-click Building Elevation. 20 On the Copy/Monitor Design Bar. click Multiple on the Options toolbar. Linking a Revit Architecture File | 157 . under Elevations (Building Elevation). After you select the grid. To select more than one level. NOTE If you are prompted that the element type already exists in the project.NOTE If you are prompted that the element type already exists in the project. click Copy. click OK. and that the type from the new project will be used. and select each level. an eyeball symbol is displayed to indicate a relationship with the original element. and that the type from the new project will be used. NOTE A warning message may indicate that the loaded type has been renamed.

25 On the Design bar. The warning can be ignored. select Level 1. To select more than one element. and columns 22 In the Project Browser. After selecting each element. click . click Finish Mode. click Multiple on the Options toolbar. an eyeball symbol is displayed to indicate a relationship with the original element. NOTE A warning message may indicate that the loaded type has been renamed. Copy structural walls. press CTRL. NOTE A warning message may indicate that the loaded type has been renamed. and select each element. 24 Click the structural elements to be copied/monitored. an eyeball symbol is displayed to indicate a relationship with the original element. Change the structural usage of the copied elements 26 Select a structural wall to be copied/monitored. click Copy. 23 On the Copy/Monitor Design Bar. click OK.After you select each level. 158 | Chapter 4 Starting a New Project . floors. and on the Options Bar. under Structural Plans. The warning can be ignored. and that the type from the new project will be used. NOTE If you are prompted that the element type already exists in the project.

the structural usage parameter must be changed in the Element Properties dialog. The linked Revit file is displayed. and on the Option Bar. and floors. 31 In the Manage Links dialog. columns. 28 Select a floor to be copied/monitored. NOTE For all copied/monitored structural walls. so that Revit Structure will enable the analytical projection plane feature for those elements. The link will not follow the host if it becomes linked into another file. click the Revit tab. Manage links 30 Click File menu ➤ Manage Links. 29 In the Element Properties dialog. click . click Reference Type. Select Attachment to make a link visible when its host document is linked into another file. and click OK. and click OK. check the value for Structural. 32 In the Manage Links dialog. ■ Select Overlay. ■ Linking a Revit Architecture File | 159 . Click OK. select Bearing for Structural Usage. Links will appear in the file they are linked into.27 In the Element Properties dialog.

In the next tutorial. 160 | Chapter 4 Starting a New Project . NOTE All copied elements are monitored for possible changes.33 Click File menu ➤ Close. You can save the open file if you wish. In a later tutorial. Project Coordination on page 461. The coordination monitor function provides notification that updates have occurred. the updated Revit Architecture file is reloaded into Revit Structure. 34 Proceed to the next tutorial. Creating a Structural Model on page 161. a new training file is supplied.

and then copy this framing to other levels. you begin by adding columns from Ground Level to Level 2. Creating a Structural Model In this lesson. You also learn how to splice the columns. you create a structural model using the tools available in Revit Structure 2009. After you copy columns. you add horizontal framing to an area of Level 2. You copy columns and use the paste-align command to add structure to other levels. 161 .Creating a Structural Model 5 In this chapter.

rvt. 4 Select the left vertical grid line. which you use as a background drawing for placing columns. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and draw a zoom box around the upper-left corner of the 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 5 Click the value in the grid head. click Training Files. 162 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . click structural model. and enter A. click . the imported drawing is a halftone. Notice the grid line is highlighted with a blue value within the grid head. 3 On the Options Bar.Adding Grid Lines to the Imported Drawing In this exercise. . 1 On the View toolbar. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_Grids. click Grid. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.

Adding Grid Lines to the Imported Drawing | 163 . click structural model. Notice it is grid L. they are labelled in alphabetical sequence. Notice it is labeled B.As you select subsequent grid lines. 6 Select the next vertical grid line to the right of grid line A. Zoom in and out as needed. change the value to J. 7 Select the remaining vertical grid lines moving from left to right. 9 On the View toolbar. 8 When you get to grid I. The last vertical grid is K. . and draw a zoom region around the upper-right corner of the 10 Select the upper horizontal grid line.

16 On the View toolbar. and draw a zoom box around the atrium. 14 On the Design Bar. click . Notice that the sequencing has adjusted from alphabetical to numeric.11 Click the blue value within the grid line L head. 13 Select the remaining 3 horizontal grids. click . The bottom grid should be grid 5. 164 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . and enter 1 for the new value. 19 Click the column to select the arc start point. click Grid. 18 On the Options Bar. Draw a grid using the arc tool 15 Enter ZF (keyboard shortcut for Zoom to Fit). 12 Select the next grid line below grid 1. 17 On the Design Bar. click Modify.

20 Click the column to select the arc endpoint. Adding Grid Lines to the Imported Drawing | 165 . 21 Click the column to set the arc radius.

Extend grid 23 Drag the arc start point approximately as shown. 166 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model .22 On the Design Bar. and select the grid. click Modify. 24 Drag the arc endpoint approximately as shown.

and save the exercise file with a unique name. click Training Files. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_Add_Columns. These columns extend from an elevation to a splice elevation just above Level 2. Adding Structural Columns | 167 .rvt. Adding Structural Columns on page 167. In the left pane of the Open dialog. The next exercise uses a new training file. Adding Structural Columns In this exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click File menu ➤ Save As. or close the exercise file without saving changes. 26 Proceed to the next exercise. you load a new column type from the Revit Structure Library and add columns at each grid intersection.25 Click File menu ➤ Close. Place columns at grid intersections 1 Enter ZF. To save changes.

NOTE If the Modelling tab of the Design Bar does not display. click Finish. 6 On the Options Bar. 3 In the Type Selector. 168 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model .Level 2 plan view 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. and click Modelling. Revit Structure places the tops of the columns at the current level and the bases of the columns at the level below. right-click in the Design Bar. 4 In the Options Bar. click Structural Column. click . select W-Wide Flange-Column: W10x33. NOTE When you use the Grid Intersection tool to place columns. 5 Select the entire grid by drawing a pick box around it.

click Modify. In addition. and press DELETE. Notice that columns are placed at each grid intersection. click Level. H1. Level 4 should be 10' 0" above Level 3 with an elevation of 30' 0". A new structural plan view by the same name is also created and listed within the Project Browser. K4 A5. 14 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and click Select All Instances. 19 Adjust the zoom settings so you can select the grid control below the grid head. Create new levels 13 In the Project Browser. Under Constraints. K5 K3. which are outside of the structure footprint. click Modify. Adding Structural Columns | 169 . K1 G2. and double-click South Elevation. and then specify the endpoint aligned with the existing level heads on the right side. 10 On the Options Bar. 15 On the left side of the elevation. 8 Select the columns listed below. 12 On the Design Bar. C5 Specify base and top of column elevations 9 Right-click the column located at C2. specify a start point for the third level at a distance of 10' 0" above Level 2. J1. Adjust location of the grid 18 Select grid head A. TIP You may have to zoom into the grid intersection to right-click one of the columns. Notice the new level is named Level 3. click ■ ■ ■ . enter 2' 0" for Top Offset. H2. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ G1. H5. you can adjust the height by clicking the temporary dimension and modifying the level elevation. Click OK. NOTE If necessary.7 Press ESC. there are a few extraneous columns on grid line intersections that are exterior to the structure. J2. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). 11 In the Element Properties dialog: Under Constraints. Level 3 should be 10' 0" above Level 2. J5. 17 On the Design Bar. K2 G5. B5. 16 Use the same method to create Level 4. enter 2' 0" for Base Offset.

double-click Level 2. and click OK. or close the exercise file without saving changes. 23 On the Options Bar. select Structural Columns. click . All of the structural columns in the model remain selected. click Check None. 25 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard.20 Drag the grid control above Level 4 as shown. 26 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. double-click South Elevation. 28 On the Design Bar. under Structural Plans. 170 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . click Modify. 29 In the Project Browser. To save changes. 27 In the Select Levels dialog. Spliced columns display from Ground Level to Level 4 30 Click File menu ➤ Close. 22 Draw a pick box around the entire structural model. Adding Horizontal Framing on page 171. TIP Press and hold CTRL when making multiple selections. under Elevations (Building Elevation). select Level 3 and Level 4. The next exercise uses a new training file. Copy the columns to new levels 21 In the Project Browser. 31 Proceed to the next exercise. 24 In the Filter dialog. click File menu ➤ Save As. and save the exercise file with a unique name. and click OK.

Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 8 On the Design Bar. click Modify. click Finish. and draw a zoom box around the east area of the structure. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Adding Horizontal Framing | 171 . Specify beam type 1 In the Project Browser. 5 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Specify Level 2 for Plane. Add girders 4 On the View toolbar. 7 On the Options Bar. 6 Select grid lines H and J. click Beam. Click Grid. select W-Wide Flange: W18x40. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_Add_Framing. double-click Level 2. under Structural Plans. click Training Files. TIP Place the cursor over a grid to display the grid name in a tooltip.Adding Horizontal Framing In this exercise. you frame 4 bays of Level 2 by adding horizontal members and a steel deck. 3 In the Type Selector. Specify Girder for Usage.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click .

expand 3D Views. select Level 3 and Level 4. 16 In the Element Properties dialog: Under Constraints. and double-click East Section . 172 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model .9 On grids H and J. 19 In the Select Levels dialog. NOTE In the following image. 15 On the Options Bar. 21 In the Project Browser. Specify Girder for Usage. 11 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Specify Level 2 for Plane. 18 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. enter -0' 7". for z-Direction Justification. and draw a girder from column to column. click ■ ■ ■ . 10 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Click OK. click Modify. framing tag visibility was turned off and the beam visibility increased for training purposes. Under Constraints. select Other. click Beam. Copy the girders to levels above 17 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. for z-Direction Offset Value. delete the 2 small beam sections between grid lines 4 and 5.Perspective. 20 Click OK. 12 Select a column center. framing the bays with girders. 13 On the Design Bar. Set top of steel 14 Right-click the girder between H3 and J3. and click Select All Instances.

Adding Beam Systems In this exercise. 4 On the Options Bar. Notice the copied beams on Levels 3 and 4. 5 On the Design Bar. you add beam systems to Level 2. 7 Click OK. 2 Zoom in on the east side of the structure where you previously added the beams. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Sketch. enter 6' 0". select Center. 6 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Constraints. click Structural Beam System Properties. click Training Files. For Spacing.NOTE If necessary. under Structural Plans.rvt. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_Add_Beam_System. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Under Pattern. To save changes. enter -0' 7" for Elevation. For Justification. Adding Beam Systems | 173 . select Fixed Distance for Layout Rule. Adding Beam Systems on page 173. or close the exercise file without saving changes. The next exercise uses a new training file. 23 Proceed to the next exercise. 22 Click File menu ➤ Close. Sketch the beam system 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Beam System. For Beam Type. and save the exercise file with a unique name. you can select the section crop view and drag its borders to adjust the extents of the view. double-click Level 2. select W-Wide Flange: W14x22. click File menu ➤ Save As.

10 On the Design Bar. The longitudinal axis of the beam system members will be placed parallel to these lines. NOTE The 2 short lines adjacent to the H3-J3 girder represent the beam system direction. Then select the 3 girders that surround the upper-left bay. In the next step you edit the beam direction. 174 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . 9 Select the girder between H3 and J3. click Pick Supports. click Beam Direction. 11 Select the vertical girder between J2 and J3.8 On the Design Bar.

Adding Beam Systems | 175 . click Finish Sketch.12 On the Design Bar. the framing tag visibility has been turned off for training purposes. NOTE In the image above and all subsequent images.

15 On the Design Bar. 176 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . enter -0' 7" for Elevation.13 Use the same method to sketch a beam system for the bay to the right using the following beam system property values in the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Constraints. Under Pattern. select Fixed Number for Layout Rule. For Beam Type. click Finish Sketch. For Number of Lines. 14 When specifying the beam direction. specify 2. select the girder between J2 and J3. select W-Wide Flange: W14x22.

20 In the Element Properties dialog: Under Constraints. select Fixed Number for Layout Rule. 17 Zoom in on the east side of the structure where you previously added the beams. 23 Select the top girder in the lower-right bay. For Number of Lines. click Beam System. For Beam Type. Click OK. double-click Level 2. 21 Select the top girder in the lower-left bay. 18 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Under Pattern. under Structural Plans. 19 On the Options Bar. Adding Beam Systems | 177 . enter -0' 7" for Elevation. 22 Click to place the beam system.Automatically create a beam system 16 In the Project Browser. select W-Wide Flange: W14x22. click ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ . specify 3.

Copy the beam systems to levels above 26 Hold the cursor over grid line H of the lower-left beam system. 178 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model .24 Click to place the beam system. click Modify. NOTE A beam system displays with dashed lines. Be sure that you have selected a beam system (not just a beam) when copying elements to other levels. 25 On the Design Bar. and press TAB until the beam system highlights. You will need to cycle through some of the elements in your model by pressing TAB as explained above.

under 3D Views. 33 Click File menu ➤ Close. Adding a Composite Deck on page 180. 31 Click OK. and click Select All Instances. double-click East Sections . and save the exercise file with a unique name. 29 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. The next exercise uses a new training file.Perspective. To save changes. 32 In the Project Browser. or close the exercise file without saving changes. select Level 3 and Level 4. 34 Proceed to the next exercise. 30 In the Select Levels dialog. Adding Beam Systems | 179 . Notice the copied beam systems.Beam system displays with dashed lines 27 Right-click on the beam system. 28 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. click File menu ➤ Save As.

7 Sketch lines along the structure perimeter using the interior-most model lines of the glazing as snap points. you add a composite deck to Level 2. click Lines. Add composite deck 1 In the Project Browser. 8 On the Design Bar. under Structural Plans. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and then sketch along the girders. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_Add_Deck. click Slab. enter -0' 2" for Height Offset from Level. click Finish Sketch. 4 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ For Type. In the left pane of the Open dialog. select 3" LW Concrete on 2" Metal Deck. click Training Files. double-click Level 2. Under Constraints. 5 Click OK.Adding a Composite Deck In this exercise. 3 On the Design Bar. 180 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . 6 On the Design Bar. click Floor Properties.rvt.

15 Click File menu ➤ Close. 13 On the Design Bar. 11 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name.Perspective. 14 In the Project Browser. Copy the slab to other levels 9 Select the slab. click Modify. The filled half-arrows of this symbol represent the span of the deck. 10 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. 12 In the dialog. under 3D Views. double-click East Section . select Level 3 and Level 4.Revit Structure provides a deck span direction symbol when the deck is placed. Adding a Composite Deck | 181 . and click OK.

and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_Add_Bracing. The next exercise uses a new training file. you add vertical bracing to a bay. click File menu ➤ Save As.To save changes. double-click Level 2. 7 Add a brace from Level 2 to Level 3: ■ Enter SE (keyboard shortcut for snap to endpoint). under Structural Plans. Adding Bracing on page 182. or close the exercise file without saving changes. Create the framing elevation 1 In the Project Browser. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 6 In the Type Selector. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. click Framing Elevation. Adding Bracing In this exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Brace. 4 In the Project Browser. 182 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . select L-Angle: L8x6x5/8. and then click the left endpoint of the Level 2 beam for the start point. In the left pane of the Open dialog. under Elevations (Interior Elevations). 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar.rvt. Use the Status Bar to see the snap point. and when it highlights. click to place the framing elevation symbol in the direction shown. double-click Elevation 1-a. click Training Files. 3 Move the cursor on or near the grid line between 4H and 4J. 5 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.

8 Use the same method for the opposite brace. 9 Repeat these steps to add bracing from Level 3 to Level 4.■ Enter SM (keyboard shortcut for snap to midpoint). Adding Bracing | 183 . NOTE If necessary. and then click the midpoint of the beam at Level 3 for the endpoint. you can select the section crop view and adjust the left/right extents to see the columns on grids H and J.

11 Click File menu ➤ Close. To save changes. click File menu ➤ Save As. or close the exercise file without saving changes.10 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. under 3D Views. double-click Level 2. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. double-click East Section . and save the exercise file with a unique name.Perspective. click Training Files. Add shear walls 1 In the Project Browser. The next exercise uses a new training file. you create shear walls that surround one of the stairwells. Adding Shear Walls on page 184. 184 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_Add_Shear_Walls.rvt. under Structural Plans. Adding Shear Walls In this exercise. Notice the braces in the back/right of the structural model. 12 Proceed to the next exercise. 2 Zoom in on the east stair in grid location F3-G4.

tracing over the centerline of the walls in the imported drawing file. 4 In the Type Selector. 5 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Select Chain. For Depth. click Structural Wall. you can select a wall and use the arrow keys on your keyboard to nudge the wall to a particular location.10" Concrete. select Basic Wall: Exterior . Adding Shear Walls | 185 . 6 Sketch 4 walls. TIP After sketching the walls. specify Ground Level.3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.

click . you can use the TAB key to highlight the entire wall chain and select it with one click. 186 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . double-click Level 2.rvt. click File menu ➤ Save As. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 12 Proceed to the next exercise. and click OK. 2 On the View toolbar. Adding Isolated Foundations In this exercise. Place isolated foundations 1 In the Project Browser. 4 On the Options Bar. click . The next exercise uses a new training file. and draw a zoom box around the east area of the structure. 3 Draw a pick box around all structural elements. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 9 On the Options Bar.7 Press ESC twice to finish placing walls. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. you add isolated foundations to column locations. click . In the left pane of the Open dialog. or close the exercise file without saving changes. To save changes. under Structural Plans. TIP During selection. specify Up to level: Level 4 for Top Constraint. 11 Click File menu ➤ Close. under Constraints. 8 Select all 4 walls. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_Add_Foundation. click Training Files. Adding Isolated Foundations on page 186.

Click OK. click Modify.5 In the Filter dialog. select Ground Level for Bottom Vertical Projection. Click OK. Adding Isolated Foundations | 187 . In your training file. the footing is placed at Ground Level. click the midpoints of the columns where you have added horizontal framing to place an isolated footing at each location. 12 On the Design Bar. 6 On the Options Bar. 8 In the Project Browser. under Structural Plans. select Level 2 for Top Vertical Projection. Under Analytical Model. 11 In the drawing area. the imported DWG file does not display in this view. click Foundation ➤ Isolated. 10 In the Type Selector. Select Structural Columns. the curtain wall visibility was altered for training purposes. NOTE In the following image. . By default. 9 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click ■ ■ ■ ■ 7 In the Element Properties dialog: Under Constraints. double-click Ground Level. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Click Check None. Under Analytical Model. select Footing-Rectangular: 72"x48"x18". enter 0' 0" for Base Offset.

Add girders using the grid tool 1 In the Project Browser. Completing the Structural Model on page 188. select W-Wide Flange: W18x40. The next exercise uses a new training file. under Structural Plans.13 In the Project Browser. Completing the Steel Framing of Level 2 In this exercise.Perspective. click File menu ➤ Save As. 188 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . click Training Files. 15 Proceed to the next exercise. In the exercises that follow. and concrete wall framing. 14 Click File menu ➤ Close. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. and save the exercise file with a unique name. you complete the structural model. as well as cantilevers and outriggers. Completing the Structural Model In previous lessons. 4 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Specify Level 2 for Plane. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_2. double-click East Section . bracing. foundation. In the left pane of the Open dialog. under 3D Views. or close the exercise file without saving changes. To save changes. Specify Girder for Usage.rvt. adding horizontal framing. Click Grid. click Beam. you have added columns and horizontal framing to your model. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. openings. you complete the horizontal framing of Level 2 by adding girders and beam systems. double-click Level 2. 3 In the Type Selector.

NOTE Although you previously added girders to the structural model. click model. TIP You can also press CTRL and select all grid lines manually. click Finish. 7 On the Design Bar. . click Modify. 10 Add girders between the perimeter columns that were not captured by the Grid tool. 5 Draw a pick box around all the grids. and draw a zoom box around the upper-left corner of the 9 Using the framing skills you have learned in previous exercises. zooming in and out as needed: ■ Above grid line 1 between B and E. using the Grid tool does not duplicate girders at these locations. complete the framing of this bay. 6 On the Options Bar. Manually add additional beams 8 On the View toolbar. Completing the Steel Framing of Level 2 | 189 . ■ Around the perimeter of the rotunda. Use the W-Wide Flange: W18x40 beam type for the 5 new beams. Add beam chains to the following locations.

■ Between the column below the midpoint of H2-H3 and the corner of the stairwell shear walls. ■ Between the lower-left corner between A4 and D5. 190 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . ■ Between the column just above K4 and over to F5.

select Other. 19 In the bay adjacent to the upper-left stairwell. Select W-Wide Flange: W14x22 for Beam Type. Click OK. 15 In the Element Properties dialog: Under Constraints. click ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ . Completing the Steel Framing of Level 2 | 191 . and draw a zoom box around the bay in the upper-left corner 12 Select the girder between A2 and B2. 18 In the Element Properties dialog: Under Constraints. and click Select All Instances. enter 3. enter -0' 7" for Elevation. Under Constraints. 20 Click to place the beam system.Specify the top of steel 11 On the View toolbar. click Beam System. for z-Direction Offset Value. click ■ ■ ■ . . enter -0' 7". 13 Right-click. 14 On the Options Bar. 17 On the Options Bar. Click OK. Under Pattern. For Number of Lines. select Fixed Number for Layout Rule. select the top girder. for z-Direction Justification. click of the model. Add a beam system to the bay 16 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.

trace the outline of the bay. Under Pattern. enter 3. Click OK. 25 Using the sketch tool. 192 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . Select W-Wide Flange: W14x22 for Beam Type. enter -0' 7" for Elevation. 22 On the Options Bar. 23 In the Element Properties dialog: Under Constraints. 26 On the Sketch Design Bar. select Fixed Number for Layout Rule. click ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ . For Number of Lines.Sketch a beam system 21 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 24 On the Options Bar. click Beam System. click Finish Sketch. click Sketch.

28 Click File menu ➤ Close. ignore it.27 Select the beam that spans the middle of the stairwell and delete it. If a warning appears indicating that pinned objects were deleted. Completing the Steel Framing of Level 2 | 193 .

under Structural Plans. beam systems have been added to all bays. 29 Proceed to the next exercise. Adding Cantilevered Beams on page 194. Rather than having you add beam systems to the dozens of bays within this model. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_3.NOTE You can save the open file if you wish. In addition. Lastly. Adding Cantilevered Beams In this exercise. and draw a zoom box around the upper-left corner of the 194 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . In the left pane of the Open dialog. The visibility of structural framing tags has been turned off in the Level 2 plan view. you add cantilevered members and outriggers to Level 2.rvt. a new training file is provided in the next exercise with the beam systems added as shown. In this new training file. click model. the base offset of the structural columns on the lower level has been set to zero so they will attach to the footings. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. the structural framing on Levels 3 and 4 (that you built in the first lesson of this tutorial) has been deleted for training purposes. click Training Files. double-click Level 2. . Add cantilevered members and outriggers 1 In the Project Browser. 2 On the View toolbar.

for z-Direction Offset Value. 7 Move the cursor to the left and select a perpendicular point on the inside face of the exterior glazing as the endpoint. select Other. for z-Direction Justification.3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click ■ ■ ■ . Click OK. Under Constraints. Adding Cantilevered Beams | 195 . enter -0' 7". click Beam. 4 On the Options Bar. Add cantilevers at columns 6 Select column A1 as the beam start point. 5 In the Element Properties dialog: Under Constraints.

select W-Wide Flange: W18x40. 14 Click File menu ➤ Close. Add an outrigger 9 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Adding a Concrete Slab with Metal Deck In this exercise. Adding a Concrete Slab with Metal Deck on page 196. 11 Select the left endpoint of the cantilever at A1 as start point of the outrigger. 15 Proceed to the next exercise. you add a concrete slab with a metal deck to the model. The next exercise uses a new training file. To save changes. Training File ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.8 Using the same method. or close the exercise file without saving changes. 10 In the Type Selector. and save the exercise file with a unique name. click Beam. 12 Select the left endpoint of the adjacent cantilever at A2 as the endpoint of the outrigger. add a cantilever beginning at column A2. Add intermediate cantilevers 13 Sketch intermediate beams between the outrigger and the beam between A1 and A2. click File menu ➤ Save As. 196 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model .

and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_4. The pre-existing columns were paste-aligned to the roof level. Adding a Concrete Slab with Metal Deck | 197 . Add concrete slab with metal deck 1 In the Project Browser. In addition. select 3" LW Concrete on 2" Metal Deck. under Structural Plans. straight. 3 On the Design Bar. click Lines. Garage Level-1. sketched. 6. click Slab. the following new levels were added: 5. and arced. you can use a combination of lines including. picked. click Floor Properties.rvt. and Foundation. 4 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Floor Type. In this training file. 6 Sketch lines along the structure perimeter using the interior lines of the glazing as snap points. additional cantilever beams and outriggers were added to the model. Use Trim/Extend to clean up line intersections and close gaps. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Click OK. click Training Files. 5 On the Design Bar. enter -0' 2". 7. double-click Level 2. For Height Offset from Level. When sketching this deck. Roof.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog.

TIP To sketch lines along the lower arced wall. The next exercise uses a new training file. or close the exercise file without saving changes. click . and save the exercise file with a unique name. To save changes. 8 On the View toolbar. 198 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . 9 Enter SD (keyboard shortcut for Shading with Edges). click File menu ➤ Save As. 7 Click Finish Sketch. and sketch a chain of continuous line segments. select Chain on the Options Bar. 10 Click File menu ➤ Close.

11 Proceed to the next exercise, Adding Shafts on page 199.

Adding Shafts
In this exercise, you add 2 shaft openings on Level 2. Training File
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_Adding_Shafts.rvt.

Add first stairway shaft opening 1 In the Project Browser, under Structural Plans, double-click Level 2. NOTE Make sure this view is using the Wireframe model graphics display style. If it is not, use the View Control Bar to make the change. 2 Enter WF (keyboard shortcut for Wireframe). 3 Zoom around the stairway in grid location F3-G4. 4 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Opening ➤ Shaft Opening. 5 On the Design Bar, click Pick Walls. 6 Select the 4 walls surrounding the stairwell.

7 On the Design Bar, click Properties. 8 In the Element Properties dialog, under Constraints, do the following:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Top Constraint, select Up to level: Roof. For Base Constraint, select Foundation. For Top Offset, enter -1' 0". For Base Offset, enter -1' 0". Click OK.

Adding Shafts | 199

These settings ensure that the shaft extends through the structure without penetrating the roof or the foundation. 9 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch. Add second stairway shaft opening 10 Zoom around the stairway in grid location A1-B2. 11 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Opening ➤ Shaft Opening. 12 On the Design Bar, click Lines. 13 Sketch the opening surrounding the stairwell.

TIP When sketching the shaft, use the Lines tool in combination with the Pick option and select the external face of the walls imported with the DWG file. Use the Trim tool to clean up gaps and intersections. 14 On the Design Bar, click Properties. 15 In the Element Properties dialog, under Constraints, do the following:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Top Constraint, select Up to level: Roof. For Base Constraint, select Foundation. For Top Offset, enter 1' 0". For Base Offset, enter 1' 0". Click OK.

16 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch. 17 On the View toolbar, click .

200 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model

18 Click File menu ➤ Close. To save changes, click File menu ➤ Save As, and save the exercise file with a unique name, or close the exercise file without saving changes. The next exercise uses a new training file. 19 Proceed to the next exercise, Duplicating Framing on page 201.

Duplicating Framing
In this exercise, you copy Level 2 framing to other levels. Training File
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_Duplicate_Framing.rvt.

Copy Level 2 framing and deck 1 In the Project Browser, under Structural Plans, double-click Level 2. 2 Enter ZF, and draw a pick box around the entire model. 3 On the Options Bar, click .

4 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Structural Framing (Girder, Joist, and Other), Structural Beam Systems, and Floors, and then click OK. 5 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. 6 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. 7 In the Select Levels dialog, select Level 3, Level 4, and Level 5, and then click OK.

Duplicating Framing | 201

8 On the View toolbar, click
Copied levels with stair openings

.

Modify roof and framing 9 In the Project Browser, under Structural Plans, double-click Level 5. 10 Select the floor. 11 On the Options Bar, click Edit. 12 Delete the atrium arc, and use the Trim tool to close the gap.

NOTE In the image shown above, the weight of the sketch lines was increased for training purposes.

202 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model

13 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch. 14 On the View toolbar, click 15 Select all framing and columns. NOTE Press and hold CTRL as you make multiple selections. , and draw a zoom box around the former atrium area.

16 Press DELETE. Ignore the warning that pinned objects were deleted. Add cantilever beams and outriggers 17 Zoom in on the former atrium area.

18 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Beam. 19 On the Type Selector, select W-Wide Flange: W18x40. 20 On the Options Bar, specify Girder for Usage. 21 On the Options Bar, click .

Duplicating Framing | 203

22 In the Element Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■

Under Constraints, for z-Direction Justification, select Other. Under Constraints, for z-Direction Offset Value, enter -0' 7". Click OK.

23 Add cantilever beams and outriggers to complete the new corner.

Extend the shaft to roof level 24 In the Project Browser, under Structural Plans, double-click Level 2. 25 Zoom around the stairway in grid location F3-G4. 26 Select the 4 walls surrounding the stairwell.

27 On the Options Bar, click
■ ■

.

28 In the Element Properties dialog, under Constraints, do the following: For Top Constraint, select Up to level: Roof. Click OK.

Copy roof framing and slab to Level 6 and 7 29 In the Project Browser, under Structural Plans, double-click Level 5. 30 Zoom out until you can see the entire model within the drawing area. 31 Draw a pick box around the entire model. 32 On the Options Bar, click .

204 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model

33 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Structural Framing (Girder, Joist, and Other), Structural Beam Systems, and Floors, and then click OK. 34 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. 35 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. 36 In the Select Levels dialog, select Level 6, and Level 7, and click OK. 37 On the View toolbar, click .

Notice the atrium columns on Levels 5 through 7 need to be deleted. This is done for you in the next training file. 38 Click File menu ➤ Close. To save changes, click File menu ➤ Save As, and save the exercise file with a unique name, or close the exercise file without saving changes. The next exercise uses a new training file. 39 Proceed to the next exercise, Adding a Shape-Modified Slab on page 205.

Adding a Shape-Modified Slab
In this new training file, beam systems have been added to the roof level to support a new shape-modified slab, and the footings added at the beginning of the tutorial have been deleted. In this exercise, you add a shape-modified slab to the new roof framing, and create a custom roof type with tapered insulation. In this exercise, you create a shape-modified slab above Level 7. Training File
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_5.rvt.

Adding a Shape-Modified Slab | 205

Open the roof framing section view 1 In the Project Browser, under Structural Plans, double-click Roof. 2 Double-click the section bubble located near grid line D to open the section view of the roof.

Notice the structural framing is sloped to provide for roof drainage. Create new roof type 3 In the Project Browser, under Structural Plans, double-click Roof. 4 On the View toolbar, click , and draw a zoom box around the upper roof framing.

206 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model

5 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Slab. 6 On the Design Bar, click Floor Properties. 7 In the Element Properties dialog, for Type, select 1 1/2" Metal Roof Deck - Tapered Insulation, and click Edit/New. 8 In the Type Properties dialog, click Duplicate. 9 In the Name dialog, enter 1 1/2" Metal Roof Deck - 4" Rigid Insulation, and click OK. 10 In the Type Properties dialog, under Construction, for Structure, click Edit. 11 In the Edit Assembly dialog, for Layer 2, clear Variable, and click OK twice. 12 In the Element Properties dialog, under Constraints, for Height Offset From Level, enter 3' 5 1/2", and click OK. Trace the outline of the roof

13 On the View toolbar, click structure. 14 On the Design Bar, click Lines. 15 On the Options Bar, click

, and draw a zoom box around the upper-left corner of the

, and enter 5" for Offset.

16 Click the beam on the upper-left corner of the structure so the offset is placed on the outside of the beam.

17 Enter ZF. 18 Using the same method, click additional lines that outline the roof.

Adding a Shape-Modified Slab | 207

19 On the Toolbar, click

(Trim).

20 With the Trim/Extend tool selected, click one of the sketched lines, and then click each additional line to complete the roof outline.

Each line will be extended and trimmed as it is selected. 21 On the Design bar, click Finish Sketch.

208 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model

22 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click 3D - Atrium.

Edit the slab 23 In the Project Browser, under Structural Plans, double-click Roof. 24 Select the slab, and on the Options Bar, click Edit. 25 On the Design Bar, click Pick Supports. 26 Select specific supports.

27 On the Toolbar, click

.

Adding a Shape-Modified Slab | 209

28 With the Trim/Extend tool selected, click one of the sketched lines, and then click each additional line to complete the outline of the shape-modified slab.

Each line will be extended and trimmed as it is selected. 29 On the Design bar, click Finish Sketch. 30 Double-click the section bubble located near grid line D to open the section view of the roof.

Notice the opening in the shape-modified slab. 31 On the View toolbar, click section view. , and draw a zoom box around the upper-left corner of the

Notice the slab is not sloped towards the opening in the center of the slab. Pick supports for modifying the slope of the roof slab 32 In the Project Browser, under Structural Plans, double-click Roof. 33 Select the slab, and on the Options Bar, click (Modify Sub-Elements).

210 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model

The corner points of the slab are highlighted.

34 On the Options Bar, click

(Pick Supports).

35 Click each of the 6 roof supports shown below in the order indicated.

NOTE The Pick Supports tool will create an elevation control point at the end of each of the 6 selected support location lines. 36 On the Design bar, click Modify. 37 Double-click the section bubble located near grid line D to open the section view of the roof. 38 On the View toolbar, click , and draw a zoom box around the center of the section view.

Adding a Shape-Modified Slab | 211

Notice the roof deck is now resting on the roof supports. 39 In the Project Browser, under Structural Plans, double-click Roof. 40 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Slab. 41 On the Design Bar, click Floor Properties. 42 In the Element Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■

For type, select 1 1/2" Metal Roof Deck - Tapered Insul Under Constraints, for Height Offset From Level, enter 2' 9 1/2". Click OK.

43 On the Design Bar, click Pick Supports. 44 Select specific supports.

45 On the Toolbar, click

.

46 With the Trim/Extend tool selected, click each line to complete the outline of the shape-modified slab.

212 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model

Each line will be extended and trimmed as it is selected.

47 On the Design bar, click Finish Sketch. 48 Double-click the section bubble located near grid line D to open the section view of the roof. 49 On the View toolbar, click , and draw a zoom box around the center of the section view.

Notice the flat portion of the roof is now covered by the slab. Draw split line to slope the variable layer 50 In the Project Browser, under Structural Plans, double-click Roof. 51 On the View toolbar, click , and draw a zoom box around the center of the roof.

52 Select the roof (that was just created) as shown.

Adding a Shape-Modified Slab | 213

Press TAB to make sure the interior roof boundary is selected. 53 On the Options Bar, click (Draw Split Lines).

The corner points of the opening are displayed.

54 Sketch a split line.

55 Press ESC. 56 Select the split line that was just created. 57 On the Options Bar, enter 5" for Elevation. 58 Press ENTER.

214 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model

click . click Modify. and draw a zoom box around the center of the section view. click Modify. 64 Select the existing flat roof to the left of the tapered roof. 61 Double-click the section bubble located near grid line D to open the section view of the roof. 65 Select the tapered roof. Join the geometry of the roof types 63 On the Toolbar. 62 On the View toolbar. click (Join Geometry). Notice the tapered insulation tapers away from the split line support. Adding a Shape-Modified Slab | 215 . and on the Design Bar.59 On the Design Bar. 60 Enter ZF.

216 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model .Atrium. double-click Level 5. under 3D Views. The next exercise uses a new training file. using the slab shape edit tools.rvt. or close the exercise file without saving changes. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_Curved_Slab. In the left pane of the Open dialog. To save changes. and draw a zoom box around the atrium roof framing. click . Adding a Shape-Modified Curved Slab on page 216. and save the exercise file with a unique name. Open the plan view 1 In the Project Browser. Adding a Shape-Modified Curved Slab In this exercise. 67 Click File menu ➤ Close. double-click 3D . you add a shape-modified slab to the curved roof of the atrium. 68 Proceed to the next exercise. 2 On the View toolbar. under Structural Plans. click File menu ➤ Save As.66 In the Project Browser. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Training Files.

Notice that the shape edit tools display on the Options Bar. 4 On the Options Bar. 6 Click the center point of the slab arc. The edge of the curved slab highlights. Sketch split lines 5 On the Options Bar. click (Modify Sub-Elements). and is available for modification.3 Select the atrium curved slab. click (Draw Split Lines). Adding a Shape-Modified Curved Slab | 217 .

218 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . Place a single drainage point 8 On the Options Bar. 9 Click to place a drainage point approximately along the split line.7 Sketch a single split line to approximately the edge of the slab. click (Add New Points).

12 Select the curved slab. and press DELETE. 14 Select the split lines. Notice that the shape edit points display. Adding a Shape-Modified Curved Slab | 219 .Place additional points 10 Click to place six additional points approximately along the edge of the slab. Delete split lines 13 On the Options Bar. click . click Modify. 11 On the Design Bar.

17 On the View toolbar. Notice that the edges of the curved slab display. double-click 3D .Atrium. and enter -0’ 6”. under 3D Views. 220 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . and draw a zoom box around the atrium roof. View the atrium slab in 3D 16 In the Project Browser. click . The general shape of the curved slab displays.Set drainage point elevation 15 Click the drainage point elevation dimension.

click Project to side. . double-click Section 3. Set the curved edge condition 20 In the Project Browser. under Sections (Building Sections). and draw a zoom box around the upper-right corner of the Notice that the tapered insulation layer of the curved slab is sloped towards the drainage point. under Structural Plans. double-click Level 5.Atrium. click Conform to Curve. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. click section view. 25 In the Element Properties dialog. Adding a Shape-Modified Curved Slab | 221 . Complete the slab geometry 26 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. click OK.View section view of slab 18 In the Project Browser. double-click 3D . for Curved Edge Condition. 24 In the Curved Edge Condition dialog. 21 Select the slab. 19 On the View toolbar. click . and click OK. under Slab Shape Edit. 22 On the Options Bar.

and select the left endpoint of the curved slab. 29 Click the center drainage point. enter SX (Snap to Point). . 222 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . click . enter SX. and select the right endpoint of the curved slab.27 On the Options Bar. click 28 On the Options Bar. 30 Click the center drainage point.

double-click 3D . 32 In the Project Browser.Atrium. click Modify. click . double-click Level 5. under Structural Plans. 36 Select each point along the slab edge and verify that the spot elevation is set to 0' 0". 35 On the Options Bar. Adding a Shape-Modified Curved Slab | 223 . Verify the slab spot elevation 33 In the Project Browser. 34 Select the atrium curved slab. under 3D Views.31 On the Design Bar.

Adding Miter Joins on page 224. Adding Miter Joins In this exercise. or close the exercise file without saving changes. 40 Proceed to the next exercise. you add miter joins to the beams on the roof frame to create a flush connection. click Training Files. double-click Section 3. 2 Select the slab. click File menu ➤ Save As. 224 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . under 3D Views. The next exercise uses a new training file. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. double-click 3D . 39 Click File menu ➤ Close.rvt. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_Miter_Joins. . In the left pane of the Open dialog. and save the exercise file with a unique name. View the roof frame 1 In the Project Browser. To save changes.View the completed slab section 37 In the Project Browser. and draw a zoom box around the upper-right corner of the Notice the tapered insulation layer slopes to the low point as a planar surface. 38 On the View toolbar. under Sections (Building Sections). click section view.View.

click . click (Edit Beam Joins). 4 On the View toolbar. The slab is now hidden.3 On the View Control Bar. 6 On the Options Bar. You can now use the Beam Join Editor. select Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Element. Add the miter join 5 Click the beam on the west side of the roof frame. and draw a zoom box around the corner of the roof frame. Only non-concrete beams with shared end joins are available for edit. Adding Miter Joins | 225 .

226 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model .7 Click the arrow control on the first beam. 8 Click the arrow control on the second beam.

9 Click the padlock icon to lock the miter join. Adding Miter Joins | 227 . The miter lock is used to lock geometry but allows symbolic manipulation (in Coarse View).The miter join is complete.

Notice the miter lock remains locked. 11 Click the arrow on the beam symbolic line. select Detail Level: Fine. select Detail Level: Coarse. 12 On the View Control Bar. Notice the symbolic line is no longer joined. 228 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model .View the miter join in coarse view 10 On the View Control Bar.

14 Click File menu ➤ Close. click . Adding Curved Beams In this exercise.Notice the miter lock remains locked. you add a curved beam to the atrium. 13 On the Design Bar. double-click Level 4. click Modify. under Structural Plans. Zoom in on the atrium 1 In the Project Browser. or close the exercise file without saving changes. click Training Files. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click File menu ➤ Save As. To save changes. The next exercise uses a new training file. and save the exercise file with a unique name. and draw a zoom box around the atrium.rvt. 2 On the View toolbar. Adding Curved Beams | 229 . Adding Curved Beams on page 229. 15 Proceed to the next exercise. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_Curved_Beams. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

5 On the Options Bar. 6 Click the atrium column to select the beam start point. select W-Wide Flange: W14 X 22. 4 In the Type Selector. and click . click Beam. 7 Click the column to select the beam endpoint. select Chain. 230 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model .Place the curved beams 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.

Adding Curved Beams | 231 .8 Click the grid line so the beam snaps to the grid.

click . place additional curved beams between the atrium columns. 232 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . Set the curved beam properties 11 Select one of the curved beams. 12 While pressing CTRL.The beam is placed. select the remaining curved beams. 10 Using the same method. 9 Press ESC twice. 13 On the Options Bar.

select W-Wide Flange: W14 X 22. and on the View Control Bar. For Maximum Spacing. double-click Level 4.Atrium. 20 On the Options Bar. 17 Click or drag the ViewCube to rotate the view so the curved beams are visible. enter 6' 0". click ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ . Adding Curved Beams | 233 . select 3D. select Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Element. For Beam Type. For Elevation. Click OK. under Structural Plans.14 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Constraints. select Top of Beam. 19 On the Modelling Tab of the Design Bar. Scroll down to Analytical Model. 21 In the Element Properties dialog: Under Constraints. Add a beam system to the atrium 18 In the Project Browser. View the analytical model of the curved beams 15 In the Project Browser. 16 Select the floor. 22 Select the bottom beam. enter -0' 7" for Start Level Offset Under Constraints. and for Vertical Projection. Click OK. under Structural Plans. double-click 3D . enter 0' 0". click Beam System. select Top. select Maximum Spacing. for Layout Rule. Under Pattern. enter -0' 7" for End Level Offset For z-Direction Justification. Notice the orange lines representing the curved beam analytical model are placed at the top of beam.

place a beam system in the remaining bays of the atrium. 23 Using the same method. 234 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model .The beam system is placed.

Additional line segments will be added to satisfy the Maximum Discretized Offset parameter.Atrium. 27 In the Project Browser. Select Use hard-points. click 26 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Analytical Model. 28 Select the floor. NOTE When hard-points are enabled. the analytical model will end at points on the curve where other framing members are joined. under Structural Plans. select Approximate Curve. . select Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Element. Adding Curved Beams | 235 . 25 Select the beam.Approximate the curve of the analytical model 24 On the View toolbar. enter 0' 4". click . Click OK. For Maximum discretized offset. double-click 3D . and draw a zoom box around one of the curved beams. and on the Options Bar. and on the View Control Bar.

you add an opening (doorway) to the structural walls of the stairway. or close the exercise file without saving changes. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_Add_Openings. under Structural Plans. Notice the analytical line of the curved beam is represented by segments instead of a single curved line. click Training Files. To save changes.rvt. double-click Ground Level. Adding an Opening In this exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog.29 Click or drag the ViewCube to rotate the view so the curved beams are visible. click . you then copy the opening to each level. Adding an Opening on page 236. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 1 In the Project Browser. click File menu ➤ Save As. 2 On the View toolbar. 236 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . 30 Click File menu ➤ Close. and draw a zoom box around the stairway. The next exercise uses a new training file. 31 Proceed to the next exercise.

6 Select the door opening. click Door. click Modify.3 On the Architectural tab of the Design Bar. Adding an Opening | 237 . 5 On the Design Bar. 4 Click stairway wall to place the door opening approximately as shown.

8 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. 7 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. select 3D View. so that levels 2-7 are highlighted. under 3D Views. 12 In the Project Browser. 14 On the View toolbar. select Level 2. and draw a zoom box around the opening created in the 238 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . select Level 7. click stairway. 13 Click or drag the ViewCube to rotate the view so the stairway is visible.. . 11 Click OK. 10 While pressing SHIFT. 9 In the Select Levels dialog.

or close the exercise file without saving changes. 2 On the View toolbar. under Structural Plans. Adding an Opening in a Beam | 239 .rvt. Add an opening (by face) to a single beam 1 In the Project Browser. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Adding an Opening in a Beam In this exercise. and save the exercise file with a unique name. The next exercise uses a new training file. click File menu ➤ Save As. Adding an Opening in a Beam on page 239. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_Add_Opening_in_Beam. and double-click 3D View. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. expand 3D Views. click Opening ➤ Opening by Face. you import the revised beam back into the project. click . You then add an opening to selected beams by creating an extrusion in the beam family. 4 Select the beam that requires the opening. you add an opening to the face of a single beam and add stiffener plates to the beam opening. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. To save changes. click Training Files. and draw a zoom box around any beam on an upper floor.15 Click File menu ➤ Close. Finally.

select Linear Stiffener-Plate: Standard. 10 On the Design Bar. 9 Using the sketch tool. click Finish Sketch. click Modify. Make sure the opening forms a closed loop.Press TAB to make sure you are selecting the beam and not the floor or beam system. 5 Using the sketch tools. 6 On the Design Bar. 8 In the Type Selector. Add stiffener plates to the opening 7 On the Modelling Tab of the Design Bar. click Component. draw a stiffener plate on both horizontal surfaces of the opening. 240 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . draw an opening in the beam approximately as shown.

and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_Add_Opening_in_Beam. and double-click 3D View. or close the exercise file without saving changes. The next exercise uses a new training file. 14 Click File menu ➤ Close. 12 On the Options Bar. click Training Files. Click OK. 15 Continue with the next exercise.Change the stiffener plate properties 11 While pressing CTRL. You then modify the beam by adding an opening. click ■ ■ . 2 On the View toolbar. Finally. click File menu ➤ Save As. and save the exercise file with a unique name. expand 3D Views. under Structural Plans. and draw a zoom box around any beam on a lower floor. To save changes. enter 0' 2". Adding an Opening to a Beam Family on page 241. you load the new family into the project. select both stiffener plates. 13 In the Element Properties dialog: Under Dimensions. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Adding an Opening to a Beam Family | 241 . Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Adding an Opening to a Beam Family In this exercise.rvt. for d. click . Select the beam 1 In the Project Browser. you open an existing beam family using the Family Editor.

and draw a circle approximately as shown. Add an opening by extrusion 6 In the Family Project Browser. expand Views (all) ➤ Elevations (Elevation 1). click Edit Family. click . 10 Click OK 11 On the Options Bar. 13 Press ESC. The beam is displayed in a new window. and draw a zoom box around the center line of the beam. under Specify a New Work Plane. click Void Form ➤ Void Extrusion. The Front elevation of the beam is displayed. click located to the left of Offset. 14 On the Family Design Bar. click Name. 5 In the Revit dialog. 8 On the Family Design Bar. and double-click Front. and select Reference Plane: Center (Front/Back). 7 On the View toolbar. 12 Click the centerline of the beam. and click (Circle). 242 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . click Yes to open the W-Wide Flange beam type for editing. 9 In the Work Plane dialog. Open the beam family 4 On the Options Bar.3 Select the beam. click Modify.

click (Align). 21 On the Options Bar.15 Select the circle. and select the centerline of the circle. 16 In the Element Properties dialog. NOTE Aligning and locking the centerline of the circle to the reference plane ensures the circle will remain in the center of the beam. Adding an Opening to a Beam Family | 243 . 24 On the Design Bar. 23 Click the lock to lock the reference plane to the centerline of the circle. and click OK. click . 17 On the Options Bar. 19 Click the lock to lock the reference plane to the centerline of the circle. and the select the centerline of the circle. and on the Options Bar. click Finish Sketch. 22 Select the horizontal centerline reference plane. click The centerline of the circle is now visible. regardless of the length. . 20 Press ESC. 18 Select the vertical centerline reference plane. click (Align). select the Center Mark Visible parameter. 25 On the View toolbar.

and save the revised beam family file as W-Wide Flange with Opening.rfa. 29 Click File menu ➤ Save As. Extrude the opening 28 Click the right directional arrow.26 Select the circle on the beam. The extrusion is displayed as a cylinder. select Model Graphic Style: Shading w/Edges. 27 On the View Control toolbar. and slide the cylinder to the right so the extrusion passes through the beam. 244 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . 30 Navigate to a folder of your preference.

38 Click in the drawing area. 34 On the View toolbar.rvt located in the Imperial project file. 33 Enter ZF. Adding an Opening to a Beam Family | 245 . select the modified beam type W-Wide Flange with Opening: W18X40. 32 In the Load into Projects dialog. and click OK. Select the new beam family 37 In the Type Selector. click . click Load into Projects. select i_RST_CSM_Add_Opening_in_Beam. 35 Click on the lowest beam located on the corner of Level 2.rfa. 36 While pressing CTRL. The project file reopens. select the beams for Levels 2 through 4. and draw a zoom box around the beams for the lower floors.Load the modified beam family into the project 31 On the Family tab of the Design Bar.

and walls are generated downward to the foundation. a roof with tapered insulation has been added over Level 7. click Training Files. 39 Click File menu ➤ Close. 40 Continue with the next exercise. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_6. The next exercise uses a new training file. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Adding Foundation Walls In this exercise.The modified beams with openings display. To save changes. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and save the exercise file with a unique name. the atrium columns on Levels 6 and 7 have been deleted. Adding Foundation Walls on page 246. 246 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . In addition. click File menu ➤ Save As. In this new training file. You add these walls using the Ground Level view. you add structural walls.rvt. or close the exercise file without saving changes.

5 In the Element Properties dialog: Under Constraints. select Foundation. . click 7 Click the arc line of the imported DWG file. select Basic Wall: Foundation . click Structural Wall. The imported DWG file was copied and paste-aligned to this level for you. select Wall Centerline. 3 In the Type Selector. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 4 On the Options Bar. Click OK. For Top Offset. Adding Foundation Walls | 247 . 6 On the Options Bar.Sketch the atrium walls 1 In the Project Browser. click ■ ■ ■ ■ . for Location Line.12" Concrete. For Base Constraint. under Structural Plans. enter -0' 6". double-click Ground Level.

A foundation wall is added and aligned with the wall centerline. and select Chain. 12 Click or drag the ViewCube to rotate the view so the foundation wall is visible. 248 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . On portions of the south wall. double-click 3D View. click . under 3D Views. Use the center of the curtain wall lines in the DWG file as an underlay to trace over. you can use an arc or a chain of small wall segments. Sketch the remaining foundation walls 8 On the Options Bar. 9 Use the sketching tools available on the Options Bar to add foundation walls to the remaining perimeter of the model. 10 Press ESC twice to finish the wall sketch. 13 Click File menu ➤ Close. 11 In the Project Browser.

4 In the Options Bar. you add piers or pilasters and concrete columns at each steel column location. 8 Place the cursor over one of the foundation walls. and click Hide Element. you will still need to manually add piers to the locations that are not on a grid line. select Foundation for Depth. TIP You can use the Grid Intersection tool to speed up this process. Concrete pier centered on steel column 6 On the Design Bar. click the Temporary Hide/Isolate control. In the left pane of the Open dialog. select Concrete-Square-Column: 18x18. add a concrete column centered on each steel column location. The next exercise uses a new training file. 5 Within the perimeter of the structure model. 7 In the Project Browser. press TAB. make sure you delete the columns outside the structure perimeter. In addition. and save the exercise file with a unique name. click File menu ➤ Save As. click Modify. 14 Proceed to the next exercise. Adding Piers or Pilasters In this exercise. Adding Piers or Pilasters | 249 . Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 3 In the Type Selector.rvt. or close the exercise file without saving changes. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_Piers. Add concrete piers 1 In the Project Browser. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. If you select all the grid lines and add columns to all intersections. under 3D Views. under Structural Plans.To save changes. double-click 3D View. click Training Files. Adding Piers or Pilasters on page 249. double-click Ground Level. and select the foundation wall chain. click Structural Column. such as the atrium. 9 On the View Control Bar.

3 On the Design Bar. For Height Offset From Level. under Structural Plans. Framing Ground and Parking Garage Levels on page 250. 10 On the View Control Bar. The foundation wall is displayed. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_7. click Training Files. 250 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . sloped slabs.rvt Frame ground and parking levels 1 In the Project Browser. double-click Ground Level. 11 Click File menu ➤ Close. click Reset Temporary Hide/Isolate. 12 Proceed to the next exercise. or close the exercise file without saving changes. Framing Ground and Parking Garage Levels In this exercise. The next exercise uses a new training file. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and save the exercise file with a unique name. click Floor Properties. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Pick Walls. To save changes. click Slab. 5 On the Design Bar. Click OK.This provides a better view of the new below-grade piers. select 6" Concrete. 4 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Type. enter 0. click File menu ➤ Save As. you frame the garage and ground levels by adding slabs. and concrete beam framing.

If necessary. 8 In the Project Browser. use the flip controls to toggle to the exterior face. 7 Click Finish Sketch. click Yes. Framing Ground and Parking Garage Levels | 251 . 9 Click or drag the ViewCube to rotate the view so the slab is visible. click Delete Type.6 Select the exterior face of the foundation walls. TIP Press TAB to select the wall chain. NOTE When prompted whether you would like the walls that go up to this floor’s level to attach to its bottom. WARNING If an error dialog displays regarding the span direction component. under 3D Views. double-click 3D View.

click Finish. select the line. expand the warning and select the framing element. NOTE If you are warned of a problem with keeping elements joined. 14 Select all grid lines. click Beam. select Concrete-Rectangular Beam:16x32. This prevents a beam being added between the atrium at G1 and G3. 15 Remove grid line G from the selection: while pressing SHIFT. 16 On the Options Bar.Frame concrete girders 10 In the Project Browser. and another between G4 and G5. under Structural Plans. click Grid. 19 Manually delete the beams placed between grid F2 and G2. 18 Manually delete the beams added to the atrium. 20 On the Design Bar. 11 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. double-click Ground Level. It is most likely a segment that can be deleted or unjoined. Resolve the problem by clicking the appropriate solution. 252 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . It will display as selected in the drawing area. 17 Manually add a beam between G3 and G4. 13 On the Options Bar. 12 In the Type Selector. click Modify.

27 In the Project Browser. 23 In the Filter dialog. Joist. 28 Click or drag the ViewCube to rotate the view so the concrete girders are visible. select Structural Framing (Girder. click Modify. 25 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. double-click 3D View. NOTE The foundation walls have been hidden in this view so the girders are visible. and then click OK. 24 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. and click OK.Copy the framing and slab to Garage Level -1 21 Drag a pick box around the entire model. 26 In the Select Levels dialog. under 3D Views. click . click Check None. Other) and Floors. 29 On the Design Bar. Framing Ground and Parking Garage Levels | 253 . select Garage Level -1. 22 On the Options Bar.

click Finish Sketch. For Height Offset at Tail. select Ground Level for Level at Tail. 40 On the Design Bar. click Lines. under Elevations (Building Elevation). select Garage Level-1. 254 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . under Structural Plans. 38 Right-click the slope arrow. click the Model Graphics Style control. For Level at Head. double-click Garage Level -1. 32 Zoom in around the lower-left corner of the model. enter 0. and click Hidden Line. click the Model Graphics Style control. double-click South Elevation. 34 On the Design Bar. 33 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 37 Sketch a slope arrow from left to right. and select Element Properties. For Height Offset at Head.Add the garage entrance exit ramp 30 In the Project Browser. 39 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Constraints. and click Hidden Line. 41 In the Project Browser. click Slab. 31 On the View Control Bar. 36 On the Design Bar. click Slope Arrow. 42 On the View Control Bar. 43 Zoom in on the lower-left corner to see the ramp. enter 0' 6". Click OK. 35 Sketch the slab in the southwest exterior corner of the structure.

48 In the Work Plane dialog. select Structural Beam System Properties. double-click 3D View. under Number of Lines. click Lines. under Specify a new Work Plane. select Concrete-Rectangular Beam: 16 X 32. under 3D Views. 53 On the View toolbar. and click OK. . under Structural Views. Under Pattern. 51 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Beam Type. and draw a zoom box around the ramp. Framing Ground and Parking Garage Levels | 255 . click Beam System. 47 On the Design Bar. and zoom in on the ramp. 50 On the Design Bar. 55 Draw an outline of the ramp. select Ground Level. 49 Select the underside face of the existing ramp. Click OK. 52 In the Project Browser. select Pick a plane. click 54 On the Design Bar. 46 On the Modelling Tab of the Design Bar. select Fixed Number for Layout Rule Value. For Value. click .Completed ramp Add a sloped beam system under the ramp 44 In the Project Browser. click Set Work Plane. enter 5. 45 On the View toolbar.

click Finish Sketch. 58 On the View toolbar. and zoom in on the ramp. When you are adding a wall opening. under 3D Views. NOTE Ignore the warning regarding the analytical point of the beam and slab. Add a wall opening at the garage entrance 59 On the View toolbar. 62 Sketch the opening. corner to corner. 61 Select the foundation wall that faces the short edge of the new ramp. click Opening ➤ Wall Opening. click . and zoom in on the wall that faces the end of the new ramp. 60 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 57 In the Project Browser. there are no drawing tools to select. 256 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . You can immediately draw the rectangular opening.56 On the Design Bar. click . double-click 3D View.

click Unjoin Elements. 66 Proceed to the final exercise. Notice that you can adjust the opening extents using the controls. 65 Click File menu ➤ Close. Placing a Wall Foundation | 257 . click Modify. In addition. 64 Select the garage opening. 63 On the Design Bar. and save the exercise file with a unique name. Placing a Wall Foundation In this exercise. you may get a warning message that elements cannot remain joined. To save changes. In this case.NOTE Depending on where you draw the opening. The next exercise uses a new training file. or close the exercise file without saving changes. you add an isolated foundation beneath the piers. you add a continuous foundation beneath the exterior walls of the structural model. click File menu ➤ Save As. and continue with the next step. Placing a Wall Foundation on page 257.

enter 1' 6". click Edit/New. 5 On the Design Bar. click Visibility/Graphics.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 2 Enter ZF. under Visibility.rvt. 8 In the Element Properties dialog. select Footing-Rectangular: 72"x48"x18". enter 1' 6". double-click Foundation. and click to select the foundation wall chain. 4 Place the cursor over one of the foundation walls. and click OK. 258 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . Click OK twice. click Foundation ➤ Isolated. press TAB until the chain of walls is highlighted. clear Structural Framing. click Modify. A continuous foundation is added. 7 On the Options Bar. 11 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. under Structural Plans. enter 1' 6". click Training Files. Under Dimensions. Sketch the continuous foundation 1 In the Project Browser. 14 Click the midpoint of each of the concrete columns to place an isolated foundation at each location. 12 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Foundation ➤ Wall. 13 In the Type Selector. Place isolated foundation 10 On the View menu. for Toe length. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_Wall_Foundation. For Heel length. Edit foundation properties 6 Select one of the foundation walls. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click 9 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ . For Foundation Thickness. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.

click Modify. Precast Concrete on page 261. 16 In the Project Browser. double-click 3D View. You can save the open file if you wish. 18 Proceed to the next tutorial. under 3D Views. You have completed the Creating a Structural Model tutorial. In the next tutorial a new training file is supplied.15 On the Design Bar. Placing a Wall Foundation | 259 . 17 Click File menu ➤ Save.

260 .

Creating a Precast Beam System In this lesson. you work with precast concrete components using the tools available in Revit Structure 2009. you add a precast beam system to the roof of an existing structure. click Training Files.rvt.Precast Concrete 6 In this tutorial. You then modify the precast beam type within the Revit Structure family editor. you add a precast concrete beam system to an existing structure. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Beam System. you add a precast concrete beam system to an existing project. In the first lesson. 261 . Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Adding a Beam System to the Structure In this exercise. and open Imperial\i_RST_Precast_Concrete. under Structural Plans. double-click Roof. 1 In the Project Browser. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.

For Clear Spacing. Click OK. under Pattern. enter 0' 1". select Clear Spacing. click ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ . 7 In the Project Browser. The longitudinal axis of the beam system members will be placed parallel to these lines. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. 5 Select the top girder on the north side of the structure as shown. 262 | Chapter 6 Precast Concrete . NOTE The dotted lines represent the beam system direction. select Center. select Precast-Double Tee: 8' x 20". For Beam Type. For Justification. 6 Click to place the beam system.3 On the Options Bar. under 3D Views. The beam system is displayed. do the following: For Layout Rule. double-click 3D.

Changing the Beam System Properties In this exercise. 1 On the View Toolbar. i_RST_Precast-in progress. Training File ■ Use the project file that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. and draw a zoom box around the edge of the beam system as Notice the gap between the edge of the beam system and the concrete beam. Changing the Beam System Properties | 263 . and save the model to a location of your choice using the following filename: i_RST_Precast-in progress. .8 Click File menu ➤ Save As. click shown.rvt. 2 Click one of the precast beams as shown. you change the construction properties so the beam system will extend to the concrete support beam. Changing the Beam System Properties on page 263.rvt. 9 Proceed to the next exercise.

3 Right-click the selected beam. under Structural Plans. double-click Roof. 7 Proceed to the next exercise. enter 0' 5". under Sections (Building Section). under Construction. 3 Select the beam system. you change clear spacing of the beam system to adjust the gap between each beam. and click Select All Instances. Training File ■ Use the project file that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. i_RST_Precast-in progress. Changing the Beam System Clear Spacing In this exercise. 5 In the Element Properties dialog. Notice the spacing between each precast beam. 4 On the Options Bar. The beam system now extends to the concrete support beam. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save.rvt 1 In the Project Browser. and click OK. Changing the Beam System Clear Spacing on page 264. 2 In the Project Browser. double-click Section 1. click . for Start and End Extension. 264 | Chapter 6 Precast Concrete .

Modifying the Precast Beam Family | 265 . 7 Click File menu ➤ Save. Notice the clear spacing between each precast beam is removed. enter 0' 0". under Construction. 8 Proceed to the next lesson. click . for Clear Spacing. Modifying the Precast Beam Family In this lesson. under Sections (Building Section). and click OK. double-click Section 1. Modifying the Precast Beam Family on page 265. 6 In the Project Browser. Adding a Chamfer to the Beam In this exercise.4 On the Options Bar. you open the precast beam within the family editor and add a chamfer to both beam supports. you add a chamfer to the existing double-tee beam family. 5 In the Element Properties dialog. You then import the revised beam back into the project.

Training File ■ Use the project file that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. click Edit Family. and double-click Left. click Yes to open the Precast-Double Tee Family for editing.rvt. i_RST_Precast-in progress. The beam is displayed in a new window. expand Views (all) ➤ Elevations (Elevation 1). 3 In the Revit dialog. 5 Select the beam. 4 In the Family Project Browser. 266 | Chapter 6 Precast Concrete . 2 On the Options Bar. Open the beam type for editing 1 Click one of the precast beams as shown.

Zoom in on the left tee of the beam 11 On the View Toolbar. and click Edit. expand Families ➤ Profiles ➤ Double Tee-Profile. 9 Click View menu ➤ Visibility Graphics. ■ ■ Under Visibility. The reference planes and dimensions are now visible. 12 Select each of the dimensions representing the slope length. 7 Right-click Double Tee-Profile. click .Open the beam profile 6 In the Family Project Browser. Click Apply. click the Annotations Categories tab. 8 In the Revit dialog. and then click OK. and draw a zoom box around the left tee of the beam. click Yes to open the Double Tee-Profile for editing. click Dimensions and Reference Planes. Adding a Chamfer to the Beam | 267 . 10 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. and drag them above the top horizontal surface of the beam profile as shown. NOTE The dimensions should be visible under normal circumstances but are purposely hidden for this demo.

and click OK. 16 Press ESC. 18 On the Options Bar. click Ref Plane. under Options. click . 19 In the Element Properties dialog. 17 Select the horizontal reference plane. for Is Reference. 268 | Chapter 6 Precast Concrete . 15 Click the reference plane dimension and enter 0' 2". Draw vertical reference planes 20 On the Design Bar. 14 Draw a horizontal reference plane below the existing plane. and click Modify. select Not a Reference.Draw horizontal reference plane 13 On the Design bar. 21 Draw a vertical reference plane to the left of the center line as shown. click Ref Plane.

for Is Reference. 27 On the Options Bar. select both vertical reference planes. 28 In the Element Properties dialog.22 Press ESC. and click the lock symbol next to the dimension to lock the distance. and click OK. click Dimension. select Not a Reference. 30 Add a dimension for the left vertical reference plane. Adding a Chamfer to the Beam | 269 . click . 23 Click the reference plane dimension and enter 0' 2". Add dimensions to each reference plane 29 On the Design Bar. 25 Use the same technique to draw a vertical reference plane to the right of center as shown. 24 Press ESC. 26 While pressing CTRL. under Options.

32 Add a dimension for the horizontal reference plane as shown. Align the bottom horizontal surface of the beam 35 On the View Toolbar. click .31 Repeat for the vertical reference plane on the opposite side as shown. 270 | Chapter 6 Precast Concrete . 34 Press ESC. NOTE Make sure the top dimension line snaps to the horizontal reference plane and not the horizontal line of the beam. and draw a zoom box around the left tee of the beam. 33 Click the lock symbol next to the dimension to lock the distance.

41 Press ESC. 42 Repeat this technique for the inside of the same tee. 37 Enter AL (this is the keyboard shortcut for Align). 39 Select the line representing the bottom surface of the beam as shown. Adding a Chamfer to the Beam | 271 . Sketch new profile 43 Select the angled line as shown. 38 For the align-to point.36 Click the bottom horizontal line of the beam. Press TAB to make sure you are selecting the end point of the line and not the reference plane. select the vertical reference plane as shown. and drag the end point away from the angled line as shown. 40 Click the lock symbol to lock the alignment.

46 Sketch the new profile for the beam as follows: ■ ■ ■ Snap to the end point of the lower horizontal plane.44 Press DELETE. 47 Press ESC. Snap to the intersection of the horizontal and vertical reference planes. click Lines. Snap to the end of the top horizontal line. 45 On the Design bar. 272 | Chapter 6 Precast Concrete . 48 Repeat this technique for the opposite side of the beam.

51 On the View Toolbar. 50 Click the horizontal reference plane and drag it beyond the right tee of the beam as shown. click .Modify the right tee of the beam 49 Enter ZF (this is the keyboard shortcut for Zoom to Fit). Adding a Chamfer to the Beam | 273 . and draw a zoom box around the right tee of the beam.

and click Yes. Flex the design 53 On the Design bar. and then click OK. Creating Drawings on page 275. 274 | Chapter 6 Precast Concrete . The beam should adapt to all changes. Reload the family into the project 56 On the Design Bar. fix any problems with alignment or constraints. 55 Click Edit menu ➤ Undo Family Type to undo the dimension changes. ■ ■ ■ ■ Draw vertical reference planes. 58 Proceed to the next tutorial. Align the bottom horizontal surface. Notice the project file becomes active and the beam updates with the latest changes. click Family Types. 54 In the Family Types dialog. enter 6' 0". Sketch the new profile. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ For Tee Width. Click Apply. select Override parameter values of existing types. enter 10' 0". click Load into Projects. For Width. If it does not. Add dimensions to each reference plane. 57 In the Reload Family dialog.52 Repeat the following techniques for the right tee of the beam.

To create a printed or plotted set of drawings from the views in your structural model. elevation. how to add views to the sheets. 3D view. section. and section views. you create a drawing sheet that includes a plan view.Creating Drawings 7 In this tutorial. you can add different views of the model directly to the sheet. Sheets are defined by borders. The model views that you can add to sheets include plan. which are a type of view in a project. you learn how to create sheets within a Revit Structure project. Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project In this lesson. The project used in the following exercises is the same one used in the previous lesson. Sheet views update automatically when you modify your model. Depending on the type of drawing that you want to create. begin by first creating sheets. 275 . and are accessible from the Project Browser. and three-dimensional (3D) views. you learn how to create drawings from a building information model using Revit Structure 2009. usually contain a title block. and how to create new views from a model. Creating a Drawing Sheet In this exercise.

Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. enter 31 March 2006. select E1 30 x 42 Horizontal: E1 30x42 Horizontal. 8 In the Select a Title block dialog box. and open Imperial\i_RST_Drawings. 5 Specify the remaining instance parameters: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Project Issue Date. 276 | Chapter 7 Creating Drawings . TIP If the View tab is not displayed in the Design Bar. MA 12345. The title block that you selected is a family that has already been loaded into the project. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. and click OK. and click View. click Edit for Project Address. For Client Name. enter the following address: 123 Main Street. Create a sheet 7 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 4 Click OK.rvt. enter 2006-01. Enter the project information to display in the title block of the drawing sheet 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Information. enter J. 2 In the Element Properties dialog box. For Project Status. The text fields in the title block family (shown below) contain labels that automatically display the corresponding project information that you entered. click Sheet. 6 Click OK. Anytown. enter Office Structure. A title block and drawing borders are displayed on the drawing sheet. enter Initial Draft. For Project Name. right-click. click Training Files. For Project Number. Smith. 3 In the Edit Text dialog box.

select Structural Plan: Level 2. Change the sheet name and number in the title block 10 On the Design Bar. on the Options Bar. and select the title block. Creating a Drawing Sheet | 277 . click Modify. 15 In the Views dialog box. click 12 In the Element Properties dialog. 9 In the Project Browser. enter Plans and Elevations. click Add View.NOTE The Project Path parameter in the lower-right corner of the sheet view automatically updates every time the project file is saved. The new sheet is displayed in the Project Browser with the name S-2 . 13 Click OK. 11 When the title block highlights. Add a plan view to the sheet 14 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Under Identity Data ➤ Sheet number. enter S-1. Under Identity Data ➤ Sheet name. and click to place the view. The sheet name and number are displayed in the title block and in the Project Browser.Unnamed. and click Add View to Sheet. do the following: ■ ■ . 16 Move the cursor to the center of the sheet. expand Sheets (all).

Click OK. Under Extents. and click Element Properties. 26 Position the view below the Structural Plan: Level 2. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. and click Add View to Sheet.0" for View Scale. 24 With the view selected. select Elevation: South Elevation.17 With the view selected. The scale of the view on the sheet changes. right-click. 22 In the Views dialog box. and click OK. specify 1/16" = 1'. and dragging the right end control until it fits under the view. under Graphics. 278 | Chapter 7 Creating Drawings . specify 1/16" = 1'. and click Element Properties. Add an elevation to the sheet 21 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and dragging the right end control until it fits under the view. click Add View. NOTE If necessary.0" for View Scale. 23 Click on the lower half of the sheet to place the view. and click View Properties. If you were to open the Structural Plan: Level 2. you would see that the scale plan view is now 1/16" = 1'0". 28 Adjust the length of the title line by selecting the view. 25 In the Element Properties dialog. 18 In the Element Properties dialog box. 19 Drag the view to the upper-left corner of the sheet. clear Crop View. right-click. right-click. you can select the view title separately and move it to a new position. 20 Adjust the length of the title line by selecting the view. 27 Drag the title line under the elevation view.

and save the file as i_RST_Drawings-in progress. select 3D View: East Section . 34 Navigate to a folder of your preference. NOTE If necessary. 35 Proceed to the next exercise. 30 In the Views dialog box. and click Add View to Sheet. Add a 3D view to the sheet 29 On the View tab of the Design Bar.rvt. Adding a Sheet to the Project on page 280. and dragging the right end control until it fits under the view.NOTE If necessary. you can select the view title separately and move it to a new position. 31 Click on the upper-right corner of the sheet to place the view. you can select the view title separately and move it to a new position. 33 Click File menu ➤ Save As.Perspective. click Add View. Creating a Drawing Sheet | 279 . 32 Adjust the length of the title line by selecting the view.

Adding a Sheet to the Project In this exercise. 5 Click File menu ➤ Save. and click OK. you learn how to create a new section view and a new callout view. click . Creating New Views to Add to Sheets In this exercise. enter Section Views for Sheet Name. 2 In the Select a Title block dialog box. add a section view. and click OK. is displayed in the Project Browser. Add a new sheet to the project 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 3 Select the title block. The new sheet. Creating New Views to Add to Sheets on page 280. 4 In the Element Properties dialog box. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. you add a new sheet to the project. and adjust the scale of the view. select E1 30 x 42 Horizontal: E1 30x42 Horizontal. and on the Options Bar. 280 | Chapter 7 Creating Drawings . click Sheet. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. under Sheets (all). i_RST_Drawings-in progress. incrementally named S-2 Section Views. and then add them to a new drawing sheet. under Identity Data. 6 Proceed to the next exercise.rvt. Section Views is displayed in the title block as the sheet name.

4 On the Options Bar. click Section.rvt. and add it to the sheet 1 In the Project Browser under Structural Plans. double-click Level 2. 5 Add a section line that cuts through the right side of the building: ■ Click between grid lines G and H to place the start point of the section line and the section head (section tag). Create a section view of Level 2.0" for Scale. i_RST_Drawings-in progress. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. click . 2 On the View Toolbar. 3 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Creating New Views to Add to Sheets | 281 . select 1/16" = 1'. and zoom in on the east area of the structure as shown.NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise.

6 In the Project Browser. you can select the view title separately and move it to a new position. double-click S-2 Section Views. and click Add View to Sheet. under Sheets (all). 7 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 10 With the view selected. and click OK. 9 Click on the upper-left corner of the sheet to place the view. NOTE If necessary. Create a callout view. 282 | Chapter 7 Creating Drawings . under Graphics. double click Section 1. 13 Adjust the length of the title line by dragging the right end control until it fits under the view. select Section: Section 1. and click Properties. 12 Drag the title line under the elevation view. click Add View. under Sections (Building Sections).0" for View Scale.■ Move the cursor to the right and click between grid lines J and K to place the section tail and complete the section line. 8 In the Views dialog box. specify 3/16" = 1' . 11 In the Element Properties dialog box. right-click. and add it to the sheet 14 In the Project Browser.

under Sheets (all). 18 Select the drag bar attached to the callout balloon. and zoom in on the lower floors of the structure. and position it approximately as shown. and click OK.15 On the View Toolbar. 17 Draw a box around the column of Garage Level 1. click Callout of section 1. double-click S-2 Section Views. and drag the view onto the sheet. Creating New Views to Add to Sheets | 283 . 23 Drag the title line under the elevation view. 20 In the Project Browser.0" for View Scale. 19 In the Project Browser. 24 Adjust the length of the title line by dragging the right end control until it fits under the view. right-click. specify 3/4" = 1'. 16 On the View tab of the Design Bar. under Graphics. and click Properties. 21 With the view selected. as shown. under Sections (Building Sections). click Callout. 22 In the Element Properties dialog box. click .

rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog.1 . 25 Click File menu ➤ Save. 284 | Chapter 7 Creating Drawings . Creating a Detail Library on page 284. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and open Imperial\i_RST_Save_Detail. Creating a Detail Library In this lesson. you learn how to create a detail library of components that can be imported into different projects.TYPICAL DETAILS. expand Sheets (all). you will learn how to save both the individual views and complete detail sheets as a new detail library and then import these details into a different project. and double-click S. you begin by opening a project that contains common drafting view details. Creating a Drafting View Detail Library In this exercise. click Training Files. Save a group of views to the library 1 In the Project Browser.NOTE If necessary. 26 Proceed to the next lesson. you can select the view title separately and move it to a new position. Instead of having to draw these details for every project.

Click the icon to the right of Save In to create a new Folder. 4 In the Save As dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Locate a common drive that can be accessed by all team members. Creating a Drafting View Detail Library | 285 . 3 In the Save Views dialog. Open the new folder. and click OK. 2 Click File menu ➤ Save to Library ➤ Save Views.Notice there are 3 typical detail views on this sheet. select Drawing Sheet: S.TYPICAL DETAILS. Enter Detail Library for the folder name.1 .

enter Footing Section. enter Typical Column Beam and Girder Details.TYPICAL DETAILS. For File name. 6 In the Save Views dialog.1 . clear Drawing Sheet: S. select Show drafting views only.■ ■ Under File name. navigate to the Detail Library folder created in step 4. do the following: ■ ■ In the list of views. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Save in. 9 Proceed to the next exercise. when you insert these views into a new project. Revit Structure will save views that contain 3D objects. Under Views. Click OK. Save individual views to the library 5 Click File menu ➤ Save to Library ➤ Save Views. Click Save. Click Save. ■ ■ 7 In the Save As dialog. Select both Footing Section views. however. Importing Details from the Library on page 287. NOTE When you save your file. Only the drafting views will be displayed. 8 Click File menu ➤ Close. only the 2D elements will be inserted. 286 | Chapter 7 Creating Drawings .

Click OK. click Training Files. select the Detail Library folder you created in the previous exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Click Open. a duplicate types dialog displays.TYPICAL DETAILS. Creating a Drafting View Detail Library on page 284 before proceeding. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise.rvt. close the warning dialog that appears. and open Imperial\i_RST_Insert_Detail. Insert drawing sheet from the library 1 Click File menu ➤ Insert from File ➤ Views.rvt. Select the file TYPICAL COLUMN BEAM AND GIRDER DETAILS.1 . 3 In the Insert Views dialog: ■ ■ Select Drawing Sheet: S. Because you are importing element types that may already exist in the project. Click OK. 2 In the Open dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Look in. Importing Details from the Library | 287 . you learn how import details from the newly created library. 4 Once the drawing sheet opens.Importing Details from the Library In this exercise.

and double-click S.TYPICAL DETAILS. Insert separate footing sections from the library 6 Click File menu ➤ Insert from File ➤ Views. 288 | Chapter 7 Creating Drawings . expand Sheets (all). 8 In the Insert Views dialog: ■ Under Views. Select the file FOOTING SECTION. do the following: ■ ■ ■ For Look in. Click Open. 7 In the Open dialog.rvt.1 .5 In the Project Browser. select the folder Detail Library you created in the previous exercise. select Drafting View: FOOTING SECTION.

a duplicate types dialog appears. Click OK. Because you are importing element types that may already exist in the project. Importing Details from the Library | 289 .■ Click OK.

10 In the Open dialog: ■ ■ For Look in.9 Click File menu ➤ Insert from File ➤ Views. select the folder Detail Library you created in the previous exercise. 290 | Chapter 7 Creating Drawings . Select the file Footing Sections.rvt.

11 In the Insert Views dialog: ■ ■ Under Views. Importing Details from the Library | 291 . select Drafting View: Footing Section 2.■ Click Open. a duplicate types dialog appears. Because you are importing element types that may already exist in the project. Click OK. Click OK.

You have also imported both individual detail views as well as the entire detail sheet into an existing project. component legends are often called schedules (beam schedule. The two most common types of legends produced for construction documents are annotation legends and building component legends. Legends list and identify components such as weld symbols and rebar tags.12 Click File menu ➤ Close. Using Legends on page 292. annotation legends are often referred to as symbol legends. you add the completed symbol legend to a sheet for the construction documents. On construction documents. 13 Proceed to the next lesson. On construction documents. 292 | Chapter 7 Creating Drawings . Creating a Symbol Legend In this exercise. Annotation legends are made up of components such as section markers which are paired with text that identifies them. and so on). You have created a library of common drafting details that can be shared by each member of the structural team. concrete schedule. using a text type you create by duplicating an existing text type and modifying the type properties. Using Legends Legends provide a way to display a list of the various structural components and annotations used in a project. you create a legend view and add symbols and text to it. Finally.

selecting each from the Type Selector and placing it in the drawing area as shown. 6 Add the following symbols to the legend view. 2 In the Project Browser. Add symbols to the legend 5 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and click Rename. click Symbol. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Section Head . i_RST_Drawings-in progress. enter Symbol Legend for Name. expand Legends. Create a legend view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Legend. 4 In the Rename View dialog box.Filled Span Direction Fixed: 1/2” Rebar Tag Weld Symbol: Both Weld Symbol .Spacer: Spacer Weld Symbol-w-Preparation: Melt Thru Creating a Symbol Legend | 293 .NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. and click OK. 3 Right-click Legend 1.rvt.

11 In the Type Properties dialog box. 9 On the Options bar. 12 Under Text. verify that Text: 1/8" text is selected. 10 In the Element Properties dialog box. click Text. 294 | Chapter 7 Creating Drawings . and click OK. you create a text type with the necessary size. 8 In the Type Selector. click . click Edit/New. On the Design Bar. and click OK twice. 14 Enter Level Marker (Level Name/Elevation) or the text note. and click to the right of the first symbol to specify the text start point. Add text to the legend 13 In the Type Selector.Create a text type 7 Because the text size for the symbol legend is not available in the Type Selector. click Duplicate. select Text: 1/4" Arial text. You do this by duplicating an existing text type and modifying the type properties. enter 1/8" for Text Size. enter 1/8" text for Name.

drag it to the lower-right corner of the sheet. expand Sheets (all).Plans and Elevations to open it in the drawing area. enter the following text for the remaining symbols in the legend: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Span Direction Fixed: 1/2” Rebar Tag (Tag#) Weld Symbol Weld Symbol .Melt thru Place the symbol legend on a sheet 16 In the Project Browser. 18 On the Design Bar. and double-click S-1 . and click to place it.15 Working from the top down.Spacer Weld Symbol . click Modify to end the command. click Symbol Legend. Creating a Symbol Legend | 295 . 17 In the Project Browser.

The symbol legend is added to the sheet. 19 Click File menu ➤ Close. 20 You can save the open file if you wish. In the next tutorial, a new training file is supplied. 21 Proceed to the next tutorial, Scheduling on page 297.

296 | Chapter 7 Creating Drawings

Scheduling

8

In this tutorial, you learn how to create a customized schedule of structural framing elements in your Revit Structure 2009 projects.

Scheduling Beam Quantities
In this lesson, you learn how to create a beam schedule for the structural model as shown below. When you schedule structural components in Revit Structure, you can list each component as a separate line item (an instance schedule), or you can group components of the same type into a single line item (a type schedule).

Creating a Structural Framing Schedule
In this exercise, you learn how to create a structural framing concrete beam schedule. Training File
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\i_RST_Schedules_Framing.rvt.

Create the schedule 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Schedule/Quantities. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active, right-click in the Design Bar, and click View. 2 In the New Schedule dialog, under Category, select Structural Framing, and click OK. Choose which fields to include in the beam schedule 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog, click the Fields tab.

297

4 Under Available fields, select Mark, and click Add. The Mark field is moved under Scheduled fields. 5 Using the same process, add the following fields to the schedule:
■ ■ ■

Comments Reference Level Family and Type

NOTE The width and depth parameters will be added to the schedule in the next exercise, Creating Shared Parameters. 6 In the Schedule Properties dialog, click Add Parameter. 7 In the Parameter Properties dialog, do the following:
■ ■ ■

Under Parameter Data, enter REBAR for Name. Under Type of Parameter, select Text. Click OK.

NOTE Rebar is now a project parameter that can also be found in the properties of all structural framing components including beams. 8 Under Scheduled fields, order the fields as shown by selecting them and clicking Move Up or Move Down.

9 In the Schedule Properties dialog, click OK. A schedule is created that includes all structural framing elements in the project.

298 | Chapter 8 Scheduling

10 Click File menu ➤ Close. To save changes, click File menu ➤ Save As, and save the exercise file with a unique name, or close the exercise file without saving changes. The next exercise uses a new training file. 11 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating Shared Parameters on page 299.

Creating Shared Parameters
In this exercise you learn how to use shared parameters to define additional elements that are usually not included in the beam schedule when it is created within the project template. Shared parameters can be added to any family, regardless of category, and are defined and stored in an external file, ensuring consistency across families and projects. Their values may also be aggregated and reported within Revit Structure multi-category schedules. An example of the use of shared parameters is the need to add width and depth information in a concrete beam schedule. This requires assigning the existing width and depth parameters originally defined as family parameters to shared parameters in the beam family. The following exercise demonstrates the solution for this situation and covers the process of setting up shared parameters and adding them to a family. Training File
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\i_RST_Schedules.rvt.

Editing the family parameters 1 In the Project Browser, under Structural Plans, double-click Ground Level. NOTE Some beams have been added to this view to better demonstrate the scheduling tool. 2 Select one of the concrete beams as shown.

Creating Shared Parameters | 299

3 On the Options Bar, click Edit Family. 4 Click Yes when prompted about opening the beam for editing. NOTE You are now in the Family Editor. The selected beam family is displayed in the drawing area. 5 On the Family design bar, click Family Types. 6 In the Family Types dialog, under Dimensions, select the b parameter, and click Modify.

7 In the Parameter Properties dialog, select Shared Parameter, and click Select. 8 When asked if you want to choose a shared parameter file, click Yes. 9 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog, click Create. 10 In the Save As dialog, specify a location for the file, and enter Project Shared Parameters for name. Click Save. 11 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog, under Groups, click New. 12 In the New Parameter Group dialog, enter Dimensions for name, and click OK. 13 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog, under Parameters, click New. 14 In the Parameter Properties dialog, do the following:
■ ■

Under Name, enter b. Under Type of Parameter, select Length.

300 | Chapter 8 Scheduling

Click OK.

15 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog, under Parameters, click New. 16 In the Parameter Properties dialog, do the following:
■ ■ ■

Under Name, enter h. Under Type of Parameter, select Length. Click OK.

17 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog, click OK. 18 In the Shared Parameter dialog, select the b parameter, and click OK. 19 In the Parameter Properties dialog, click OK. 20 In the Family Types dialog, under Dimensions, select the h parameter, and click Modify. 21 In the Parameter Properties dialog, select Shared Parameter, and click Select. 22 In the Shared Parameter dialog, select the h parameter, and click OK. 23 In the Parameter Properties dialog, click OK. 24 In the Family Types dialog, click OK. NOTE The b and h parameters, which were originally family parameters, are now shared parameters. They will appear in the structural framing schedule field once they are reloaded into the project file. 25 On the Family design bar, click Load into Project. 26 When prompted to overwrite the existing version of the family, click Yes. Remove Family and Type parameter 27 In the Project Browser, under Schedules/Quantities, right-click Structural Framing Schedule, and select Properties. 28 In the Element Properties dialog, under Other, for Fields, click Edit. 29 In the Schedule Properties dialog, under Scheduled fields (in order), select Family and Type, and click Remove. The Family and Type field is removed from the Scheduled fields column. Add depth and width parameters to the beam schedule 30 Under Available Fields, select b (Width) and h (Depth), and click Add. The b and h fields are moved under Scheduled fields. 31 Under Scheduled fields, order the fields as shown by selecting them and clicking Move Up or Move Down.

Creating Shared Parameters | 301

32 In the Schedule Properties dialog, click OK. 33 In the Element Properties dialog, click OK. 34 Click File menu ➤ Close. To save changes, click File menu ➤ Save As, and save the exercise file with a unique name, or close the exercise file without saving changes. The next exercise uses a new training file. 35 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating a Type Schedule on page 302.

Creating a Type Schedule
In this exercise, you learn how to create a type schedule. Training File
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\i_RST_Schedules_Custom.rvt.

Modify the table elements 1 In the Project Browser, under Schedules/Quantities, double-click Structural Framing Schedule. 2 Modify the schedule headings as follows:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Select Mark, and enter MARK. Select b (Width), and enter W. Select h (Depth), and enter D. Select Comments, and enter REMARKS. Select the title, and enter GROUND LEVEL CONCRETE BEAM SCHEDULE.

NOTE Under the Project Browser, click Schedules/Quantities. Notice that the schedule name has changed. 3 Select headings W and D. 4 On the Options bar, click Group.

302 | Chapter 8 Scheduling

A new blank cell is created above columns W and D. 5 Click the new heading, and enter SIZE.

Select a filter 6 Right-click the open area next to the schedule, and select View Properties. 7 In the Element Properties dialog, under Other, for Filter, click Edit. 8 In the Schedule Properties dialog, do the following:
■ ■ ■ ■

Click the Filter tab. Select Reference Level for Filter by. Select Ground Level. Click OK.

9 In the Element Properties dialog, click OK. Notice the schedule is filtered and shows only the structural framing elements of the ground level.

Format units 10 Right-click the open area next to the schedule, and click View Properties. 11 In the Element Properties dialog, under Formatting, click Edit for Value. 12 In the Schedule Properties dialog, click the Formatting tab. 13 Under Fields, click b, and click Field Format. 14 In the Format dialog, do the following:
■ ■ ■

Clear Use project settings. Under Units, select Fractional inches. Under Rounding, select To the nearest 1/2".

Creating a Type Schedule | 303

Click OK.

15 Using the same method, format units for field h. 16 In the Schedule Properties dialog, click OK. 17 In the Element Properties dialog, click OK. Columns W and D now display fractional inches.

Add structural usage parameter to the beam schedule 18 In the Project Browser, under Schedules/Quantities, right-click the Ground Level Concrete Beam Schedule, and select Properties. 19 In the Element Properties dialog, under Other, for Fields, click Edit. 20 In the Schedule Properties dialog, click the Fields tab. 21 Under Available Fields, select Structural Usage, and click Add. The Structural usage is moved under Scheduled fields. 22 Under Scheduled fields, order the fields as shown by selecting them and clicking Move Up or Move Down.

304 | Chapter 8 Scheduling

23 In the Schedule Properties dialog, click OK. 24 In the Element Properties dialog, click OK. The schedule now displays the structural usage of each item.

Sort by Structural Usage 25 Right-click the open area next to the schedule, and select View Properties. 26 In the Element Properties dialog, under Sorting/Grouping, click Edit for Value. 27 In the Schedule Properties dialog ➤ Sorting/Grouping tab, do the following:
■ ■ ■

Under Sort by, select Structural Usage. Select Header. Select Footer.

Creating a Type Schedule | 305

■ ■

Select Blank Line. Click OK.

28 In the Element Properties dialog, click OK. The schedule is updated to provide both a header and footer for each type, sorted by structural usage.

29 Click File menu ➤ Close. To save changes, click File menu ➤ Save As, and save the exercise file with a unique name, or close the exercise file without saving changes. The next exercise uses a new training file. 30 Proceed to the next exercise, Customizing the Type Schedule on page 307.

306 | Chapter 8 Scheduling

Customizing the Type Schedule
In this exercise, you first add mark information to identify each beam type, you then sort the schedule by mark, hide specific columns, and finally, you add rebar information. Training File
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\i_RST_Schedules_Custom_Type.rvt.

Add mark data 1 In the Project Browser, under Structural Plans, double-click Ground Level. 2 On the Window menu, click Tile. The screen is split into two separate windows, showing both the beam schedule and Ground Level view. NOTE Close any additional views that may be opened. If prompted to save the changes to the beam family, click Yes, and provide a location for the new family file. 3 While pressing CTRL, select multiple joists on the Ground Level window as shown.

4 On the Options bar, click
■ ■

.

5 In the Element Properties dialog, do the following: Under Identity Data, enter B1 for Mark Value. Click OK.

NOTE Ignore the warning regarding elements having duplicate Mark values. The schedule is updated with the joist information.

Customizing the Type Schedule | 307

6 While pressing CTRL, select multiple joists on the Ground Level window as shown.

7 On the Options bar, click
■ ■

.

8 In the Element Properties dialog, do the following: Under Identity Data, enter B2 for Mark Value. Click OK.

NOTE Ignore the warning regarding elements having duplicate Mark values. The schedule is updated with the joist information.

308 | Chapter 8 Scheduling

9 While pressing CTRL, select multiple joists on the Ground Level window as shown.

10 On the Options bar, click
■ ■

.

11 In the Element Properties dialog, do the following: Under Identity Data, enter B3 for Mark Value. Click OK.

NOTE Ignore the warning regarding elements having duplicate Mark values. The schedule is updated with the joist information.

Customizing the Type Schedule | 309

Sort and filter the schedule by mark 12 Maximize the schedule window. 13 Right-click the open area next to the schedule, and select View Properties. 14 In the Element Properties dialog, under Sorting/Grouping, click Edit for Value. 15 In the Schedule Properties dialog, do the following:
■ ■

Clear Footer, Header, Itemize every instance, and Grand totals. Under Sort by, select Mark.

16 In the Schedules Properties dialog, click the Filter tab, and do the following:

Under Filter by, select Mark, then select contains, and enter B.

310 | Chapter 8 Scheduling

Click OK.

17 In the Element Properties dialog, click OK. Notice the schedule is not itemized and does not show each beam, but instead groups all the beams of the same mark in a single row.

Hide/unhide columns 18 Right-click the open area next to the schedule, and click View Properties. 19 In the Element Properties dialog, under Formatting, click Edit for Value. 20 In the Schedule Properties dialog, do the following:
■ ■ ■

Under Fields, select Reference Level. Under Field Formatting, select Hidden field. Click OK.

21 In the Element Properties dialog, click OK. The Reference Level column is now hidden. NOTE To show all hidden columns, right-click the open area next to the schedule, select Unhide All Columns. You can also hide a column by right-clicking the desired column, and selecting Hide Column(s) from the drop-down menu. Rename existing rebar parameter 22 Right-click the open area next to the schedule, and click View Properties. 23 In the Element Properties dialog, under Formatting, click Edit for Value.

Customizing the Type Schedule | 311

select Text. under Fields. click OK. Click OK. 32 In the Element Properties dialog. Click OK. Under Heading. Rebar will not be added to the model with the data entered in this dialog. click Add Parameter. 27 In the Element Properties dialog. Add new rebar parameter 26 Right-click the open area next to the schedule. select REBAR. 31 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 312 | Chapter 8 Scheduling . This parameter provides text information that is added to all beams within the model. 30 Under Scheduled fields. 29 In the Parameter Properties dialog. 25 In the Element Properties dialog. 28 In the Schedule Properties dialog.24 In the Schedule Properties dialog. order the fields as shown by selecting them and clicking Move Up or Move Down. click OK. and click View Properties. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Data. The new rebar field is added. The Rebar field is renamed. click Edit for Value. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Fields. Under Type of Parameter. enter Top Bars for Name. enter Bottom Bars. click OK.

Creating an Instance Schedule | 313 . and under Top Bars. Creating an Instance Schedule In this exercise. 37 Click File menu ➤ Close. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Edit for Value. click Group. and under Top Bars. A new blank cell is created above the columns. and save the exercise file with a unique name. select 2-#5C. and click View Properties. enter 2-#5A 1-#5B. 2 Right-click the open area next to the schedule. as well as the total cost of all structural items for the ground level of the structure. under Schedules/Quantities. and under Top Bars. under Bottom Bars. The schedule is updated with the joist information. 35 Click the new heading. or close the exercise file without saving changes. you create a formula to calculate the unit cost for each joist instance. For Joists B2. To save changes. enter 2-#7A 1-#7B. and open Imperial\i_RST_Schedules_Formula. Enter rebar data 36 Enter the following rebar set information for each rebar instance as follows: ■ ■ ■ For Joists B1. enter 2-#6A 1-#6B. select2-#5C. 38 Proceed to the next exercise.rvt. Creating an Instance Schedule on page 313. click Training Files. For Joists B3. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. 34 On the Options bar. under the Fields parameter. double-click Ground Level Concrete Beam Schedule. Create the formula 1 In the Project Browser. enter 2-#5 C. and enter REBAR. click File menu ➤ Save As. under Bottom Bars. The next exercise uses a new training file.Group rebar columns 33 Select both the Bottom Bars and Top Bars headings. under Bottom Bars.

Enter Volume*Cost/1'^3 for Formula. the value will be applied to all elements of the same type. Select Number for Type. click OK. and click Add. Click Calculated Value. 314 | Chapter 8 Scheduling . select Volume. The schedule will calculate the total cost for all joists. ■ Click OK.4 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. 5 In the Calculated Value dialog. Because cost is a type parameter. 8 Under Joist B1. and click Add. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Enter Total Cost for Name. 6 In the Schedule Properties dialog. select Cost. click OK. enter 3 for Cost. Note that the formula will calculate the total cost based on a volume unit of 1 cubic yard. and press ENTER. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Available Fields. Under Available Fields.

enter 1. click Edit for Value. Under Fields. 16 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 9 Under Joist B2. select Total Cost. Under Field Formatting. clear Use default settings. 12 In the Schedule Properties dialog. select Currency.NOTE The cost value represents a random value chosen for demonstration purposes only. In the Format dialog. and click View Properties. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click the Formatting tab. Under Rounding. Under Unit Symbol. under Formatting. select 2 Decimal Places. Creating an Instance Schedule | 315 . click Edit for Value. under Formatting. Click OK. Also notice that the Total Cost parameter does not have a unit value assigned. select Total Cost. click OK. Under Field formatting. select $. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click the Formatting tab. and press ENTER. Format total cost to include currency value 14 Right-click the open area next to the schedule. click Field Format. The schedule now includes the sum for Total Cost. select Calculate totals.5 for Cost. and click View Properties. 13 In the Element Properties dialog. Under Fields. 10 Right-click the open area next to the schedule. Under Units. 11 In the Element Properties dialog.

To save changes. 20 Proceed to the next lesson. click File menu ➤ Save As. and open Imperial\i_RST_Schedules_Create_GCS. The Total Cost column displays a currency value in Dollars. and save the exercise file with a unique name. The next lesson uses a new training file. click OK. click Training Files. 17 In the Schedule Properties dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. click OK. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Create the Graphical Column Schedule In this exercise you learn how to create a graphical column schedule. Creating a Graphical Column Schedule In this lesson. you learn how to create a graphical column schedule for the current project. or close the exercise file without saving changes. Creating a Graphical Column Schedule on page 316.rvt.■ Click OK. 19 Click File menu ➤ Close. 316 | Chapter 8 Scheduling .

4 In the Levels Hidden dialog. and select View Properties. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. Garage Level .1. and click OK.Create the schedule 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 5 In the Element Properties dialog. 6 On the Toolbar. The schedule is created automatically. click . NOTE These levels will not appear on the graphical column schedule. select Foundation. and Ground Level. Create the Graphical Column Schedule | 317 . under Other. Notice that the first level on the schedule is Level 2. click OK. click Graphical Column Schedule. and zoom in on the schedule. click Edit for Hidden Levels. 2 Right-click the column schedule.

The schedule also provides the nearest grid intersection and the value for the offset distance between the grid and column. Columns located at off-grid locations 318 | Chapter 8 Scheduling .NOTE The graphical column schedule includes columns located at off-grid locations as shown below.

under Horizontal Widths. and click OK. enter 3". under Vertical Heights. and for Grid Appearance. for Below Bottom Level. click Edit. In the Graphical Column Schedule Properties dialog. click OK. select Group Similar Locations. and select View Properties. For Column Locations. 8 In the Element Properties dialog. Notice that all columns located at off-grid locations are now grouped together under a single column. ■ In the Element Properties dialog. enter 3". do the following: ■ ■ Under Graphics.Columns displayed in plan view Grouping and formatting off-grid columns 7 Right-click the schedule. Create the Graphical Column Schedule | 319 .

3 In the Element Properties dialog. clear both Include Off-Grid Columns and Group Similar Locations. and select View Properties. under Graphical Column Schedules. 4 In the Graphical Column Schedule Properties dialog.rvt. and open Imperial\i_RST_Schedules_Customize_GCS. and then select Bold. and click OK.Include/Exclude columns at off-grid locations In the graphical column schedule view. 12 Proceed to the next exercise. you can include or exclude columns located at off-grid locations. select Courier New from the drop-down list. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. Change the Schedule Appearance In this exercise. and then select Bold and Italic. click File menu ➤ Save As. or close the exercise file without saving changes. Change the Schedule Appearance on page 320. 320 | Chapter 8 Scheduling . To save changes. 9 Right-click the schedule. under Graphics. For Level text. The next exercise uses a new training file. Notice the schedule view only displays those columns located at grid intersections. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Edit for Value. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Training Files. and select View Properties. do the following: ■ ■ For Title text. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 11 Click File menu ➤ Close. 2 Right-click the schedule. Customize text 1 In the Project Browser. select Arial Black from the drop-down list. you learn how to add a title to the schedule and how to customize text and graphic appearance. double-click Graphical Column Schedule 1. under Text Appearance.

5 Click the Grid Appearance tab. under Identity Data. Enter 2" for Level Names. 8 In the Element Properties dialog. 7 Click OK. Change the Schedule Appearance | 321 . enter Steel Column Schedule for Title. 9 Click OK. 6 Under Horizontal Widths: ■ ■ Enter 2" for Column Locations.

click . 12 Click any column on Level 7 to place the tag. 322 | Chapter 8 Scheduling . 14 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. and clear Leader. 11 On the Options bar. Click OK. 18 In the Filter dialog. and click OK. clear Structural Columns. 13 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 16 Draw a pick box around the entire schedule.Tag the columns 10 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Tag All Not Tagged. Click Apply. 15 Enter ZF to fit the entire column schedule in the drawing area. 17 On the Options bar. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Category. Under Orientation. select Vertical. click Tag ➤ By Category. click Vertical. select Structural Column Tags.

and move the tags until they are positioned approximately as shown. click 20 On the Toolbar. Split the column schedule 21 Right-click the schedule. . Change the Schedule Appearance | 323 . and select View Properties. click .19 On the Toolbar. and zoom in on one of the column tags.

rvt.0". you create multiple sheets for the graphical column schedule. do the following. 3 In the Project Browser. click File menu ➤ Save As. enter S-3. expand Sheets (all). Change the sheet name and number 4 On the Design Bar. click Training Files. select E1 30 x 42 Horizontal: E1 30x42 Horizontal. 23 Click OK. enter Steel Column Schedule. click Sheet. To save changes.22 In the Element Properties dialog. Under Column Locations per Segment. Creating Multiple Sheets for the Graphical Column Schedule In this exercise. and save the exercise file with a unique name. and open Imperial\i_RST_Schedules_Multiple_Sheets_GCS. A titleblock and drawing borders are displayed on the drawing sheet. and click OK. The schedule is split into multiple segments with 10 column locations per segment. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 25 Proceed to the next exercise. Click OK. 5 On the Options bar. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 6 In the Element Properties dialog. ■ ■ Under View Scale. enter 1/4" = 1' . The new sheet is displayed in the Project Browser. 324 | Chapter 8 Scheduling . or close the exercise file without saving changes. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. and select the titleblock. 24 Click File menu ➤ Close. The next exercise uses a new training file. click Modify. click ■ ■ ■ . do the following: Under Identity Data ➤ Sheet Name. Under Sheet Number. Create a sheet 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. enter 10. Creating Multiple Sheets for the Graphical Column Schedule on page 324.

click Modify. and click Add View to Sheet. Creating Multiple Sheets for the Graphical Column Schedule | 325 . 11 In the Element Properties dialog. do the following: Under Identity Data ➤ Sheet Name. click . The first segment will be placed on Sheet S-3. select Graphical Column Schedule. 16 In the Element Properties dialog. 8 In the Views dialog. Add the column schedule to the sheet 7 On the View tab of the Design bar. 10 Select the schedule. select Steel Column Schedule. Add additional sheets 12 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 17 Repeat previous steps to add 2 additional sheets. under Extents. and enter S-5 and S-6 for sheet numbers.The sheet name and number are displayed in the titleblock and in the Project Browser. expand Sheets (all). select E1 30 x 42 Horizontal: E1 30x42 Horizontal. 15 On the Options bar. click ■ ■ ■ . click OK. and click OK. enter 1 for Segments in Viewport. click Sheet. click Add View. Click OK. and select the titleblock. and click to place the view. enter S-4. Place remaining views 18 On the Project Browser. and on the Options Bar. 14 On the Design Bar. 13 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. Under Sheet Number. 9 Move the cursor to the center of the sheet. and double-click Sheet S-4. Enter Steel Column Schedule for name.

8 In the New Database dialog. The next exercise uses a new training file. and open Imperial\i_RST_Schedules_Export_Project_Info. 12 Click OK in the remaining dialogs. click OK. and click Next. 7 In the ODBC Microsoft Access Setup dialog. 6 Click Finish. 29 Proceed to the next exercise. and click to place the view. and click to place the view. click Training Files.rvt. expand Sheets (all). click File menu ➤ Save As. and double-click Sheet S-6. click Graphical Column Schedule 1. and drag it onto the sheet. you learn how to export project information into a Microsoft® Access 2000 database. and drag it onto the sheet. Export the schedule 1 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ ODBC Database. expand Sheets (all). In the left pane of the Open dialog. under Database Name. enter Revit_Project. 2 In the Select Data Source dialog. under Database. under Graphical Column Schedule. select the Microsoft Access driver (*mdb). 22 On the Project Browser. 326 | Chapter 8 Scheduling . click Graphical Column Schedule 1.19 On the Project Browser. 25 On the Project Browser. under Graphical Column Schedule. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and double-click Sheet S-5 23 On the Project Browser. 10 When the confirmation message displays. and then open the database in Microsoft Access. 20 Move the cursor to the center of the sheet. click Graphical Column Schedule 1. click OK. 4 In the Create New Data Source dialog. The process that you use to export the database is similar for any other ODBC-compliant database. 11 In the OBDC Microsoft Access Setup dialog. under Graphical Column Schedule. and click Next. 27 Move the cursor to the center of the sheet. click the File Data Source tab. 21 Position the schedule as necessary. 26 On the Project Browser. click Create. Exporting Project Information with ODBC In this lesson. Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access In this exercise. you learn how to export project information to an ODBC (Open DataBase Connectivity) compliant database. and click OK to create the database. and click to place the view. 28 Click File menu ➤ Close. 5 Enter RevitDSN for the name of the DSN. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 9 Under Directories. or close the exercise file without saving changes. and drag it onto the sheet. To save changes.mdb. Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access on page 326. 3 Click New. select a location for the database file. 24 Move the cursor to the center of the sheet.

instance tables include a Type ID column containing the ID of the instance’s type. 14 Proceed to the next tutorial. click File menu ➤ Save As.Revit Structure creates 2 tables: one that lists all of the element instances in a project. The next tutorial uses a new training file. or close the exercise file without saving changes. For example. and some instance tables include a Room ID column containing the ID of the room that the instance is in. Elements IDs are also used to establish relationships between elements in different tables. A unique element ID is used to identify exported elements. and save the exercise file with a unique name. so that each table of elements includes an ID column. Steel Details on page 329. To save changes. Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access | 327 . 13 Click File menu ➤ Close. and one that lists all of the element types in a project (see below).

328 .

In the left pane of the Open dialog. Structural Plans. you learn how to use Revit Structure 2009 to create steel details from the structural model (model-based). revise a callout view. click Training Files. and double-click Level 4.rvt. you begin with a framed model as the basis of your details. Prepare the welded brace elevation view 1 In the Project Browser.Steel Details 9 In this tutorial. and how to create a drafting detail using the tools provided (drafting-detail). revise an existing elevation view. 2 Select . Detail drawings describe how particular pieces of the structure go together and are typically created in the middle to later portion of the design process after the general building shape and structural elements have been decided upon. expand Views (all). and open Imperial\i_RST_DET. and draw a zoom box around the northwest stair opening as shown. You cut a section in plan. 329 . Cutting Sections and Adding Views to Sheets Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and add these views to a sheet. This tutorial comprises the following model-based steel detail exercises: ■ ■ ■ Welded Brace Connection Bolted Angle Connection Glazing Support Connection Setting Up Section Views on Sheets In this lesson.

and drag the controls to resize such that only the Level 4 area is visible.3 Double-click the elevation bubble to open the elevation view.0". Click Detail Level ➤ Fine. 7 Select . Create the section view 6 In the Project Browser. under Structural Plans. 4 In the elevation view. and select 3/4" =1' . double-click Level 4. 5 On the View Control Bar: ■ ■ ■ Click Scale control. Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. and draw a zoom box around grid line intersection 1-E. click Section. select the elevation crop view. 8 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 330 | Chapter 9 Steel Details .

Revise the callout view 14 In the Project Browser. 11 Double-click the section bubble to open the section view. and drag the view controls so that only Level 4 is visible.0". A callout symbol is located in this view at the south wall. Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. Cutting Sections and Adding Views to Sheets | 331 . 15 Select . click Modify. under Elevations (Building Elevation).9 Draw a section as shown. double-click West Elevation. 12 Select the section crop view. Click Detail Level ➤ Fine. 13 On the View Control Bar: ■ ■ ■ Click Scale control. 10 On the Design Bar. 16 Double-click on the callout head to open the view. and zoom in on the south wall at Level 4. and select 1/2" =1' .

24 In the Views dialog. 21 Right-click S-6 Unnamed. 31 Move the cursor onto the sheet. 29 In the Project Browser. 27 In the Views dialog. 332 | Chapter 9 Steel Details . right-click S-6 . 26 In the Project Browser. and click Add View. 19 In the Select a Title block dialog. and select 3/4" =1' . 28 Move the cursor onto the sheet. and click OK. and click Add View to Sheet.17 On the View Control Bar: ■ ■ ■ Click Scale control. and click to place the view. 30 In the Views dialog. and click to place the view. and callout views on the sheet 18 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Sheet. Create a sheet and place the section. right-click S-6 . select Elevation: Elevation 1-a. 23 In the Project Browser.Steel Details. and click Add View to Sheet. and click to place the view. Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. and click Add View. 22 In the Sheet Title dialog. expand Sheets (all). select E1 30x42 Horizontal. enter Steel Details for Name. and click Add View. 25 Move the cursor onto the sheet. and click Add View to Sheet.0".Steel Details. Click Detail Level ➤ Fine. 20 In the Project Browser. right-click S-6 . elevation.Steel Details. select Section: Section 1. select Elevation: Callout of West Elevation. and click Rename. and click OK.

and draw a zoom box around the midpoint of the beam where the Detailing Steel | 333 .rvt. and a facade support detail to the model. a bolted angle detail. You will sketch the lines in a model view. and save the model to a location of your choice using the following file name: i_RST_DET-in progress.32 Click File menu ➤ Save As. i_RST_DET-in progress. Sketch line work 1 In the Project Browser. you add a welded bracing detail. double click Elevation 1-a.rvt. Detailing Steel In this lesson. The first part of the exercise involves adding a plate to the underside of a beam to support the bracing. Detailing Steel on page 333. Creating a Welded Bracing Detail Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. . under Elevations (Interior Elevation). 2 On the Toolbar. click braces meet at Level 4. 33 Proceed to the next lesson.

6 Sketch a vertical line down 1' -1 3/8" from the bottom flange as shown. enter the value. 5 Place the cursor near the bottom flange of the beam. TIP After establishing the line direction.3 Select the left brace. and enter SM to snap to the midpoint. click Detail Lines. 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 334 | Chapter 9 Steel Details . and drag the shape handle (two small triangles at the brace end) to move the brace so it is not touching the beam flange.

select Numerical. click . 13 On the Options Bar. and enter 1' 8" for the Offset value. click Detail Lines. enter 2' 6" for Offset. 7 On the Options Bar. you create 2 detail lines that are offset from this vertical line. Creating a Welded Bracing Detail | 335 . 14 Place the cursor on the bottom flange of the beam as shown. and select Copy. and click to place the detail line. click Offset. 11 Repeat the same steps to place a vertical line on the opposite side. A line displays that is offset from the highlighted line. 10 Click to place this line.Next. 9 Place the cursor near the vertical line to highlight it. 8 On the Options Bar. 12 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.

click Modify. and select the horizontal detail line. click Detail Lines. 16 Enter 3' 9" for the temporary dimension value as shown. 17 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.15 On the Design Bar. and sketch 2 detail lines to connect the horizontal line to the vertical lines as shown. 336 | Chapter 9 Steel Details .

and select the weld symbol. 20 Click Modify.18 Select the middle vertical line that you used as a reference line. Add weld symbols 19 In the Project Browser. drag it into the view as shown. and enter 3/8. click the left top weld annotation. and press DELETE to delete this element. click Add a Leader. Repeat for the left bottom value. Repeat for the right bottom value. 24 On the Options Bar. The weld symbol has 4 numerical parameters that are currently set to 0. 21 Select the weld symbol. 23 On the Design Bar. and enter a period. 22 Click the right top weld annotation. Creating a Welded Bracing Detail | 337 . 25 Drag the leader arrowhead to the position as shown. click Modify. expand Families ➤ Annotation Symbols ➤ Weld Symbol ➤ Select Both. and click to place it.

338 | Chapter 9 Steel Details . 27 Right-click the new weld symbol. 28 In the Element Properties dialog. and click Properties. Under Graphics. select Weld Contour-Empty for Top Symbol. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Structural. Click OK. select Weld All Around.26 Use the same technique to add another weld symbol as shown.

30 On the Options Bar. click Text. i_RST_DET-in progress. Creating a Bolted Angle Detail Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. you add 2 angles to the model using an angle family that has been loaded into the project. 1 In the Project Browser. 36 Proceed to the next exercise. 34 Draw a leader to the brace and enter L8x8. double-click Section 1. and enter 3/8" PL for text. 33 On the Options Bar.Label the angles and the plate 29 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.rvt. under Sections. Then you add some annotations. click Text. In the first part of the exercise. click . TYPICAL for text as shown. 32 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Creating a Bolted Angle Detail | 339 . Creating a Bolted Angle Detail on page 339. 35 Click File menu ➤ Save. click . 31 Draw a text leader to the plate.

click Text. 7 On the Options Bar. click . 5 Sketch a vertical line through the center of the left set of bolts as shown.2 In the Project Browser. Add annotations 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. select L4x4x5/16. under Families ➤ Detail Items ➤ L-Angle-Bolted Connection Section. 6 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 340 | Chapter 9 Steel Details . click Detail Lines. 3 Drag the family onto the grid line in the view as shown.

1 In the Project Browser. double-click West Elevation. click Level 4 at Grid 4.rvt. you add members to support exterior wall glazing. 2 On the Toolbar. and draw a zoom box around the callout at the intersection on Creating a Facade Support Detail | 341 . 9 Click File menu ➤ Save. . under Elevations (Building Elevation).8 Enter the text notes as shown. Creating a Facade Support Detail on page 341. 10 Proceed to the next exercise. In this exercise. i_RST_DET-in progress. Creating a Facade Support Detail Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise.

and click to place it. 342 | Chapter 9 Steel Details . On the right side of the view is an imported symbol that represents a curtain wall. You will attach a channel in section to the outrigger for use as a member of the facade support system. click . 5 Drag the channel onto the drawing area. expand Families ➤ Detail Items ➤ C-Channel Section. 7 Press the SPACEBAR to rotate the channel twice.3 Double-click the callout head to open Callout of West Elevation. 4 In the Project Browser. 8 On the Edit toolbar. move it to the position shown. 6 Click Modify and select the channel. select C5x6. and select the left side of the column as shown.7.

9 Next. Creating a Facade Support Detail | 343 . 10 Continue to use the align tool to align the channel to the bottom of the outrigger as shown. select the back of the channel as shown.

13 Click the open area outside of the channel and enter C5x6. 344 | Chapter 9 Steel Details . expand Families ➤ Detail Items ➤ Bolt-Section.7. a new training file is supplied. Creating a Drafting View Detail In this lesson. You can save the open file if you wish. click Text. select the bolt. and drag it onto the outrigger and channel as shown. you learn how to create a drafting view detail for a deck span transition using the drafting tools provided in Revit Structure. Creating a Drafting View Detail on page 344. A325 BOLT. 16 In the Project Browser. Add annotations 12 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. In the next lesson. 17 Click File menu ➤ Close.11 In the Project Browser. double-click S-6 Steel Detail to view the results of your work in the sheet view. 18 Proceed to the next lesson. under Sheets. 15 Press ESC twice to exit the Text tool. 14 Click near the bolt and enter 3/4" DIA.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. Align the bottom of the joist seat with the top of the beam as shown. click Drafting View. click Training Files. Click OK. select 1 1/2" = 1' .Side: 14K3. and double-click Typical Detail . select Detail Component.Creating a Deck Span Transition Detail Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 3 In the Project Browser.0". select Detail Component. enter Typical Detail . 10 Position the joist on the right side of the beam. 11 On the Design bar.Deck Span Transition. Create the drafting view 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 5 In the Type Selector. select AISC Wide Flange Shapes . and open Imperial\i_RST_Deck_Span_Detail. 9 In the Type Selector. Load detail components 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Name.Section: W18x35. Creating a Deck Span Transition Detail | 345 . 8 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. expand Drafting Views. Under Scale. 7 On the Design bar.rvt. select K-Series Bar Joist .Deck Span Transition. click Modify. 2 In the New Drafting dialog. 6 Click the drawing area to place the component.

346 | Chapter 9 Steel Details . 24 Align the bottom of the decking with the top of the joist and move the deck to the left approximately as shown. select AISC Tube Shapes . select Roof Decking-Side: 1. click Modify. and continue to move the pointer to the right until the deck is drawn as shown.12 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 18 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 16 Press the SPACEBAR to rotate the orientation of the deck.5 WR 22. 17 On the Design bar. select Repeating Detail : Metal Deck. 22 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. select Repeating Detail.Section: HSS2-1/2x2-1/2x. select Detail Component. 20 Place the tube on the top flange of the steel beam directly next to the end of the joist seat as shown. 21 On the Design bar. 15 Move the pointer to the right to begin placing the deck. select Detail Component. 14 Click the end of the joist. 13 In the Type Selector.125. click Modify. 19 In the Type Selector. 23 In the Type Selector.

Enter 2 @ 12 for Bottom Weld Length. clear Symbol Left. and on the Options Bar. click Modify. click ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ . Under Other. Add weld symbols 30 In the Project Browser. Click OK. Creating a Deck Span Transition Detail | 347 . 32 Select the weld symbol. 33 In the Element Properties dialog. drag it into the view as shown. select K-Series Bar Joist-Section: 14K3. 31 On the Design Bar. change the following instance parameters: Under Structural. and click to place it.25 On the Design bar. Enter 3/16" for Bottom Weld Size. 29 On the Design bar. select Detail Component. and align the top of the joist with the bottom of the deck as shown. 28 Place the joist to the left of the beam. and select Symbol Right. click Modify. select Field Weld. 27 In the Type Selector. expand Families ➤ Annotation Symbols ➤ Weld Symbol ➤ select the bottom. click Modify. 26 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.

36 Drag the leader arrowhead to the position as shown.34 On the Design Bar. click . click Modify. 41 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Text. click Modify. 39 Draw a text leader to the steel deck and enter STL DECK SEE PLAN for text. click Text. 348 | Chapter 9 Steel Details . click Add a Leader. 40 On the Design bar. 38 On the Options Bar. 35 On the Options Bar. 42 Repeat the previous steps to add the remaining text and leader to the detail view as shown. and select the weld symbol. Add text to the detail view 37 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.

Concrete Reinforcement Modelling on page 351.43 Click File menu ➤ Save As. Creating a Deck Span Transition Detail | 349 . 44 Proceed to the next tutorial. and navigate to a folder location of your choice.

350 .

Reinforcement in a Beam In this exercise. you learn how to model reinforcement using the sketching tools and rebar library provided with Revit Structure. using the Revit Structure rebar shapes library.Concrete Reinforcement Modelling 10 In this tutorial. Each exercise shows how specific reinforcement elements are built while demonstrating the modelling capabilities of Revit Structure. you model reinforcement in a concrete beam. you learn how to use Revit Structure 2009 to model concrete reinforcement from the structural project. 351 . This tutorial comprises the following concrete reinforcement modelling exercises: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Reinforcement in a Beam Reinforcement in a Column Area Reinforcement in a Structural Wall Area Reinforcement in a Slab Path Reinforcement in a Slab Sketching Reinforcement in a Footing Sketching Reinforcement in a Structural Wall Concrete Modelling Examples In this lesson.

click Training Files. under Detail Views (Detail). positioned to the right of the drawing area. The Rebar Shape Browser launches. Open detail view 1 In the Project Browser. 2 On the Toolbar. This browser provides multiple rebar shape types that can be placed within the specified host. Launch the rebar shape browser 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.rvt. click . Some of the rebar line weights were increased in the illustrations for training purposes. NOTE The line weights in your file may differ from the examples shown. and open Imperial\i_RST_Concrete_Reinf. click Rebar ➤ Place Rebar Parallel.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 352 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . The active rebar shape is highlighted and corresponds to the shape specified on the Options bar. double-click Beam Detail. and draw a pick box around the section view of the beam located in the center of the drawing area. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

The library is located in the Rebar Shapes folder in the Imperial Library. the Rebar Shape Library is already loaded in this training file. Place rebar parallel to the beam face 4 In the Type Selector. scroll down the list of available shapes. 7 Click the bottom edge of the beam to place the rebar. Notice that the rebar shape changes as you select a different beam edge. select Rebar Bar: #4. and select Rebar Shape: S3. For training purposes. 5 Click in the Rebar Shape Browser.NOTE You can open or close the Rebar Shape Browser by clicking on the Options Bar. 6 Hover over the section view. Reinforcement in a Beam | 353 .

Set rebar spacing 11 Select the rebar shapes that you placed in the previous steps. and on the Options Bar. For Spacing. approximately as shown. scroll down the list of available shapes. scroll down the list of available shapes. and select Rebar Shape: 01. click Modify. and select Rebar Shape: T9. click Rebar ➤ Place Rebar Perpendicular. 354 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . select Maximum Spacing. 14 Place 2 rebar in the detail view. 15 On the Design Bar. 13 Click in the Rebar Shape Browser.8 Click in the Rebar Shape Browser. enter 0’ 6”. 17 Click in the Rebar Shape Browser. 10 On the Design Bar. click Rebar ➤ Place Rebar Perpendicular. Place rebar perpendicular to the beam face 12 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. scroll down the list of available shapes. 16 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. do the following: ■ ■ For Layout. and select Rebar Shape: 01. 9 Click the top edge of the view to place the rebar.

select Fixed Number.18 Pace a single rebar at the bottom of the detail view. click Modify. For Layout. Reinforcement in a Beam | 355 . For Quantity. click Modify. and on the Options Bar. 21 On the Design Bar. Set rebar visibility 22 Draw a pick box to select the rebar as shown. enter 4. Set rebar spacing 20 Select the single rebar that you just placed. do the following: ■ ■ ■ For Rebar Size. select Rebar Bar: #6. 19 On the Design Bar. approximately as shown.

29 Click or drag the ViewCube to re-orient the view until the south side of the structure is visible. click . for 3D View. under 3D Views. 24 In the Element Properties dialog. select Detail Level: Fine. select both View unobscured and View as solid. double-click 3D.23 On the Options Bar. 30 On the Toolbar. click OK. click . 26 In the Element Properties dialog. View rebar in 3D 27 In the Project Browser. click Edit for View Visibility States. 28 On the View Control Bar. under Graphics. 25 In the Rebar Element View Visibility States dialog. and draw a zoom box around the beam as shown 356 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . and click OK.

Reinforcement in a Beam | 357 .Notice that the rebar sets are visible. and draw a zoom box around the end of the beam. click 32 Select the rebar as shown. Modify the rebar length 31 On the Toolbar. .

click File menu ➤ Save As. 35 Proceed to the next exercise. 358 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . Reinforcement in a Column on page 359. and save the exercise file with a unique name. The next exercise uses a new training file.33 Click and drag the rebar shape handles to change the length of the rebar as required. To save changes. or close the exercise file without saving changes. 34 Click File menu ➤ Close.

you model reinforcement in a concrete column. Open detail view 1 In the Project Browser. positioned to the right of the drawing area. under Detail Views (Detail). Some of the rebar line weights were increased in the illustrations for training purposes. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Reinforcement in a Column | 359 . click Rebar ➤ Place Rebar Parallel. 2 On the Toolbar. using the Revit Structure rebar shapes library. Launch the rebar shape browser 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click .Reinforcement in a Column In this exercise. This browser provides multiple rebar shape types that can be placed within the specified host. click Training Files. and open Imperial\i_RST_Concrete_Reinf. double-click Column Detail.rvt. The Rebar Shape Browser launches. and draw a pick box around the section view of the column located in the center of the drawing area. The active rebar shape is highlighted and corresponds to the shape specified on the Options bar. NOTE The line weights in your file may differ from the examples shown.

For Layout. 7 Click the bottom edge of the column to place the rebar as shown. The library is located in the Rebar Shapes folder in the Imperial Library. 8 On the Design Bar. select Maximum Spacing. enter 0’ 3”. click Modify. select Rebar Bar: #4. and select Rebar Shape: T1. For training purposes. the Rebar Shape Library is already loaded in this training file. 5 Click in the Rebar Shape Browser.NOTE You can open or close the Rebar Shape Browser by clicking on the Options Bar. and on the Options Bar. For Spacing. do the following: ■ ■ ■ For Rebar Size. Notice that the rebar shape changes as you select a different column edge. Place rebar parallel to the column face 4 In the Type Selector. select Rebar Bar: #4. 360 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . 6 Hover over the section view. scroll down the list of available shapes. Set rebar spacing 9 Select the rebar that you just placed.

For Layout. scroll down the list of available shapes. and on the Options Bar. Set rebar spacing 14 Select the single rebar. click Modify. 12 Click on the Rebar Shape Browser. Reinforcement in a Column | 361 . as shown. Copy the rebar 16 Select the rebar. do the following: ■ ■ ■ For Rebar Size. Place rebar perpendicular to the column face 11 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 15 On the Design Bar. 13 Click to place a single rebar as shown. 18 Click the rebar centerline as the copy starting point. click Rebar ➤ Place Rebar Perpendicular. and select Rebar Shape: 00. select Rebar Bar: #8. 17 On the Edit toolbar. click Modify. enter 3. click (Copy). For Quantity.10 On the Design Bar. select Fixed Number.

20 On the Design Bar. Set rebar visibility 21 Select the rebar in the detail view as shown.19 Move the cursor to the opposite side of the column to select the copy end point as shown. 362 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . click Modify.

22 On the Options Bar. double-click 3D. under 3D Views. for 3D View. click Edit for View Visibility States. 24 In the Rebar Element View Visibility States dialog. select both View unobscured and View as solid. 29 On the Toolbar. 27 On the View Control Bar. select Detail Level: Fine. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. 28 Click or drag the ViewCube to re-orient the view until the south side of the structure is visible. under Graphics. click OK. 25 In the Element Properties dialog. View rebar in 3D 26 In the Project Browser. and draw a zoom box around the column as shown Reinforcement in a Column | 363 . click . and click OK. click .

click Training Files.rvt. click File menu ➤ Save As. The next exercise uses a new training file. or close the exercise file without saving changes. 31 Proceed to the next exercise. 30 Click File menu ➤ Close.Notice that the rebar sets are visible. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you model area reinforcement in a structural wall. and open Imperial\i_RST_Area_Reinf_Wall. To save changes. Area Reinforcement in a Structural Wall on page 364. 364 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . Area Reinforcement in a Structural Wall In this exercise. and save the exercise file with a unique name.

2 On the Toolbar. and draw a zoom box around the upper north wall of the structure.Create a section view 1 In the Project Browser. NOTE The line weights in your file may differ from the examples shown. select 3/4" = 1' . select the crop view.0" for Scale. Some of the rebar line weights were increased in the illustrations for training purposes. 5 Double-click the section bubble to open the section view. double-click Garage Level-1. click Section. Area Reinforcement in a Structural Wall | 365 . 4 Add a section line that cuts through the north wall of the structure as shown. 3 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 6 On the View Control Bar. 7 In the section view. under Structural Plans. click . and drag the controls to resize the view such that only the foundation wall is shown.

double-click 3D. under 3D Views. 366 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . 9 In the Project Browser.Sketch the area reinforcement 8 Select the foundation wall.

10 Use the ViewCube to rotate the model so the north side of the structure is visible. The foundation wall will be highlighted as shown below. click (Sketch Area Reinforcement) to enter sketch mode. 12 On the Design Bar. 11 On the Options Bar. click Lines. Area Reinforcement in a Structural Wall | 367 . and trace the outline of the foundation wall as shown.

on the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. 368 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . Minor bars will be placed perpendicular (inside position) to the major bars (outside position). under Sections (Building Sections). 14 In the Project Browser. click Major Direction Edge. and select one of the horizontal lines of the outline. Bars will be placed parallel to the major direction near both wall faces. To change the major direction. The area reinforcement is automatically applied to the selected foundation wall. 13 On the Design Bar. adjacent to the major bars.NOTE The 2 short lines adjacent to the vertical line of the outline represent the rebar major direction. and is indicated on the 3D view with an X as shown. double-click Section 3.

Area Reinforcement in a Structural Wall | 369 . Remove the major bars 15 Select the area reinforcement.The area reinforcement for the foundation wall is displayed.

17 In the Element Properties dialog. under Layers. 16 On the Options Bar. click . and click OK.Notice the graphical controls to toggle the hook orientation appear at the base of the reinforcement. 370 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . clear the values for Exterior Major Direction and Interior Major Direction.

Change the number of rebar for the exterior and interior layers 18 In the Element Properties dialog. Area Reinforcement in a Structural Wall | 371 . and that the minor bars move out to the clear cover setting for the wall. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Exterior Major Number of Lines. and click OK. enter 30. enter 30.Notice the rebar for the major span direction of the foundation wall is deleted from the section view. For Interior Major Number of Lines. enter 30. under Construction. 19 In the Element Properties dialog. For Interior Minor Number of Lines. For Exterior Minor Number of Lines. enter 30. select Fixed Number. for Value. under Layers. Click OK. Reselect Interior Major Direction and Exterior Major Direction.

change all Bar Types to #4. move the area reinforcement tag approximately as shown. click Add annotation 24 Right-click in an empty part of the drawing area. click Tag ➤ By Category. . 28 Using the drag control. 27 On the Design Bar. click Modify. under Layers. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. click Modify.Notice that additional bars are added to the section view. 372 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . 20 On the Design Bar. and click Zoom to Fit. Change bar type 21 Select the Area Reinforcement. 22 On the Options Bar. 26 Click the area reinforcement to place the tag. 25 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.

Create a section view 1 In the Project Browser. click File menu ➤ Save As. and draw a zoom box around the circular foundation on the north side of the structure as shown. In the left pane of the Open dialog. or close the exercise file without saving changes. click Training Files.rvt. 30 Proceed to the next exercise. Area Reinforcement in a Slab | 373 . double-click Garage Level-1. Area Reinforcement in a Slab on page 373. Area Reinforcement in a Slab In this exercise. 2 On the Toolbar. click . Some of the rebar line weights were increased in the illustrations for training purposes. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.29 Click File menu ➤ Close. NOTE The line weights in your file may differ from the examples shown. and save the exercise file with a unique name. under Structural Plans. and open Imperial\i_RST_Area_Reinf_Slab. To save changes. you model area reinforcement in a concrete slab. The next exercise uses a new training file.

select 1/4" = 1' . select the crop view. 6 On the View Control Bar.3 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 5 Double-click the section head to open the section view. select Shading w/Edges. For Model Graphics Style. 7 In the section view. do the following: ■ ■ ■ For Scale. select Fine. For Detail Level. 4 Add a section line that cuts through the circular foundation as shown. 374 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling .0". and drag the controls to resize the view such that only the concrete slab on Garage Level-1 is shown. click Section.

9 Select the concrete slab as shown.Sketch the area reinforcement 8 In the Project Browser. 11 Using the line tool. click . 10 On the Options Bar. under Structural Plans. Area Reinforcement in a Slab | 375 . draw an area reinforcement box as shown. to enter sketch mode. double-click Garage Level -1.

double-click Section 4.12 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. 376 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . under Sections (Building Sections). 13 In the Project Browser.

18 In the Element Properties dialog. 23 Select the rebar tag. click Tag ➤ By Category. Notice the bars in the top major direction are deleted from the section view. and click OK. click . click . and on the Options Bar. click Modify. 22 On the Design Bar. 15 On the Options Bar. clear Top Major Direction. move the rebar tag approximately as shown. Add annotation 20 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. change all Bar Types to #4.The area reinforcement for the slab is displayed. 19 On the Design Bar. and click OK. Area Reinforcement in a Slab | 377 . 16 In the Element Properties dialog. 21 Click the area reinforcement to place the tag. Notice the graphical controls to toggle the hook orientation appear at each end of the area reinforcement. Change the area reinforcement properties 14 Select the area reinforcement. under Layers. under Layers. select Attached End. Change bar type 17 On the Options Bar. 24 Using the drag control.

Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Sketch the path reinforcement 1 In the Project Browser. and open Imperial\i_RST_Path_Reinf. Path Reinforcement in a Slab on page 378. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. The next exercise uses a new training file. click Training Files. under Structural Plans. 4 Select the slab opening.25 Click File menu ➤ Close. double-click Level 3. you model path reinforcement in a concrete slab. 2 On the Toolbar.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 378 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . You are now in sketch mode. and draw a zoom box around the slab opening on the north side of the structure as shown. Path Reinforcement in a Slab In this exercise. or close the exercise file without saving changes. click Rebar ➤ Sketch Path Reinforcement. click . 26 Proceed to the next exercise. To save changes. click File menu ➤ Save As.

The path reinforcement for the slab opening is displayed. 8 On the Design Bar. 6 Draw a path reinforcement box approximately as shown. 7 On the Design Bar. Path Reinforcement in a Slab | 379 . NOTE The lines you sketch for the path reinforcement box cannot intersect and must not form a closed loop. click . click Finish Sketch. and enter 1' 0" for Offset. click Modify.5 On the Options Bar. Change bar type 9 Select the Path Reinforcement.

For Detail Level.Type. click Modify. under Layers. For Model Graphics Style. 16 On the View Control Bar. 15 Double-click the section head to open the section view. and drag the controls to resize the view such that only the edge of the opening in the slab and the path reinforcement on Level 3 is shown.0". select the crop view. and click OK.10 On the Options Bar. 17 In the section view. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. select 1/4" = 1' . 380 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . 12 On the View tab of the Design Bar. for Primary Bar . 14 On the Design Bar. do the following: ■ ■ ■ For Scale. select Fine. click Create a section view . click Section. select Shading w/Edges. 13 Add a section line that cuts through the slab opening as shown. select #4.

23 On the Design Bar. 20 Click the toggle control to change the rebar hook type as shown. 25 Using the drag control. . Notice the toggle hook orientation icon appears. 24 Select the rebar tag. click 19 Select the rebar. 22 Click the path reinforcement to place the tag. move the rebar tag approximately as shown. Path Reinforcement in a Slab | 381 . click Tag ➤ By Category.NOTE The line weights in your file may differ from the examples shown. and on the Options Bar. Some of the rebar line weights were increased in the illustrations for training purposes. select Free End. Change rebar properties 18 On the Toolbar. and draw a zoom box around the edge of the slab opening. Add annotation 21 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Modify.

or close the exercise file without saving changes. Sketch Reinforcement in a Footing In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and position the upper drag bar as shown. click structure. . under Structural Plans. Open section view 1 In the Project Browser. NOTE The line weights in your file may differ from the examples shown. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 382 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling .26 Click File menu ➤ Close. 2 On the Toolbar. The next exercise uses a new training file. click Training Files. and zoom in on the southwest corner of the 3 Click the section line. and open Imperial\i_RST_Footing_Detail. Some of the rebar line weights were increased in the illustrations for training purposes. click File menu ➤ Save As. Sketch Reinforcement in a Footing on page 382.rvt. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 27 Proceed to the next exercise. draw a pick box. double-click Ground Level. To save changes. you use the tools provided with Revit Structure to sketch reinforcement in a concrete footing.

click . 5 Double-click the section bubble.4 Press ESC. Sketch Reinforcement in a Footing | 383 . Add wall keys at the bottom of wall 6 On the Toolbar. and draw a zoom box around the wall footing as shown. The Section 1 view opens.

8 On the Options Bar. select Boundary between faces. click Finish Sketch. Sketch 3 lines as shown. 10 On the Design Bar. 11 On the Design Bar. 384 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . 7 On the Toolbar. select Chain. click (Edit Cut Profile).NOTE For training purposes. and click (Line). Model Graphics Style is set to Shading w/Edges (on the View Control Bar). 9 Select the boundary between the wall and footing. click (Draw).

click Sketch. click Sketch. 21 Sketch a rebar by clicking inside the footing first and then moving the cursor into the wall as shown. Sketch rebar parallel to the footing and wall 18 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. The Design Bar changes to sketch mode. Sketch Reinforcement in a Footing | 385 . click Rebar ➤ Place Rebar Parallel. 20 Select the continuous footing as the host element.Sketch rebar parallel to the footing 12 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Rebar ➤ Place Rebar Parallel. 19 On the Options Bar. 13 On the Options Bar. click Finish Sketch. 14 Select the continuous footing as the host element. 17 On the Sketch tab. 16 Press ESC. 15 Sketch a straight bar by clicking inside the footing first and then moving the cursor to the right as shown.

and click Element Properties. 25 In the Element Properties dialog. click Finish Sketch. select Standard . 26 Click OK. 23 On the Sketch tab.NOTE Be sure to sketch from the footing to the wall.90 deg. Add hook 24 Right-click the rebar you added in the previous steps. 386 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . under Construction. 22 Press ESC. This rebar will not be included in rebar estimates of the structural wall. NOTE Rebar only contributes to the estimated reinforcement volume of its host. for Hook At Start.

and select the center reference plane of the structural 28 Click to place the rebar. select Rebar Bar: #8.Mirror the rebar 27 On the Options Bar. 31 Select the end of the straight bar. Sketch Reinforcement in a Footing | 387 . Place rebar perpendicular 29 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 30 In the Type Selector. (Mirror). click wall. click Rebar ➤ Place Rebar Perpendicular. and place the pointer between the hooked and straight bars approximately as shown.

click Modify. For Spacing. 388 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling .Notice the footing cover settings display when placing the rebar. 36 On the Options Bar. 37 Select the rebar set. do the following: ■ ■ For Layout. Place rebar set 34 Select the single rebar. enter 4". select Minimum Clear Spacing. 33 On the Design Bar. 35 Press the SPACEBAR to change the direction of rebar placement. 38 Drag the shape handles so the rebar set aligns with the end of the horizontal rebar as shown. 32 Click to place the first rebar as shown.

(Pick Elements). Sketch Reinforcement in a Footing | 389 . 41 On the Options Bar. Set rebar cover by element 40 On the Toolbar.39 On the Design Bar. Notice the default rebar cover settings are displayed in the section view as dotted lines. click (Edit Rebar Cover). click Modify. click 42 Select the footing.

(Pick Faces). enter Exposed/Cast against Earth. Notice that the rebar cover has changed to the new setting. . do the following: Click Add. For Setting. enter 0' 2". Click OK. 390 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . 47 Select the face of the structural wall. click 46 On the Options Bar. Set rebar cover by face 45 On the Toolbar.43 On the Options Bar. 44 On the Rebar Cover Settings dialog. For Description. click ■ ■ ■ ■ (Edit Cover Settings).

Check rebar clear spacing 51 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.48 On the Options Bar. 50 Repeat the same process to set the rebar cover on the opposite face of the structural wall. Sketch Reinforcement in a Footing | 391 . select Exposed/Cast against Earth. Notice the rebar cover has changed to the new setting. do the following: Under Description. click ■ ■ . 49 On the Rebar Cover Settings dialog. 52 Move the cursor over the first rebar in the footing array as shown. click Dimension. Click OK.

The vertical snapping plane of the bar is highlighted. To save changes. 56 Proceed to the next exercise. or close the exercise file without saving changes. The next exercise uses a new training file. Delete the dimension after verifying the clearance requirements have been met. 55 Click File menu ➤ Close. 392 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . 54 Click to select this plane and place the dimension. click File menu ➤ Save As. Sketch Reinforcement in a Structural Wall on page 393. 53 Click to select this plane. and move the cursor to the edge of the footing as shown. and save the exercise file with a unique name. NOTE The dimension is placed to check the clear space distance from the concrete face to the rebar array.

Create section view 1 In the Project Browser. Some of the rebar line weights were increased in the illustrations for training purposes. you use the tools provided with Revit Structure to sketch reinforcement in a structural wall. draw a pick box. . and zoom in on the southwest corner of the 3 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 6 Click the section line. and click the outside wall to place the section as shown. double-click Garage Level . click structure. move the cursor down.rvt. 4 Click inside the wall between grid lines B and C. click Training Files. click Modify. and open Imperial\i_RST_Wall_Detail. 5 On the Design Bar.Sketch Reinforcement in a Structural Wall In this exercise. click Section. 2 On the Toolbar. In the left pane of the Open dialog.1. Sketch Reinforcement in a Structural Wall | 393 . NOTE The line weights in your file may differ from the examples shown. and position the drag bar as shown. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. under Structural Plans.

0". Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 8 Double-click the section bubble. Click Detail Level ➤ Fine. 9 In the section view. and select 3/4" = 1'. 10 On the View Control Bar: ■ ■ ■ Click Scale control. 394 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . select the crop view. The Section 2 view opens.7 Press ESC. and drag the controls to resize the view such that only the foundation wall is shown.

Place rebar set 15 Select the single rebar. Place horizontal rebar 11 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. as shown. 17 On the Options Bar.NOTE For training purposes. Sketch Reinforcement in a Structural Wall | 395 . the graphics style is used to display detail in the section view. select Maximum Spacing. 16 Press the SPACEBAR. 13 Place the rebar at the base of the wall approximately as shown. do the following: ■ For Layout. click Rebar ➤ Place Rebar Perpendicular. until a vertical line appears indicating the direction of placement. 12 In the Type Selector. 14 On the Design Bar. select Rebar Bar : #7.

23 Move the cursor to the right until the center line reference plane of the wall appears as shown. click .■ For Spacing. and zoom in on the Ground Level of the structure. click Modify. click (Mirror). The quantity of rebar adjusts to the extents of the structural wall on the garage level. 396 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . Resize the rebar set 18 On the Toolbar. enter 1' 6". 20 On the Design Bar. 19 Select the rebar set. Mirror the rebar set 21 Select the rebar set. 22 On the Edit toolbar.1. and drag the rebar shape handle down to Garage Level . draw a zoom box.

and draw a zoom box around the lower half of the wall. click Sketch. Place vertical rebar 25 Right-click in an empty part of the drawing area. Sketch Reinforcement in a Structural Wall | 397 . 27 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. and click Zoom to Fit. click Rebar ➤ Place Rebar Parallel. 29 Select the concrete wall as the rebar host. 26 On the Toolbar. 28 On the Options Bar.24 Click to place the rebar. click .

click . 37 Move the cursor over the wall until the center line reference plane appears. 32 Click to place the rebar. 36 On the Edit toolbar. click Finish Sketch. 30 Click the base of the structural wall to establish the sketch start point. 33 Press ESC. 34 On the Design Bar.1. 31 Drag the sketch line up towards the top of the wall at Garage Level .You are now in sketch mode. 398 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . Notice the cursor snaps to the rebar cover. Mirror the rebar 35 Click the vertical rebar.

38 Click to place the rebar. Sketch Reinforcement in a Structural Wall | 399 . Set rebar visibility 39 Select the outside vertical rebar as shown.

400 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling .40 Press CTRL. and select the outside horizontal rebar as shown.

43 In the Rebar Element View Visibility States dialog. double-click 3D. and click OK. under 3D Views. click Edit for View Visibility States. 45 In the Project Browser.41 On the Options Bar. 42 In the Element Properties dialog. for 3D View. 46 Click or drag the ViewCube to re-orient the view until the garage ramp side of the structure is visible. 44 In the Element Properties dialog. Sketch Reinforcement in a Structural Wall | 401 . click . under Graphics. click OK. select View unobscured and View as solid.

or close the exercise file without saving changes. and draw a zoom box around the garage ramp. To save changes. click File menu ➤ Save As. Annotating and Dimensioning on page 403. and on the Options Bar. The rebar automatically extends the entire length of the garage wall. click . Notice the rebar is visible.47 On the Toolbar. do the following: ■ ■ For Layout. enter 1' 6". select Maximum Spacing. 49 Click File menu ➤ Close. 402 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . For Spacing. Extend the vertical rebar for the garage wall 48 Select the single rebar. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 50 Proceed to the next tutorial.

Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Dimensioning In this lesson. select it.rvt. you learn how to create and modify different types of permanent dimensions that you can add to your drawings. Temporary dimensions display automatically when you create and insert components and select existing components. Permanent dimensions must be explicitly created. and open Imperial\i_RST_Dimensioning. In the left pane of the Open dialog. The dimension types include aligned. The default dimensioning options display on the Options Bar. By default. and double-click Floor. move the cursor over the north wall of the proposed North Building. click Dimension. 4 When the centerline of the wall highlights. 3 Without making any changes on the Options Bar. and ordinate. angular. baseline. linear. expand Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans.Annotating and Dimensioning 11 In this tutorial. multi-segmented. Creating Dimensions In this exercise. dimensions are aligned and snap to wall centerlines. In Revit Structure. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 403 . there are 2 types of dimensions: temporary and permanent. Create permanent dimensions 1 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. you learn how to annotate and dimension your Revit Structure 2009 projects. you learn how to create permanent dimensions to control and document your designs. radial.

toward the empty space outside the wall. 404 | Chapter 11 Annotating and Dimensioning . 6 Move the cursor to the left.5 Move the cursor toward the south wall and when the centerline of the wall highlights. select it. and click to place the dimension.

13 On the Options Bar. and press DELETE. 14 Select the north and south walls of the North Building. Notice that the south wall moves with the north wall. and click to set the dimension location. 8 On the Design Bar. indicating that you cannot change the distance between the referenced walls without first unlocking the dimension. 16 Select the exterior faces of the top and bottom walls of the South Building. Creating Dimensions | 405 . 9 Select the north wall and move it upward. and the distance between them does not change because the dimension is constrained. 7 Click the lock. 11 Select the dimension. click Dimension. click Modify. 10 On the Toolbar. 15 On the Options Bar. The lock displays as locked. 17 Move the cursor to the left of the South Building. indicating that the dimension can be modified. select Wall centerlines for Prefer.The dimension displays in the drawing. click the lock to unlock it. (Undo). click Create a multi-segmented dimension 12 On the Design Bar. select Wall faces for Prefer. A lock symbol that is unlocked displays next to it.

an equal symbol with a slash through it is displayed. 21 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region. click ■ ■ (Create Radial Dimensions). 406 | Chapter 11 Annotating and Dimensioning . click Dimension. and select Wall centerlines for Prefer. In addition. and click to place the dimension. 20 Dimension a curved wall of the North Building: Select the southwest corner wall to display the radial dimension. Create a radial dimension 18 On the Design Bar. Move the cursor to the inside of the curved wall.An unlocked lock symbol displays next to each dimension segment. 19 On the Options Bar. indicating that the dimension segments are not equal in length. and draw a zoom box around the curved wall.

click Dimension. 24 On the Options Bar. click ■ ■ . Select the inside face of the wall.The dimension is snapped to the wall centerline. 26 Adjust the zoom settings so that you can add a dimension to the upper-left portion of the North Building. 25 Dimension the curved wall again: Move your cursor over the inside face of the wall until it highlights. click for Prefer. 23 On the Design Bar. and place the dimension as shown. as shown. ■ (Create Angular Dimensions). and verify that Wall faces is selected 28 Dimension the angled wall at the top left of the North Building: Select the inside face of the angled wall below the opening. click Modify. the default dimension option. ■ Creating Dimensions | 407 . and then select the inside face of the vertical wall below it. Move your cursor to the right to size the dimension arc. and select Wall faces for Prefer. and click to place the dimension. select the dimension line of the radial dimension. Create an angular dimension 27 On the Options Bar. 22 On the Design Bar. and press DELETE.

Move your cursor to the right. for Dimension String Type. The linear dimension tool has a more restricted selection filter so that you can select only points. Click Apply. 38 Select the reference line for grid 1 to start the dimension string as shown. click . You can override the cursor tracking by pressing the SPACEBAR. 408 | Chapter 11 Annotating and Dimensioning . 30 Dimension interior walls in the South Building: ■ In the top room on the left side of the building. select Baseline. 35 In the Element Properties dialog. . and click to place the dimension. 34 On the Options Bar. click Modify. Create a baseline dimension 32 On the Toolbar. The dimension is always constrained to either the horizontal or vertical axis. select a point at the interior corner of the top left wall join. click (Create Horizontal or Vertical Dimensions). and zoom in on the footings located just outside the exterior wall of the south building as shown. do the following: ■ ■ Under Graphics. and depends on the cursor tracking behavior. 33 On the Design Bar. click Dimension. click .Create a linear dimension 29 On the Options Bar. ■ ■ 31 On the Design Bar. 37 In the Element Properties dialog. 36 In the Type Properties dialog. Notice that the Prefer and Pick options are no longer available on the Options Bar. click OK. click Edit/New. and OK. Select the interior corner of the bottom left wall join of the room.

. click OK. and OK. click Edit/New. click . Create an ordinate dimension 42 Select the baseline dimensions placed in the previous steps. 45 In the Type Properties dialog. 46 In the Element Properties dialog. 40 Select the reference lines for grids 4 and 5 to place the remaining dimensions as shown. do the following: ■ ■ Under Graphics. 41 On the Design Bar. 43 On the Options Bar. Notice the multiple dimensions display the distance from the same baseline (grid 1). 44 In the Element Properties dialog. Click Apply.39 Select the reference line for grids 2 and 3 as shown. select Ordinate. Creating Dimensions | 409 . click Modify. for Dimension String Type.

6" Click Apply and OK. to each additional element (grids 2 through 5). +/. 410 | Chapter 11 Annotating and Dimensioning .Notice the perpendicular dimensions display the distance from the origin point or datum (grid 1). 51 On the Design Bar. and enter S. do the following: ■ ■ Under Dimension value. 49 Click the dimension text placed in the last step. (See Architectural Drawing). Click Apply and OK.F. 53 Proceed to the next exercise. do the following: ■ ■ For Below. and save the model to a location of your choice using the following file name: i_RST_Dimensioning-in progress. Notice the new text appears below the supplemental text.rvt.A. Controlling Witness Line Location on page 411.I.D. click Replace with Text.A. 52 Click File menu ➤ Save As.M. click Modify. 50 In the Dimension Text dialog. Notice the dimension value is replaced with the new text S. Add supplemental text to a permanent dimension 47 Click the value for the ordinate dimension at grid 2. 48 In the Dimension Text dialog. under Text Fields. enter V.

click Dimension. 5 Alternate the cursor position over the inner and outer wall face. because the Prefer wall faces option is selected instead of the Prefer wall centerline option.rvt Override dimension defaults 1 Delete the multi-segmented vertical dimension that you placed along the left side of the building model in the previous exercise. 10 Move the cursor to the south wall of the South Building. press TAB until the wall centerline highlights. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 3 On the Options Bar.Controlling Witness Line Location In this exercise. in some cases. you specify their origin on the Options Bar. When you place dimensions. delete. i_RST_Dimensioning-in progress. and select it. you may need to override their settings on an instance basis. verify that Wall faces is selected for Prefer. and select the exterior face. a different wall selection choice highlights. you learn to add. 4 Move the cursor over the north wall of the North Building. 11 Place the dimension as shown. and change the origin of dimension witness lines. you may want to locate the 2 outermost witness lines on the exterior face of each wall. For example. 6 Position the cursor over the wall. including the wall centerline. Notice that only the wall faces highlight when you move the cursor over them. select it. However. but do not select anything. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Each time you press TAB. 9 Move the cursor to the top horizontal wall of the South Building. and press TAB repeatedly. 8 Move the cursor over the south wall of the North Building. 7 When the exterior face of the wall highlights. and select the exterior face. whereas the witness lines referring to interior walls would be located on the centerline of each wall. for a multi-segmented dimension. Controlling Witness Line Location | 411 .

click Modify. and control boxes display on each witness line. 13 Select the dimension that you just placed. The dimension highlights.Edit dimension witness lines 12 On the Design Bar. 412 | Chapter 11 Annotating and Dimensioning .

16 Move the cursor to the control box on the witness line that references the north wall of the South Building. 17 Right-click the control box. but do not select it.14 Click twice on the control box on the witness line that references the south wall of the North Building. The witness line is deleted. 15 Click the control box again. The witness line moves to the wall centerline. Controlling Witness Line Location | 413 . The witness line moves to interior wall face. and click Delete Witness Line.

click Edit/New. Modifying Dimension Properties In this exercise. If you right-click the control box. 19 Select the outside face of the north wall of the South Building. Modifying Dimension Properties on page 414. click in the drawing area away from the floor plan. click Modify. IMPORTANT Be careful to right-click the witness line and not the control box on the witness line. i_RST_Dimensioning-in progress. and click Edit Witness Lines. 22 Proceed to the next exercise. 20 To end the editing command. you learn to modify the type parameters of dimensions. Change the type parameters of the floor plan dimensions 1 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.18 Right-click the dimension line that references the face of the south wall of the North Building. The full dimension string is displayed. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 3 In the Element Properties dialog.rvt. 2 On the Options Bar. click . 414 | Chapter 11 Annotating and Dimensioning . 21 Click File menu ➤ Save. a context menu with different options is displayed. and select the multi-segmented dimension that you modified in the previous exercise.

Working with Alignments and Constraints | 415 . Working with Alignments and Constraints In this exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Training Files. You can save the open file if you wish. For example. and open Imperial\i_RST_Alignment. you learn to align components and lock their alignment to better work with them in your drawings. when sketching walls. a lock symbol immediately displays. Aligning components is similar to dimensioning components with a value of zero. change the following type parameter values: ■ ■ Under Text. select Right. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Working with Alignments and Constraints on page 415. allowing you to lock the alignment of the walls. click Modify.4 In the Type Properties dialog. enter 3/16" for the Text Size. A locked alignment is a constraint that is maintained if any of the aligned components are moved or modified. This controls which side (of the dimensioning arrow) the text is on. 6 On the Design Bar. In the next exercise. if 2 or more walls are colinear. Under Text. not the direction it is read. alignments can be made and locked with minimal effort. 7 Click File menu ➤ Close.rvt. As you create components. 5 Click OK twice. The dimension updates as shown. 8 Proceed to the next exercise. then Up for Read Convention. a new training file is provided.

indicating that the alignment of the 2 walls is now locked. indicating that the Align command is active. 3 Click the lock. and select Wall centerlines for Prefer. Select the exterior face of the shorter horizontal wall on the left. 5 Select the lower center wall to define it as the target fixed wall to which the other walls will align. select Multiple Alignment. indicating the 2 walls are not constrained to each other. 2 Align the walls: ■ ■ Select the exterior face of the uppermost horizontal wall. the first component that you select is the target and remains fixed in position. click (Align). 416 | Chapter 11 Annotating and Dimensioning . The cursor displays 2 arrows at its tip. 6 Select the short wall to the left. The lock symbol displays as unlocked. The shorter horizontal wall on the left moves to align with the upper horizontal wall. The symbol changes to a closed lock. When you align 2 components. Align the 3 short horizontal walls 4 On the Options Bar.Align the 2 uppermost horizontal walls in the floor plan 1 On the Toolbar. while the second component moves to complete the alignment.

Working with Alignments and Constraints | 417 . Do not lock this segment of the alignment.7 Click the lock to lock the alignment of the walls. and then click the lock to align the wall with the middle wall. The wall on the left moves with the middle wall when you drag it. 11 On the Toolbar. but the wall on the right does not because the alignment between the 2 walls is not constrained (locked). and drag it downward. 12 Click the right wall. 8 Select the short horizontal wall on the right. 9 On the Design Bar. 10 Select the middle horizontal wall. click Modify. click (Undo) once to undo the move.

Align the windows on the floor plan 13 On the Toolbar. 418 | Chapter 11 Annotating and Dimensioning . 15 Select the window in the upper horizontal wall on the left side of the floor plan. 16 Select the window on the far left in the lower wall. clear Multiple Alignment. click (Align).Move the walls to verify the alignment. 14 On the Options Bar.

click . 20 Click the lock to unlock it. 19 To view the constraint. and select the dimension between the second window and the right wall. click Modify. 18 Select the far right window in the top wall. The second window does not align because it is already constrained by a locked dimension. on the Design Bar. indicating the constraint.The 2 windows align. as shown. 21 On the Toolbar. A lock is displayed. 22 Align the remaining windows. 17 Select the far right window in the bottom wall. and align the windows. Working with Alignments and Constraints | 419 .

24 Proceed to the next exercise. and save the model to a location of your choice using the following file name: i_RST_Alignment-in progress. Creating Automatic Linear Wall Dimensions In this exercise.rvt. you learn how to automatically dimension a linear wall with openings (windows) by selecting the wall. 1 View the south wall. Creating Automatic Linear Wall Dimensions on page 420. 420 | Chapter 11 Annotating and Dimensioning .23 Click File menu ➤ Save As. You want to dimension the wall so that the width of each opening displays in the dimension string. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.rvt. i_RST_Alignment-in progress. and notice that it includes 5 openings. instead of selecting the wall and all the openings as dimension references.

indicating the start and end of the dimension string. 3 On the Options Bar. For Prefer. Working with Spot Dimensions In this exercise. 8 On the Design Bar. select Entire Walls. Working with Spot Dimensions on page 421. In the next exercise. For Pick. 6 Select the south wall. click (Create Aligned Dimensions). Training File ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 10 Proceed to the next exercise. 7 Move your cursor below the south wall. The 2 vertical walls highlight. You can save the open file if you wish. select Openings and Widths. 9 Click File menu ➤ Close. Working with Spot Dimensions | 421 . a new training file is provided. verify that Wall centerlines is selected. Click Options. These options ensure that the wall dimension includes the openings (in this case. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Options Bar. and click to add the dimension. the windows).2 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 5 Click OK. and that the window widths are referenced in the overall dimension string. 4 In the Auto Dimension Options dialog. you learn how to use the spot dimension feature of Revit Structure. click Dimension.

Click the center of the tapered insulation to create the first leader point as shown. expand Structural Plans. click Training Files. 422 | Chapter 11 Annotating and Dimensioning . ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Move the cursor up and to the left. and for Relative Base. and double-click New Roof.rvt. 5 On the Options Bar. click Spot Dimension ➤ Spot Elevation. 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Add spot dimensions to the tapered roof 1 In the Project Browser. select Spot Elevations: No Symbol (Relative). select Leader. Notice that the value of the spot elevation is displayed as the cursor is moved. Click to place the spot dimension. click . Click to create the second leader point. 4 In the Type Selector. 6 Place the spot dimension as follows: ■ Move the cursor along the edge of the tapered roof. Move the cursor to the left. and draw a zoom box around the upper view as shown.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. select Current Level. and open Imperial\i_RST_Spot_Dimensions_Tapered_Roof. 2 On the Options Bar.

and draw a zoom box around the structural columns as shown. click Spot Dimension ➤ Spot Elevation. 11 Place the spot dimension as follows: ■ Click the corner of the slab (grid location A1) to create the first leader point as shown. select Current Level. click 8 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. Drag the leader to the right to place the dimension. Working with Spot Dimensions | 423 . select Leader. Click to place the spot dimension. 7 On the Options Bar.■ On the Design Bar. 10 On the Options Bar. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Move the cursor up and to the right. select Spot Elevations: No Symbol (Relative). Click to create the second leader point. 9 In the Type Selector. and for Relative Base. Move the cursor to the right. .

Click to create the second leader point. 13 On the Options Bar. 424 | Chapter 11 Annotating and Dimensioning . select Spot Elevations: No Symbol (Relative). click Modify. 17 Place the spot elevation as follows: ■ ■ ■ Click the upper-right corner of the footing. click . and draw a zoom box around a footing as shown. and double-click Foundation. click Spot Dimension ➤ Spot Elevation. Move the cursor up and to the right. and Current Level for Relative Base. 15 In the Type Selector. expand Structural Plans. 14 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.■ On the Design Bar. select Leader. 16 On the Options Bar. Add a spot dimension to the footing 12 In the Project Browser.

19 On the Options Bar. ■ Click OK. 20 In the Element Properties dialog. Working with Spot Dimensions | 425 . click Modify. Change the spot dimension properties 18 Select the spot dimension. 21 On the Design Bar. Notice that the elevation at the top of the footing is displayed.■ ■ Move the cursor to the right. for Single/Upper Value Prefix. enter TOF=. Click to create the third leader point. ■ On the Design Bar. click Modify. click ■ . do the following: Under Text.

Click Apply. 24 In the Element Properties dialog. Add spot coordinates to a sloped beam 28 In the Project Browser. Notice that the value of the spot coordinate displays as the cursor moves. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). and then OK. click Spot Dimension ➤ Spot Coordinate. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Bold. 27 On the Design Bar. 31 Place the spot coordinate as follows: ■ Move the cursor along the edge of the sloped beam. click Edit/New. and double-click South Elevation.Change the text orientation 22 Select the spot dimension. 29 On the View Control Bar. click . under Text. 25 In the Type Properties dialog. 26 In the Element Properties dialog. 23 On the Options Bar. ■ 426 | Chapter 11 Annotating and Dimensioning . select Medium. For Text Location. Click the center of the sloped beam to create the first leader point as shown. click Modify. click OK. 30 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. for Detail Level. select In-line with Leader.

under Text.■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Move the cursor up and to the right. For Text Location. 34 In the Element Properties dialog. On the Design Bar. click OK. 33 On the Options Bar. click . 35 In the Type Properties dialog. Click to place the spot coordinate. For Elevation Indicator. 37 On the Design Bar. Click to create the second leader point. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Bold. select In-line with Leader. 36 In the Element Properties dialog. click Modify. Working with Spot Dimensions | 427 . and then OK. click Modify. click Edit/New. Click Apply. Move the cursor to the right. Notice that the elevation indicator displays below the existing coordinates. enter EL. Change the spot coordinate orientation 32 Select the spot coordinate.

expand Structural Plans.38 Click File menu ➤ Close.rvt. a new training file is provided. You also learn how to create a custom mark in place of an existing beam tag. you learn how to use some of the annotation features included in Revit Structure. Tagging Beams In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you learn how to use the beam annotation tool to tag all beams in a plan view. Annotating In this lesson. Tag all beams in plan view 1 In the Project Browser. click Beam Annotations. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Training Files. You can save the open file if you wish. and double-click Level 2. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and add an end reaction annotation to specific beams in the structure. You learn how to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Tag beams in a plan view Tag a beam system Tag beams by category Create a custom type mark in place of the beam tag Create a custom beam tag. 428 | Chapter 11 Annotating and Dimensioning . and open Imperial\i_RST_Annotations. 39 Proceed to the next lesson. Annotating on page 428. In the next lesson.

and click Remove existing beam tags and spot elevations. select All beams in current plan view. 5 On the Design Bar. Click Settings. the tags that were placed in the previous steps have been removed from this view. select All selected beams in current plan view. 6 In the Beam Annotations dialog. click Beam Annotations. In the Placement Settings dialog. Add an end-reaction value to specific beams 4 Select multiple beams located inside one of the bays as shown. do the following: ■ ■ Under Placement. do the following: ■ Under Placement. Notice that a beam tag has been added to the top-middle location on all beams within the plan view. and click OK.The Beam Annotations dialog opens. Click OK. for Horizontal End Offset. ■ ■ Tagging Beams | 429 . 3 In the Beam Annotations dialog. NOTE For training purposes. enter 1".

This dimension sets the annotation offset distance measured from the beam start location as indicated in the dialog. 8 In the Element Properties dialog. select Structural Framing Tag-w-End Reactions : Standard. Enter the reaction force 7 On the Options Bar.Live. click . click OK. ■ ■ In the Select Annotation Type dialog. 430 | Chapter 11 Annotating and Dimensioning . click Structural Framing Tag. under Analysis Results. ■ Under Annotation location and type. ■ ■ In the Beam Annotations dialog. and click OK. and click OK. to specify the top-end annotation type as shown. Click . click the Level beams in plan tab. Under Structural Framing Tag. enter 10. The end reaction value is added to the selected beams.0 kip for End Reaction . under Select Element to Place.

. click 18 In the Element Properties dialog. and then OK. click Apply. 13 Click one of the W18X40 beams. enter W18. click OK. 11 Right-click the open area above the model. 12 Draw a zoom box that surrounds the upper beams between grids C and D as shown. 15 In the Type Properties dialog. 16 In the Element Properties dialog. and click Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region. under Type Mark. and on the Options Bar. click Modify. click Apply. Tagging Beams | 431 . . click 14 In the Element Properties dialog. 17 Click one of the W14X22 beams. enter W14. click Edit/New. click Edit/New. and then OK.9 On the Design Bar. Create a custom type mark tag 10 Enter ZF (Zoom to Fit). and on the Options Bar. 19 In the Type Properties dialog. under Type Mark.

click the W18X40 beam tag. 31 In the Type Selector. click Yes. select the W14X22 beam tag. click OK. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. for Value. 24 In the Edit Label dialog.20 In the Element Properties dialog. You are now in the Family Editor. When prompted to open the Structural Framing Tag for editing. click OK. and on the Options Bar.by Type Mark: Standard. and. 28 On the Family Design Bar. and on the Options bar. The new beam tag is applied to the selected beams. click . and click OK. click Edit. click Load into Projects. (Add 25 In the Element Properties dialog. 27 In the Save As dialog. Click Save. under Label. click parameter(s) to a label). Edit the beam tag family 21 Click one of the W18X40 beam tags. click Edit Family. while pressing CTRL. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Select a folder location. and click OK. 29 In the Load into Projects dialog. 22 Click the structural label. 432 | Chapter 11 Annotating and Dimensioning . Apply the new type mark tag to all beams 30 In the plan view. Enter Structural Framing Tag . under Category Parameters. 26 Click File menu ➤ Save As. select Structural Framing Tag . select Type Mark.by Type Mark for File name. select the active file.

Select Structural Framing Tags. and draw a pick box around the entire model as shown. 34 In the Filter dialog.32 Enter ZF. do the following: Click Check None to clear all items. 33 On the Options bar. click ■ ■ (Filter). Tagging Beams | 433 .

35 In the Type Selector. or close the exercise file without saving your changes.by Type Mark: Standard. and save the exercise file with a unique name. and draw a zoom box around the beam system as shown. click File menu ➤ Save As.■ Click OK. select Structural Framing Tag . 36 To save your changes. Tag the beam system 37 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region. The new beam tag is applied to all beams. 434 | Chapter 11 Annotating and Dimensioning .

click Edit Label. click Beam System Tag. Creating a Custom Beam Tag | 435 . 40 Click File ➤ Close. 38 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 3 Click the structural label. and open Imperial\i_RST_Custom_beam_tag. and double-click Level 2. and on the Options Bar.NOTE For training purposes. When prompted to open the Structural Framing Tag for editing. and notice the tag for the specific beam system displays. 2 Click one of the W14X22 beam tags. Move the cursor over the beams in the drawing area. expand Structural Plans. Creating a Custom Beam Tag In this exercise. In the next exercise a new training file is provided. the existing beam tags have been removed for the following steps.rvt. click Yes. 39 Click any beam within the beam system to place the tag. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Creating a Custom Beam Tag on page 435. click Training Files. You can save the open file if you wish. 41 Proceed to the next exercise. you learn how to create a custom beam tag that includes multiple categories and then apply the tag to different beam types. You are now in the Family Editor. click Edit Family. and on the Options Bar. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Open the beam tag family 1 In the Project Browser.

Under Category Parameters. select Reference Planes. select Number of studs. select 3. 11 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. click . and click OK. and for Suffix. do the following: ■ ■ Click the Annotation Categories tab. 436 | Chapter 11 Annotating and Dimensioning . Select parameter 2. 10 Press VV (Visibility/Graphic Overrides). and click The new category is added to the label as parameter 2. for Prefix. enter ( (left parenthesis). add the following categories: ■ Under Category Parameters. click OK. enter ) (right parenthesis). and select Break. select Top. for Sample Value. ■ 5 In the Edit Label dialog. for Sample Value. select Camber Size. under Graphics. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. and for Suffix. enter S1. for Prefix. enter ] (close bracket). . enter C=1/2". for Spaces. enter [ (open bracket). Select parameter 3. for Vertical Align. add the following Label Parameters: ■ ■ Select parameter 1. Under Visibility. (Add parameter). and click The new category is added to the label as parameter 3. enter W14X22. Align the beam tag 7 Click the drag control for the label until the text is positioned on two lines as shown. for Sample Value. 8 On the Options Bar. ■ 6 In the Edit Label dialog.Add multiple categories to the beam label 4 In the Edit Label dialog.

click Override parameter values of existing types. 15 On the Design Bar. and the camber size for each beam type in the structure. 13 Press the UP ARROW or DOWN ARROW to move the text until the beam type is positioned just below the horizontal reference plane as shown. expand Schedules/Quantities. Notice the Structural Framing Schedule includes the number of studs parameter. click Load into Project. In the Reload Family dialog. and double-click Structural Framing Schedule.■ Click OK. 14 Click Modify. 12 Select the text on the beam label. Notice that each beam tag now specifies a different camber setting based on the beam type. View the framing schedule 16 In the Project Browser. and double-click Level 2. and click Yes. Creating a Custom Beam Tag | 437 . expand Structural Plans. View the properties for beam type S2 17 In the Project Browser.

438 | Chapter 11 Annotating and Dimensioning . do the following: Under Structural. 22 Proceed to the next tutorial. Worksets on page 439. 20 In the Element Properties dialog.18 Click one of the W18x40 beams. and save the completed project in a folder location of your preference. Click OK. notice that the Camber Size value reflects the parameters entered in the framing schedule. click ■ . ■ 21 Click File ➤ Save As. 19 On the Options Bar.

and they can publish work to a central file whenever they choose. etc. you learn how to work as an individual with the central and local project files. team members adding and changing elements in worksets can save their work to a local file on the network to their own hard drive. 439 . Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets In this exercise. beams. You subdivide the project into worksets and save the project as the central file. They can also update their local files at any time in order to see the changes other team members have published. to allow visibility control and ownership for each assigned element. Using Worksharing. engineers commonly work in teams with each person assigned to a specific functional task. This includes how to plan and execute the use of worksets in a project in order to maximize project and team performance. you can borrow that element without requiring the workset owner to relinquish control of the entire workset. this collection of building elements (such as roofs. In this tutorial. and open Imperial\i_RST_Worksets. All other team members can view this workset.) is called a workset. You can enable Worksharing for any project. you enable Worksharing within an existing project. In the left pane of the Open dialog. This prevents possible conflicts within the project. If you need to modify an element that belongs to a workset that someone else is actively working on.Worksets 12 On many building projects. In the next exercise. You begin by enabling Worksharing within a project and setting up the initial workset environment.rvt. and to have all the elements coordinated by Revit Structure. click Training Files. however. you learn the fundamentals of Worksharing. they cannot make changes to it. Only one user can edit each workset at a given time. This involves simultaneously working on and saving different portions of the project. In Revit Structure 2009. Using Worksharing in a Project In this lesson. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. You then learn how to work within a Worksharing-enabled project with multiple users and how to borrow particular elements from other users. slabs. Enable Worksharing 1 Click File menu ➤ Worksets. you learn how to use Worksharing to divide a project into worksets so multiple users can access the project.

and all team members must have access to all linked or imported DWG or RVT files. TIP The initial owner name is assigned by the operating system of your computer. In this case. a second user is assigned the roof. You cannot change your user name with an unsaved Worksharing-enabled project open. 440 | Chapter 12 Worksets . Verify that Visible by default in all views is selected. do the following: ■ ■ For new workset name. imagine 5 users including yourself. the user name was changed in the Options dialog (accessible from the Settings menu). and notice all are editable by you. For training purposes. For training purposes. Project Standards. Therefore. 3 In the Worksets dialog. and Views. select: ■ ■ ■ Families Project Standards Views 4 Scroll down the list of workset names. 5 Under Show. under Show. click New. enter Beams and Columns. In this simple training project. The Worksets dialog is displayed. The project is subdivided in such a way as to reflect the tasks of each user. Notice that all worksets are open and editable by you. clear Families. and User1 is displayed as the present owner. Creating new worksets 6 In the Worksets dialog. you must create worksets that allow each team member to work independently. Only User-Created worksets should display. a third is assigned all beams and columns. a fourth is assigned the foundation and garage ramp. a small number of team members are working on the structural model. one team member is assigned to the slabs. 7 In the New Workset dialog.2 Click OK to accept the default workset names. a fifth is assigned to the elevator shafts.

do the following: ■ ■ For new workset name. click New. do the following: ■ ■ ■ For new workset name. 13 In the New Workset dialog. This improves performance because fewer components need to be generated in each view. ■ 12 In the Worksets dialog. Verify that Visible by default in all views is selected.■ Click OK. 9 In the New Workset dialog. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets | 441 . enter Elevator Shafts. click New. do the following: ■ ■ ■ For new workset name. 11 In the New Workset dialog. Click OK. 10 In the Worksets dialog. The foundation should only be visible in specific views. Clear Visible by default in all views. Click OK. enter Foundation. enter Slabs. click New. 8 In the Worksets dialog. Click OK. Verify that Visible by default in all views is selected.

■ 16 In the Worksets dialog. this improves performance. enter Roof. Again. Clear Visible by default in all views. 442 | Chapter 12 Worksets . do the following: ■ ■ For new workset name. click New. 17 In the New Workset dialog. 15 In the New Workset dialog. click New. The garage ramp should only be visible in specific views. enter Garage Ramp. do the following: ■ ■ For new workset name. Clear Visible by default in all views. do the following: ■ ■ ■ For new workset name. Click OK. Click OK. Again. this improves performance. The roof should only be visible in specific views. enter Linked or imported DWG or RVT files. click New. Verify that Visible by default in all views is selected. 19 In the New Workset dialog. Click OK.14 In the Worksets dialog. ■ 18 In the Worksets dialog.

you must relinquish workset editability so that other users can have access to the worksets they need. The central file is created automatically the first time you save the project after enabling worksets. Now that you have created the central file. This is imperative if you and another user intend to complete the multi-user exercise later in this tutorial. The next step is to create the central file. 20 In the Worksets dialog. 23 Click Save.You have created the required worksets for each team member working on this project. for file name. click Non Editable. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets | 443 . under Show. enter Worksets Project . NOTE Continue using the central file for the following steps. Navigate to a location on a network drive that all team members have access to. 25 In the Worksets dialog. select: ■ ■ ■ ■ User-Created Families Project Standards Views 26 Select all the worksets by pressing CTRL+A. If you do not have access to a network and still want to complete that exercise. 27 On the right side of the dialog. click OK Create the central file 21 Click File menu ➤ Save As. Check in the worksets 24 Click File menu ➤ Worksets. this can be accomplished by saving the central file to your hard drive and changing your user name before accessing the project. 22 In the Save As dialog. but be sure not to save the file in the training files location.Central.

Create a local file 32 Click File menu ➤ Open. 33 Select the file. enter Initial Central File Setup. and click Open. click File menu ➤ Close.Central on the network drive. notice that your name has been removed as the owner of the worksets and also notice that all worksets are not available for editing. and click Save. under Comments. 35 In the Save As dialog. navigate to a folder on your local computer. click OK. 444 | Chapter 12 Worksets . 36 Enter Worksets Project_Local-User 1 for File name. 29 Click File menu ➤ Save to Central. 31 After the file is saved. 34 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 37 Proceed to the next exercise. Navigate to the location of the central file Worksets Project .In the Worksets dialog. 30 In the Save to Central dialog. and click OK. 28 In the Worksets dialog. Assigning Worksets on page 445.

1 Click File menu ➤ Worksets. 7 Click the highlighted column to deselect it. you enabled Worksharing on a project. click . Assigning Worksets In this exercise. NOTE Continue using the local file Worksets Project_Local-User 1 for the following exercise. 5 In the Element Properties dialog. select Beams and Columns. This project is now ready for individuals to access it and check out their required worksets. notice that all worksets are available for editing. you assign the structural columns workset to User1.In this exercise. 6 Click OK. 8 Click File menu ➤ Worksets. checked in all worksets. and created a local file. 3 Click one of the structural columns as shown. You then created the central file. 2 Click Cancel. Assigning Worksets | 445 . and created new worksets to accommodate each team member. In the Worksets dialog. for Workset. 4 On the Options Bar.

click Check None. 9 Click Cancel. 11 On the Options Bar. 446 | Chapter 12 Worksets . click . under Borrowers for Workset1. Assign the structural columns 10 Draw a pick box around the entire model to select all elements. and click OK.The Worksets dialog. 12 In the Filter dialog. 13 Select Structural Columns. notice that User1 is listed.

and click Make Elements Editable. select Beams and Columns. The puzzle-piece icons disappear. and a workset puzzle-piece icon displays next to each column indicating it can be changed to editable. 16 In the Element Properties dialog. 14 Right-click one of the columns. 15 On the Options Bar. for Workset. but the columns remain highlighted. click . Assigning Worksets | 447 .All structural columns in the model are highlighted.

The columns and beams elements are now assigned for Workset1. Making the Entire Workset Editable on page 448. 19 In the Save to Central dialog. 18 Click File menu ➤ Save to Central. Navigate to the location of the central file Worsksets Project-Central on the network drive. under After save relinguish editable. 20 Click File menu ➤ Save. 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. 3 Click File menu ➤ Worksets.17 Click OK. clear Borrowed Elements. 448 | Chapter 12 Worksets . 2 Click Open. to save the local file. 21 Proceed to the next exercise. you make the entire workset editable and assign individual elements to specific users. Making the Entire Workset Editable In this exercise. and click OK.

and select Floors. 5 Click OK. User1 is now listed as the Owner of Workset1. notice User1 is listed under Borrowers for Beams and Columns. Assign the floor workset 6 Draw a pick box around the entire model to select all elements. Making the Entire Workset Editable | 449 . click Check None. 8 In the Filter dialog. 7 On the Options Bar. click . 4 In the Worksets dialog.In the Worksets dialog. select Workset1. and click the Editable on the right-side of the dialog.

click . 12 Click OK. select Slabs. for Workset. 450 | Chapter 12 Worksets . 10 On the Options Bar. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. The slabs are now assigned for Workset1. All floors are highlighted.9 Click OK.

Making the Entire Workset Editable | 451 . select Roof. 19 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. and the garage ramp. The roof is now assigned for Workset1. 18 Enter VV. click . 16 Click OK. This is the keyboard shortcut for Visibility/Graphic override. assign the remaining worksets for the elevator shafts. for Workset. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. click the Worksets tab. Using the steps described in the previous procedure.Assign the roof workset 13 Select the roof as shown. 14 On the Options Bar. Turn visibility on/off 17 Click elsewhere in the drawing area to deselect the roof. foundation.

To turn off additional elements. clear the box next to the desired element.20 Clear Beams and Columns. 23 Check Beams and Columns. The elements are now visible in the view. and then click Apply and OK. Roof. and Slabs. click the Worksets tab. 22 Enter VV. 21 The elements are now hidden from the view. 452 | Chapter 12 Worksets . and Slabs. and on the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. Roof. Save to central file 24 Click File menu ➤ Save to Central. and then click Apply and OK.

For training purposes. select: ■ ■ User-created Worksets Borrowed Elements 26 After the file is saved. click Options. skip the following section. This is a system setting. Use a second Revit Structure session to mimic User 2 1 Minimize the current Revit Structure window. and check out worksets 6 Click File menu ➤ Open. 27 Under Comment. and navigate to the location where you saved the central file named Worksets project-Central. each user must check out worksets. instructions are staggered. a single user can complete this exercise by opening up an additional session of Revit Structure and setting the user name to User 2. Create a local copy 5 In this exercise. NOTE If you are working with a second user (User 2). User 2: Create a local file. Using Worksets with Multiple Users on page 453. The user who has not yet created a local file for the chosen central file is User 2. Although this exercise is designed specifically for two separate users with network access to the central file. In the following section of this exercise. specifically sequenced. under User name. please do so before continuing.rvt. Regardless of which central file you choose to use. This exercise requires the completion of the previous workset exercises and access to the resulting local and central files. make elements editable. Each modifies the structural model within their local file and publishes it back to the central file where the other user can see the changes. If both users have completed the previous worksets exercises and created central files on the network. and reload the latest changes. 28 Click OK. instructions are provided on how to accomplish this. they are referred to as User 1 and User 2. WARNING After completing this tutorial and closing the project file. one user has already created a local file. click File menu ➤ Save to save a local copy. and proceed to Create a local copy. return to the Settings dialog. consider that person to be User 1. two users work on the structural model residing in the central file you created and saved in a previous exercise. If you have not yet completed these exercises. and reset the User name to your computer login name. 29 Proceed to the next exercise. select one of those central files to be used in this exercise. 3 On the Settings menu. 2 Start a new Revit Structure session by double-clicking the Revit Structure icon on the desktop or by selecting it from the Start menu. and refer explicitly to User 1 and User 2. enter User 2. two users access the central file through a network connection. Using Worksets with Multiple Users | 453 .25 In the Save to Central dialog. enter Reassigning elements to their own worksets. Throughout the process. and click OK. Throughout the remainder of this exercise. 4 Click the General Tab and. The next series of steps create a local file for User 2. Using Worksets with Multiple Users In this exercise. For training purposes.

and move it. 8 Click Open. 10 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 18 Click File menu ➤ Worksets. select the central file and. name the file Worksets Project_Local-User 2. and click OK. Notice that the Foundation workset is checked out by User 2. 15 Select the Foundation workset. select all the User-Created worksets. If it is not open. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work. select Specify. any referenced workset is opened but hidden. You now have a local copy of the project.7 In the Open dialog. 9 In the Opening Worksets dialog. and publish changes 17 User 1 should still have the local file open. click Options. This file is for your use only. 14 Click File menu ➤ Worksets. In addition. 22 Click OK. You are now the owner of that workset. and click Save. open it now. 16 Click OK. If you only have one workset checked out. modify the structural model. expand 3D Views. Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. it becomes the active workset. and select Yes for Editable. 21 Select the Beams and Columns workset. 11 In the Save As dialog. User 1: Check out worksets. 13 Navigate to your preferred location on the hard drive. 19 Try to change the Editable status for Foundation to Yes. under Open Worksets. Notice that you own this workset and the active workset is now Beams and Columns. A warning is displayed informing you that you cannot check out this workset because it is already checked out by another user. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. 23 In the Project Browser. verify that Make this the Central location after save is not selected. 454 | Chapter 12 Worksets . 24 Select any column on the foundation level as shown in the following illustration. 20 Click OK to return to the Worksets dialog. and select Yes for Editable. and double-click 3D-Atrium. 12 In the File Save Options dialog. and click OK.

select the option to save the local file after the central file is saved. Using Worksets with Multiple Users | 455 . expand 3D Views. That is because changes made to the central file display in local files only when the worksets are explicitly updated. User 2: Modify the building model and publish changes 29 In the Project Browser. 25 Click anywhere in the empty drawing area to ignore the warning. 30 Using the following illustration as a guide. 26 Click File menu ➤ Save to Central. 27 In the Save to Central dialog. Notice that the changes made by User 1 do not immediately display in the local file of User 2. 28 Click OK. select a footing.A warning is displayed informing you that a conflict exists. and double-click 3D-Atrium. and move it.

and check out additional worksets 32 Click File menu ➤ Reload Latest. The changes User 2 made are apparent. 35 On the Project Browser. and sketch a new roof between any four beams. User 1: Reload latest worksets. 39 On the View menu. double-click Roof. 36 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click the Worksets tab. 41 Notice that the roof you added previously now displays. 34 Select Roof. Even though the Roof workset is active. under Structural Plans. you are asked if you want to make the Roof workset the active workset. This is because when the Roof workset was created. You should turn on the visibility before adding a roof. Click Yes. select Yes for Editable. 37 In the Design Bar. any elements added to the structure are automatically assigned to the active workset. the Visible by default option was not selected. click Pick Supports. click Modify. and click OK. Therefore. the visibility of the workset is not turned on even though it is checked out and is the active workset. 456 | Chapter 12 Worksets . 40 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. select Roof to turn on its visibility. However. click Slab. Because you now have more than one workset checked out.31 Click File menu ➤ Save to Central. click Visibility/Graphics. and click OK. you still have complete access to the elements belonging to the Beams and Columns worksets. 38 On the Design Bar. 33 Click File menu ➤ Worksets. A message displays informing you that the component you are trying to place is not visible in that view.

a single user can complete this exercise by opening up an additional session of Revit Structure and setting the user name to User 2. instructions are provided on how to accomplish this. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users In this exercise. modified the structure and published their changes back to the central file. At the appropriate point in this exercise. 44 Click OK. Each user checked out worksets. you may receive a message informing you that the central file has been relocated. two users are working on the same project with separate local files. you save the training file as a central file. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users on page 457. This exercise also requires two users and you can skip the first sections of the exercise and proceed directly to the section. User 1: Check out worksets 1 Click File menu ➤ Worksets. 43 In the Save to Central dialog. Although this exercise is designed specifically for two separate users with network access to the central file. they are referred to as User 1 and User 2. If you intend to complete the final portion of this tutorial by proceeding to the Element Borrowing exercise.42 Click File menu ➤ Save to Central. In the final exercise of this tutorial. you need to set up your central and local files. if any User-Created worksets are not open. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users | 457 . If you have not completed the previous workset exercises. 2 In the Worksets dialog. and click Open. There are specific instructions for each user. In this exercise. and these problems are rectified. select them. Each user must have network access to the central file. you must borrow elements that belong to worksets that the other user has checked out. This exercise requires two users and. you learn how to borrow elements from worksets that other users are actively working on. two users worked on the same structure using worksets. throughout this training. leave this file open in its current state. In subsequent steps. leave this file open in its current state. If you intend to complete the final exercise of this tutorial. Only one user needs to open the training file and save the central file to a network location. Click OK to this message and subsequent messages. You learn how to make borrowing requests and how to grant them. As each of you work. select the option to save the local file after the central file is saved. Check out worksets. These messages are a result of the central file being relocated (to your PC). NOTE When you open the training file for this tutorial.

verify that Editable Only is cleared. You are now the owner of that workset. select a footing. and click OK. 6 In the Worksets dialog. User 2: Borrow an element from User 1 8 In the Project Browser. you should inform User 1 that you are waiting for permission to edit a borrowed element. and click OK. User 1: Grant User 2 permission to borrow element 13 When User 2 contacts you and informs you that a borrowing request is pending your authorization. 9 On the Options Bar. 7 Under Active Workset. At this point. 12 Click Place Request to ask User 1 for permission to move the footing. This allows you to select elements that belong to worksets that you do not own. 11 Move the footing.3 Select the Foundation workset. You are now the owner of that workset. a message informs you that you are waiting for permission from User 1. and select Yes for Editable. select Foundation. click File menu ➤ Editing Requests. After you submit the request. and select Yes for Editable. User 2: Check out worksets 5 Click File menu ➤ Worksets. select the Beams and Columns workset. A warning message informs you that you must obtain permission from User 1. A symbol appears letting you know that it belongs to a workset you do not own. select Beams and Columns. 10 Using the following illustration as a guide. and double-click 3D-Atrium. 458 | Chapter 12 Worksets . 4 Under Active Workset. expand 3D Views. Leave this dialog open until User 1 grants permission.

In this multi-user exercise. 20 In the Save to Central dialog. and close 19 Click File menu ➤ Save to Central. click Check Now.14 In the Editing Requests dialog. 22 Proceed to the next tutorial. select the request submitted by User 2. select the following. Project Coordination on page 461. and notice the footing is in the new location. User 2: Check for editability grant 17 In the Check Editability Grants dialog. ■ ■ ■ User-created Worksets Borrowed Elements (User 2 only) Save the local file after “Save to Central” completes successfully 21 Click File menu ➤ Close. and the other user granted it. A message informs you that your request has been granted. In this case. you learned how to borrow elements from another workset even though that workset was actively being edited by another user. 16 Click Close. User 1 and 2: Save to Central. you requested permission to edit the element. 15 Click Grant. to Local. 18 Click OK. and click OK. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users | 459 .

460 .

Click OK to open the file. Coordination Review In this lesson. floors. or window) that might interfere with elements in the Revit Structure 2009 model. which can be accepted.Project Coordination 13 You have received the latest model from the architect and changes have been made to the design. Finally. In the tutorial. Finally. levels. you begin by opening the Revit Structure file that contains the modified Revit Architecture file. When the modified file is brought back into Revit Structure. and determines the impact of each modification on the structure. 461 . walls. you run an interference check to verify that the changes do not interfere with structural elements of the model. a warning is displayed. and open Imperial\i_RST_Coordination. Opening the Modified Revit Architecture file Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. This feature enabled the engineer to monitor the project grids. Starting a New Project on page 149. and columns for any future modifications. an interference check is run on the model to correct the placement of any architectural elements (door. rejected.rvt NOTE Because some of the changes from the architect involve elements that are monitored by the copy monitor feature of Revit Structure. depending on the impact to the design. all changes are documented using the Revit Structure revision system feature. This task is accomplished using the copy monitor feature that was activated when the project was started. the copy monitor feature automatically notifies you of the changes. In the left pane of the Open dialog. In this tutorial. click Training Files. the structural engineer imports the modified Revit Architecture model. Once each change has been reviewed. or postponed. reviews each change individually. the architect’s file was imported into Revit Structure. and the copy monitor feature was activated.

select Coordination for Discipline. and then click OK. click .rvt. under Structural Plans. Selecting this discipline allows the architectural walls to be visible. Click . 3 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. double-click Level 3. 7 Enter ZF. 5 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. This is the keyboard shortcut for Zoom to Fit. 4 Select the linked file i_RBD_After. 2 Click View menu ➤ Visibility Graphics. The modified Revit Architecture file will now be visible along with the Revit Structure file.1 In the Project Browser. 462 | Chapter 13 Project Coordination . click Apply. and notice the duplicate grid lines and the relocation of the stairway. 6 In the Element Properties dialog. under Graphics. and click OK. and draw a zoom box around the upper-left corner of the building at grid line B. select the Revit Links tab. 8 On the View Toolbar.

click Opening the Modified Revit Architecture file | 463 . click as shown. 13 On the Options Bar. and click Wireframe. and draw a zoom box around the elevator shaft. and draw a zoom box around the lower levels of the elevator shaft 11 Click Window menu ➤ Tile. . click the Model Graphics Style control. 12 In the Structural Plan: Level 3 window: ■ ■ ■ Select . Close all additional views that may have been opened accidentally. The Revit Architecture file is highlighted. The Level 3 Plan view and the 3D view are displayed in separate windows.9 Click or drag the ViewCube to re-orient the view until the elevator shaft is visible as shown. Click between grid lines A and B until the Revit Links box is displayed. Click to select the linked file. 10 On the Toolbar. and the Coordination Review icon displays on the Options Bar. On the View Control Bar. .

and then click Show. ■ 464 | Chapter 13 Project Coordination . In the Action column. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Expand New/Unresolved ➤ Floors ➤ expand Monitor Floor Sketches. Display the review message for any individual floor by expanding Sketches are Different. or changed in some way from the architect’s file. and a custom message that pertains to each New/Unresolved category. ■ Click the first message under Monitor Floor Sketches. moved. The structural engineer should address each message individually and take some form of action to resolve the conflict. select the remaining messages. and click Apply. Accept Difference.The Coordination Review lists all messages that require some type of action. These messages identify elements that were deleted. Reject. and click Show. press SHIFT. Click the message Floor: Floor: 6" Concrete. select Copy Sketch to Floor: 6" Concrete. 16 In the Coordination Review dialog. Review change to Floor Sketch 15 Position the Coordination Review dialog so the 3D window is visible. 14 Click the 3D Views: 3D window to deselect the plan view. Actions include: Postpone. Notice each floor is highlighted on the 3D view. The selected floor from the structural model is highlighted in the 3D window.

rvt: Grids: Grid:B. Review location of elevator walls 19 On the Toolbar. ■ For Action. Opening the Modified Revit Architecture file | 465 . 18 In the Coordination Review dialog. select Modify Grid B. and draw a zoom box around the elevator shaft in the plan view. The grid line is adjusted to accommodate the architect’s change. do the following: ■ ■ Expand New/Unresolved ➤ Grids ➤ Maintain relative position of Grids ➤ Grid moved. and click Show.The concrete floor sketches for all levels of the structure will be adjusted to accommodate the architect’s floor sketch change. and click Apply. Review location of grid B 17 Position the Coordination Review dialog so the plan view is visible. Click the message i_RBD_After. click . Grid B from the architect’s model is highlighted on the Level 3 window.

select Modify Wall Basic Wall: Generic 8" Masonry. For Action. do the following: ■ Under New/Unresolved ➤ Walls. and select the remaining messages. Select one of the messages and notice the wall is highlighted on the Structural Plan: Level 3 plan view. expand Maintain wall position.20 In the Coordination Review dialog. Click the first message under Wall centerlines are different. There are 4 changes involving the elevator shaft walls. and click Apply. ■ ■ 466 | Chapter 13 Project Coordination . press SHIFT.

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click OK.rvt.The elevator walls on the structural model will be adjusted to accommodate the architect’s change. Click the message Walls: Basic Wall: Generic . 22 In the Coordination Review dialog.8" Masonry. and save the model to a location of your choice using the following file name: i_RST_Coordination-in progress.12" Concrete. ■ ■ In the Edit Comment dialog. The structural engineer will discuss this change with the architect before proceeding. In the Edit Comment dialog. enter Need to discuss with architect. enter Need to discuss with architect. Select Postpone for Action. Review wall modifications 21 Position the Coordination Review dialog so the lower floors of the 3D View are visible. Opening the Modified Revit Architecture file | 467 . click Apply. Click the Add Comment field. Click OK. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Expand New/Unresolved ➤ Walls ➤ Monitor Wall Sketches ➤ Sketch is missing. Click the message Walls: Basic Wall: Foundation . and OK. Select Postpone for Action. 23 Click File menu ➤ Save As. Click the Add Comment field. In the Coordination Review dialog.

NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise.rvt for Categories from. The first is the possible interference between the stairs and a relocated structural column. i_RST_Coordination-in progress. you use the interference tool in Revit Structure to check on 2 potential problems with the stairway.rvt 1 Click Tools menu ➤ Interference Check ➤ Run Check. The default table compares elements within the same project. Interference Check on page 468. Interference Check In this exercise. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. 468 | Chapter 13 Project Coordination . 2 On the right-side of the Interference Check dialog. select i_RBD_After. and the second is a structural brace that interferes with a door opening in the stairway. The next step is to select the architect’s file so it can be checked against the structural project.24 Proceed to the next exercise.

Run interference check on columns and stairs 3 In the list for the current project.Notice the categories for the architect’s file differ from the current Revit Structure project. select Structural Columns. and Stairs for the Revit Architecture project. Interference Check | 469 .

470 | Chapter 13 Project Coordination . do the following: ■ Under Structural Columns. expand the message for Level 3 Stairs as shown. 5 In the Interference Report dialog.4 Click OK. A report is generated showing all instances of interference between columns in the structural project and the upper-left stairway in the Revit Architecture project.

Stair Check. The report provides detail on the interference and should be used to discuss the problem with the architect. select Revit Interference Report (*.rvt: Stairs: Stair: 7" max riser 11" tread.There are 7 instances of interference between structural columns and the upper-left stairway. select a folder location on your local computer. Under Save as type.html). Notice the column of the structural model is highlighted on the Structural Plan: Level 3 window. ■ ■ Export the Column interference report 6 In the Export dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Save in. Interference Check | 471 . enter Columns vs. Notice the stairway of the architect’s model is highlighted on the Structural Plan: Level 3 window Select Structural Columns: W-Wide Flange Column: W10X33. Click Save. ■ Select i_RBD_After. Each representing a different level. Under File name. and that it interferes with the stairway. Click Export to generate an interference report.

select i_RBD_After. 472 | Chapter 13 Project Coordination .7 In the Interference Report dialog.rvt for Categories from. click Close. There is 1 instance of interference between structural bracing and the door for the upper-left stairway. 9 In the Interference Check dialog. 10 Select Structural Framing ➤ Vertical Bracing for Current Project. 11 Click OK. Run interference check on vertical bracing 8 Click Tools menu ➤ Interference Check ➤ Run Check. and Doors for the Revit Architecture project.

do the following: ■ ■ Under Structural Framing ➤ expand Doors. Under File name. Interference Check | 473 . Under Save as type.12 In the Interference Report dialog. Notice the door from the architect’s model is highlighted on both the 3D View and Structural Plan view windows. Notice the brace from the structural model is highlighted on both the 3D view and Structural Plan view windows. Select i_RBD_After.rvt: Doors: Door Single. ■ Click Export to generate an interference report. Door opening. select a folder location on your local computer. select Revit Interference Report (*. Select Structural Framing: L-Angle: L4X4X3/4 ■ . also the brace interferes with the opening. Export the Brace and Door interference report 13 In the Export dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Save in. enter Brace vs.html).

Add a revision for grid B 3 Click on the value for Release Date. all tags and schedules display the numeral 1. Setting Up a Revision Table Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. a new training file is provided. For example. and you can draw revision clouds around elements in your project that have changed.rvt. Specify a revision numbering method 1 On the Settings menu. the revision is locked and issued to the field. click Close. 474 | Chapter 13 Project Coordination . When Issued is selected. This is the date the revisions were identified. You can use revision tags to notate the revision clouds. Using Revision Tracking on page 474.■ Click Save. yet as concise as possible. 16 Proceed to the next lesson. and can then display the revisions in schedules that appear in the title block of each project sheet. When you use this option. Using Revision Tracking Revit Structure provides tools that enable you to track revisions to your project. 14 Click File menu ➤ Save and save the file in a folder of your preference. 4 Click on the value for Description. and open Imperial\i_RST_Revision. 5 Verify that Issued is cleared. revision descriptions should be comprehensive. verify that By Sheet is selected for Numbering Method. In general. If you select By Project. In the left pane of the Open dialog. You can create a sequence of revisions. The report provides detail on the interference and should be used to discuss the problem with the architect. click Revisions. In the next lesson. the revisions are numbered according to the sequence in which they are added to a sheet. 6 Verify that Visible is selected. 2 In the Revisions dialog. if the active revision is number 1. and enter 2/15/06. click Training Files. the revisions are numbered according to the sequence of revisions in the Revisions dialog. and enter Moved Grid B west by 2'. 15 In the Interference Report dialog.

Revit Structure is now in sketch mode. you can add a revision cloud to the 3D view once it is placed on a sheet.Level 3 Framing Plan.1 . 6 Continue adding segments until the cloud encompasses the area that you changed. Sketching Revision Clouds | 475 . double-click S.If Visible is not selected. 5 Click to end that segment and begin a new segment. which are inherited from the revision table you created for the project. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click near grid line B. Each cloud is visible only in the view in which it is sketched. Sketching Revision Clouds In this exercise. In most instances. The Activate View command activates a viewport on the sheet. You can draw multiple revision clouds for each revision. However. click Revision Cloud. any revision cloud you draw to indicate this particular revision is not visible in the view in which you create it. 7 Click Apply. allowing you to edit the model directly from the sheet. You can sketch revision clouds in all views except 3D model views. and move the cursor clockwise to create a segment of the revision cloud. you indicate the changes made by the architect graphically with a revision cloud. Revision clouds have read-only properties. under Sheets (all). 8 Proceed to the next exercise. 4 In the drawing area. including revision number and revision date. 3 Right-click the view on the sheet. Add a revision cloud for grid B 1 In the Project Browser. and OK. you would turn off visibility only after a revision was issued. Sketching Revision Clouds on page 475. and select Activate View.

Add Remaining Revisions on page 476. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. 8 Click File menu ➤ Save As. and enter Moved Stair exit 2' west. A new row is added below the existing row in the revision table. When Issued is selected. yet as concise as possible. and enter 2/20/06.7 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch.rvt. 3 Click on the value for Release Date. NOTE At this point. the revision is locked and issued to the field. The revision cloud is displayed around the modified grid line. 2 In the Revisions dialog. 9 Proceed to the next exercise. click Revisions. In this tutorial. revision descriptions should be comprehensive. click Add: New. i_RST_Revision-in progress. In general. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. 476 | Chapter 13 Project Coordination . the revision for grid line B should be issued to the field to prevent any changes to the revision cloud. 6 Verify that Visible is selected. This is the date the revisions were sent out for review. the remaining revisions for the project are documented. Add Remaining Revisions In this exercise. the revisions to the project will be issued after all the revision clouds have been drawn. 5 Verify that Issued is cleared.rvt. Add a revision for the elevator stairs 1 On the Settings menu. and save the model to a location of your choice using the following file name: i_RST_Revision-in progress. 4 Click on the value for Description.

click above the elevator shaft. click Revision Cloud. In most instances. 10 Continue adding segments until the cloud encompasses the area that you changed. Add a revision for the brace interference 12 In the Revisions dialog. click Add: New. you would turn off visibility only after a revision was issued. and move the cursor clockwise to create a segment of the revision cloud. 9 Click to end that segment and begin a new segment. Revit Structure is now in sketch mode. This is the date the revisions were sent out for review. and enter Research brace. and enter 2/21/06. Add Remaining Revisions | 477 . 13 Click on the value for Release Date. The revision cloud is displayed around the modified stairs. You can change the appearance of the cloud from the Settings menu. 8 In the drawing area.If Visible is not selected. Add a revision cloud for the elevator stairs 7 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 11 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. A new row is added below the existing row in the revision table. any revision cloud you draw to indicate this particular revision is not visible in the view in which you create it. 14 Click on the value for Description.

Stair Shafts Sections.In general. 21 Click to end that segment and begin a new segment. the revision is locked and issued to the field. 20 In the drawing area. In most instances. and select Activate View. If Visible is not selected. Add a revision cloud for the brace interference 17 In the Project Browser. 16 Verify that Visible is selected. 22 Continue adding segments until the cloud encompasses the area that you changed. any revision cloud you draw to indicate this particular revision is not visible in the view in which you create it. allowing you to edit the model directly from the sheet. Revit Structure is now in sketch mode. click Revision Cloud. click above the brace. 18 Right-click the center view on the sheet. double-click S. you would turn off visibility only after a revision was issued. 478 | Chapter 13 Project Coordination . The Activate View command activates a viewport on the sheet. under Sheets (all). revision descriptions should be comprehensive. yet as concise as possible. and move the cursor clockwise to create a segment of the revision cloud. 19 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 15 Verify that Issued is cleared. When Issued is selected.2 .

and enter Research door. click Finish Sketch. revision descriptions should be comprehensive. You can change the appearance of the cloud from the Settings menu.23 On the Design Bar. 26 Click on the value for Description. In general. The revision cloud is displayed around the brace. click Add: New. yet as concise as possible. the revision is locked and issued to the field. This is the date the revisions were sent out for review. 25 Click on the value for Release Date. 27 Verify that Issued is cleared. Add a revision for the door interference 24 In the Revisions dialog. Add Remaining Revisions | 479 . 28 Verify that Visible is selected. and enter 2/22/06. When Issued is selected. A new row is added below the existing row in the revision table.

and select Activate View.2 . 33 Click to end that segment and begin a new segment. You can change the appearance of the cloud from the Settings menu. 35 On the Design Bar. allowing you to edit the model directly from the sheet. under Sheets (all). i_RST_Revision-in progress. 32 In the drawing area. 37 Proceed to the next exercise. The tag number that is displayed in the drawing is based on the numbering method you specified when you set up the revision table in a previous exercise. click above the door. you apply a revision tag to the revision cloud in the current drawing. 36 Click File menu ➤ Save. Add a revision cloud for the door interference 29 In the Project Browser. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. and move the cursor clockwise to create a segment of the revision cloud.If Visible is not selected. any revision cloud you draw to indicate this particular revision is not visible in the view in which you create it. click Finish Sketch. 30 Right-click the right view on the sheet. The revision cloud is displayed around the door. 480 | Chapter 13 Project Coordination . Tagging Revision Clouds on page 480. 31 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. In most instances.rvt. Tagging Revision Clouds In this exercise. The Activate View command activates a viewport on the sheet. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise.Stair Shafts Sections. you would turn off visibility only after a revision was issued. 34 Continue adding segments until the cloud encompasses the area that you changed. Revit Structure is now in sketch mode. click Revision Cloud. double-click S.

and then issue the revisions to create a record. Because you chose to number by sheet. click Tag ➤ Tag By Category. The tag displays the revision number of the cloud. and select Activate View. double-click S.Place a revision tag 1 In the Project Browser. position the cursor just outside the revision cloud for grid line B.rvt. you first view the revisions that were created in the previous exercise. 9 Proceed to the next exercise. under Sheets (all). The Activate View command activates a viewport on the sheet. 7 Repeat steps 2 through 5 to add revision tags for all remaining revision clouds. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. 5 In the drawing area. 2 Right-click the view on the sheet. 8 Click File menu ➤ Save.Level 3 Framing Plan. i_RST_Revision-in progress. 6 Click to place the tag. 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. If the cursor is just inside the cloud. Working with Revisions on page 481. The number is based on the numbering method you specified when you set up the revision table. 4 On the Options Bar. Working with Revisions | 481 . and lock it from further changes. Working with Revisions In this exercise. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. the tag is displayed inside the cloud. and because the revision is the first in the project.1 . the cloud is tagged as number 1. allowing you to edit the model directly from the sheet. clear Leader.

double-click S. 482 | Chapter 13 Project Coordination .1 . 6 Select Issued for each revision entry. 4 Select . double-click S. You cannot add revision clouds to the revision in the drawing area. Issue a revision 5 After you make the necessary changes to the project and add the revised views to a sheet.Level 3 Framing Plan.View the revisions 1 In the Project Browser.Stair Shafts Sections. and click OK. you can no longer modify it. NOTE After you issue a revision. you prevent further changes to the revision. 2 Select . On the Settings menu. under Sheets (all). and draw a zoom box around the title block as shown. nor can you edit the sketch of the existing clouds. You do this by issuing the revision.2 . click Revisions. and draw a zoom box around the title block as shown. under Sheets (all). 3 In the Project Browser.

7 Click File menu ➤ Close. Structural Analytical Modelling on page 485. Click Yes when prompted to save the drawing. 8 Proceed to the next tutorial. Working with Revisions | 483 .

484 .

As you create objects and the physical model. Applying the Analytical Model to the Design Process Revit Structure combines 2 models. the analytical model is created automatically based on engineering rules and logical relationships between the structural objects. For example. the template is still applied to the 3D view. To update a view. interaction with steel detailers and fabricators and also the analytical model that can be consumed by multiple 3rd party analysis software. View Templates help standardize the look of all views. quantity take off. you learn some basic concepts of the Revit Structure 2009 analytical model and how to prepare the model to be analyzed by a third party analysis software. Discipline. material properties. component properties. the View Template saves and applies only common properties. The analytical model consists of structural components. You can also apply an existing view’s view properties using the Apply View Template command. 485 . and the visibility settings of categories and subcategories. The view inherits view properties such as View Scale. Revit Structure applies only the properties applicable to both. Though the View Range property applies only to plan views. All views created with that template are not automatically updated. loads and load combinations. When working with the analytical model. You can apply a template to an existing or new view. Detail level.Structural Analytical Modelling 14 In this tutorial. Revit Structure View Templates provide initial conditions for a view. NOTE Reapplying a view template overrides previous view property modifications and View templates can only be applied to geometric views. You can save the View Template from one type of view and apply those same properties to any other geometric view. you can reapply the modified template. you can apply that same template to a 3D view. Views and View Templates are not linked. if you save a template from a plan view. Because each view in Revit Structure consists of different properties. geometry. The physical model that is used for documentation.

Apply the view template 1 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. click Training Files. 2 In the Select View Template dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. The Structural Analytical Normal view template will present structural components in this new analytical plan view with both the analytical model and the physical model displayed as shown. 486 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . you learn how to check member supports. select Structural Analytical Normal or Structural Analytical Stick. Analytical checks should be run at different phases of the project and the model adjusted accordingly.rvt.Analytical Checks In this exercise. and open Imperial\i_RST_SAM_Analytical_Checks. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and run an analytical consistency check on the analytical model shown below. The Structural Analytical Stick view template will present structural components in this new analytical plan with only the analytical model displayed as shown.

4 In the Warning dialog click . This tutorial will run both the Member Supports Check and Analytical/Physical Model Consistency Check for all elements selected from the Settings menu ➤ Structural Settings dialog. 2 In the Structural Settings dialog. Notice that the structural element is highlighted on the model as each warning is selected. A Warning dialog appears notifying you that there are structural elements that may not be supported properly. Revit Structure checks for instances where a structural element (column) is missing a foundation support (slab. or isolated). Verify analytical settings 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Structural Settings. Check member supports 3 Click Tools menu ➤ Analytical Model ➤ Check Member Supports. 5 Close the Warning dialog. select the Analytical Model Settings tab. applying either the stick or normal analytical view template to the view will cause loads to be displayed. wall.NOTE If the visibility of loads is tuned off in the view. Analytical Checks | 487 . to view each warning. under the Analytical Model Settings tab. Review support warnings 6 Click Tools menu ➤ Review Warnings.

488 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . Click Structural Columns: W-Wide Flange-Column: W10X33 ■ ■ Click Show. Click OK in the Viewing Tips dialog.7 In the Warning dialog: ■ ■ Expand Structural Element may not be supported ➤ Warning 1.

Notice the column is not supported by an isolated footing. Review circular reference warnings 8 Click Tools menu ➤ Review Warnings. Analytical Checks | 489 . 9 In the Warning dialog: ■ ■ Expand Circular Support Chain Detected ➤ First Warning Click Structural Framing: W-Wide Flange-Column: W18X40 ■ Click Show.The unsupported element is highlighted and displayed in the drawing area.

Notice the highlighted beam requires an adjacent beam for support on one end. Correct circular reference 15 In the Project Browser. H-3. D-2. 12 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Notice that there are missing isolated footings at specific grid locations. 16 Correct the placement of the structural beams as shown. E-3. under Structural Plans. double-click Ground Level. double-click Level 2. Correct member supports 11 In the Project Browser. and H-4. click Close. 490 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . 10 In the Warning dialog. click Foundation ➤ Isolated. 14 On the Design bar.■ Click OK in the Viewing Tips dialog. 13 Place an isolated footing at each of the following grid locations: E-1. click Modify. under Structural Plans. D-4.

6 In the Warning dialog: ■ ■ Expand Zero-length Analytical Model Detected ➤ first Warning. Review warnings 5 Click Tools menu ➤ Review Warnings. click to view each warning. 3 In the Warning dialog.Run a consistency check 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Click Tools menu ➤ Analytical Model ➤ Analytical / Physical Model Consistency Check. Revit Structure checks for consistency between the analytical and physical models. and double-click 3D. 4 Close the Warning dialog. A Warning dialog appears notifying you that there are model elements that have a zero-length. This indicates the specific element has a physical length but no analytical length. Notice that the structural element is highlighted on the model as each warning is selected. Click Structural Columns: W-Wide Flange-Column: W10X49 Analytical Checks | 491 . expand 3D Views.

■ ■ Click Show. and on the Options Bar. click Close. under Analytical Model. The Zero-length element is highlighted and displayed in the drawing area. Click OK in the Viewing Tips dialog. 8 Select the column that was previously highlighted. click . notice that Ground Level is selected as the value for Top Vertical Projection. 7 In the Warning dialog. In the Element Properties dialog. 492 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling .

Correct zero-length elements 10 Enter ZF (Zoom To Fit).9 In the Element Properties dialog. and select the 3 columns identified in the warning dialog as shown. 12 Press CTRL. 11 Click or drag the ViewCube to re-orient the view until the south side of the structure is visible as shown. click OK. Analytical Checks | 493 .

15 In the Element Properties dialog. click OK. This indicates the zero-length warnings have been fixed. Load Cases on page 494. 18 Proceed to the next exercise. for Top Vertical Projection. 14 Under Analytical Model.13 On the Options Bar. You can save the open file if you wish. Load Cases In the Structural Settings dialog. a new training file is provided. The following illustration shows the Structural Settings dialog with the Load Cases tab selected. click . In the next exercise. 494 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . The Warning dialog does not appear. 17 Click File menu ➤ Close. 16 Click Tools menu ➤ Analytical Model ➤ Analytical / Physical Model Consistency Check. select Top of Column. you edit and add load cases.

2 Click Add. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Revit Structure provides a default number. 5 Under Category. 2 In the Structural Settings dialog. 4 Click in the name cell of the new load case. and rename it to Roof Hung. and the Add button changes to Duplicate. The second table is the Load Natures table. In this table. you add.The first table is the Load Cases table. In this table. select the Load Cases tab. select Dead Loads. you add or delete load natures. In this exercise. Load Cases | 495 . The selected load case is copied in the table. and open Imperial\i_RST_SAM3. NOTE You can also create a new load case with the Duplicate command. In the left pane of the Open dialog. A new load case is added to the bottom of the table. click Training Files. then click Duplicate. you learn how to add new load cases. edit. Add a load nature 1 Click in the Load Natures table. Add a Load Case 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Structural Settings. Select an existing load case record in the table. Revit Structure provides several default load case types that you can use to generate loads in the model. 3 Click Add. or delete load cases.rvt. NOTE The Case Number column of the table is read-only. A new load nature record is added to the bottom of the table.

4 Click OK to close the Structural Settings dialog.rvt Change the coordinate system orientation 1 In the Project Browser. perpendicular to the host’s work plane.Analytical. 6 Proceed to the next exercise. Adding Loads to the Model Loads are added to the model using a coordinate system. Use the project file that you saves at the end of that exercise. NOTE The new load nature is now available under the Nature column of the Load Cases table. and wind loads to the model. Hosts include slabs and beams. using the project coordinate system. A host for a load has its own work plane. Revit Structure has several coordinate systems for loads: ■ ■ ■ project coordinate system current work plane host work plane The project coordinate system displays in the view when you click Loads on the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. and save the model to a location of your choice using the following filename: i_RST_SAM3-in progress. The orientation of the project coordination is as illustrated: A view has a work plane that can be used for object placement. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. Adding Loads to the Model on page 496. 496 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . expand 3D Views. expand Views (all).rvt. 5 Click File menu ➤ Save As. and enter an appropriate name. Then you create load combinations for use by analysis and design software. and double-click View 1 . i_RST_SAM3-in progress.3 Click in the cell of the new load nature. live loads. In this exercise. you will be adding dead loads. Loads are placed perpendicular to the view’s current work plane. and loads can be placed by default.

and click Hidden Line. select 6 In the Element Properties dialog. 9 Click the garage sloped slab. 4 Select . Adding Loads to the Model | 497 . 7 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. select Top of Slab for Vertical Projection. draw a zoom box around the garage sloped slab and select it. . and click OK. click the Model Graphics Style control. click (Area Load). 8 On the Options Bar. click Loads. 5 On the Options Bar. 3 Click or drag the ViewCube to rotate the model so the garage sloped slab is visible. Use the tooltips to be sure you click the correct option. under Analytical Model.2 On the View Control Bar. TIP Be sure to click the Area Load with Host option.

expand Views (all). and double-click Level 2-Analytical. 10 On the Design Bar. click 13 Click OK. click Loads. 3 On the Options Bar. under Structural Analysis. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. expand Structural Plans. click (Area Load). . 11 Select the load. Notice the coordinate system indicates the load is perpendicular to the host (ramp). 12 In the Element Properties dialog.The load is placed on the garage sloped slab. Add an area load at level 2 using slab as host 1 In the Project Browser. click Modify. and on the Options Bar. select Project for Orient to. The load coordinates are now parallel to the project. 498 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling .

double-click Level 2-Analytical. enter -0.0300 ksf for the Fz 1 parameter. 7 Right-click on the load you placed. and click OK. Add wind load at Level 2 9 In the Project Browser. Adding Loads to the Model | 499 . 6 On the Design Bar. 4 In the Type Selector. select Area Load: Area Load 1. and click Element Properties. click Modify to exit the Loads tool. 8 In the Element Properties dialog. 5 Select the Level 2 slab perimeter as shown. 10 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. under Structural Plans. Use the Tooltips to be sure you click the correct option.TIP Be sure to click the Area Load with Host option. click Loads.

click Duplicate. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. 14 Right-click on the Line Load 1. and click Element Properties. 17 In the Element Properties dialog.11 On the Options Bar.0400 kip/ft for Fx 1 500 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . enter Wind Load. 16 In the Type Properties dialog. click (Line Load). click Edit/New. Use the Tooltips to be sure you click the correct option. do the following: ■ ■ Enter 0 kip/ft for Fz 1 Enter 0. as shown. Watch the Status Bar to be sure you are highlighting Line Load 1. TIP Be sure to click the Line Load option. 13 On the Design Bar. and click OK. TIP You may need to press TAB to highlight the line load. 12 Sketch a line load from one corner of the slab to the other. click Modify.

and double-click View 1 .Analytical. 19 On the View Control Bar. click the Model Graphics Style control.Analytical in order to view the added loads. and click OK. expand Views (all). double-click Level 2 . 18 In the Project Browser. expand 3D Views. Adding Loads to the Model | 501 . under Structural Plans. 20 In the Project Browser.■ Select WIND1(3) for Load Case. and click Hidden Line. draw a zoom box around the beams on the east side of the structure as shown. 21 Select .

23 Draw a temporary grid as shown.22 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 502 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . click Grid.

24 On the View tab of the Design bar. 25 Place the framing elevation symbol so that it will snap to the temporary grid approximately as shown.This grid is drawn for reference only. Adding Loads to the Model | 503 . draw a zoom box around the lower floors of the structure as shown. 27 Select the temporary grid. The elevation view opens. click Framing Elevation. and will be deleted in a later step. 26 On the Design bar. click Modify. 28 Double-click the new elevation bubble. and press DELETE. 29 Select .

Use the Tooltips to be sure you click the correct option. The load projection plane is now oriented to the workplane of the temporary grid line plane to which the framing elevation was pointing. click (Line Load). under Structural Analysis. click . and on the Options Bar. 33 Drawing the load from one corner of the flange to the other.30 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 504 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . click Loads. and click OK. as shown. select Workplane for Orient to. 35 In the Element Properties dialog. 31 On the Options Bar. 34 Select the load. select the edge of the flange as the starting point for the load. You will see the load is oriented to project orientation. 32 On Level 2. TIP Be sure to click the Line Load option.

Use the project file that you saves at the end of that exercise.rvt. You edit and add load combinations in the Structural Settings dialog. 5 Click on the Edit Selected Formula table. 37 Proceed to the next exercise. select LL1. 6 Under Factor. you add a load combination to your model for use by the analysis and design software. Load Combination In this exercise.rvt Add a DL + LL combination 1 On the Settings menu. and click Add. 8 Click Add. Load Combination on page 505.4. 7 Under Case or Combination. i_RST_SAM3-in progress. Load Combination | 505 . enter DL+LL. 3 Click Add in the Load Combination section.36 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 2 In the Structural Settings dialog. enter 1. click the Load Combinations tab. enter 1. select DL1. 9 Under Factor. Notice that the Formula field under Load Combination changed automatically to show the new factor. and save the model to a location of your choice using the following filename: i_RST_SAM3-in progress. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. click Structural Settings.6. 10 Under Case or Combination. 4 Under Name.

5. enter DL+LL+WIND. 14 Under Factor. 12 Under Name. select Envelope. 20 Under Factor. 24 Under Type. 21 Under Case or Combination.Add a DL + LL + wind combination with a factor 11 Click on the Load Combination table. 23 Select Row 2. 17 Under Factor. Add a WIND1 combination with a factor 19 Click Add in the Edit Selected Formula table. and enter 1. select Ultimate. 18 Under Case or Combination.3. 15 Under Case or Combination. 22 Click on the Load Combination table. and click Add. 25 Under State. select DL1. Add a LL1 combination with a factor 16 Click Add. enter 0.2. select WIND1. and click Add. select LL1. 13 Click on the Edit Selected Formula table. 506 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . enter 1.

3 In the Select Items to Copy dialog. 28 Proceed to the next exercise. Transfer Project Standards on page 507. Scroll down the list of items. select the file that contains the load table. you transfer the load combination table to a new or existing project. 2 Click File menu ➤ Transfer Project Standards. and select Load Types. 27 Click File menu ➤ Save. click OK. Click Check None. ■ ■ ■ Under Copy from.rvt Importing load types and combinations from a previous project 1 Open an existing Revit Structure project or create a new project. Use the project file that you saves at the end of that exercise. Transfer Project Standards | 507 .26 In the Structural Settings dialog. Transfer Project Standards In this exercise. i_RST_SAM3-in progress. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise.

6 On the Structural Settings dialog. 5 Click Settings menu ➤ Structural Settings.■ Click OK. click the Load Combinations tab. click Overwrite. 508 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . 4 In the Duplicate Types dialog.

The load combinations are displayed. and creating an analytical schedule. Documenting the Analytical Model In this exercise. 7 Click File menu ➤ Save. Documenting the Analytical Model on page 509. 8 Proceed to the next exercise. and double-click Level 2 Analytical. you document the analysis by adding an annotation. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. expand Views (all). i_RST_SAM3-in progress.rvt Add annotation 1 In the Project Browser. click Tag ➤ By Category. Use the project file that you saves at the end of that exercise. 3 Click the Wind Load to place the tag. Documenting the Analytical Model | 509 . expand Structural Plans.

510 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . 6 Click on the drag control for the wind load tag and position approximately as shown.4 Click the Area Load to place the tag. click Modify. 5 On the Design Bar.

Create a load schedule 7 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select Line Loads and click OK. 10 Under Available fields. 8 In the New Schedule dialog. Define the fields 9 In the Schedule Properties dialog. under Category. add the following fields to the schedule: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Fx 2 Fy 1 Fy 2 Fz 1 Fz 2 Nature 12 Under Scheduled fields. right-click on the Design Bar. and click View. The Fx 1 field is moved under Scheduled fields. select Fx 1 and click Add. click Schedule/Quantities. order the fields as shown in the following illustration by selecting them and clicking Move Up or Move Down. Documenting the Analytical Model | 511 . 11 Using the same process. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. click the Fields tab.

double-click Ground Level . i_RST_SAM3-in progress. Examples of Analytical Adjustment and Reset in the Model on page 512. Manual adjustment is required before a structural model is input into the analysis and design software. the geometry of the analytical model may be adjusted in relation to those elements that it joins.3. Revit Structure provides a reset tool to reset analytical models back to their original location relative to the corresponding physical model. 2 Zoom into the column at grid line F . NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise.rvt Align the analytical beam 1 In the Project Browser. Examples of Analytical Adjustment and Reset in the Model There are some structural configurations that are not suitable for direct integration with structural analysis and design software. In addition. 512 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise.Analytical. under Structural Plans.13 Click OK. 14 Click File menu ➤ Save. 15 Proceed to the next exercise. For this reason. A schedule is created that includes the analytical elements in the project.

3 Click Tools menu ➤ Analytical Model ➤ Adjust Analytical Model. 5 Press TAB. and select the endpoint of the analytical line of the beam. and select the corner endpoint of the analytical plane of the slab. 4 Press TAB. Examples of Analytical Adjustment and Reset in the Model | 513 .

You can save the open file if you wish. a new training file is provided. 7 Proceed to the next exercise. Revit Structure provides the capability to automatically adjust the analytical model to reduce or eliminate these discrepancies for newly created elements as well as the ability to disassociate or reassociate the auto-detect parameter for existing elements.The analytical model lines and planes are now connected at the same location for analysis purposes. 6 Click File menu ➤ Close. setting both planes to level 2 as shown: ■ Creating columns Places the analytical model of columns and walls in the same plane as shown: ■ Creating slabs and walls 514 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . Examples of Automatic Adjustment in the Analytical Model The analytical model that is generated in Revit Structure has discrepancies that are not suitable for direct integration with structural analysis and design software. For example. ■ Creating beams The corresponding beam to slab projection planes are matched. Examples of Automatic Adjustment in the Analytical Model on page 514. In the next exercise. NOTE The auto-detect feature automatically adjusts the analytical model when creating the following structural elements within a project.

Aligns the vertical and horizontal analytical projection plane of walls. despite any variation in wall thicknesses or projection plane location as shown: If a wall and slab are joined. the top or bottom plane of the wall’s analytical model will coincide with the slab analytical model as shown: If a wall has a portion that extends beyond the roof (commonly known as parapets). Examples of Automatic Adjustment in the Analytical Model | 515 . it can be excluded in the wall’s analytical model to exclude loads that extend above a level with framing members.

click Training Files. select the Analytical Model Settings tab. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. This exercise applies the auto-detect feature within the tolerances specified in this dialog. or it can be trimmed back the analytical/physical model of the slab as shown: NOTE The following adjustments to the analytical model are applied to an existing project to better demonstrate the auto-detect feature. and open Imperial\i_RST_SAM_Auto_Detect. 2 In the Structural Settings dialog. Auto-detect tolerances 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Structural Settings. and the auto-detect tolerances for both horizontal and vertical planes. the exterior of the wall can be defined as the analytical projection plane. 3 Click OK. They include distances for the analytical-to-physical model and analytical adjustments.rvt.If the analytical edge of slab coincides with the beam or wall analytical model. 516 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling .

Examples of Automatic Adjustment in the Analytical Model | 517 . . 2 On the Toolbar. 4 On the Toolbar. and draw a zoom box around one of the beams. click . double-click Level 2. and draw a zoom box around the lower-left corner of the structure 3 Double-click the section bubble to open the section view.Adjust the beam to slab vertical offset 1 In the Project Browser ➤ Structural Plans. click as shown. 5 Move the cursor over the top of the beam as shown.

and then click OK. NOTE The properties for all beams of the same type should be changed. select Auto-detect. select Top of Slab. For demo purposes. The vertical projection plane of the analytical model automatically moves to the top of the slab. and on the Option Bar. and then click OK. and on the Option Bar. 518 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . click . click . a single beam is selected 7 In the Element Properties dialog. under Analytical Model. represents the vertical projection plane of the beam analytical model.The dot located at the top of the beam. for Vertical Projection. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. under Analytical Model. 6 Click the beam. for Vertical Projection. 8 Click the slab.

Notice the green line representing the analytical model of the concrete wall is not aligned with the blue dot representing the analytical model of the column. Adjust the column to wall horizontal offset 10 In the Project Browser ➤ Structural Plans. 11 On the Toolbar.The vertical projection plane of the analytical model automatically moves to the top of the slab. 13 Draw a zoom box around the column as shown. click . The dot located at the top of the slab. represents the vertical projection plane of the analytical model. and click Zoom in Region. 12 In an empty part of the drawing area. Examples of Automatic Adjustment in the Analytical Model | 519 .Analytical. double-click Level 2 . right-click. and draw a zoom box around the column at grid location A3.

aligns with the horizontal projection plane of the wall. click (Join Geometry). click . select the wall. and then select the column. The horizontal projection plane for the column. click . and then click OK. The geometry of the column and wall are now joined.14 Click the column. select Auto-detect. under Analytical Model. for Horizontal Projection. double-click Level 2. Adjust the vertical alignment of different wall types 17 In the Project Browser ➤ Structural Plans. and draw a zoom box around the elevator shaft located on the lower-right side of the structure as shown. 520 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . and on the Option Bar. 18 On the Toolbar. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. 16 On the Tools toolbar.

Examples of Automatic Adjustment in the Analytical Model | 521 .19 Double-click the section bubble to open the section view.

select Auto-detect. click . and then click OK. Check the Status Bar to verify you are selecting the chain of walls and not a single wall. 21 Press TAB. and select Chain of Walls or Lines. 23 In the Element Properties dialog.Notice the solid green lines are not aligned. 20 Move the cursor over the lower wall. 522 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . for Horizontal Projection. The dotted green line represents reference plane 1. These lines represent the vertical projection plane of the upper and lower wall analytical model. under Analytical Model. 22 On the Option Bar.

27 In the Element Properties dialog. 25 Draw a zoom box around the center of the upper and lower walls as shown. click . and then click OK.The vertical projection plane for the lower wall is now aligned with the vertical projection plane of the upper wall. Examples of Automatic Adjustment in the Analytical Model | 523 . and click Zoom in Region. for Horizontal Projection. under Analytical Model. 24 In an empty part of the drawing area. 26 Click the upper wall. right-click. select Plane 1. and on the Option Bar.

and click Zoom in Region. Adjust the vertical alignment of a wall and slab 28 In the Project Browser ➤ Sections (Building Section). double-click Section 3. 524 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . right-click. 30 Draw a zoom box around the intersection of the beam and column.The vertical projection plane for both the upper and lower walls are now aligned with vertical projection plane 1. 29 In an empty part of the drawing area.

and then click OK. 32 In the Element Properties dialog. Examples of Automatic Adjustment in the Analytical Model | 525 . and on the Option Bar. The vertical projection plane for the lower wall is now aligned with the horizontal projection plane of the slab. Adjust the horizontal alignment of the slab to wall 33 Click the slab. select Bottom of Slab. 34 In the Element Properties dialog. for Vertical Projection. under Analytical Model. click . click . and on the Option Bar. and then click OK. for Top Vertical Projection. select Auto-detect. and the green line represents the analytical model of the wall.The brown line represents the analytical model of the slab. under Analytical Model. 31 Click the lower wall. Notice the green line extends to the top of the beam.

for Horizontal Projection. and then click Open View. 37 Select the left sketch line of the slab as shown. 39 In the Element Properties dialog. and on the Option Bar. 35 Click the slab. In the Revit dialog. click Finish Sketch. and on the Option Bar. 41 In the Project Browser ➤ Sections (Building Section).Analytical.The horizontal projection plane for the slab (brown line) is now aligned with the vertical projection plane of the wall (green line). You are now in sketch mode and the slab perimeter appears in the drawing area. and then click OK. click No. 43 In the Element Properties dialog. under Analytical Model. select Auto-detect. select Structural Plan: Level 2 . select Exterior Face. double-click Section 3. 36 In the Go to View dialog. click . 42 Click the lower wall. 38 On the Option Bar. Notice the analytical line of the wall moves with the analytical line of the slab. click . 526 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . and then click OK. for Analytical Slab Edge. click . 40 On the Design Bar. under Analytical Model.

and on the Option Bar. and on the Option Bar. select Top of Wall. 47 In the Element Properties dialog. select Auto-Detect Horizontal Projection. under Analytical Model. for Top Vertical Projection. Adjust the column to the lower wall analytical projection 44 Click the column. 45 In the Element Properties dialog. 46 Click the lower wall. click . and then click OK. Examples of Automatic Adjustment in the Analytical Model | 527 . click .The horizontal projection plane of the slab is now aligned with the exterior face of the wall. and then click OK. under Analytical Model.

51 Click Window menu ➤ Tile.Analytical. Close any additional open windows. 52 On the Toolbar.The vertical projection plane of the column (blue line) is now aligned with the exterior face of the wall (green line). click . Both windows will be visible in the drawing area. double-click Level 3 . 49 Enter ZF. double-click Level 3. Adjust the horizontal alignment of a beam 48 In the Project Browser ➤ Structural Plans. and draw a zoom box around the beam located in the upper-left corner of both views as shown. 50 In the Project Browser ➤ Structural Plans. 528 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling .

. and on the Option Bar. Check the Status Bar to make sure you are selecting the shape handle and not the beam. Press TAB. click Notice the beam is highlighted in both open views. under Analytical Model. 54 In the Element Properties dialog. and select the beam shape handle. and then click OK. do the following: ■ ■ Move the cursor over the beam. ■ Examples of Automatic Adjustment in the Analytical Model | 529 . Extend each end of the beam as shown. select Auto-Detect. 55 In the Level 3 window.53 Click the beam. for Horizontal Projection.

a new training file is provided. 57 Proceed to the next exercise. In the next exercise.Notice the beam in the analytical view remains unchanged. 530 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . 56 Click File menu ➤ Close. Boundary Conditions on page 531. You can save the open file if you wish.

Boundary Conditions | 531 . Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Boundary Conditions. and for State. and click Zoom in Region. 8 On the Options Bar. 10 Draw a zoom box around the base of one of the columns. right-click. and open Imperial\i_RST_SAM_Boundary_Conditions.Analytical. and then click OK. 11 Click the end of the blue line (representing the analytical model of the beam) to place the point boundary condition. clear Structural Foundation. 7 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.rvt. 9 In an empty part of the drawing area. and click Zoom in Region.Boundary Conditions In this exercise. under Visibility. 4 In the Visibility/Graphic dialog. right-click. click Apply. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 5 In an empty part of the drawing area. 2 Enter ZF. click (Point Boundary Condition). 6 Draw a zoom box around the columns located on the lower-left side of the structure as shown. 3 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. double-click View 1 . select Fixed. you add a boundary condition to your model for use by the analysis and design software. Add a point boundary condition to the base of a column 1 In the Project Browser ➤ 3D Views. click Training Files.

14 On the Option Bar. 13 Click one of the boundary condition symbols. and select the other symbol. under Structural Analysis. for State. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. 532 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . click . press CTRL. and then click OK.12 Repeat this technique to add a fixed boundary condition to the next closest beam as shown. select Pinned.

18 On the Toolbar. and for State. click (Line Boundary Condition). 17 Click or drag the ViewCube to rotate the view until the foundation wall is displayed as shown.Notice the boundary condition now displays a pinned state symbol. select Pinned. 21 Click the green line (representing the analytical model of the foundation) to place the line boundary condition. Boundary Conditions | 533 . and draw a zoom box around the foundation. click Boundary Conditions. Add a line boundary condition to the footing 16 Enter ZF. 19 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 20 On the Options Bar. click .

including structural plans. All views. that you confirm in the analysis software. or member addition. The application programming interface (API) starts. Exporting Revit Structure Files on page 535. Preparing the Analytical Model to be Calculated in Third Party Analysis Software Revit Structure links to an analysis and design software. the API also returns you to your Revit Structure model and updates it. You can save the open file if you wish. In addition. Size changes to your model and geometric modifications to your model involving member deletion. a new training file is provided. are imported back into Revit Structure. 2 Proceed to the next tutorial. via an Application Programming Interface (API). and detail sheets are updated according to changes that you import into Revit Structure. NOTE The External Tools menu is only available once an approved 3rd party analysis software application has been installed. member relocation. You can open the analysis software or write to an export file for later use. click Help ➤ Structural Analysis Partners. 534 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . some internal analysis software parameters are imported into Revit Structure. Export the model to analysis software 1 Click Tools menu ➤ External Tools ➤ Send Model. In the next exercise. If you choose to have the API open the software and run your model. elevations. For more information.22 Click File menu ➤ Close. 23 Proceed to the next exercise. sections. Preparing the Analytical Model to be Calculated in Third Party Analysis Software on page 534.

expand 3D Views. In this tutorial. In the left pane of the Open dialog. which is imported into AutoCAD 2007. You can also export the project drawing sheets and import them as 2D images. etc. Exporting CAD Formats In this lesson. you begin by exporting a 3D view of the structural model as a DWG format and importing the file into AutoCAD Architecture 2007. or you can export a 3D view directly into AutoCAD Architecture. sheet.Atrium. maintains the properties of all structural elements as true AutoCAD Architecture objects. Export CAD formats 1 In the Project Browser. You then select a 2D structural plan view and export the file as a DWG format. 535 . and double-click 3D . Revit Structure. you export sheets from the project and import them into AutoCAD 2007 or AutoCAD Architecture 2007 as 2D images.rvt.Exporting Revit Structure Files 15 Your Revit Structure 2009 project can be exported into several different AutoCAD formats. and open Imperial\i_RST_Export. You can export a 2D view (plan. elevation. click Training Files.). Exporting the 3D Model to AutoCAD Architecture 2007 Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Finally. section. you learn how to export your project into both 2D and 3D formats for improved coordination with architects and engineers. or schedule into AutoCAD.

536 | Chapter 15 Exporting Revit Structure Files .2 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ CAD Formats.dwg). select Export as AutoCAD Architecture and AutoCAD MEP Options. do the following: ■ ■ Under Save in. Under File naming. click Short. 4 In the Export Options dialog. select AutoCAD 2007 DWG Files (*. The existing file name is automatically shortened. do the following: ■ Under Solids (3D views only). Under Save as type. 3 In the Export dialog. ■ ■ Click Options. select a folder on your local computer. NOTE You can only export the 3D model in a 3D view.

■ ■ Under Prefer. 5 On the Export dialog. 7 Click File menu ➤ Open. NOTE Revit Structure cannot export to earlier releases of AutoCAD Architecture. View the 3D file in AutoCAD Architecture 2007 6 Open AutoCAD Architecture 2007. 8 Navigate to the file location. Click OK. and click Open. Exporting the 3D Model to AutoCAD Architecture 2007 | 537 . select AutoCAD Architecture objects. click Save.

Exporting a 2D view to AutoCAD on page 539 538 | Chapter 15 Exporting Revit Structure Files .rvt. and save the model to a location of your choice using the following filename: i_RST_Export-in progress. and notice it is a true AutoCAD Architecture structural element. beams. Revit Structure columns. 12 Proceed to the next exercise. 11 In Revit Structure.When the file is opened in AutoCAD Architecture 2007. 10 Minimize the AutoCAD Architecture program. click File menu ➤ Save As. and braces are converted to the corresponding type of AutoCAD Architecture structural member. 9 Select a beam as shown. the Revit Structure model appears as shown.

Under File name.Exporting a 2D view to AutoCAD Training File ■ Continue to use the training file that was saved in the previous exercise. and double-click Level 2.rvt. Exporting a 2D view to AutoCAD | 539 . clear the existing name and enter Framing Plan Level 2. select AutoCAD 2007 DWG Files (*. expand Structural Plans. Click Save.dwg). Under File naming. 3 In the Export dialog. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Save in. 1 In the Project Browser. click Long (Specify prefix for all exports). 2 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ CAD Formats. Under Save as type. select a folder on your local computer. i_RST_Export-in progress.

Exporting Sheets on page 540 Exporting Sheets Training File ■ Continue to use the training file that was saved in the previous exercise.If the view was set to wireframe. 6 Navigate to the file location.rvt. click Hidden Line Removal. NOTE Revit Structure cannot export to earlier releases of AutoCAD Architecture. On the View’s export mode dialog. When the file is opened in AutoCAD 2007 or AutoCAD Architecture 2007. a warning dialog appears. View the 2D file 4 Maximize the AutoCAD 2007 or AutoCAD Architecture 2007 program. 5 Click File menu ➤ Open. 540 | Chapter 15 Exporting Revit Structure Files . i_RST_Export-in progress. and click Open. click File menu ➤ Save. 9 Proceed to the next exercise. 7 Minimize the AutoCAD or AutoCAD Architecture program. the Revit Structure exported Level 3 Plan appears. 8 In Revit Structure.

you can flatten xrefs by selecting the Export each view or sheet as a single file option as shown. clear Views. Select each sheet. do the following: ■ ■ Under Show. click Save. click Selected views/sheets ➤ Select. Under Export Range. do the following: ■ ■ Under Save in. Click No when asked if you want to save the settings for use in a future Revit session. This option is automatically selected for DXF files and not available for DGN or SAT files. Exporting Sheets | 541 .Export sheets 1 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ CAD Formats. 2 In the Export dialog. and click OK. 4 On the Export dialog. NOTE If you are exporting to a DWG file. 3 In the View/Sheet Set dialog. select a folder on your local computer.

NOTE Revit Structure cannot export to earlier releases of AutoCAD Architecture. If you wish to save the changes. 542 | Chapter 15 Exporting Revit Structure Files . On the View’s export mode dialog. View the Revit Structure sheets in AutoCAD 2007 or AutoCAD Architecture 2007 6 Maximize the AutoCAD or AutoCAD Architecture program. click Hidden Line Removal. 8 Navigate to the location of the files saved in the previous exercise.If the view was set to wireframe. navigate to a folder of your preference and rename the file. and click Open. 5 Close the Revit Structure file. 7 Click File menu ➤ Open. a warning dialog appears.

Exporting Sheets | 543 .When the sheets are opened in AutoCAD or AutoCAD Architecture. they appear as shown.

544 .

the types would all be saved as one file which can then be loaded into any project. they are still related and come from a single source. There are. In addition. You provide the information necessary to describe uniquely the family geometry. you create a family within predefined templates that contain the intelligent objects required to create the particular family type.rfa extension. there is another type of family that allows you to create any shape or form required for a particular project and have Revit Structure recognize it as a particular component type. material set. For example. and when and how to use it. Some family types are pre-defined within Revit Structure and cannot be created or modified outside of the project environment. each with a different size.About Families and the Family Editor 16 All elements in Revit Structure 2009 are “family based. In this lesson. 545 . Using the Family Editor. The different file types become much easier to manage. such as a curved beam. however. shape. you learn about the three types of families and how they are used within a project and how they are created. Changes to a family type definition ripple through the project and are automatically reflected in every instance of that family or type within the project. You also learn about the Family Editor. exceptions to this rule. Even though various types within a family can look different. if you create a family called wide beams that includes types with several sizes. because there is only one file to track. Each family element can have multiple types defined within it. you learn about the various types of families and the Family Editor. Using Families and the Family Editor One of the many advantages of using Revit Structure is the ability to create your own families of components without having to learn a complex programming language.” The term family describes a powerful concept used throughout Revit Structure to help you manage your data and make changes easily. thus the term family. or other parameter variables as designed by the family creator. This keeps everything coordinated and saves you the time and effort of manually keeping components and schedules up to date. Introduction to Families Most families are created in the Family Editor and saved as separate files with an . In this tutorial. Walls. All different types that you create are stored with the master family file. and roofs are examples of these types of families.

and beam. has wall types that define interior. 546 | Chapter 16 About Families and the Family Editor . and roofs. The basic walls system family. You can either duplicate and modify an existing component family or create a component family based on a variety of family templates. while many more are stored in component libraries. Host-based families have components that require hosts. foundation. The following illustration shows different types within the basic walls family. Family templates are either host-based or standalone. You can duplicate and modify existing system families. floors. Standard Component Families Standard component families are loaded by default in project templates. exterior. NOTE You can use “Transfer Project Standards” to copy system families from one project to another. Family templates assist you in creating and manipulating component families. for example. but you cannot create new system families. The following dialog box shows how you can select a specific family template to start your family design project. You work with the Family Editor to create and modify components.Revit Structure has three types of families: ■ ■ ■ System Standard Component In-place System Families System families are pre-defined within Revit Structure and comprise principle building components such as walls. and partition wall styles. generic. Standalone families include columns.

and also a standalone pile cap family component. You have a choice of categories when you create in-place families. You can load them into projects. custom step footing.rfa extension. Introduction to Families | 547 . In-place Families In-place families are either model or annotation components in a particular project. for example. You create in-place families only within the current project.Standard component families can exist outside of the project environment and have an . and save them from a project file to your library if needed. The following illustration shows host-based openings in a wall. so they are useful for objects unique to that project. transfer them from one project to another. The following illustration shows an in-place step footing. and the category that you use determines the appearance and display control of the component within the project.

3 Navigate to the library or location of the family. After the family has been loaded in the project. or you can load it using the Load From Library. and the general procedure for creating a standard component family. In this exercise. you learned about the different types of Revit Structure families and when to use them. 2 Click File menu ➤ Load From Library ➤ Load Family. reload the family in the project to see the updated family. Families are listed in the Project Browser under their respective component category. how to access it. In the final exercise. 548 | Chapter 16 About Families and the Family Editor . or 3D.Add a family to a project 1 Open or start a project. In this section. Family element visibility can be dependent of your viewing direction. if you change the original family. Families store all of the necessary geometry to display the two-dimensional (2D) and three-dimensional (3D) versions of particular objects. However. such as plan. as well as the level of detail associated with that view. Introduction to the Family Editor You can use the Family Editor to create both real-life building components and graphical/annotation components. you learn about the Family Editor. and when to use it. Load Family command on the File menu. To add a family to your project. it is saved with the project. you can drag it into the document window. you learn when to use the Family Editor. how to access it. elevation. 4 Select the family file name and click Open. You do not have to carry the original family file along with the project.

With Revit Structure open. 4 If you cannot find the component you require. you will need a specific component for your design. and click Open. try to find the component that most closely resembles it. create a component family using one of the family templates as a starting point. When the family opens. 9 Save the newly defined family.rfa extension and it opens Revit Structure in the Family Editor. such as newsgroups. 7 Specify 2D and 3D geometry display characteristics with subcategory and entity visibility settings. and then load it into the project. Within the Windows® environment. It is far easier to modify an existing component within the Family Editor than to create it from scratch. Introduction to the Family Editor | 549 . if you have exhausted your external resources. 2 Define subcategories for the family to aid in controlling visibility of the object. it will be available within the Type Selector. you can click File ➤ Open. You can have a project open and the Family Editor open simultaneously. presume it is a bay window that you require. it opens within the Family Editor. To start a new family. 6 Flex the new model to verify correct component behavior. There is a logical thought process to follow: 1 Is there a component of this type already loaded into this project? If so. consider checking the Web library and other Web resources. Also consider any internal family libraries that exist on the network. open it in the Family Editor. 5 Finally. you can double-click any file with an . click File ➤ New ➤ Family. 3 Lay out reference planes to aid in drawing component geometry. How to use the Family Editor You can access the Family Editor in several ways. 3 Next. 5 Add label dimensions to create type or instance parameters. If you find a close match. 8 Define family type variations by specifying different parameters. you can search the component library loaded on your local hard drive. It will be apparent because the only Design Bar tab available is Family. General procedure for creating a standard component family 1 Select the appropriate family template. and then load it into a new project and see how it performs. 4 Add dimensions to specify parametric component geometry. modify it as needed.When to use the Family Editor During the design process. and click Open. select the appropriate template. In this case. navigate to a family file. 2 If there is not a component family loaded in the project.

550 .

you create a custom. In the first exercise. Creating a Custom Metal Deck Family In this exercise. you create it within the project file. and an in-place family for a step-footing. you customize 2 different families with the Revit Structure family editor. you create a custom opening in a castellated beam family. a custom castellated beam. non-composite metal deck family by adding a dovetail rib to the deck profile.Creating Components in the Family Editor 17 In this tutorial. This allows you to create the family in the context of the current project. Creating Custom Families In this lesson. Using the installed templates.rft file). In the second exercise. When you create an in-place family. you create the following families: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ a custom metal deck profile.rft) template for use in other projects. you modify the profile for a non-composite metal deck family by adding a dovetail rib. a reinforcement layout with overlapping rebar. a custom titleblock. Modifications to the existing families are saved as a family (. not within the Family template (. you learn how to create specific Revit Structure 2009 Families. 551 .

3 Click View menu ➤ Visibility Graphics.Open the metal deck family profile 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. and click Zoom to Fit. 4 On the Annotations Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. 5 In an empty part of the drawing area. right-click. Delete the same parameter on the opposite side of the profile. select 1 1/2" = 1' 0" for scale. and open Imperial\Form Deck_Non Composite. click Dimensions and Reference Planes. 552 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and press DELETE. click Training Files.rfa. Click Apply. 8 Delete additional vertical reference planes until the view appears as shown. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. and then click OK. do the following: ■ ■ Under Visibility. 6 On the View Control Bar. Delete vertical reference planes 7 Select parameter wr as shown.

Move the cursor inside the profile. click Modify. 11 Place a dimension for the angle as follows: Click the horizontal reference plane. Creating a Custom Metal Deck Family | 553 . click Dimension. 10 On the Options Bar. 12 On the Design Bar. click ■ ■ ■ (Create Angular Dimensions). Click the angle.Modify the angular reference plane 9 On the Design Bar. and click to place the dimension as shown.

554 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor .13 Select the angled reference plane. and drag them approximately as shown. 16 On the View Control Bar. 17 Click the top and bottom dimensions. 15 In an empty part of the drawing area. 14 Select the angular dimension and click the lock symbol to lock the angle to the horizontal reference plane. enter 66. select 6" = 1' 0" for scale. Repeat this technique to add a dimension for the angle on the opposite side of the profile. right-click. and press ENTER. and click Zoom to Fit.

18 Select the dimension that refers to the width of the profile base. and add a dimension as shown. click Dimension. Creating a Custom Metal Deck Family | 555 . and press DELETE. Place new dimensions 19 On the Design Bar. Repeat for the dimension on the opposite side.

click Ref Plane. 22 On the Design Bar. 28 Add a dimension from the top of the profile to the dovetail horizontal reference plane as shown. Sketch the dovetail reference planes 21 On the View Toolbar. click Dimension. for Is Reference. select Not a Reference. under Other. 23 Draw 1 horizontal and 4 vertical reference planes approximately as shown. Dimension and constrain the dovetail 27 On the Design Bar. 25 Select the reference planes and on the Options Bar. and click the EQ symbol to apply equal constraints. click . 556 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click . and then click OK. 26 On the Element Properties dialog. and draw a zoom box around the top of the profile.20 Add 2 dimensions from the center reference plane to the bottom of each side of the profile as shown. 24 Press ESC.

32 Repeat the previous technique to add the remaining dimensions for the dovetail as shown. click the dimension. and press ENTER. These dimensions refer to the positioning of the dovetail in relation to the profile center reference plane. 33 Click the EQ symbol to constrain the dimensions as shown. and enter 0' 11/32".The dimensions displayed in the following steps are provided for reference only and can be customized based on your requirements. Creating a Custom Metal Deck Family | 557 . and click the lock symbol to lock the distance to the horizontal reference plane. 31 Select the dimension line. 30 Select the horizontal reference plane. 29 Press ESC.

35 Sketch the dovetail by snapping to the intersections of the vertical and horizontal reference planes as shown. 37 On the Tools toolbar click (Split). 39 Press ESC. click Lines. 38 Using the split tool. 36 Click Modify.Sketch the dovetail 34 On the Design Bar. and click Delete Inner Segment. trace the line between the dovetail and the existing element as shown. Create parameters a and b 40 Select the lower dovetail dimension as shown. 558 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor .

enter a for Name. Creating a Custom Metal Deck Family | 559 .41 On the Options Bar. 42 In the Parameters Properties dialog. 43 Select the upper dovetail dimension as shown. enter b for Name. and then click OK. 44 On the Options Bar. under Parameter Data. click Label ➤ Add Parameter. 45 In the Parameters Properties dialog. and then click OK. click Label ➤ Add Parameter. under Parameter Data.

48 Select the dimension as shown.Define wr parameter 46 On the Design Bar. Flex the new dovetail profile 50 On the Design Bar. and OK. for a. enter 0' 2". enter 0' 4 1/2". select 2" X 6". Click Apply. and select wr. for wr. ■ Under Other. Under Other. 47 In the Family Types dialog. click Family Types. do the following. 51 In the Family Types dialog. 49 On the Options Bar. click Family Types. 560 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . do the following: ■ ■ ■ For Name. click Label.

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ (Undo). and for File Name. select Structural Analysis-Default. enter 0' 2 1/2". in the Imperial Templates folder. and click Open. enter 0' 2 1/2". Notice that the dovetail adjusts automatically to the new parameters. 60 In the New Project dialog. click (Rectangle). click Slab. for b. 65 On the Design Bar. 63 In the Project Browser. click Family Types. Click Apply. Under Family Types. and click Save. 61 In the Choose Template dialog. You are now in sketch mode. do the following. 66 On the Options Bar. Under Other. Create new parameters 56 On the Design Bar. click Lines. enter Form Deck_Non Composite_Dovetail. for Sr. click Browse. select Rename. click OK.rte. Under Other. Under Other. Creating a Custom Metal Deck Family | 561 . 57 In the Family Types dialog. click Save the new profile 53 Click File ➤ Save As. and then click OK. and click OK. under Structural Plans. Create a new project 59 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. 67 Draw a slab in the center of the drawing area. 68 On the Design Bar.■ ■ Under Other. Click Apply. The slab size should be approximately 55' 0" long by 35' 0" wide. 55 Click Profiles ➤ Structural folder. 58 Click File ➤ Save. for a. click the Imperial Library folder. 62 In the New Project dialog. 52 On the Toolbar. 64 On the Design Bar. enter 0' 2". 54 In the left pane of the Save As dialog. double-click Level 2. for b. and enter 2" x 5". click Finish Sketch. enter 0' 5".rfa.

Create a section view of the slab 69 On the Design Bar. select Fine. double-click Section 1. under Sections (Building Sections). 72 Select the slab. 562 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . select 1" = 1' 0". select Wireframe. and in the Type Selector. For Detail Level. do the following: ■ ■ ■ For Scale. click Section. For Model Graphic Style. 70 Click above the slab and draw a section line through the slab approximately as shown.The slab is created. select Floor: 3" LW Concrete on 2" Composite Metal Deck. 71 In the Project Browser. 73 On the View Control toolbar.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. select Layer 3. click 77 In the Element Properties dialog. you create a custom opening in a castellated beam. Under Structural Deck Properties. Customizing a Castellated Beam | 563 . select the slab project from the available files.rvt. If it is not. 83 Proceed to the next exercise. double-click Section 1. ■ ■ ■ . under Sections.Apply the custom family to the metal deck 74 Click the Window menu. click Load into Project. 75 On the Families Design Bar. 76 Select the slab. click OK. The file should still be open. The new non-composite metal deck family is loaded into the slab project. Customizing a Castellated Beam on page 563. 81 In the Element Properties dialog. 78 In the Type Properties dialog. Under Layers. and on the Options Bar. Click OK. click OK. for Deck profile. Customizing a Castellated Beam In this exercise. do the following. 79 In the Edit Assembly dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 80 In the Type Properties dialog. click Edit/New. select Edit for Structure. click Training Files. open the file from the saved folder location. If there are multiple files open. select the new metal deck profile file. and open the new family file. and open Imperial\i_RST_Custom_Beam. 82 In the Project Browser. under Construction. The new profile is applied to the slab.

Modify the beam opening 1 On the Options Bar. . . click 3 In the Element Properties dialog. Refer to the following diagram to identify and define the parameters for the beam opening. click Edit/New. 564 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and on the Options Bar. and draw a zoom box around one of the openings in the 2 Select the beam. ■ ■ ■ ■ e1 = Tee length. e2 = Space between voids (web post length). dt1 = Tee depth top beam. b = Length of sloped portion. click castellated beam. 4 Position both dialogs so the opening is visible in the drawing area as shown.

Open the 2-dimensional (2D) rebar family 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. click Training Files. click OK. click Rebar Lines. enter 0' 6". For b. Creating a Custom Reinforcement Layout In this exercise. enter 0' 3". 7 Proceed to the next lesson. For dt2. 5 In the Type Properties dialog. Creating a Custom Reinforcement Layout | 565 . Click Apply. For e2. Sketch the rebar 3 On the Design Bar. 6 In the Element Properties dialog. enter 0' 3". enter 0' 4". Notice the opening in the beam changes based on the new parameters. For dt1. you create a custom reinforcement layout with overlapping rebar. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For e1. and then click OK. and open Imperial\2D Rebar Shape Template. Creating a Custom Reinforcement Layout on page 565.■ dt2 = Tee depth bottom beam. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. under Construction. enter 0' 5 1/2".rft.

click ■ (Draw). and draw a horizontal line to create the top surface of the rebar. 566 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . as follows: Click to the right of the vertical reference plane. 5 Draw the overlapping rebar as one continuous line.4 On the Options Bar. ■ Click and draw a second horizontal line to create the bottom of the rebar. ■ Click and draw a vertical line to create the inside loop.

click Dimension.■ Click and draw a second vertical line to create the outside loop. 6 On the Design Bar. Place dimensions 7 On the Design Bar. Creating a Custom Reinforcement Layout | 567 . click Modify. 8 Place dimensions on the rebar sketch as shown. ■ Click and draw a horizontal line to complete the rebar sketch.

12 Select the inside vertical rebar dimension as shown. 9 Press ESC.Make sure you snap to the reference plane when placing the dimensions. 11 On the Options Bar. select B. 568 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Create parameter labels 10 Select the upper horizontal rebar dimension as shown. for Label.

select D. select C. 16 Select the outside vertical rebar dimension as shown. 14 Select the bottom horizontal rebar dimension as shown. Creating a Custom Reinforcement Layout | 569 .13 On the Options Bar. 15 On the Options Bar. for Label. for Label.

select C. and click Save. 25 In the Imperial Templates folder. enter Square. 19 On the Options Bar. for File name. select B. Create a new project 23 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. 570 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click OK.17 On the Options Bar. Save the new profile 20 Click File ➤ Save As. 18 Select the inner horizontal rebar dimension as shown. select Structural Analysis-Default. in the Choose Template dialog.rte. 21 Navigate to a folder of your choice. 22 In the Save As dialog. and click Open. 26 In the New Project dialog. click Browse. for Label. 24 In the New Project dialog. for Label.

Load the overlapping rebar into the new project 33 Click the Window menu. The slab is created. click Slab. under Structural Plans. and select Rebar Shape: Square. and corresponds to the shape specified on the Options bar. scroll down the list of available shapes. 29 On the Design Bar. 35 In the Load into Projects dialog.rfa file is open. click Finish Sketch. 30 On the Options Bar. 37 Click on the Rebar Shape Browser. click Load into Projects. 31 Draw a slab in the center of the drawing area. Launch the rebar shape browser 36 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Creating a Custom Reinforcement Layout | 571 . and be certain that the Square. positioned in the right-side of the drawing area. click (Rectangle). open the file from the saved folder location. The new overlapping rebar family is now loaded into the slab project. The Rebar Shape Browser launches. You are now in Sketch mode. click Rebar ➤ Place Rebar Parallel. 32 On the Design Bar. If it is not. select the new project. This browser provides multiple rebar shape types that can be placed within the specified host. NOTE You can launch or close the Rebar Shape Browser by clicking Place rebar parallel to the slab on the Options Bar. The file should still be open. double-click Level 2. and click OK. 34 On the Families Design Bar.27 In the Project Browser. The active rebar shape is highlighted. Sketch a slab 28 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Lines.

42 Click ESC. select Detail Level: Fine. 41 Click to place the rebar. 40 Hover over the section view. for Placement Plane. select Near Cover Reference. 44 Select the rebar. select Rebar Bar: #10. 572 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Modify rebar layout 43 On the View Control Bar.38 On the Options Bar. 39 In the Type Selector. Notice that the rebar shape is positioned over the slab.

Creating In-Place Families | 573 . you create an in-place family in your current project rather than in the Family (. you start with an incomplete foundation wall.rft) template. Creating In-Place Families on page 573. Because in-place families interact with the structural model according to their assigned family category. 47 Proceed to the next lesson. 45 Select one of the shape handles and change the position or shape of the rebar as shown.Notice that the rebar shape handles appear. 46 On the Design Bar. click Modify. Creating In-Place Families In this lesson.

3 In the Type Selector. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 1. click . Place the foundation wall 1 In the Project Browser. 574 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and open Imperial\i_RST_In-Place-Footing. The footing is placed at the base of the foundation wall.36" x 12". click 3D Views ➤ 3D.Creating a Step Footing In-Place Family In this exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you create a step footing on an existing foundation wall. 6 On the Options Bar. select Wall Foundation: Bearing Footing . and draw a zoom box around the foundation steps as shown. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Training Files. 4 Click the foundation wall. Create new family category 5 In the Project Browser.rvt. click Foundation ➤ Wall.

12 Press TAB. 9 In the Name dialog.7 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. and select the bearing footing as shown. Creating a Step Footing In-Place Family | 575 . select Pick a plane. Make sure the entire footing is selected. 8 In the Family Category and Parameters dialog. Sketch the extrusion 13 Click the corner of the footing to start the extrusion sketch as shown. and click OK. 10 On the Design Bar. and click OK. enter Structural Foundations 1 for Name. 11 In the Work Plane dialog. and click OK. click Create. select Structural Foundations. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion.

sketch a solid extrusion as shown. The dimensions have been added for reference purposes only. click Finish Sketch. Change extrusion properties 17 On the Design Bar. 22 On the Family Design Bar. 16 On the Design Bar. under Materials and Finishes. click Finish Family. 21 On the Design Bar. 20 In the Element Properties dialog. click OK. 25 Click the corner of the step foundation and the extrusion as shown.14 Using the drawing tools provided with Revit Structure. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. for Name. and then click OK. select Concrete . 24 On the Options Bar. 15 On the Options Bar. 19 In the Materials dialog. click the value for Material. Copy extrusion 23 Select the extrusion. click .Cast-in-Place Concrete. 576 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . for Depth. click Modify. and select Multiple. enter -3' 0". click Extrusion Properties.

27 Click to place a third copy of the extrusion as shown.26 Click to place a second copy of the extrusion as shown. Creating a Step Footing In-Place Family | 577 .

30 Select the wall foundation as shown. 578 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and click Multiple Join.28 Press ESC. Join extrusion elements to the footing 29 On the Options Bar. click (Join Geometry). 32 Select the middle extrusion as shown. 31 Select the lower extrusion as shown.

Join extrusion elements to each other 34 On the Design Bar.33 Select the upper extrusion as shown. 37 Select the lower extrusion as shown. click Modify. 35 On the Options Bar. and click Multiple Join. click (Join Geometry). 36 Select the middle extrusion as shown. Creating a Step Footing In-Place Family | 579 .

click 3D Views ➤ 3D. 39 Press ESC. 40 In the Project Browser. 580 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor .38 Select the upper extrusion as shown.

You customize the titleblock with a new text style. you draw all of the linework necessary to create a custom D-size sheet. Sketch the inside border 3 On the Design Bar. text. 2 In the New dialog. The default titleblock template consists of 4 border lines. click . and enter -1/2" for Offset. and click Open. The titleblock has linework. select D . and your project data. Drawing Linework for a Titleblock Sheet In this exercise. 5 Specify the upper-left corner of the sheet for the first rectangle corner. 4 On the Options Bar. and labels.rft. and then specify the lower-right corner of the sheet for the second corner of the rectangle.Creating a Titleblock Family In this lesson. Create a new family based on the default titleblock template 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Titleblock.36 x 24. navigate to the Titleblocks folder. you create a custom titleblock sheet based on the D-size titleblock template. click Lines. graphics. Creating a Titleblock Family | 581 .

8 On the Options Bar. 11 Draw a horizontal line 3'' below the last horizontal line as shown. 7 Move the cursor over the right inside border line. . 582 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 10 Draw a horizontal line 4'' below the upper inside border as shown. click . and enter 4 1/2" for Offset. click 9 Enter 0 for Offset. and click to draw a new vertical line. 12 Draw a horizontal line 3'' above the lower inside border as shown.Add vertical and horizontal lines 6 On the Options Bar. and click .

and click to draw a new horizontal line 1/2'' below the existing line. 21 Move the cursor over the fifth horizontal line. and click to draw a new horizontal line 3/4'' above the existing line. 16 On the Design Bar. and click to draw a new horizontal line 3/4'' above the existing line.13 On the Design Bar. click . 27 Zoom out to view the entire sheet. 24 Move the cursor over the seventh horizontal line. 14 In the Type Selector. select Title Blocks. NOTE The wide line style is not visible until the titleblock is loaded into a new project. 15 Zoom in on the lower-right corner of the sheet. click Modify. click Lines. and click to draw a new horizontal line 1/2'' below the existing line. 17 In the Type Selector. while pressing CTRL. select Wide Lines. 19 Move the cursor over the third horizontal line. click Modify. and enter 0' 1/2" for Offset. 26 On the Design Bar. 18 On the Options Bar. 20 Move the cursor over the fourth horizontal line. and. and click to draw a new horizontal line 3/4'' above the existing line. and click to draw a new horizontal line 1/2'' below the existing line. 25 Move the cursor over the eighth horizontal line. 23 Move the cursor over the third horizontal line. Drawing Linework for a Titleblock Sheet | 583 . enter 3/4" for Offset. select the second and third horizontal lines. 22 On the Options Bar.

Add a company logo 1 On the File menu.jpg. and click Open. 10 In the Type Properties dialog. navigate to Training/Common. 8 In the Type Properties dialog. click Text. and click OK. under Text. Create a new 3/8'' text style 5 On the Design Bar. and labels to your titleblock. 3 Place the image in the upper-right corner of the sheet as shown. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. 11 Click OK twice.The titleblock linework is now complete. you add a company logo. 584 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click Edit/New. enter 3/8" for Text Size. click . click Duplicate. enter 3/8" Bold for Name. 9 In the Name dialog. click Import/Link ➤ Image. select Company Logo. 6 On the Options Bar. 4 Zoom in on the logo. Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock In this exercise. 2 In the Open dialog. text notes. and select Bold.

and click outside of the text box to complete the text.Add company name text 12 Draw a text box under the first horizontal line as shown. 18 Select the drag handle. and drag the text note down as shown. 16 Draw a text box below the initial text. select Text: Text Note 1. in the text box. Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock | 585 . 13 Enter Arch Design Inc. 17 On the Design Bar. 14 Click outside of the text box to complete the text. and add an address and phone number as shown. Press ENTER to add each new line of text. and select the last text note. click Modify. Add company address and phone number text 15 In the Type Selector.

23 On the Edit toolbar. address. and enter the following text: ■ ■ ■ ■ Consultant: Address: Address: Telephone: 22 On the Design Bar. 25 Click inside the Consultant text group. Add consultant name. 21 Draw a text box below the second horizontal line. click Modify. 24 On the Options Bar.19 Click outside the text box to complete the modification. and phone number text 20 On the Design Bar. select Constrain and Multiple. 586 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and select the consultant text note. click Text. click .

29 On the Options Bar. and click to specify the first copied text note position. click Edit/New. 30 In the Element Properties dialog. Create a new 3/16'' text style 28 On the Design Bar. 31 In the Type Properties dialog. click Text. click . and click OK. select Text: 3/16".26 Move the cursor down 4''. under Text. 27 Move the cursor down another 4''. and enter Sheet Number. 32 In the Name dialog. 33 In the Type Properties dialog. enter 3/16" for Text Size. and click to specify the second copied text note location. 34 Click OK twice. click Duplicate. Add drawing data text 35 In the Type Selector. Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock | 587 . enter 3/16" for Name. 36 Draw a text box in the lower-right space of the titleblock.

39 Draw a text box in the next space up.37 Draw a text box in the next space up. and enter Drawn By:. The label displays a default value wrapped to 2 lines. and drag to the left until the label displays on one line. 44 Select the left drag handle on the label. Add drawing data labels 40 On the Design Bar. 43 In the Select Parameter dialog. and click to specify the label location. select Right and Bottom for Text Alignment. 41 On the Options Bar. 588 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and enter Date. and enter Checked By:. select Project Issue Date. and click OK. 42 Place the cursor at the lower-right corner of the Date field. 38 Draw a text box in the next space up. click Label.

enter 3/8" Label for Name. 50 On the Options Bar. click . click Duplicate. 46 In the Select Parameter dialog. click Edit/New. enter 3/8" for Text Size. 47 Place the cursor at the lower-right corner of the Checked By field. 54 In the Type Properties dialog. select Drawn By. 52 In the Type Properties dialog. 45 Place the cursor at the lower-right corner of the Drawn By field. 48 In the Select Parameter dialog. and click OK. and click to specify the label location. 55 Click OK twice. 53 In the Name dialog. Create a new 3/8'' label style 49 On the Design Bar. and click OK. click Label. under Text. and click to specify the label location. select Checked By.NOTE Move the label if necessary to line up properly with the existing text. and click OK. 51 In the Element Properties dialog. Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock | 589 .

60 Place the cursor near the center of the field above the Date field. 58 In the Select Parameter dialog. and drag to the left until the label displays on one line. and click OK. and click to specify the label location. select Sheet Number. click Center and Middle. and click to specify the label location. select Project Number.Add sheet number and project data labels 56 In the Type Selector. select Label: 3/8'' Label. 62 Select the left drag handle on the label. 57 Place the cursor at the lower-right corner of the Sheet Number field. 590 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 61 In the Select Parameter dialog. and click OK. 59 On the Options Bar.

75 On the Options Bar. and then adjust the width of the File Path field so that it is approximately equal to the width of the Sheet Number field. enter 1/16" Label. click Modify. Click Modify. and click to specify the label location.63 Place the cursor near the center of the field above the Project Number field. click Left and Middle. click Duplicate. select File Path. 72 In the Type Properties dialog. and click to specify the label location. click Edit/New. click . 64 In the Select Parameter dialog. select Client Name. and click OK. select Project Name. 76 Place the cursor in the border area below the left side of the Sheet Number field. Add Project Path label 74 In the Type Selector. enter 1/16" for Text Size. so that they are all aligned. under Text. and select any labels that may need to be moved. and click to specify the label location. 65 Place the cursor near the center of the field above the Project Name field. 66 In the Select Parameter dialog. 78 On the Design Bar. and click OK. Create a 1/16” label style 67 On the Design Bar. 77 In the Select Parameter dialog. and click OK. click Label. select 1/16” Label. 68 On the Options Bar. Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock | 591 . 73 Click OK twice. 71 In the Name dialog. 69 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. 70 In the Type Properties dialog.

click . verify that default. 6 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. Load the new titleblock family into a new project 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. enter Name for Drawn By. Adding the Titleblock to a New Project In this exercise. under Other. select Training D-Size Titleblock. 2 In the New Project dialog. 9 On the Options Bar. Modify titleblock properties 8 On the Design Bar. text. The titleblock graphics. 3 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 7 Click OK. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. and select the titleblock. 11 Zoom in on the lower-right corner of the sheet. select it. and click Open. and labels are now complete. 592 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . navigate to the location of Training D-Size Titleblock. 5 In the Open dialog. click Modify.79 Save the new titleblock family with the name Training D-Size Titleblock.rfa file.rte is the Template file and that Project is selected under Create new. and click OK. and then click OK. click Sheet. you add the titleblock that you created to a new project. 4 In the Select a Titleblock dialog.rfa. click Load.

enter January 1. 2005. Adding the Titleblock to a New Project | 593 . enter 2005-01. For Client Name. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Project Issue Date. click Project Information. For Project Number. For Project Status. For Project Name.12 On the Settings menu. 14 Click OK. This completes the Creating a Titleblock Family lesson. enter In Progress. enter Jane Smith. enter Office Building. 13 In the Type Properties dialog.

594 .

To use the Truss tool. Revit Structure then creates the structural framing elements as necessary to draw the truss.rvt. you learn how to use the truss building capabilities of Revit Structure 2009. click Training Files. Working with Trusses In Revit Structure you add a truss to your structure by using the Truss tool. The lines in the layout determine the placement of the sub-elements that comprise the truss: top chord. bottom chord. you select the truss family type and then specify the truss start point and endpoint in the drawing. 595 . and open Imperial\i_RST_Add_Truss. double-click Roof. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Add a roof truss by defining the span in plan view 1 In the Project Browser. you add predefined trusses to multiple locations within an existing project.Truss Building 18 In this tutorial. and web members. placing them on the layout lines specified for the selected family. which creates the truss according to the layout and other parameters specified in whichever truss family type you select. under Structural Plans. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. This lesson comprises the following truss building exercises: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Add multiple trusses to an existing project by specifying the spans Create a custom truss by modifying the brace parameters Change the shape of a truss profile by attaching it to a roof Create a custom truss family using the Family Editor Create a truss using the drafting tools provided with Revit Structure Adding Trusses to a Project In this exercise.

click . click ■ ■ ■ . click . do the following: Under Structural. select Top. select Howe Flat Truss: Standard. click Truss. 596 | Chapter 18 Truss Building . 7 Click the column at grid location A1 to select the start point of the truss span. and draw a zoom box around the columns on the upper-left corner of the model as shown. 3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.2 On the View toolbar. enter 6' 0". for Bearing Chord. 5 On the Options Bar. Under Dimensions. for Truss Height. Click OK. 4 In the Type Selector. 8 Click the column at grid location A2 to select the endpoint of the truss span. 9 On the View toolbar. 6 In the Element Properties dialog.

Notice the extra flange at column locations A1 and A2 that will not be necessary for this span.The truss is placed between the columns. 12 Using the same method. delete the extra flange at column location A1. Adding Trusses to a Project | 597 . Modify the truss 10 Click the flange located at column location A2 as shown. Close the Warning dialog that indicates the selected flange is pinned. 11 Press DELETE.

598 | Chapter 18 Truss Building . double-click Roof. 17 Click the column at grid location A1 as shown. click (Copy). select Multiple. 16 On the Options bar. under Structural Plans.Copy the single truss 13 In the Project Browser. 14 Select the truss placed in the previous steps. 15 On the View toolbar.

20 On the View toolbar. 25 On the View toolbar. click (Copy). select the remaining trusses. under Structural Plans. Copy multiple trusses to the opposite end of the structure 22 In the Project Browser. 24 While pressing CTRL. click Modify. 19 On the Design Bar. Adding Trusses to a Project | 599 .18 Click the columns at grid locations A2 and A3 to place copies of the original truss. double-click Roof. 21 Enter ZF (keyboard shortcut for Zoom to Fit). 23 Select the truss placed between grid location A1 and A2. click .

Add multiple trusses by defining the span in 3D view 30 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 600 | Chapter 18 Truss Building . 31 In the Type Selector. click 29 Enter ZF. . 28 On the View toolbar. and then click the column at grid location E1 to select the copy endpoint as shown.26 Click the column at grid location A1 to select the copy start point. click Truss. 27 On the Design Bar. select Howe Flat Truss: Standard. click Modify.

34 Click the column at grid location B1 as shown. Adding Trusses to a Project | 601 . enter 6' 0". do the following: Under Structural. 35 Click the top endpoint of the column at grid location B4 to place the truss as shown. select Top. Under Dimensions. 33 In the Element Properties dialog. Click OK.32 On the Options Bar. for Bearing Chord. for Truss Height. click ■ ■ ■ .

add trusses between columns C1. click 39 Enter ZF. . and D1. 37 Using the same method.D4.36 Enter ZF.C4. 38 On the View toolbar. 602 | Chapter 18 Truss Building .

and draw a zoom box around the end of one of the trusses as 41 Select the flange at one end of the truss. Adding Trusses to a Project | 603 .Modify each truss 40 On the View toolbar. click shown .

5 In the Type Properties dialog. 3 On the Options Bar. ■ ■ ■ 604 | Chapter 18 Truss Building . click Truss. and click OK. click Edit/New.42 Press DELETE. and repeat for the remaining trusses. Customizing Truss Parameters In this exercise. for Structural Framing Type. Under Diagonal Webs. 2 In the Type Selector. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In the next exercise. 7 In the Type Properties dialog. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. enter 90.500. 45 Click File menu ➤ Close.Short Span.rvt. you create a custom truss for both the short and long spans by modifying the truss type parameters. 44 Using the same method. do the following: ■ Under Vertical Webs. for Angle. select Howe Flat Truss: Standard. You can save the open file if you wish. delete the flange on the opposite end of the same truss. Create a new truss type for the short span 1 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Customizing Truss Parameters on page 604.500. click . 43 Close the Warning dialog that indicates the selected flange is pinned. select HSS-Hollow Structural Section: HSS6X6X. enter Howe Flat Truss . for Structural Framing Type. and open Imperial\i_RST_Customize_Truss_Parameters. select HSS-Hollow Structural Section: HSS6X6X. click Training Files. Click OK. a new training file is supplied. 6 In the Name dialog. 46 Proceed to the next exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Duplicate. Under Bottom Chords.

. and then NOTE Check the Status Bar to make sure you are selecting the truss and not a chord or web. under 3D Views. 12 Using the same method. The truss changes to the new type. select Howe Flat Truss: Howe Flat Truss . draw a zoom box around one of the short trusses. Apply the new truss type 9 In the Project Browser.8 In the Element Properties dialog. click select the truss as shown. click OK. double-click 3D. change the remaining short trusses to the new type. . click 14 Enter ZF. 13 On the View toolbar. 11 In the Type Selector. 10 On the View toolbar.Short Span. Customizing Truss Parameters | 605 .

enter Howe Flat Truss . and click OK. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. . click Duplicate. select Howe Flat Truss: Standard. 20 In the Name dialog. do the following: ■ Under Vertical Webs. click Edit/New. click select the truss as shown. and then 606 | Chapter 18 Truss Building . draw a zoom box around one of the long trusses.500. Apply the new truss type 23 In the Project Browser. click Truss. 17 On the Options Bar. 24 On the View toolbar. Click OK. for Structural Framing Type.Roof Span. 21 In the Type Properties dialog. under 3D Views.Create a new truss type for the roof span 15 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. select HSS-Hollow Structural Section: HSS6X6X. Under Diagonal Webs. select HSS-Hollow Structural Section: HSS6X6X. 19 In the Type Properties dialog. click OK. double-click 3D.500. ■ ■ 22 In the Element Properties dialog. for Structural Framing Type. click . 16 In the Type Selector.

Roof Span.NOTE Check the Status Bar to make sure you are selecting the truss and not a single truss flange. 25 In the Type Selector. click 28 Enter ZF. select Howe Flat Truss: Howe Flat Truss . change the remaining long trusses to the new type. 27 On the View toolbar. The truss changes to the new type. Customizing Truss Parameters | 607 . . 26 Using the same method.

click Training Files. Modifying the Shape of a Truss on page 608. 30 Proceed to the next exercise. Modifying the Shape of a Truss In this exercise.29 Click File menu ➤ Close. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Imperial\i_RST_Truss_Change_Shape. double-click 3D. 2 On the View toolbar. under 3D Views.rvt. Select all trusses 1 In the Project Browser. You can save the open file if you wish. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click . 608 | Chapter 18 Truss Building . In the next exercise. and then select the truss as shown. a new training file is supplied. you change the shape of a truss profile by attaching it to an existing roof. draw a zoom box around a truss on the upper-left corner of the structure.

Attach the roof 4 On the Options Bar. click 5 Select the roof as shown.3 Click Edit menu ➤ Select All Instances. Modifying the Shape of a Truss | 609 . (Attach/Detach Top Chord). All instances of the truss will be highlighted.

8 On the View Control Bar. 11 Click File menu ➤ Close. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Element. 12 Proceed to the next exercise. 6 On the Design bar. and draw a zoom box around a roof truss as shown. 610 | Chapter 18 Truss Building . You can save the open file if you wish. Notice the shape of the top chord and structural webs are modified to match the roof profile. a new training file is supplied. vertical webs. click Modify.The top chords. In the next exercise. click . click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Reset Temporary Hide/Isolate. Creating a Custom Truss Family on page 611. 9 On the View toolbar. 10 On the View Control Bar. and diagonal webs of each truss will attach itself to the shape of the roof. View the custom truss 7 Select the roof.

5 Sketch 5 vertical reference planes approximately as shown. and place dimensions to each reference plane as shown.rvt. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 3 Open Structural_Trusses. you use the Revit Structure Family Editor to create a custom truss family.rft located in the Imperial folder. Sketch web reference planes 4 On the Design Bar. and open Imperial\i_RST_Truss_Custom_Family. 6 On the Design Bar. click the Training Files icon.Creating a Custom Truss Family In this exercise. Open the truss family 1 Click File ➤ New ➤ Family. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Ref Plane. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. click Dimension. Creating a Custom Truss Family | 611 .

7 Click the EQ symbol to apply equal constraints. place additional vertical reference planes to complete the web pattern as shown. Sketch top and bottom chords 9 On the Design Bar. 8 Using the same method. 612 | Chapter 18 Truss Building . click Truss Top Chord. 10 Sketch the truss top chord as shown.

11 On the Design Bar. Sketch truss webs 13 On the Design Bar. 12 Sketch the truss bottom chord as shown. 14 Click the intersection of the bottom chord and the first vertical reference plane to set the start point of the first truss web as shown. Creating a Custom Truss Family | 613 . Truss Bottom Chord. click Truss Web. 15 Snap to the intersection of the top chord and reference plane as shown.

and click OK. For File name. For Save as type. navigate to a folder of your choice. 614 | Chapter 18 Truss Building . Load the truss into the project 20 On the Design Bar. 17 On the Design Bar. Save the new truss family 18 Click File menu ➤ Save As.rvt. enter Custom_Truss. 21 In the Load into Projects dialog. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Save in. click Modify.16 Using the same method. click Load into Projects. 19 In the Save As dialog. You are now in the project file. Click OK. select i_RST_Truss_Custom_Family. add remaining truss webs to complete the pattern as shown. select Family Files (rfa).

double-click Level 2. 23 On the Design Bar.Place the custom truss 22 In the Project Browser. click Truss. Creating a Custom Truss Family | 615 . 28 Repeat the same method to place additional trusses as shown. double-click 3D. under 3D Views. 24 In the Type Selector. 27 In the Project Browser. select Custom_Truss. under Structural Plans. 25 Click the column at grid location A1 to establish the start point of the truss. 26 Click the column at grid location A4 to establish the endpoint of the truss as shown.

Building a Truss with Drafting Tools In this exercise.29 Click File menu ➤ Close. 4 In the New Project dialog. in the Imperial Templates folder. You can save the open file if you wish. create column grids. a new training file is supplied. 7 Draw 2 grid lines approximately as shown. and a framing elevation. and click Open. you open a new project and create the top and bottom chords using the beam tool. 2 In the New Project dialog. 30 Proceed to the next exercise.rte. you add braces to form the steel truss. 616 | Chapter 18 Truss Building . double-click Level 2. under Structural Plans. Create grids 5 In the Project Browser. click Grid. click Browse. 6 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Create a new project 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. In the next exercise. Building a Truss with Drafting Tools on page 616. 3 In the Choose Template dialog. select Structural Analysis-Default. Finally. click OK.

(The dimensions are displayed for reference purposes only. 11 In the Type Selector. 17 Click the dimension. 12 Place 2 columns on each grid line spaced approximately 70' 0" apart as shown. and press ENTER. click Framing Elevation. and drag the blue handles beyond each column as shown .a. 9 Select each grid line. and place approximately as shown. Sketch horizontal reference planes 14 In the Project Browser. select W-Wide Flange Column: W10 x 49. double-click Elevation 1 . Place support columns 10 On the Design Bar.) 13 Click the Framing Elevation symbol.Add framing elevations 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Structural Column. under Elevations (Interior Elevation). click Ref Plane. enter 5' 0". Building a Truss with Drafting Tools | 617 . 16 Place a horizontal reference plane above Level 2. 15 On the Design Bar.

click Ref Plane. and enter 15' 0". 19 Click the dimension. Place vertical reference planes 20 On the Design Bar. 21 Snap to the center of the left column and draw a vertical reference plane that extends beyond the top horizontal plane as shown. Place multiple reference planes using the array tool 23 Select the reference plane on the left column as shown. 618 | Chapter 18 Truss Building . 18 Place a second horizontal reference plane above the first. 22 Press ESC.The dimensions are displayed for reference purposes only.

27 Enter 7 for array count. click . and press ENTER. click Beam. Place top and bottom chords 28 On the Design Bar. select W-Wide Flange: W12 x 26. 29 In the Type Selector. Building a Truss with Drafting Tools | 619 . 25 Click the left vertical reference plane to identify the array start point. The array is complete.24 On the Tools toolbar. and snap to the center of the right column to identify the array length. 26 Drag the array to the right.

and draw a zoom box around the upper-right corner of the 620 | Chapter 18 Truss Building . Place braces 32 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 31 Using reference planes as a guide. select 3D Snapping. create the top and bottom chords of the truss by placing beams as shown. . Fix corner joint 35 On the View toolbar. select W-Wide Flange: W12 x 26. When placing beams. When placing braces. click truss as shown. 33 In the Type Selector.30 On the Tools toolbar. make sure you snap to the intersections of the reference planes. click Brace. create cross-braces by placing braces as shown. 34 Using the vertical reference planes as a guide. make sure you snap to the intersections of the reference planes.

then select the edge of the top chord as shown. and sketch a vertical ref plane as shown. 39 Select the vertical ref plane. 37 Snap to the outer surface of the brace. click Ref Plane. click . 38 On the Tools toolbar. Building a Truss with Drafting Tools | 621 .36 On the Design Bar.

double-click 3D.40 The edge of the top chord will align with the vertical brace as shown. 622 | Chapter 18 Truss Building . View the truss 41 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views.

42 Click File menu ➤ Save. Building a Truss with Drafting Tools | 623 . 43 Save the file to a folder location of you choice. You have completed the Truss Builder tutorial.The completed truss is displayed.

624 .

625 .Creating Multiple Design Options 19 When working with a building model. you learn how to create and manage multiple design sets and options within a single building model. In addition. Creating Multiple Design Options in a Project You can use design options to explore multiple design schemes as the project develops. you can designate a primary design scheme for each option set. After you and the client agree on the final design. In this tutorial. For example. it is common to explore multiple design schemes as the project develops. and each option set can have multiple schemes. you can have an option set called roofing with multiple subordinate roofing schemes. Using design options. you can have multiple sets of design options. you create multiple design schemes within a single project file. These schemes can be conceptual or can be detailed engineering designs. you can have an option set for the roof structure with multiple subordinate structural design schemes. Because all design options coexist in the project with the main model (the main model consists of elements not specifically assigned to a design option). you can study and modify each design option and present the options to the client. At any time in the design process.

Any new elements introduced at that time become part of that option. Each option set represents a portion of the building model wherein design alternatives are being considered. you learn how to manage and organize the design options. click Training Files. After you create a design option. Notice Option Set 1 has been created with a design option: Option 1 (primary). In the left pane of the Open dialog. the only available command is to create a new option set. you can edit it. With the second option. In the second exercise. The client has asked you to create various options. Creating the Structural Design Options In this exercise. click New. you create two roof system design options that work with the structural options. In the final exercise of this lesson. TIP In this exercise. and open Imperial\i_Urban_House.In this particular case. In the first exercise in this lesson. you set up the design option names and add the modeling elements to the structural design option set. you set up multiple design option sets. Create first design option 1 On the Tools menu. you design each of the structural options. you create a unique in-place family as the structural system. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. The client is interested in a pergola and sunshade for the roof terrace but is not sure of the specific layout or materials. There is no limit to the number of option sets you can create. This option will be the first structural scheme consisting of 3"round columns and 2" round bars. make your final design decision. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. each with multiple design options. the roof and structure systems must work together. The first time you open the Design Options dialog within a project. each is constructed for interchangeability. The first option is a simple combination of columns and beams. 2 In the Design Options dialog.rvt. therefore. under Option Set. 626 | Chapter 19 Creating Multiple Design Options . and delete the unwanted options from the project. These three exercises are designed to be completed sequentially with the second and third exercises dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. After setting up the design option sets and their subordinate options. the task is to develop two roof schemes for an addition to an existing house.

and the third column centered between the two. click Edit Selected. 7 In the Type Selector. the midpoint of the lower notch line is selected. or add a dimension string between the columns. 11 On the Edit toolbar. In this case. Creating the Structural Design Options | 627 . make sure you select a point that is easily recognizable. you can continue adding new copies without reselecting the reference point (the first click). TIP To center the middle column. Arrows and the dimension lines have been added for training purposes only. 9 On the Design Bar. 5 On the View menu. and click Close. You should delete the dimension and unconstrain after adding the column. and click the EQ symbol to equalize the segments. The first click specifies the reference point on the element to be copied. click Modify. select: ■ ■ ■ . either add a centered reference plane and snap the column to it. add three columns. 13 Zoom in around the left column that is embedded in the notch. In the following illustration. and the second click specifies the point on the building model the reference point is copied to. Selecting Constrain limits the movement and helps ensure the post-copy alignment of the columns. expand Floor Plans. and zoom in on the upper half of the building model. Constrain Copy Multiple The Copy command is a two-click process. click Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region. the second column directly across from it at the intersection of the two walls. 4 In the Project Browser. click Column. 8 Using the following illustration as a guide. Because it is important that you select the same location on the notches you copy to. expand Views (all). By selecting Multiple. select Round Column: 03" Diameter. the three columns need to be copied three times to create a 3 x 4 grid of 12 columns. Any new elements introduced to the building model are added to this option.3 Select Option 1 (primary). The left column should be centered at the intersection of the notch and the wall. 6 On the Architectural tab of the Design Bar. 10 Select the three columns either by dragging a pick box around them or by selecting them individually while holding CTRL. 14 Click at an identifiable part of the notch construction. click 12 On the Options Bar. and double-click ROOF TERRACE.

TIP You can zoom in and out easily during this process using the wheel on your wheel mouse. using the same technique. they are difficult to see in this view. 17 Zoom out and. and click in the same location as you did for the previous notch. 16 Zoom in around the notch construction. add a copy of the columns to the next two notches below this one. Because of the size of the columns. 15 Zoom out and move downward to the notch just below this one. 628 | Chapter 19 Creating Multiple Design Options . When you are finished. click . click Modify on the Design Bar to end the copy process. 18 On the View toolbar. A copy of the three selected columns is added.

22 Add the first beam between the upper left and right columns by using the following steps: ■ ■ ■ Zoom in on the upper-left column. and click at its center to set the beam start point. double-click TOP OF CORE. you add the beams that span the columns. two callouts with thin lines have been added to clarify the location of the start and end points of the beam. click Beam. under Floor Plans. Next. The second click specifies the end of the beam. click Modify. Zoom out and move the cursor over the upper right column. The beam needs to be added between the remaining columns. and click on the center to set the beam endpoint. Creating the Structural Design Options | 629 . Adding a beam is a two-click process.Notice the 12 columns that you added. 24 Select the Beam you added previously. The first click specifies the beam start point. 20 On the tab of the Design Bar. select Round Bar : 2". Use the following illustration as a guide. 23 On the Design Bar. In it. Zoom in on the upper right column. 19 In the Project Browser. You can do this manually or use the Copy command. 21 In the Type Selector.

630 | Chapter 19 Creating Multiple Design Options . zoom into the left column. select: ■ ■ ■ . 28 Zoom out. Constrain Copy Multiple 27 Zoom in around the upper left column that is embedded in the notch. and click the center point. This is the reference point for the subsequent copies. 29 Repeat this step twice more until a beam is added to each set of columns. and select the center of the column to add a copy.25 On the Edit toolbar. click . click 26 On the Options Bar. move down to the next set of columns. 30 On the View toolbar.

and click OK. 43 In the Rename dialog. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. 41 Under Option Set. not a new option set. 34 In the Design Options dialog. 42 Select Option Set 1 and. select Option 1 (primary). 38 In the Rename dialog. 35 Select Option 1 (primary) and. 36 In the Rename dialog. Creating the Structural Design Options | 631 . under Option. click New. and click OK. click Rename. enter Roofing for New. notice that you are still editing Option Set 1: Option 1 (primary). 39 Select Option Set 1 and. click Rename. enter Beam for New. name the option Louvers. Logically naming the option sets and relative options allows you to more easily manage them. click Rename. and click OK. 33 Click Finish Editing. click New. click Rename. under Option Set. 32 In the Design Options dialog. enter Brackets for New. click New. under Option. and click OK. 44 Select the option set Roofing and. NOTE Be sure you are creating a new option. under Option. 46 Under Option. 37 Select Option 2 and. There should now be two roofing design options. enter Structure for New. Organize design option sets and subordinate options 31 On the Tools menu. 40 In the Rename dialog. under Option.Notice that the beams complete the bracket structure for the proposed roof. click Rename. and click OK. 45 Under Roofing. under Option Set.

48 Under Option. double-click ROOF TERRACE. This allows you to more easily manage the project. 632 | Chapter 19 Creating Multiple Design Options . 51 Under Edit. and click OK.47 Under Roofing. Notice that the columns added to the Brackets design option do not display. 53 In the Project Browser. 52 Click Close. Design the second structural design option 49 In this section of the exercise. When finished. under Structure. notice that Structure: Beam is displayed. click Rename. select Option 2. You have completed the initial setup of the design option sets and their subordinate design option names. you create the second design option. it will resemble the following illustration. 54 Zoom in toward the top of the roof terrace near the stairs. under Floor Plans. name the option Sunscreen. select Beam. 50 In the Design Options dialog. Under Now Editing. select Edit Selected.

Creating the Structural Design Options | 633 . 59 Align the roof beam by clicking the lower edge of the adjacent horizontal wall and then clicking the lower edge of the roof beam. select Roof Beam. Using the Align tool requires two clicks. The first click sets the plane that the object will be aligned to. 56 In the Type Selector. 58 On the Tools menu. The second click represents the plane that is moved.55 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Align. click Component. Refer to the following illustration. 57 Place a roof beam into the drawing area as shown.

click the padlock that displays to lock the alignment. click 63 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ ■ . on the Edit toolbar. Clear Group and Associate Enter 4 for number Select 2nd for Move To: Select Constrain Using the Array tool requires two clicks. 634 | Chapter 19 Creating Multiple Design Options . 65 Move the cursor down to the next intersection of the lower edge of the horizontal wall and the beam. Click to indicate the end point of the move. 61 On the Design Bar. The second click represents the move end point.60 After aligning the beam. 64 Click the start point at the alignment of the beam and wall as shown. 62 Select the beam and. click Modify. The first click sets the move start point.

71 Navigate to your preferred directory. Notice that even before you close the dialog. You can leave it open and proceed immediately to the next exercise. 67 On the Tools menu. 69 Click Close. 70 On the File menu. name the file.Three more roof beams are placed at the same intersection as the first beam. Notice the new design option for the structural elements supporting the roof system. i_Urban_House-in progress. click Save As. Creating the Structural Design Options | 635 . and click Save. click . 68 In the Design Options dialog. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. Design option visibility is covered in more detail later in the tutorial. you need this file in its current state. NOTE If you intend to continue with the next exercise. 66 On the View toolbar. That is because the brackets option is set to primary. the 3D view has reverted back to the brackets rather than the structural beams you just created.rvt. click Finish Editing. which is visible by default.

After setting up the design option sets and their subordinate options. This exercise is designed to work in conjunction with the other exercises in this tutorial. under Roofing. you design each of the roofing options. The dimensions shown are for training purposes. Roofing: Louvers (primary) should display. Both of these options are designed to work in conjunction with each of the structural design options. If you need to add dimensions. 10 Referring to the following illustration. you created a unique in-place family as the structural system. 8 In the Type Selector. each with multiple design options to pick from. a Louver system. 6 In the Project Browser. The first option. you set up multiple design option sets. is a simple fabric roof created using an extrusion. you designed each of the structural options: one for brackets. The second roofing system. All are sequential and dependent on the previous exercise. The first option is a simple combination of columns and beams. is constructed of 2" x 10"rafters and 2" x 6" louvers. click Component. you create the roof systems that compliment these structural design options. 5 Click Close. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. Under Now Editing. In the next exercise. open it now. do so now. 9 Zoom in on the lower half of the building model until you can see the bottom set of columns and the beam traversing the span. 636 | Chapter 19 Creating Multiple Design Options . 7 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. expand Views (all). If you have not completed the first exercise in this tutorial. click Edit Selected. You should have named it i_Urban_House-in progress.In this exercise. expand Floor Plans. Creating the Roof System Design Options In this exercise. select Rafter 2 x 10. the other for beams. select Louvers (primary).rvt. Create the first roofing design option 1 If you do not have the project file that you saved at the end of the previous exercise open. delete them after the rafter is in place. 2 On the Tools menu. Sunscreen. 4 Under Edit. 3 In the Design Options dialog. place the rafter 3' 0" inside the wall shown and overlap the horizontal beam 3'. and double-click TOP OF CORE. With the second option.

Enter 5 for Number. 17 Zoom in on the intersection of the lower end of the rafter and the intersecting beam. 16 On the Options Bar. Select Constrain. 15 On the Edit menu. click Modify. enter 38' 6" for Length. Creating the Roof System Design Options | 637 . and click OK. click . specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear Group and Associate. Select 2nd for Move To. 13 On the Options Bar. The rafter should now span the entire vertical length of the proposed roof system. 12 Select the rafter you added previously. You are creating an array of five rafters that are 3' 3" apart. under Other. click Array. click in the center of the intersection to specify the array start point. 14 In the Element Properties dialog.11 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.

you do not need to type the foot and inch markers. enter 3' 3". For example. and press ENTER. Zoom out to see that the rafter array is created. TIP When entering a dimension value. rather than entering 3' 3". The space separates feet and inches. you can enter 3 3. when the listening dimension displays. 638 | Chapter 19 Creating Multiple Design Options .18 Move the cursor horizontally to the right and.

Select 2nd for Move To. enter 1’. click the Edit menu. Enter 34 for Number. and press Enter. 20 In the Type Selector. Select Constrain. under Other. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear Group and Associate. click . Creating the Roof System Design Options | 639 . enter 17' 6 1/2" for Length. when the listening dimension displays. 27 For the array starting point. and click Array. and click OK. click Modify. The louver now spans the horizontal plane of the roof system. 21 Place the first horizontal louver in the upper left corner according to the following illustration. 22 On the Design Bar. 25 With the louver still selected. and select the louver you just placed. 28 Move the cursor vertically downward. 23 On the Options Bar. 26 On the Options Bar. 24 In the Element Properties dialog. click in the center of any intersection between the louver and the beam. select Louver 2 x 6. click Component.Add the louvers to the design option 19 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and.

click . 640 | Chapter 19 Creating Multiple Design Options . 31 In the Design Options dialog. The louver roof system is complete. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. The louver roof system still displays in the 3D view because it is the primary option.Zoom out to see that the 34 louvers array 1' 0" apart. 30 On the Tools menu. 29 On the View toolbar. click Finish Editing. under Edit.

40 On the Options Bar. and double-click West. and click OK. 35 Zoom in on the upper level where the roof design is taking place. select Reference Plane : Roof Extrusion for Name. Notice that the louver roof system no longer displays. and then click Close. and then adjust the dip of the arc until it is 60 degrees. try to get the angle value as close to 60 degrees as possible. under Roofing. 42 Repeat the previous step and create two more arcs between the columns. click Lines.Create sunscreen roof system 32 In the Design Options dialog. The roof extrusion reference plane has been added to the training file specifically for this purpose and is hidden in all views. click Properties. click Roof ➤ Roof by Extrusion. 43 On the Design Bar. 33 Under Editing. The first two points define the ends of the line. Do not be too concerned if your sketch lines do not exactly connect. In this case. Click OK. Because an extruded roof has a roof type associated with it. then you can modify it through the dimension. 34 In the Project Browser. Therefore. click Edit Selected. click . and the third point defines the arc. This tool allows you to sketch an arc line using three points. 39 On the Design Bar. 38 You are prompted to verify the roof level and offset. the top of the next column on the right. You can adjust the degrees by clicking the blue temporary dimension value immediately after you create the line. select Sunscreen. the sketch should be a series of arcs connected at the ends where they connect to the columns. 41 Select the top of the left column. 36 On the Architectural tab of the Design Bar. you must create a draped canvas sunscreen. you only need to sketch a single line or a string of lines to define the shape of the extruded roof. Creating the Roof System Design Options | 641 . expand Elevations. 37 In the Work Plane dialog. NOTE As you sketch the arcs. You will fix this in a later step.

44 In the Element Properties dialog. Sunscreen. 50 On the Tools menu. click Finish Editing. and then click Close. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. In this exercise. You have completed the sunscreen roof system. 49 On the View toolbar. 46 On the Tools menu. The roof sketch must be a continuous line. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Sunscreen Fabric for Type. 48 On the Design Bar. 45 Click OK. Under Constraints. The first option. 52 On the File menu. click . was constructed of 2" x 10"rafters and 2" x 6"louvers. You must make sure the arcs are connected where they connect to the columns. enter -19' 0"for Extrusion End. NOTE If you intend to continue with the final exercise. under Edit. 51 In the Design Options dialog. you need this file in its current state. was a simple fabric roof created using an extrusion. Select the right arc. You can leave it open and proceed immediately to the next exercise. 47 Select the left arc and then the center arc. 642 | Chapter 19 Creating Multiple Design Options . click Finish Sketch. a Louver system. Both of these options are designed to work in conjunction with each of the structural design options. Under Constraints. enter 1' 0" for Extrusion Start. you designed each of the roofing options. click Trim/Extend. then the center arc. The easiest way to accomplish this is to use the Trim tool. The second roofing system. click Save. The arcs should connect. The louver roof system is complete.

and click Rename. and last options. Create new views for each design option 1 In the Project Browser. under Views (all). Notice that both option sets are set to automatic. click the Design Options tab. under 3D Views. double-click Primary Option. double-click Secondary Option. you must create a named 3D view for the primary. and click Duplicate. 3 In the Rename View dialog. you explore how to present each of the design options by creating multiple views to display the various combinations. This ensures that the primaries (currently bracket and louver) are visible. expand 3D Views. This exercise is designed to work in conjunction with the other exercises in this tutorial. 10 In the Project Browser. and delete the discarded design options. All are sequential and dependent on the previous exercise. 7 On the View menu. and click Rename. under 3D Views. click Visibility/Graphics. Rename the three copies as follows: ■ ■ ■ Secondary Option Tertiary Option Last Option 6 In the Project Browser. 8 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. make it part of the building model. under 3D Views. do so now. right-click the 3D View Primary Option. 12 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. under Views (all). tertiary. enter Primary Option. 9 Click OK. click the Design Options tab. click Visibility/Graphics. under Views (all). under Views (all). 4 In the Project Browser. Managing Design Options | 643 . 11 On the View menu. you select a design. 2 In the Project Browser. After exploring the combinations. and click OK. Repeat this step two more times until you have three copies of the view. 5 Right-click each of the copies. secondary. Because the client wants to see 3D building models of each of the designs. If you have not completed the previous exercises in this tutorial. right-click {3D}.Managing Design Options In this exercise.

under Views (all). click the Design Options tab. click Visibility/Graphics. 18 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. and click OK. under Views (all).13 Specify Beam for the Structure design option. 14 In the Project Browser. double-click Last Option. click the Design Options tab. 21 Specify Beam for the Structure design option. double-click Tertiary Option. 19 On the View menu. click Visibility/Graphics. 17 Specify Brackets for the Structure design option. 16 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. under 3D Views. and click OK. specify Sunscreen for the Roofing design option. 15 On the View menu. 20 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. and click OK. specify Sunscreen for the Roofing design option. 644 | Chapter 19 Creating Multiple Design Options .

31 In the alert dialog. Managing Design Options | 645 . An alert is displayed. 24 Under Option. This was the client choice for structural.At this point. The set is deleted. 34 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. 26 Under Option Set. asking if you are sure you want to delete all elements of secondary options in this option set and remove the option set. and you get a dialog asking if you want to delete dedicated option views. the current primaries are no longer options. under Structure. select Beam. 25 Select Structure. In this case. the client has reviewed the design options and has decided that the beam system coupled with the louver roofing system is the preferred design. 30 Under Option Set. the beam and the louver roofing should be selected as primary. select Make Primary. click Accept Primary. The other options were removed along with any dedicated option views. since you no longer need them. click Delete to remove the views that used options. 27 In the alert dialog. click Yes. 33 In the Design Options dialog. 22 On the Tools menu. delete the other design option geometry and any dedicated option views. but should be accepted as part of the building model. 29 Select Roofing. all isometric views are ready to be placed on a titleblock or exported and e-mailed to the client. click Close. Because the client has selected the design option. 28 In the Delete Dedicated Option Views dialog. the beam option becomes part of the model. 23 In the Design Options dialog. click Accept Primary to take the louvers into the model. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. click Delete. In your design options. click Yes. 32 In the Delete Dedicated Option Views dialog. double-click Primary Option.

and deleted the discarded design options. you learned how to present each of the design options by creating multiple views to display the various combinations. In this exercise. you selected a design. 35 On the File menu. click Save.The beam and louver systems are now part of the building model. After exploring the combinations. 646 | Chapter 19 Creating Multiple Design Options . made it part of the building model.

In the final lesson. A residential development in which a few different prototypes are configured differently in an area. you share the coordinates so that the linked files remember their location within the host project. 647 . or of a group of related but semi-independent sub-projects. and productivity by working in a smaller project file while retaining the ability to place that building model into a larger context. modify their visibility. This maximizes efficiency.Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates 20 Many projects consist of disparate buildings in an overall campus. Specific examples when you may want to use model linking and shared coordinates: ■ ■ ■ A campus plan that contains links to several structures. and manage the links throughout the project. you can use model linking and shared coordinates to create the campus within one project file while allowing work to proceed on the individual building models in other project files. In this tutorial. Comparison of alternatives on a site. performance. you link several building models within a single project file in which only a site plan has been developed. You position the building models on the site plan. In these situations.

and the other is a townhouse. 648 | Chapter 20 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . You position the building models on the site.Linking Building Models In this lesson. NOTE The center of a Revit Structure model is the center of the model geometry. One building model is a condominium.Center to Center: Revit Structure places the center of the imported geometry at the center of the model. you open a project in which only site components have been developed. and manage their locations in coordination with their originating project files. You link multiple instances of one building model and a single instance of another. This center changes as the footprint of your model changes. modify their visibility. Placement options when linking building models When you link a building model in a project. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files In this exercise. NOTE You must complete the exercises in this lesson in sequence. You link two building models to the project. you have the option to manually place the linked building model or allow Revit Structure 2009 to automatically place it. Automatic placement options: ■ Auto . you work within a project in which only the site components have been developed.

Manual . The required files can be found in the Common folder of the Training files: c_Site.Base Point: Not applicable for linked Revit Structure Files. you need to copy the three training files to a different directory and make them writable. and open Common\c_Site.■ Auto . NOTE You may need to scroll down in the left pane to see the Training Files folder. All three files now reside.Center: The geometric center of the linked document is at the cursor location. click Save As. and click Properties. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. ■ ■ Manual . and click OK. c_Condo_Complex. NOTE Revit Structure projects have an internal coordinate system.rvt. click Open. Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models on page 665. this system is not exposed to the user. click Close. This tutorial requires write permission to all the training files used. Save training files to different folder 1 Create a new folder on your hard drive called Model Linking. this option will place the link at a predefined location. use the following steps to copy the training files to a new location. with write permission.Origin to Origin: The origin of the imported geometry is placed at the invisible origin of the Revit Structure model. right-click. Auto . Linking Building Models from Different Project Files | 649 . If you are comfortable doing this using Windows Explorer. RELATED See the lesson. Select c_Site. 2 On the File menu. in the Model Linking folder that you created. you can do so. Because training files are used in multiple tutorials and are normally installed as read-only. 5 On the File menu. click Open. This option is grayed out.By Shared Coordinates: When using Model Linking in conjunction with Shared Coordinates. ■ ■ Navigate to the Model Linking folder. ■ Manual placement options: ■ Manual . Otherwise.Origin: The origin of the linked document is centered on the cursor. and save the file there. Link condo complex into site project 9 On the File menu. however. 8 Clear Read-only. click Training Files. c_Townhouse. 6 Repeat the previous five steps for the following files: ■ ■ c_Townhouse c_Condo_Complex 7 Open the Model Linking folder. 4 On the File menu. navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first step. select the three files.

13 Click Open.■ Click Open. 12 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ Navigate to the Model Linking folder and select c_Condo_Complex. expand Views (all). 10 In the Project Browser. click Import/Link ➤ Revit. and double-click Level 1.Origin to Origin. 650 | Chapter 20 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . For Positioning. The condo complex building model is placed approximately at the center of the site model. 11 On the File menu. expand Floor Plans. Notice the blue detail lines. These represent the footprint outlines of the three building model sites. select Auto .

Linked Revit Model: c_Condo_Complex. 17 For the move endpoint. click the upper-left corner of the linked condo complex building model. After you select it.Move the condo complex building model 14 Select the linked building model. The linked model moves as one object. the linked file displays within the confines of the blue detail lines. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files | 651 .rvt displays in the Type Selector. similar to the behavior of imported DWG objects. click the upper-left corner of the matching blue detail lines above it. click (Move). The second click specifies the move endpoint. 16 For the move start point. 15 On the Edit toolbar. The Move command requires two clicks. The first click specifies the move start point. After you specify the location to move to. Standard move commands work with linked building models.

652 | Chapter 20 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates .18 On the View menu. click Import/Link ➤ Revit. Rotate the townhouse 22 Zoom in around the townhouse model and select it. The townhouse building model displays above the site model. click Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. and select c_Townhouse. 20 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ Navigate to the Model Linking folder. For Positioning. select Auto . Link the townhouse building model 19 On the File menu.Origin to Origin. 21 Click Open.

you first specify the rotation start point. click to specify the rotation start point. 24 Place the cursor just north of the townhouse and. and click to specify the end of the rotation. click (Rotate). To rotate an object. and then click to specify the end of the rotation. when the vertical line displays. 25 Move the cursor 90 degrees clockwise. the townhouse must be rotated 90 degrees clockwise. In this case. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files | 653 .23 On the Edit toolbar.

This townhouse building model needs to be moved inside the blue detail lines in the lower-left corner of the site model. Move the townhouse 26 On the Edit toolbar. 654 | Chapter 20 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . Do not be concerned if the detail lines do not match the exact footprint of the townhouse. click (Move). 28 Select the lower-left corner of the lower-left set of blue detail lines as the move endpoint.The rotated townhouse should resemble the following illustration. 27 Click the lower-left corner of the townhouse building model as the move start point.

click (Copy). Linking Building Models from Different Project Files | 655 . Copy the townhouse 29 On the Edit toolbar. 30 For the starting point.The townhouse is located within its required footprint. and the second click specifies the copy-to point. The Copy command works much like the Move command. 31 Select the upper-right corner of the blue detail lines on the right to specify the copy-to point. select the upper-right corner of the townhouse. The first click specifies the start point.

click . if it does not fit reasonably well within the detail lines. 36 Use the same technique to name the instance of the Townhouse on the right to Townhouse B. 33 Click the first instance of the townhouse on the left. 35 In the Element Properties dialog. 34 On the Options Bar. click Rotate. and rotate the townhouse 180 degrees. use the Move command to make any adjustments. enter Townhouse A. for Name. 32 On the Edit menu.A copy of the townhouse displays on the right side of the site project. NOTE After you rotate the townhouse. 37 On the View toolbar. under Identity data. and click OK. click (Default 3D View). 656 | Chapter 20 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates .

38 On the File menu. you modify their vertical position so that the townhouses sit correctly on the site. 2 On the SteeringWheels. and then spin the model until it resembles the following illustration. In this exercise. When you originally linked the files. NOTE If this is the first time you are using the SteeringWheels. you rotated and moved the building models to fit them into their designated positions within the site development. Repositioning Linked Building Models In this exercise. Repositioning Linked Building Models | 657 . click Save. do so before continuing. they were placed too low within the site topography. you need this project file open and in this view. In the next exercise. If you have not completed the previous exercise. Modify the vertical position of the townhouses 1 On the View toolbar. you modify the elevation of the townhouses. click and hold Orbit. click (SteeringWheels). In this exercise. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise in this tutorial and the resulting project files. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this tutorial. click Try Me for the Full Nav Large Wheel. After linking the files. you linked two separate Revit Structure 2009 models into a site model. you reposition the townhouses in respect to their elevation.

7 On the Tools toolbar. 8 Select the Level 1 line of the Site project. In this case. you may want to hide the Condo Complex from the view. press TAB until Level 1 : Reference displays in the status bar. In the steps that follow. 658 | Chapter 20 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . TIP Place the cursor over the Level 1 line of the Site project. 3 In the Project Browser. To do this.Notice that the townhouse is not at the proper elevation in relationship to the site toposurface. and then select the plane that you want to align. and click to select it. This is apparent because there is a planter below ground level that was designed to sit on top of the site surface. and double-click South. when it highlights. This process ensures that you are aligning to the level marker in the site project and not to the linked condo complex project. If you experience difficulty finding the Level1 : Reference. Click the Revit Links tab. When using the Align command. expand Elevations. 5 Place the cursor over the townhouse and notice that. and click OK. under Views (all). you first select the plane you want to align to. clear Visibility for the c_Condo_Complex. 4 Zoom in around the townhouse on the left. click (Align). the status bar displays the name of the linked file. and click to select the line.rvt. you use the Align command to reposition the linked model within this project. 6 Zoom in closer on the lower half of the townhouse and notice the ground floor level of the townhouse is 11 feet below Level 1 of the site project. move the cursor over the Ground Floor level of the Townhouse project. you align the Ground Floor level to Level 1 of the site plan. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. Remember to turn on visibility of the Condo Complex after you have completed this task.

Notice that the townhouse is now at the proper height within this project. Also notice the option displays for you to lock the alignment. Do not lock the alignment of the linked file. This would over-constrain the model. 9 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click North. 10 Using the same technique learned in the previous steps, align the Ground Floor level of the remaining townhouse to Level 1 of the Site project.

11 Return to the South elevation view. Both townhouses should be at the proper level.

12 On the View toolbar, click 13 On the View toolbar, click

(Default 3D View). (SteeringWheels).

14 On the SteeringWheels, click and hold Orbit, and then spin the model until it resembles the following illustration.

15 On the File menu, click Save.

Repositioning Linked Building Models | 659

NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this tutorial, you need this project file open and in this view. In this exercise, you changed the elevation of the townhouses relative to the host project. As you can see, each linked file can have a separate set of levels and relative heights and you can accommodate those differences within the host project. In the next exercise, you modify how the linked files display within the host project.

Controlling Linked Building Model Visibility
In this exercise, you modify the visibility settings of the linked files within the site project. After you link a Revit Structure 2009 project file within another project, you can independently control the visibility settings, detail level, display settings, and the halftone settings for each linked project. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises in this tutorial and the resulting project files. If you have not completed the previous exercise, do so before continuing. Modify visibility settings 1 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click South. 2 On the View menu, click Visibility/Graphics. 3 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog, click the Revit Links tab. 4 Under Visibility, expand c_Townhouse.rvt. Notice that you can change visibility settings of an entire linked file or selected instances of a linked file. NOTE You have three options for controlling visibility settings of a linked file. By host view matches the display to the settings of the current active project view. By linked view matches the display to the settings of the linked project view. Custom allows you to override specific visibility settings for a linked project or an instance of the linked project. When you link a file, the defaults are set to By host view for all options. 5 Under Display Settings for c_Townhouse.rvt, click By Host View. 6 On the Basics tab of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog, click Custom. If the Basics page is set to Custom, then the other pages on the RVT Link Display Settings dialog may be set to By host View, By linked view, or Custom. 7 Click the Annotations Categories tab. 8 For Annotation Categories, select <Custom>. 9 Under Visibility, scroll down and clear Levels. 10 Click OK. 11 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog, click OK. Notice the Level lines for both townhouses no longer display.

NOTE Changes to Visibility/Graphics are per view only. The townhouse level lines still display in the remaining elevation views.

660 | Chapter 20 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates

12 Using the same technique learned in the previous steps, clear the Levels display for c_Condo_Complex.rvt.

Apply halftone 13 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 1. 14 On the View menu, click Visibility/Graphics. 15 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog, click the Revit Links tab. 16 Under Visibility, expand c_Townhouse.rvt. Notice the option to halftone individual instances of the townhouse model. 17 Select Halftone for the Townhouse project, and click OK. Halftone displays objects with half their normal darkness. With linked files, you can apply halftone to the entire linked project or individual instances of the model. Using the Custom option, you can also apply halftone to individual categories. Notice both townhouses display in halftone.

Detail levels of a linked file 18 On the View menu, click Visibility/Graphics. 19 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog, click the Revit Links tab. 20 For c_Townhouse.rvt, under Display Settings, click By Host View. 21 In the RVT Link Display Settings dialog, on the Basics tab, select Custom. 22 Click the Model Categories tab. 23 In the Model categories list, select <Custom>. By default, the detail level for the linked townhouse project is set to By Host View. This means that the detail level of the linked file is matched to the detail level of the current active project view. By selecting custom under Model Categories, you can independently set the detail level for each model category for each link on a per view basis. You can click the value for Detail Level, and then set the detail level to coarse, medium, or fine. In this case, no detail level changes are required. 24 Click OK.

Controlling Linked Building Model Visibility | 661

Modify display settings of linked files You can use display settings to control the view range, phase, and phase filter of a specific link. 25 On the Revit Links tab, under Visibility, select c_Townhouse.rvt. Notice that the Custom button displays under Display Settings.

26 Under Display Settings, click Custom for the Townhouse link. 27 In the RVT Link Display Settings dialog, select Floor Plan: Ground Floor for Linked view. By default, the view range of a linked project uses the current view of the host project to define its view range. In most cases, this is preferable. However, there are situations, on a sloped site for instance, where you need to specify a different view range so that all the building model plan views cut at the same height. In this case, the townhouse view range now uses the same view range defined within the Floor Plan: Ground Floor of the original linked file. 28 Select By linked view for View range. Notice the Phase and Phase filter specified are By host view. In this case, the host view specifies New Construction for the Phase and Show All for the phase filter. This means that the phase named New Construction for the linked building model is displayed, with Show All as the phase filter applied to the link. With the Show All filter applied, all new, existing, demolished, and temporary components in that particular phase (New Construction) are displayed. All other components are grayed out. 29 Click OK. 30 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog, click OK. 31 On the File menu, click Save. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this tutorial, you need this project file open and in this view. In this exercise, you modified the visibility settings of the townhouse link by turning off the visibility of the level lines and applying halftone in a plan view. You also changed the view range of the townhouse so it would cut through the building model at the same height as the other linked building model. In the next exercise, you manage the linked files.

Managing Linked Building Models
In this exercise, you manage the links within the host project by unloading and reloading the linked projects. After you link a Revit Structure 2009 project into another project, a connection to the linked project continues to exist. If the host file is closed and one of the linked files is modified, those modifications are reloaded into the host project when it is reopened.

662 | Chapter 20 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates

NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises in this tutorial and the resulting project files. If you have not completed the previous exercise, do so before continuing. Unload and reload links 1 On the File menu, click Manage Links. 2 In the Manage Links dialog, click the Revit tab. Notice the Loaded, Locations Not Saved, and Saved Path fields are read only. They supply information regarding the links. NOTE The Locations Not Saved field is only relevant for links with shared coordinates. In a shared coordinate environment, any changes made to the locations of a linked file are saved within the linked file rather than the host project. As links are moved to new locations in the host project, you can use the Save Locations command to save the new locations to the linked project. You learn more about this in the next lesson, Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models. 3 Under Path Type, notice that you have a choice between Relative and Absolute. The default path type is Relative. In general, you should use a relative path rather than an absolute. If you use a relative path and move the project and linked file together to a new directory, the link is maintained. If you use an absolute path and move the project and linked file to a new location, the link is broken because the host project continues to look for the link in the absolute path specified. The most common scenario for using Absolute is when the linked file is on a network where multiple users need access to it. 4 Under Linked File, select c_Condo_Complex.rvt. The buttons at the bottom of the dialog are now active. 5 Click Unload. NOTE Unloading linked projects may increase performance by reducing the quantity of components that must be opened and drawn. 6 At the confirmation prompt, click Yes. The Loaded option for that linked file is now clear. 7 Click OK. Notice that the condo complex link no longer displays in the host project.

Managing Linked Building Models | 663

TIP In the Manage Links dialog, you can also remove a link completely or reload the link from a different location. Linking building models with Worksharing enabled In some cases, you may need to link projects that have Worksharing enabled. In these cases, you should consider the following:

Selective open of worksets: When linking a Worksharing-enabled building model, you can specify which worksets to open after the link is made. In the Import/Link RVT dialog, click the arrow next to the Open button, and select Specify. This enhances performance by reducing the quantity of components that must be opened and drawn. Changing the linked worksets: While working in a host file with Worksharing-enabled linked files, you may decide that you need to see additional worksets of one of those linked files. To do this, go to the Manage Links dialog and use the Reload From command. You can then specify the additional worksets you need opened. Linking a building model into multiple host projects: Although the same Worksharing-enabled building model can be linked within multiple host projects, the specific worksets opened in each host project must be identical. The user who creates the first link determines the status for all other linked files. Host files with Worksharing enabled: When the host file has Worksharing activated, you must keep in mind which workset the link is placed in. Links consist of two parts: the link symbol and the link instance. When you initially place the link, both the link symbol and the link instance are placed in the active workset. However, link instances can be reassigned to different worksets. In general, you should try to keep all instances of a link on the same workset.

TIP When opening a Worksharing-enabled host file, it is possible to specify which links are loaded when the host file opens. A link is only loaded if the workset that the link instance is assigned to opens. If you choose not to open that workset, the link is not loaded. 8 In the Project Browser, expand Revit Links, right-click c_Condo_Complex.rvt, and click Reload. NOTE Some of the more frequently-used commands from the Manage Links dialog can be accessed by right-clicking the link in the Project Browser. Notice the condo complex building model has been reloaded into its previous location.

9 On the File menu, click Save As.

664 | Chapter 20 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates

10 In the Save As dialog, navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise, name the file Site_Project, and save it as an RVT file. NOTE If you intend to complete the next lesson, Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models, it is important that this file exist in the same directory as the condo complex and townhouse projects. In this exercise, you managed the linked files by unloading and reloading the townhouse project. In the next lesson, you learn how to share the coordinates between the host and linked projects. If you intend to complete the next lesson now, leave the project file open in its current view.

Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models
In this lesson, you learn how to share coordinates between project files so that you can correctly locate building models with respect to each other. When used in conjunction with model linking, you can keep track of the multiple locations in which a linked building model may reside. When you share coordinates between projects, you are deciding which coordinate system will be used by the two files. In essence, you are establishing a shared origin point. TIP You can also use shared coordinates with linked DWG files. When Revit project views are exported to DWG, project or shared coordinates can be specified in the Export Options dialog. This lesson requires the completion of the lesson Linking Building Models on page 648, and the resulting project files. If you have not completed the previous lesson, do so before continuing.

Acquiring and Publishing Coordinates
In this exercise, you publish the coordinates from a host project file to two different buildings that are linked to that project. The host file consists primarily of site components. When you link a Revit Structure 2009 project into another project (the host project), you can choose to use the coordinates of either the host project or the linked project. In most cases where the host project consists primarily of site components and the linked projects contain the building models, the host project coordinates are used. This ensures all the linked building models define their position with respect to the site data.

Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models | 665

When you are working in the host project, you can publish the coordinates of the linked files. This sends the coordinate information to the linked project so that its internal coordinate system matches the host project. You can also acquire coordinates when working in the host project. In this case, the host file acquires the coordinates of a specified linked file. You may want to do this in a case when the link refers to a DWG that has an established coordinate system that you want the host project to adopt. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous lesson, Linking Building Models on page 648, and the resulting project files. If you have not completed the lesson, do so before continuing. If you have closed the project, open it before continuing. Training File
■ ■ ■

On the File menu, click Open. Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial. Select Site_Project.rvt and click Open.

Publish coordinates 1 Verify that the floor plan Level 1 is the active view.

2 On the Tools menu, click Shared Coordinates ➤ Publish Coordinates. As indicated in the Status Bar, you must now select a linked project to publish coordinates to. 3 In the drawing area, click the Condo Complex. It is the building model in the upper center of the host project.

666 | Chapter 20 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates

4 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog, select Location 1, and click OK. On the Status Bar, notice you are still in Publish Coordinates mode and Revit Structure is waiting for you to select another link. 5 On the Design Bar, click Modify to end the Publish Coordinates process. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this lesson, you need this project file open and in this view. You have published the coordinates of the host project to the linked project. Both projects now share a coordinate system and can be linked to one another using this common coordinate system.

Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates
When a Revit Structure 2009 model is linked into a host project, it is placed at a specific location. Until coordinates are shared between the link and the host, this location is not saved outside of the host project. However, if coordinates are published from the host to the linked project, then the location becomes saved in the linked file. This location is defined as being a specified location with respect to the origin of the Host. Linked files using shared coordinates must have at least one defined location, but can have multiple additional locations. An example of a linked file with many locations is a prototype model of a house that is placed on 3 different lots. These three locations can be named Lot A, Lot B, and Lot C. Each of these lots is simply a different position for the same house design. Each of the locations can then be saved within the linked file for reference. This makes it possible to use the same building file to represent identical buildings on a site. In this exercise, you specify and save the two townhouse locations, even though both models originate from one linked file. You also relocate the shared origin of the project. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise within this lesson and the resulting project files. If you have not completed the exercise, do so before continuing. Specify a townhouse location 1 In the drawing area of the floor plan Level 1, move the cursor over the left townhouse and, when the edges highlight, click to select it.

2 On the Options Bar, click

.

Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates | 667

3 In the Element Properties dialog, under Instance Parameters, notice the Shared Location value is Not Shared. 4 Under Value, click Not Shared for Shared Location. Because this is the first time you are setting up the shared coordinates between the host and the linked models, a dialog displays telling you to reconcile the coordinates. This means that you need to choose which coordinate system will be shared by both files. This is a one-time operation. 5 In the Share Coordinates dialog:
■ ■

Select Publish the shared coordinate system. Under Record selected instance as being positioned at location, click Change.

6 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog, click Rename. 7 In the Rename dialog, enter Lot A for New, and click OK. 8 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog, click OK. 9 In the Select Location dialog, click Reconcile. 10 In the Element Properties dialog, notice the Shared Location value is now Lot A, and click OK. Constrain a link to a specific location 11 Select the townhouse building model on the right side of the host project. After a link instance is assigned a shared location, changing the position of that instance can affect the definition of the location that is saved with the linked file. When constraining a link to a location, you have only two choices:
■ ■

Move the instance to an existing location that is not already in use. Record the current position as a location. .

12 On the Options Bar, click

13 In the Element Properties dialog, under Instance Parameters, click Not Shared for Shared Location. In the Choose Location dialog, notice that you do not have an option to acquire or publish coordinates. This is because the coordinates for this linked file have already been shared. It is only necessary to reconcile coordinates once. 14 In the Choose Location dialog, select Move instance to. Notice the OK button is not active. This is because you cannot choose a location where an instance link already exists. You created the Lot A location in previous steps, and the left townhouse resides at that location. 15 In the Choose Location dialog, select the second option, Record current position as. Notice the OK button is still not active. Because Lot A is currently in use, you cannot redefine its location. 16 Click Change. 17 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog, click Duplicate, enter Lot B for Name, and click OK. 18 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog, make sure Lot B is selected, and click OK. 19 In the Select Location dialog, click OK. 20 In the Element Properties dialog, click OK. You now have two different locations for the townhouse building model: Lot A and Lot B. Save locations 21 On the File menu, click Manage Links. 22 In the Manage Links dialog, click the Revit tab, and then select the townhouse project.

668 | Chapter 20 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates

23 Click Save Locations. 24 In the Save Modified Linked Model dialog, select Save, and click OK. When you create a location, it is not automatically saved within the linked file. To explicitly save a location, you must go to the Manage Links dialog and save the locations there. NOTE If you attempt to close a host file without saving location changes made to linked files, you are prompted to save the locations to the linked files. 25 In the Manage Links dialog, notice the Locations Not Saved option for the townhouse project is no longer selected. 26 Click OK. 27 Select the townhouse on the right in Lot B and drag it a short distance in any direction. When you release the mouse button, a warning displays. You are informed that you have attempted to move a linked file that has been saved to a specific location. You are given the opportunity to save the new location, ignore the warning, or cancel the action. 28 Click Cancel to return the townhouse to Lot B. You can relocate an entire project with respect to all the linked files that are shared with it. When you relocate a project, the active location position is moved, although it may appear that the linked files are moving. By relocating a project, you essentially move the origin of the shared coordinates. Relocate a project 29 On the View menu, click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. 30 On the Tools menu, click Project Position/Orientation ➤ Relocate this Project. This is a two-click process. The first click specifies the move start point. The second click specifies the move endpoint. 31 Click just north of the site topography and just below the North elevation symbol.

32 Move the cursor horizontally to the left approximately 40' and click to relocate the shared origin.

Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates | 669

Notice the site topography and the linked building models no longer line up, and the linked projects are offset the distance that you moved the origin.

33 On the Edit menu, click Undo to return the origin to its original position. 34 On the File menu, click Save. 35 In the Save Modified Linked Model dialog, select Save, and click OK. 36 On the File menu, click Close. NOTE In the following exercise, you work in one of the linked projects. You cannot work on a host file and one of its linked files simultaneously in the same session of Revit Structure. In this exercise, you created and saved the locations of each townhouse. You have also learned how to relocate the host project with respect to the linked projects.

Working with a Linked Building Model
After a file has been linked into a host and its coordinates are shared, the linked file contains information about its location with respect to the host. When opening the linked file, you can select which of the defined locations is the active location that you would like to work on. Also, if other models were linked into the same host, you could link them in and have them retain their correct position. In this exercise, you work on the townhouse building model and modify its location. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises within this lesson and the resulting project files. If you have not completed the exercises, do so before continuing. Training File

On the File menu, click Open.

670 | Chapter 20 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates

■ ■

Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial. Select c_Townhouse and click Open.

Link a project 1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click 1st Floor. This project is currently linked to the Site_Project.rvt file. It is located in Lot A and Lot B within that project file. In addition, the condo complex is linked within the Site_Project.rvt file. 2 On the File menu, click Import/Link ➤ Revit. 3 In the Import/Link RVT dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial. Select c_Condo_Complex. For Positioning, select Auto - By Shared Coordinates. Click Open.

Because this building model only has one named location, it is placed automatically within the host project. 4 Zoom out to see the condo complex building model.

The condo complex is positioned relative to the active location of the townhouse building model. The current active location is Lot A. Change the active location 5 On the Settings menu, click Manage Place and Locations. Notice that Lot A is the current active location. 6 Select Lot B, and click Make Current. 7 Click OK. Notice that the condo complex link has repositioned itself as though the townhouse was on Lot B.

Working with a Linked Building Model | 671

NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this lesson, you need this project file open and in this view. In this exercise, you worked within a project that is linked within another project. You loaded a linked file into the townhouse project and then changed the active location to see how the project reacts to the changes. In the next exercise, you manage the shared locations.

Managing Shared Locations
The Manage Place and Locations command allows you to quickly create new location names or rename existing ones. These new locations can be assigned later within a host file. In this exercise, you create a new location, orient a view to true north, and use the Report Shared Coordinates tool. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises within this lesson and the resulting project files. If you have not completed the exercises, do so before continuing. Manage locations 1 On the Settings menu, click Manage Place and Locations. 2 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog, click Duplicate. 3 In the Name dialog, enter Lot C, and click OK. 4 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog, click OK. Lot C now exists as a location although it has not been specified as an instance. In the host file, you can select Lot C if necessary. Orient a view to true north 5 On the View menu, click View Properties. 6 In the Element Properties dialog, under Graphics, select True North for Orientation, and click OK. 7 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. Notice that the orientation of the model resembles the site project.

672 | Chapter 20 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates

Report shared coordinates 8 On the Tools menu, click Shared Coordinates ➤ Report Shared Coordinates. This command allows you to determine the location of elements and points in the model with respect to the shared coordinate origin. 9 Click any component or in any location on the drawing area. On the Options Bar, notice the coordinates display in regards to the direction and distance to the origin. 10 On the File menu, click Close. You can save the file if you wish. In this exercise, you created a new location using the Manage Place and Locations tool. You rotated a view to true north and used the Report Shared Coordinates tool to locate components in regards to the origin.

Scheduling Components of Linked Files
In this exercise, you schedule components of the host file and of all linked files. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises within this lesson and the resulting project files. If you have not completed the exercise, do so before continuing. Training File
■ ■ ■

On the File menu, click Open. Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial. Select Site_Project.rvt and click Open.

Create a door schedule 1 Verify that the floor plan Level 1 is the active view.

Scheduling Components of Linked Files | 673

2 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Schedule/Quantities. 3 In the New Schedule dialog, under Category, select Doors, and click OK. Select the fields to display in the door schedule 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog, click the Fields tab. 5 Under Available fields, select Count, and click Add. 6 Add the remaining fields in the following order:
■ ■ ■

Family and Type Comments Cost

7 Select Include elements in linked files.

674 | Chapter 20 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates

Because you did not itemize every instance of each door type. you can sort the schedule data and display a single table entry per door type. and a grand total for the number of doors in the project buildings. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. and then click OK twice. select Family and Type for Sort by. under Other. You have completed this tutorial. clear Itemize every instance. 12 Select Grand totals. In order to see a concise listing of all the doors in the campus project. expand Schedules/Quantities. 14 On the File menu. click Edit for Sorting/Grouping. Sort schedule data 9 In the Project Browser. right-click Door Schedule. click Close. In this exercise. and click Properties.8 Click OK. Scheduling Components of Linked Files | 675 . You also sorted the schedule data to produce a consolidated listing of the components. click Save. 13 On the File menu. you created a schedule of doors in the host file and all linked files of a project. 11 In the Schedule Properties dialog. the schedule lists the total count for each door type.

676 .

beams. Phases represent distinct time periods over the duration of a project. and create plan views for each phase. Also includes demolition of all internal walls for the existing building. you apply phase-specific room tags to rooms that vary with each phase.Project Phasing 21 In any project. Phase 1 (south): Includes new steelwork and footings for the existing building. You create new phases. and a non load-bearing brick panel wall for a new building to be constructed north of the galleria. you renovate a building to convert it to a shopping mall. you or the client may want to view the model according to phases. For the client. In the second exercise. You can create as many phases as necessary and assign building model elements to specific phases. complete with schedules. demolish existing construction. In the lesson and exercises that follow. the galleria. You customize the display of phased work to highlight demolition work. you work in a simple building model that requires renovation. assigning building elements to the appropriate phase: ■ Existing: Includes the original brick-clad building with structural walls and non load-bearing internal partitions. you work with a building information model that requires renovation. as well as a covered walkway. assign new building model elements such as steelwork (columns. You create and manage 3 project phases. You then create schedules for the phased steelwork and 3-dimensional views of the phased construction and place them on a drawing sheet for a specific phase. Using Phasing In this lesson. you can create a visual time line of phase-specific 3D views. This allows you to create phase-specific project documentation. In this tutorial. and then add new building model elements. Phase 2 (north): Includes new steelwork. You can use phase filters to control the flow of building model information into views and schedules. braces and footings) to phases. footings. a floor slab. ■ ■ 677 . You create new phases.

Existing phase Phase 1 (south) 678 | Chapter 21 Project Phasing .

After you assign building elements to phases. you create new phase-specific views. you begin with all the building elements drawn as new construction. Phasing Your Model | 679 . you create structural schedules for a specific phase of the project. The default structural project template has 2 phases: Existing and New Construction. You create new phases for the project timeline.Phase 2 (north) After you add phases to the project. Dataset ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. The finished sheet Phasing Your Model In this exercise. use phase filters to control what displays in each phase. You create a new sheet on which you place the schedules and 2 views of the building model. and modify graphic overrides to highlight demolition work.

under Phasing. They can also be added or edited in an existing project at any time. Every building element has a Phase Created and a Phase Demolished value so you can assign a creation and a demolition phase to new work. notice that Show All is selected for Phase Filter and New Construction is selected for Phase. they are assigned to the New Construction phase by default. existing.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. TIP Available phases and view phase settings can be changed in a project template so they are available for each new project. if a view is assigned to a Phase 1 setting. This phase assignment is controlled by a Phase setting within the view properties. click Training Files. while previous phase linework is displayed as gray. or temporary) are visible in this phase. and open Common\c_STR_Project_Phasing. expand Views (all). When you create a new structural project. click . the current phase linework is displayed as black. and double-click Floor. By default. You can also use the Demolition tool to select building elements for demolition. 2 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. Any new elements that you add to this view are assigned the New Construction phase value. For example. 4 Click Cancel. These values let you assign creation and demolition phases in a timeline. 680 | Chapter 21 Project Phasing . 2 phases exist by default: Existing and New Construction. then new building elements are assigned to Phase 1. and the Phase Demolished value is None. 5 Select any of the exterior walls. Verify the current phase is New Construction 1 In the Project Browser. A phase view can show work in the current phase and work from previous phases in the project timeline. expand Floor Plans. Demolition work is represented by a black dashed line. notice that the Phase Created value is New Construction. The Show All filter means that all building model elements (new.rvt. demo. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. 6 On the Options Bar. As you add new elements to the building model. In the Element Properties dialog.

or temporary work (created and demolished in same phase). click the New Construction field. click Modify to clear the command. which means that work assigned to Phase 1 (south). scroll down the list of Instance Parameters until you see the Phasing heading. 13 Click in the Description fields for each phase. and double-click 3D. Phase 1 (south). 18 Select Show New for Phase Filter. 12 Under Insert. existing earlier phases. 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. With the phase Filter set to Show New. 10 In the Phasing dialog. All of the building elements in the project are currently assigned to Phase 1 (south). 11 Enter Phase 1 (south). so Phase 1 and Phase 2 occur after the Existing phase. and enter Phase 2 (north) under Name. There are now 3 phases in your project: Existing. 16 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. click After. All building objects that were assigned to New Construction are now assigned to Phase 1 (south) because you changed the phase name. demo. You do not see a change in the graphics because all the building elements are new to Phase 1 (south). and enter the following text: ■ ■ ■ Existing: Existing building Phase 1 (south): Existing building with new steelwork and demolished walls Phase 2 (north): New building with steelwork and exterior panel wall 14 Click OK. The Phase value is Phase 1 (south) and the Phase filter is Show All. Now you are seeing only work that is new to Phase 1 (south) of the project. 17 In the Element Properties dialog.7 Click Cancel. you will see a visual confirmation of the change as the building elements disappear from the view. Add and edit phases 9 Click Settings menu ➤ Phases. Assign selected building elements to the Existing phase 15 In the Project Browser. and Phase 2 (north). is visible in this view. on the Project Phases tab. Phasing Your Model | 681 . The phases are on a timeline with later phases lower on the list. as you change selected building elements to the existing phase. expand 3D Views. and click OK.

and click Select All Instances. 20 In the drawing area. The footings are hidden and cannot be selected.19 Click the ViewCube to adjust your view as shown. right-click one of the rectangular footings. click Hide/Isolate. 682 | Chapter 21 Project Phasing . 21 On the View Control Bar. 22 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Top. and click Hide Object.

click Hide/Isolate. 30 Click View menu ➤ View Properties.23 Use a crossing window to select the existing building. 31 In the Element Properties dialog. The continuous footing foundations. and previously you hid the rectangular footings to make sure they couldn’t be selected. are selected and are displayed in red. click . 24 On the Options Bar. 29 On the View Control Bar. which are the building elements that comprise the existing building. select Show All for Phase Filter. and openings. 27 In the Element Properties dialog. select Existing for Phase Created. 25 In the Filter dialog. click . 26 On the Options Bar. clear Structural Columns and Structural Framing. under Phasing. The building elements that you assigned to the Existing phase are no longer displayed in the drawing. walls. under Phasing. Phasing Your Model | 683 . and click OK. as shown. and click Reset Temporary Hide/Isolate. and click OK. 32 Click OK. 28 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Southeast. This filters out the steelwork. Only elements new to Phase 1 (south) are displayed.

You do not see future phases such as Phase 2 (north). Phase 1 (south) with demolition. 33 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Top. you modify phase and phase filter properties 684 | Chapter 21 Project Phasing . You see work for Phase 1 (south) and the existing phases. 35 On the Options Bar.Now you can see the Existing phase displayed with gray linework in the view. click . 34 Use a selection window to select the structural elements. 37 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Northeast. Because this is a renovation project. 36 In the Element Properties dialog. under Phasing. and the footings north of the galleria. Because the active phase is Phase 1 (south) and the phase filter is set to Show All. it requires separate plan views for the Existing. All of the structural elements are still assigned to Phase 1 (south). You have reassigned building elements to 3 phases. and Phase 2 (north) project phases. and click OK. the slab. select Phase 2 (north) for Phase Created. the walls. the building is displayed as shown. After you create the views.

right-click Copy of Existing. you do not want to rename the corresponding views and level. 42 In the Project Browser. 50 In the View Properties dialog. 47 In the Element Properties dialog. right-click Floor. double-click Existing. in phase 1. and click OK. and click OK. it might be desirable to show previous phases or demolition. under Floor Plans. This refers to the ceiling plan and the level line visible in any of the elevation views. right-click Existing. enter Existing. under Floor Plans. Because of this time relationship. which will include planned demolition. The cursor is displayed as a hammer. a graphic override is used to make “older” existing elements use the gray line style. 48 In the Project Browser. 49 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. The line style of the new work. and click OK.to determine which phase is shown and which building elements (existing. You now have a separate floor plan for the existing building model and for Phase 1. The line style of the walls and openings are displayed as black. and click Duplicate. Because this is a phase-specific view. You are asked if you want to rename corresponding level and views. under Floor Plans. under Phasing. double click Phase 1 (south). and click OK. enter Phase 1 (south). Demolish the interior walls 51 On the Tools toolbar. select Phase 1 (south) for the Phase value. 39 In the Rename View dialog. new. 40 Click No. Create phase-specific plan views 38 In the Project Browser. shows as black. under Floor Plans. In a phase such as Phase 1. Phasing Your Model | 685 . 43 In the Rename View dialog. demo. 41 In the Project Browser. 44 Repeat the process to create a view named Phase 2 (north) Manage the phases for a view 45 In the Project Browser. and click Rename. and temporary) are shown in the same timeline. Phase 1 (south) occurs after existing construction. click . and click Rename. under Phasing. 46 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. under Floor Plans. You can see the earlier existing phase because the phase filter is set to Show All. select Existing for Phase.

click New. The default phase filters are displayed. Create a custom phase filter 57 Click Settings menu ➤ Phases. 64 Click OK twice. New. 53 In the Project Browser. 56 Click OK. Demolished. under Phasing. and select Show All for Phase Filter. Notice that the openings display as demolished even though you did not specifically demolish them. This new filter uses graphic overrides to set the display of all building model elements. you need a filter that takes all of the phases into account with a particular graphic override to highlight the demolished walls in red. under Floor Plans. In this case. select Phase 2 (north) for the Phase value. 59 In the Phasing dialog. you demolish all elements hosted by it. select the interior walls one at a time. new or temporary. click the Phase Filters tab. and enter Demo Red. demo. 60 Under Filter Name. click Filter 1. As you click each wall. 58 In the Phasing dialog. Graphic overrides define the appearance of building model elements according to their phase status: existing. The line style of the current phase is displayed as black and previous phases are displayed as gray. select Overridden.52 Referring to the walls displayed as dashed lines in the following illustration. 63 Click on the Demolished line color and change it from black to red. it is displayed as a dashed line. That is because the openings are wall-hosted elements. however. 686 | Chapter 21 Project Phasing . Demo Red. 61 For the Filter Name. double-click Phase 2 (north). 55 In the Element Properties dialog. When you demolish the host. A new phase filter is displayed at the bottom of the Filter Name list. View graphic overrides 62 Click the Graphic Overrides tab. Because the Phase value is Phase 1 (south) the walls are demolished in this phase. under Demolished. 54 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. and Temporary. Existing.

Manage the phases for the 3D views 72 In the Project Browser. You can see the earlier existing phase because the phase filter is set to Show All. a graphic override is used to make “older” existing elements use the gray line style. select Demo Red for Phase Filter to show work that is demolished with the red line color from the graphic overrides. in phase 1. 70 Right-click on each of the copies. This displays both architectural and structural building elements. Phasing Your Model | 687 . 76 Under Graphics. and Show All for Phase Filter. select Phase 1 (south) for Phase. double-click Phase 1 (south). under Phasing. under 3D Views. and click Rename. double-click Existing. 78 Click OK. 83 Select Coordination for Discipline. 73 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. under 3D Views. Because you changed the override. and the Show All phase filter includes the override for demolition. Do this 3 times so you have 3 copies. select Shading for Model Graphics Style. which will show both architectural and structural building elements. The line style of the new work.Apply the Demo Red graphic overrides to a view 65 Under Floor Plans. under Phasing. Because of this time relationship. Phase 2 (north). shows as black. the demolished walls are displayed as red. double-click Phase 1 (south). under 3D Views. select Existing for the Phase value. Phase 1 (south) occurs after existing construction. and click OK. 68 Click OK. 82 In the Element Properties dialog. The override settings for Show All and Demo Red are the same. 66 To assign as specific phase filter to a view. under Phasing. 79 In the Project Browser. 77 Select Coordination for Discipline. Create phase-specific 3D views 69 In the Project Browser. 74 In the Element Properties dialog. select Shading for Model Graphics Style. 81 In the Element Properties dialog. 67 In the Element Properties dialog. 80 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. Phase 1 (south). 75 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. under Graphics. click View menu ➤ View Properties. The line style of the walls and openings are displayed as black. right-click 3D and click Duplicate. 71 Name the views Existing.

as well as 2 views of the building model. you create column. you created a building model with 3 distinct phases and created 3 plan views with appropriate phase filters to display each phase. 85 Repeat steps 81 . You created a custom phase filter with graphic overrides to show demolition work in red. framing.84 for the Phase 2 (north) view. In this exercise. and footing schedules for a single phase of a project.84 Click OK. you can do so at this time or you can continue in this file for the next exercise. Creating Phase-Specific Structural Schedules In this exercise. assigning Phase 2 (north) as the Phase. You create a new sheet on which you place the schedules. 86 If you wish to save this file. The finished sheet 688 | Chapter 21 Project Phasing . You finished the exercise by creating 3d phased views suitable for a client presentation.

select Structural Columns. Click OK.Phase 1 for Name. 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog. Create a structural framing schedule for Phase 1 (south) 6 On the Design Bar. 7 In the New Schedule dialog.Phase 1 for Name. You can drag a column grid line to adjust the width of a column. 2 In the New Schedule dialog. Click OK. 5 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Select Length for Then by. click Schedule/Quantities. click the Fields tab. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Category. Click OK. Enter Framing . Select Phase 1 (south) for Phase. and open Imperial\i_STR_Project_Phasing_Schedules. Select Grand totals. and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ Count Family and Type Length TIP Press and hold CTRL to make multiple selections under Available Fields. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Category. Create a structural column schedule for Phase 1 (south) 1 On the View tab of the Design bar. click Training Files. Enter Columns . Creating Phase-Specific Structural Schedules | 689 . 4 Under Available Fields. Select Phase 1 (south) for Phase. and do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Family and Type for Sort By. select Structural Framing. select the following fields. click Schedule/Quantities. Clear Itemize every instance.Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.

14 Under Available Fields. 18 In the Project Browser. Next. you drag the schedules and project views onto the sheet. Clear Itemize every instance. select the following fields. 17 In the Select a Titleblock dialog.8 In the Schedule Properties dialog. select Structural Foundations. Click OK. and click New Sheet.Phase 1 for Name. and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ Count Family and Type 15 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab. 690 | Chapter 21 Project Phasing . click the Fields tab. 13 In the Schedule Properties dialog. Create a sheet and then add views and schedules 16 In the Project Browser. Select Grand totals. Click OK. select the following fields. 19 In the Sheet Title dialog. and do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Family and Type for Sort By. Clear Itemize every instance. Use the following illustration as a guide as you complete the steps to create your sheet. click Schedule/Quantities 12 In the New Schedule dialog. right-click the new sheet. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Category. click the Fields tab. Create a footings schedule for Phase 1 (south) 11 On the Design bar. Select Phase 1 (south) for Phase. expand Sheets (all). and do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Family and Type for Sort By. Enter Footings . and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ Count Family and Type 10 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab.Structural for Name. Select Grand totals. 9 Under Available Fields. Click OK. enter Phase 1 . right-click Sheets (all). and click Rename. click OK.

Creating Phase-Specific Structural Schedules | 691 . 23 On the sheet. drag each of the 3 schedules onto the sheet. expand Floor Plans. drag Phase 1 (south) onto the sheet. and click to place them. 21 Under 3D views. and click to place it. and drag Phase 1 (south) onto the sheet. In this exercise. select each schedule one at a time.20 In the Project Browser. 22 Expand Schedules. and move the column controls to adjust column width. and click to place it. you created 3 custom structural schedules for a specific project phase and placed them on a sheet.

692 .

Daytime rendering of the pool house 693 .Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs 22 In this tutorial. You also learn how to create and record animated walkthroughs of a model. you learn how to create an exterior perspective view of a pool house building model and create rendered images for daytime and nighttime lighting. you learn to use the rendering features in Revit Structure 2009 to create rendered interior and exterior views of a building information model. Rendering an Exterior View In this lesson.

Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model In this exercise. After you create the perspective view. You work with a building model that already has materials applied to it. you render a region of the building that includes the exterior wall. add trees to the building site. 694 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . You also learn how to create a new material and apply it to a building component. define a new black anodized aluminum material and apply it to the curtain wall mullions of the pool house wall. you learn how to view and modify the material that is applied to a building component in a building model. In this exercise. and the curtain wall to view and verify the material and texture changes.Nighttime rendering of the pool house You learn to create and apply materials to the building model. and create the perspective view that you want to render. you: ■ ■ ■ change the render appearance of the wood material applied to the exterior screen wall of the pool house. When you complete these changes. you specify options that define the model environment. the pad. and then render a final exterior view. change the material of the pad of the pool house from the default material to concrete.

Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.rvt. Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model | 695 . click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Common\c_Pool_House. View the finish material of the screen wall 1 Verify that the 3D view of the pool house is displayed. 2 Zoom in to the wall of the house near the pool.

for Structure. so you can change the render appearance for the material. 696 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs .Teak. click Replace. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. click Edit/New. (Element You check the construction of the screen walls to determine the material assigned to the wall. click Properties). The design calls for the use of a dark stained. satin-finished teak. 10 On the Render Appearance tab. 6 In the Edit Assembly dialog. verify that the material for Structure [1] is Wood . Change the render appearance of the wood material 8 Click Settings menu ➤ Materials. for Materials.Teak. select the wooden screen wall. 7 Click OK 3 times. Solid.Teak. 5 Under Construction. 9 In the Materials dialog.3 In the drawing area. Solid. select Wood . Solid material is currently a light stained teak. and on the Options Bar. The Wood . click Edit.

select Concrete . You make modifications to the settings for this material to more closely match the desired finish. 20 Click the Graphics tab. and click OK. The material assignment for the pad is currently set to By Category. click (Element Properties). 16 Under Construction. click Modify. select Broom Straight. click Edit/New. 13 Click Update Preview. for the Structure [1] Material value. for Finish. 17 In the Edit Assembly dialog. and click OK. Change the material of the pad from the default material to concrete 14 In the drawing area. Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model | 697 . select Satin Varnish. You do not want the medium gloss finish. You change the material assignment to use a concrete with a straight broom finish. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. click <By Category>. but it is the closest material to what you want. 22 On the Design Bar. 18 In the Materials dialog. 21 Click OK 4 times. for Finish. and on the Options Bar. and review the material patterns. and click .11 In the Render Appearance Library dialog. It can be used for visual feedback to see if the setting produces the desired results. for Structure.Cast-in-Place Concrete. and click Update Preview. select the pad. click Wood Teak Stained Dark Medium Gloss. 19 On the Render Appearance tab. The Update Preview option provides a real time rendering of the changes to the material. click Edit. 12 On the Render Appearance tab of the Materials dialog. which is using a default material.

Aluminum. 26 At the bottom left corner of the Materials dialog. for Name. review the material appearance (color and pattern). 25 In the Materials dialog. By selecting this option. and apply it to the mullions of the pool house wall. You use an existing material as a template to create the black anodized aluminum material. 27 In the Duplicate Revit Material dialog. 698 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . Anodized . and click OK. 31 On the Graphics tab of the Materials dialog. 30 In the Render Appearance Library. click (Duplicate). the color used for this material in shaded views is an average color defined by the render appearance.Aluminum. click Aluminum Anodized Black.Black. and click OK. and click OK. 28 On the Graphics tab of the Materials dialog. 24 Click Settings menu ➤ Materials. select Metal . select Use Render Appearance for Shading. 29 On the Render Appearance tab. click Replace. enter Metal . You create a black anodized aluminum material.Define a new material and apply it to the mullions 23 Zoom in to view the curtain wall mullions.

35 Click OK twice. The mullions and frame for the wall are defined as By Category. . Anodized . Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model | 699 . select Metal .Aluminum. and click 34 In the Materials dialog. Render a region of the model to view the material changes 37 On the View Control Bar. 38 At the top of the Rendering dialog. You change the material used by the curtain wall mullion category. click 39 Select the rendering crop boundary. 36 Zoom to fit the drawing in the view. 33 In the Object Styles dialog. (Show Rendering Dialog). select Region. for Curtain Wall Mullions.32 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. select the Material value.Black.

40 Adjust the extents of the region by dragging the borders in tight around the areas where the materials changed (pool house screen. 700 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . the faster the image renders. 41 Zoom in to the region in order to see the results of the rendering test more clearly. NOTE The smaller the region. It is a good practice to define a precise render region until you are ready to create the final rendered image. and pad). mullions.

The higher the quality. 45 Close the Rendering dialog. Adding Trees to the Site In this exercise. 47 Proceed to the next exercise. 46 Click File menu ➤ Save. ■ ■ 43 Click Render.42 Specify options in the Rendering dialog: ■ Under Quality. select Exterior: Sun only. on the Rendering dialog. select Sunlight from top left. for Scheme. Adding Trees to the Site on page 701. the longer the rendering process will take. Several quality settings are available. The Rendering Progress dialog displays. For Sun. and save the project as c_Pool_House_in_progress. click Show the model. providing information on the status and duration of the rendering process. you place trees and shrubs on the building site in order to provide a more realistic context for rendering the project. for Setting.rvt. Refer to the Revit Structure Online Help for best practices for optimizing quality and output settings. Adding Trees to the Site | 701 . 44 To display the building model. Under Lighting. select Medium. under Display. after the rendering process completes.

2 Zoom in so you can easily view the area surrounding the pool house and walkway. NOTE For simplicity. Add shrubs and trees to the site 1 In the Project Browser.In a later exercise. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. expand Floor Plans. when you render an exterior view of the model. imperial components and units are used in this lesson. but any type and size can be used. Specific types and sizes of trees are referenced in the steps. and double-click Site. 702 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . c_Pool_House_in_progress. expand Views (all).rvt. the RPC model is used in the rendering.

5 Place 4 shrubs to the right of the patio. click Site Component. select RPC Tree . NOTE If planting families are not loaded into a project. select RPC Shrub : Yew 2'-4''. See Loading Families in the Revit Structure 2009 Online Help. near the walkway.) 6 In the Type Selector. as shown.30'. right-click in the Design Bar. and click Site.3 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. (Exact placement is not important. and place 2 trees in the project. Adding Trees to the Site | 703 . similar to the locations shown. TIP If the Site tab is not displayed. 4 In the Type Selector. they can be loaded from the Content Library.Deciduous : Red Maple .

click Rename. enter Honey Locust . 13 Click OK twice. Create a tree type and add it to the site 8 In the Type Selector.42'.18'. and click OK.Deciduous : Scarlet Oak . select RPC Tree . 9 In the Element Properties dialog. for New. 12 In the Type Properties dialog.Deciduous : Honey Locust . 10 In the Type Properties dialog. click Edit/New. 704 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs .25'. select RPC Tree . for Height.7 In the Type Selector. You change the size of the existing Honey Locust tree family. 11 In the Rename dialog. enter 18'. 14 Click in the drawing area to the right of the pool house to place the tree. and on the Options Bar. click (Element Properties). and place a tree to the left of the pool house between the 2 maple trees.

Creating a Perspective View | 705 . Creating a Perspective View In this exercise. 17 Proceed to the next exercise. click Modify. 16 Click File menu ➤ Save.15 On the Design Bar. you define the exterior perspective view of the building model that you want to render. Creating a Perspective View on page 705.

2 Add the camera to the view by specifying points for the camera position and the camera target point: ■ Specify the first point along the curve of the walkway facing the pool house to position the camera. Place a camera in the site view 1 With the Site view open. Specify the second point in the upper left corner of the pool house to define the target point of the camera. on the View tab of the Design Bar.rvt. The perspective view displays. ■ Exact placement is not important because you modify the view as required.Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 706 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . c_Pool_House_in_progress. click Camera.

under Floor Plans. The camera can also be moved along the walkway to get the desired perspective view. as necessary. and select the crop boundary. the triangle that represents the field of vision can be adjusted. double-click Site. as shown. Creating a Perspective View | 707 . With the camera shown. in the Project Browser. Adjust the back clipping plane so that it is beyond the wall in the yard. and click Show Camera. If the camera is not shown in the view. Depending on camera placement. right-click 3D View 1. and adjust the field of vision. Adjust the field of vision and back clipping plane 5 In the Project Browser. 4 Adjust the crop boundary to display the entire building and some of the pool in the foreground.3 Zoom out. the back wall of the yard may be cut off.

under 3D Views. and click Rename.Day.6 In the Project Browser. 9 Zoom to fit the perspective view in the window. enter Exterior . double-click Exterior . 7 In the Rename View dialog. 11 Proceed to the next exercise. right-click 3D View 1. and make any final adjustments to the crop boundary to improve image composition. 10 Save the file.Day to open the view. 708 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . Creating the Exterior Rendering on page 709. and click OK. 8 In the Project Browser.

Creating the Exterior Rendering | 709 . modify render settings. double-click Exterior .rvt.Day. Display the perspective view 1 In the Project Browser. and render a daytime view of the exterior. You then duplicate the view. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. and create lighting groups for a nighttime view of the exterior. under 3D Views. you specify the time and location settings for the rendering. c_Pool_House_in_progress.Creating the Exterior Rendering In this exercise.

for Sun. select Spring Equinox. select Sky: Cloudy. see Orienting to True North for Solar Studies. 6 Click OK twice.Specify rendering settings for a daytime view 2 On the View Control Bar. for Setting. for New. 710 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . 7 In the Rendering dialog. under Lighting. 3pm. NOTE If a background image is required. export the resulting image in PNG or TIFF format. the sky will be a procedural sky based on cloud settings and time of day. enter Spring Equinox . 4 On the Still tab of the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. select Medium. You create a location and time for the rendering. and click Rename. click (Show Rendering Dialog).Santa Monica. 3 In the Rendering dialog. under Background. 5 In the Rename dialog. and click Render. select Edit/New. For information on how the rendering/sun relates to the location settings. You adjust cloud settings as required. 8 Under Quality. In this case. The PNG and TIFF formats place the chosen background on an alpha channel for easier manipulation during photoediting.

click Show the rendering. click Export. For Files of type. click Show the model.9 In the Rendering dialog. click Desktop. 10 In the Rendering dialog. select Portable Network Graphics (*. After the image is rendered. 13 Close the Rendering dialog. The image file is saved to the Desktop for later reference.png). Creating the Exterior Rendering | 711 . you can switch between the rendered view and the model view as long as the Revit Structure session is open. Export the rendered image to an external file 11 In the Rendering dialog. 12 In the Save Image dialog: ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. Click Save.

21 In the Light Groups dialog. highlight 9 :Sconce Light . (Show Rendering 17 In the Rendering dialog.Night. select the first light. enter Pool Lights.Specify rendering settings for a nighttime view 14 In the Project Browser. 20 In the Artificial Lights dialog. 15 Rename the Copy of Exterior .Day view to Exterior . and click OK. right-click Exterior . and click OK. Create lighting groups 18 In the Artificial Lights . To create a similar view using different rendering settings. 26 In the Artificial Lights dialog.120V through 14 :Sconce Light . on the View Control Bar.Night. verify that Pool Lights is selected. and click Move to Group. add 16 :Light Fixture through 29 :Light Fixture to the Pool House Lights group. for Name.120V. under Ungrouped Lights. and click OK. under 3D Views. for Scheme. click New. 19 In the New Light Group dialog.Flat Round : 60W . click New.Day. 712 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . and click Artificial Lights. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. for Name. 24 In the New Light Group dialog. you duplicate the view and change the settings. 23 In the Artificial Lights dialog. select Exterior: Artificial only.Flat Round : 60W . 25 Using the same method.120V through 35 :Sconce Light .Night view open. under Ungrouped Lights. 16 With the Exterior . To select a sequential list. press and hold SHIFT. click Dialog). Lighting groups allow greater control over lighting schemes used in renderings. 27 In the Rendering dialog.Flat Round : 60W . click OK. You change the rendering settings to create a nighttime rendering of the same view. under Group Options. enter Pool House Lights. dialog.120V to the Pool Lights group. 22 Using the same method. under Lighting.Flat Round : 60W . click Render. and select the last light. add 30 :Sconce Light .Exterior . under Group Options.

and click OK. Rendering an Interior View In this lesson. 32 Save the file. the exposure can be modified to improve the output. Rendering an Interior View on page 713. you create a nighttime and a daytime rendering of the interior view of the building model that you worked with in the previous lesson. click Adjust Exposure. 30 In the Rendering dialog. 31 Close the Rendering dialog. Rendering an Interior View | 713 . click Show the model. 33 Proceed to the next lesson. Settings can be changed at any time within the Revit Structure session. and then switch between the views by clicking Show the rendering. In this example. After the image is rendered. but the other settings can be modified as well to control the final rendering.Adjust the exposure 28 In the Rendering dialog. for Exposure Value. under Image. you change the brightness of the exposure. enter 4. 29 In the Exposure Control dialog.

RPC people are represented by a 2D symbol in plan view and resemble real people only when rendered in a 3D view.Draft nighttime rendering of the interior High quality daytime rendering of the interior To create the rendered view. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 714 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . define the perspective view and rendering settings.rvt. render the views. you add ArchVision® realpeople (RPC content) to the interior of the pool house. and finally. c_Pool_House_in_progress. you add an RPC person to the interior view that you render in a later exercise. Adding RPC People In this exercise.

4 In the Type Selector. 2 Zoom in to the pool house. the person’s line of sight. Adding RPC People | 715 . Exact placement is not important. click Modify. but place the figure close to the front of the vanity so that her reflection displays in the mirror after the scene is rendered. select RPC Female : YinYin. double-click Level 1. 6 Select the figure. ■ (Rotate). 5 On the Design Bar. and on the Edit toolbar. click 7 Rotate the figure: The pointed portion of the symbol represents the front of the figure. and place the component inside the pool house. click Component. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. under Floor Plans.Add an RPC figure to the view 1 In the Project Browser. Click to set the rotate start point at the line of sight.

select Cast Reflections. 14 Save the file. the reflection of RPC content is turned off in order to enhance rendering performance. and click so that the figure is angled toward the vanity. the reflective properties must be turned on for the family type. In order to see the figure’s reflection. By default. 10 In the Type Properties dialog. 12 Click OK 3 times. click (Element Properties). If reflections of RPC content are important to the rendering. Enable reflective properties for RPC content 8 With the RPC figure selected. click Edit. under Identity Data. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. 716 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . on the Options Bar.■ Rotate clockwise about 20 degrees. you can enable this option. click Modify. for Render Appearance Properties. under Parameters. 13 On the Design Bar. 11 In the Render Appearance Properties dialog. click Edit/New.

you create the interior perspective view that you will render in the final exercise in this lesson. Creating the Interior Perspective View | 717 . and using a section box to limit the geometry included in the rendering process. Creating the Interior Perspective View on page 717. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Creating the Interior Perspective View In this exercise.rvt. Add a camera 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 2 Add the camera to the view by specifying points for the camera position and target point: ■ ■ Click inside the lower right corner of the pool house to place the camera. Click outside of the pool house to the left to place the target point.15 Proceed to the next exercise. You define the interior perspective by placing a camera. You place a camera into the view to create an interior perspective. c_Pool_House_in_progress. click Camera. Exact placement is not important because you will adjust the crop boundary of the view in later steps.

right-click 3D View 1. select Section Box.The perspective view displays. 6 Zoom out so that you can see the selection box. Add a section box to limit the extents of the rendered view 3 Zoom to fit the view in the window. 718 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . 4 In the Project Browser. and click OK. 5 In the Element Properties dialog. You can use a section box to limit the geometry included in a rendering. and click Properties. under 3D Views. under Extents.

under Elevations (Building Elevations). 11 In the 3D view. 10 Click Window menu ➤ Tile. double-click South. 8 In the Project Browser. select the section box. In order to accurately adjust the section box. in addition to the 3D view.7 Click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. double-click Level 1. 9 In the Project Browser. you display an elevation/section view and a plan view. Creating the Interior Perspective View | 719 . under Floor Plans.

right-click. 14 In the 3D view. size the box as shown. 720 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . size the box as shown. 13 In the South Elevation view. select the section box. and click Hide in view ➤ Category.12 In the floor plan view.

doors that contain windows or glass. you define daylight portals for the glazed panels of the curtain wall. 17 Save the file. Creating the Interior Rendering In this exercise. Training File Creating the Interior Rendering | 721 .15 Maximize the 3D view. Creating the Interior Rendering on page 721. and adjust the crop boundary to match the illustration. Daylight portals improve the quality of light that shines through windows. 16 Zoom to fit the view in the window. and render the interior view. you define artificial lighting and render a nighttime view of the interior. and curtain walls. 18 Proceed to the next exercise. To create a daytime view.

and click OK. enter Interior . 5 Click Artificial Lights. You can specify a lower quality. under 3D Views. These settings can be adjusted after the rendering is complete using the Adjust Exposure option. c_Pool_House_in_progress. and click OK. 2 In the Rename View dialog. click (Show Rendering Dialog). and render the view to check lighting levels and material selections. 3 On the View Control Bar. The Interior: Artificial only option defines a baseline for the exposure and other settings for an interior rendering without daylight. 4 In the Rendering dialog.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. click Render. 6 In the Artificial Lights dialog. select Interior: Artificial only. select Draft. under Lighting. After these settings are established. for Scheme. Define lighting for a nighttime view 1 In the Project Browser. you turn them off for this scene. clear Pool Lights. and click Rename. for Setting. 722 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . Because the exterior pool lights will not have an effect on this rendering. 7 Under Quality. 8 In the Rendering dialog.rvt. the view can be rendered at a higher quality level. right-click 3D View 1. Using light controls and lighting groups can help to define multiple lighting conditions for views.Night.

Day. select Interior: Sun only. Create an interior day view 10 In the Project Browser.Santa Monica. For more information on daylight portals. 3pm. NOTE The custom setting is only applied to this view. 13 In the Rendering dialog. click Copy To Custom. click 14 For Setting. You create a view for the interior during the day.9 Close the Rendering dialog. You can duplicate the view for each lighting condition/time of day you want to render. the daylight portals can be turned on. The daylight portals help to further refine this daylight into a more realistic rendered effect. in order to turn on daylight portals. right-click Interior . see the Revit Structure Online Help. IMPORTANT Enabling daylight portals can drastically increase rendering times. 11 Rename the copied view to Interior . This process must be repeated if you want to use custom settings in other views. (Show Rendering Dialog). 15 In the Render Quality Settings dialog. for Daylight Portal Options.Night. 16 Scroll to the bottom of the dialog. but the space will receive standard daylighting. Specify rendering settings 12 On the View Control Bar. select Curtain Walls. select Spring Equinox . In this case. select Edit. for Sun. and click OK. 17 In the Rendering dialog. Creating the Interior Rendering | 723 . you must create a custom setting. select Region. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. For sunlit interiors. The preset schemes are read-only. By default they are turned off. You have to copy a preset scheme to your custom settings in order to make changes. for Scheme. and click Render.

View the properties of the column and note that the assigned material is Wood. and close the Rendering dialog. click Show the model. Modify the column material 21 In the drawing area. click Adjust Exposure. and on the Options Bar. you adjust the material of the column to improve the effect. Notice that the speckling on the wooden column in the foreground is reflecting too much light. Click OK. under Image. For Saturation.18 In the Rendering dialog. In the next steps. 19 In the Exposure Control dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Exposure Value. 20 In the Rendering dialog. enter 10. (Element 724 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . enter 1. click Properties). select the column on the right.

As size and DPI are increased. click Settings menu ➤ Materials. click (Show Rendering Dialog). and click Render. select High. and rotate the material so that the grain of the wood runs vertically along the column. enter 90. 26 Click Update Preview. Click OK. You change the varnish setting. 31 In the Crop Region Size dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Change. the render time increases significantly. select the crop boundary. For Bump. 32 In the Rendering dialog. move the slider to the right until the value is approximately 5. select Unfinished. and on the Options Bar. Create a print quality rendering 27 On the View Control Bar. For Rotate. click OK. 23 With the column still selected. select Printer. For Width. select Scale (locked proportions). Creating the Interior Rendering | 725 . you can define the output and quality settings for final output.6. clear Region. The rendered output can be set to a printed ratio and the printed size of the output as well as the DPI for the image can be controlled. for Setting. 28 In the Rendering dialog. 24 In the Materials dialog. under Output Settings. After you use the test renderings to verify that you made the correct lighting and material selection. add a bump map to create texture. 25 Specify options on the Render Appearance tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Finish. for Resolution. click the dimensions for Size. enter 5''. select Based on wood grain. For Amount. and click OK.22 In the Element Properties dialog. 29 In the Rendering dialog. select Wood. 30 In the drawing area.

but you can also define it in a 3D. you define the walkthrough path in a plan view. You learned to create perspective views suitable for rendering and to modify rendering options in order to optimize the final output. you can select one of the following display options for the building model in your walkthrough: ■ ■ ■ Wireframe Hidden Line (wireframe view with hidden lines) Shading 726 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . but you can also create it in a 3D orthographic view.The rendered image displays. Recording a Walkthrough After you create a walkthrough. A walkthrough is created in a 3D perspective view by default. Usually. You can edit the walkthrough path by selecting and moving the key frames. and you create it by specifying points that create the spline. The walkthrough path is a spline. Each point becomes a key frame in the walkthrough. In a plan view. or section view. you learn how to create and record animated walkthroughs of your building models in Revit Structure 2009. you can also specify the height of the camera along the walkthrough path. Creating and Recording Walkthroughs In this lesson. The file can now be exported or saved to the Revit project. 33 Close the exercise file with or without saving. independent of the Revit Structure software. you can record it by exporting it to an AVI file that you can play with any available video player. which is the path that a camera will follow through the building model. Creating and Editing a Walkthrough The first step in creating a walkthrough is to define the walkthrough path. Additional frames that comprise the walkthrough are created between the key frames. By completing the two rendering lessons included in this tutorial. you rendered an exterior and an interior view. elevation. When you export your walkthrough to an AVI.

■ ■ Shading with Edges Rendering Creating a Walkthrough In this exercise. expand Views (all). 3 To create the walkthrough in a 3D perspective view. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and click to specify the start point (the first key frame) of the walkthrough. expand Floor Plans. TIP If the tab that you need does not display in the Design Bar. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. proceeds through the dining room. and change unit formats as desired. and double-click 1st Floor. Creating a Walkthrough | 727 . and ends in the far corner of the living room. click Settings ➤ Project Units. NOTE Some imperial values are used by default in this exercise. click Walkthrough. If you prefer to use metric values. right-click in the Design Bar. Create a walkthrough of the first floor of the building model 1 In the Project Browser. and click the tab in the context menu.rvt. click Training Files. verify that Perspective is selected. you learn how to create and edit a walkthrough of the first floor of a townhouse. 4 Move the cursor under the text label in the Breakfast room. and open Common\c_Townhouse. on the Options Bar. 5 Specify 4 additional points to define key frame positions on the walkthrough path as shown. You create a walkthrough that begins in the breakfast room of the townhouse.

expand Views (all) ➤ Walkthroughs. and double-click Walkthrough 1. 728 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . Edit and play the walkthrough 7 In the Project Browser. surrounded by a crop boundary with grips as shown.6 After you specify the final point of the walkthrough path in the Living room. click Finish. on the Options Bar. Your frame may look a bit different from the frame in the illustration because the walkthrough path is not precisely the same. The last frame of the walkthrough is displayed.

verify that Field of view is selected. 16 On the Options Bar. select the crop boundary. enter 1. Two options are displayed on the Options Bar: Edit Walkthrough and Size.8 Verify that the crop boundary of the walkthrough frame is selected and is displayed as red with blue grips. 11 Under Change. for Width. enter 60 to reduce the total number of frames in the walkthrough from 300 to 60. and click OK. for Frame. enter 16''. and press ENTER to set the walkthrough to play from the beginning (the key frame). The frame that is displayed is frame 300 of a total of 300 frames. on the Options Bar. 15 In the Walkthrough Frames dialog. enter 9''. If it is not. and for Height. 14 Click . and select the crop boundary. The walkthrough controls are displayed on the Options Bar. 13 On the Options Bar. 9 To change the size of the walkthrough frame crop region. click the dimensions for Size. Creating a Walkthrough | 729 . click Edit Walkthrough. 17 Click . and click OK. click Zoom ➤ Zoom Out (2x). 10 In the Crop Region Size dialog. 12 On the View menu.

The camera is displayed at the first key frame position on the walkthrough path in the breakfast room.rvt. click (Element Properties). 3 In the Element Properties dialog. Change the properties of the camera 1 In the Project Browser. 730 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . proceed to the next exercise. 18 When the walkthrough stops playing. double-click 1st Floor. you learn how to edit the walkthrough path and change the camera position in the walkthrough that you created in the previous exercise. click Edit Walkthrough. Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position In this exercise. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. and click OK. press ESC. under Extents. clear Far Clip Active. 2 On the Options Bar. NOTE To stop playing the walkthrough at any time. c_Townhouse. Clearing this option disables the far clipping plane of the camera. under Floor Plans. Edit the walkthrough path 4 On the Options Bar. The walkthrough path is displayed in the floor plan of the first floor. Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position on page 730.The walkthrough plays. The current display is wireframe with hidden lines.

and drag it to the location shown. Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position | 731 . You can move any camera target or key frame position. so do not be concerned if the camera displays at a slightly different location.5 Select the target point of the camera (the magenta grip). 7 Click the third key frame position. Blue grips are displayed at each key frame. select Path. 6 On the Options Bar. Your walkthrough path may vary from the one in the illustration. for Controls. and adjust it to view the kitchen as shown.

4 In the Export Walkthrough dialog. select <Shading>. specifying the number of frames. enter 15. 6 Double-click the AVI file to play the walkthrough from the location that you specified previously. without opening Revit Structure 2009. select any codec (compression/decompression) that is available on your system. shading with edges. or rendering.rvt. shading. . perhaps to 6'' wide x 4'' height. under Walkthroughs. It produces files that are larger than compressed files. for Frames/sec. Reducing the size of the output images and managing the frame rate lets you create realistic and smooth movement. you record the walkthrough that you created in the previous exercise by exporting it to an AVI file. If you are unsure of what option to use. on the Options Bar. 7 Try creating other walkthroughs. 5 In the Video Compression dialog. NOTE The available Compressor options are specific to your current computer system. double-click Walkthrough 1. click File menu ➤ Save As. 2 In the Length/Format dialog. and with a frame rate of from 15-30 frames per second. 8 If you want to save this exercise. Recording the Walkthrough In this exercise. If you had 150 frames and a frame rate of 15 seconds. for Compressor. and click OK. 9 To play the walkthrough. the Full Frames (Uncompressed) option is available to all users. then you are moving from the breakfast area to the living room window in 10 seconds. The walkthrough is recorded. under Output Length. 3 Under Format. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. specify a path and a file name for the AVI.Play the walkthrough to view the changes that you made 8 In the Project Browser. 732 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . c_Townhouse. but that do not suffer loss due to compression quality. Recording the Walkthrough on page 732. reducing the size of the image. you can select to display the walkthrough in wireframe. and then click 10 Proceed to the next exercise. click Edit Walkthrough. and click Save. for Model Graphics Style. 1 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Walkthrough. and click OK. hidden line. 9 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. When you export the walkthrough. and save the exercise file with a unique name.

you learn how to add fascia. 733 . mansard. you create an extruded roof over a breezeway between a house and a garage. You do not need to create the work plane. a work plane named Breezeway exists for the purpose of this exercise.Roofs 23 In this lesson. Creating Roofs Creating an Extruded Roof You create the roof by sketching the top roof profile and extruding it over the length of the breezeway. including hip. gutters. shed. Training File ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you learn how to create different types of roofs in Revit Structure 2009. In this exercise. and low sloped roofs. In this lesson. In addition. you learn to create several different types of roofs. you create roofs from footprints and by extrusion. Before you can sketch the roof profile. and soffits to the roofs that you create. gable. you need to select a work plane to use as a sketching guide. In this tutorial.

Before you can sketch the profile of the roof. verify Level 3 is selected for Level. expand Floor Plans.rvt. expand Views (all). 4 Click OK. 8 Sketch the first reference plane 1'6'' to the left of the left exterior breezeway wall face. and then click Open View to select a section view parallel to the work plane in which to sketch the roof. and open Imperial\i_Roofs. and then select Reference Plane : Breezeway. 5 In the Go To View dialog. verify that Section: Section1 is selected. The section view is automatically cropped around the area where you want to sketch the roof. select Name.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 In the Work Plane dialog. click Ref Plane. and double-click Level 1. 7 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. click Roof ➤ Roof by Extrusion. 734 | Chapter 23 Roofs . 6 In the Roof Reference Level and Offset dialog. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 1 In the Project Browser. you need to define four reference planes to help determine key points on the profile sketch. click Training Files.

and so on). you can place it in the general location and then zoom in and use temporary dimensions. To change where the temporary dimension is measured from (face. click the blue square on the witness line. 9 Sketch a similar reference plane 1'6" to the right of the right exterior breezeway wall face. 11 Sketch a horizontal reference plane 1'6" below Level 2.TIP Instead of trying to place the reference plane in its exact location initially. centerline. This helps ensure that the plane is measured from the face of the wall rather than from the wall centerline. 10 Sketch a vertical reference plane centered between the two vertical walls. Creating an Extruded Roof | 735 .

click Finish Sketch to complete the roof. Use automatic snaps to link the chain to the reference plane intersections. sketch the roof profile. 13 On the Options Bar. 14 Sketch two sloped lines to create the roof profile. 736 | Chapter 23 Roofs . 16 On the View toolbar.Next. 12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click (Default 3D View) to display the model. The roof is automatically extruded from the Breezeway work plane in one direction. 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Begin the sketch at the intersection of the left vertical reference plane and the horizontal plane. click Lines. select Chain.

22 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. press CTRL. 18 Select the edge of the roof. 23 Select one of the breezeway walls. Next. The breezeway walls still penetrate the roof. 20 Select the breezeway roof edge. and then select the exterior face of the wall. click Modify. and select the second wall. 19 On the Tools toolbar. and double-click Section 1. press TAB. and then select the exterior wall face of the garage to join the roof to the garage wall. click (Join/Unjoin Roof).Notice that the breezeway roof penetrates the house walls inappropriately. Use the Join Roof command again to join the opposite end of the breezeway roof to the exterior wall of the house that joins the breezeway. expand Views (all). The roof should resemble the following illustration. use the Join Roofs command to adjust the length of the roof and join the roof edges to the exterior walls. so you next attach the breezeway walls to the breezeway roof. Creating an Extruded Roof | 737 . expand Sections (Type 1). 21 In the Project Browser. 17 On the Tools toolbar. click (Join/Unjoin Roof).

click Attach for Top/Base. 738 | Chapter 23 Roofs . (Default 3D View) to view the completed breezeway roof in the 27 Proceed to the next exercise.24 On the Options Bar. 26 On the View toolbar. Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint on page 738. and then verify that Attach Wall: Top is selected. 25 Select the roof to join the wall tops to the roof. Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint In this exercise. click model. you create a gable roof over a garage from a footprint.

5 On the Options Bar. 6 Select the left vertical wall of the garage to define the first roof slope line. 2 Select Garage Roof to move the roof to the correct level. expand Views (all). click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. To complete the gable roof with the correct pitch.You begin by sketching the perimeter of the roof in plan view to create the roof footprint. You use roof slope lines to define the roof gable ends. verify that Defines slope is selected. and enter 2' 0'' for Overhang. 1 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Because you are in a three-dimensional view. sketch the roof footprint. 4 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. you set the roof slope as a property of the footprint slope lines. 3 In the Project Browser. Verify that a dashed blue line displays to the left of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the wall. click Pick Walls. the roof is automatically created on the lowest level of the house and a notification dialog is displayed. and click Yes. expand Floor Plans. i_Roofs.rvt. and double-click Garage Roof. Next. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint | 739 .

11 Press CTRL. 15 On the View toolbar. 14 When you see the informational dialog. and click OK. 8 On the Options Bar. By default. (Default 3D View) to view the gable roof and attached walls in 16 Proceed to the next exercise.7 Select the parallel wall on the right to define the second roof slope line. clear Defines slope. Verify that a dashed blue line displays to the right of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the wall. enter 6'' for Rise/12" to change the roof slope. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. select both slope definition lines. click Modify. Next. and on the Options Bar. 10 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. edit the properties of the two vertical slope definition lines to change the roof pitch. Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint on page 741. under Dimensions. 13 On the Design Bar. click the model. click Yes to attach the highlighted exterior garage walls to the roof. click Finish Roof. 9 Select the two horizontal walls to create a closed loop and complete the roof footprint. click (Properties). 740 | Chapter 23 Roofs . the roof slope has a 9'' rise over a 12'' run. The Element Properties dialog is displayed.

3 On the Options Bar. press TAB. NOTE You add the slope defining lines in a later step. Next. You begin by sketching the perimeter of the roof in plan view to create the roof footprint. Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint | 741 . and then verify that a dashed blue line displays to the exterior side of the walls. When you complete the roof. expand Floor Plans. The roof requires an opening to accommodate a chimney. 4 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. and enter 1' 0'' for Overhang.Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint In this exercise. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. click Pick Walls. you sketch a closed rectangular opening around the chimney. expand Views (all). you add a main gable roof to a house from a footprint. clear Defines slope. and double-click Level 3. 5 Place the cursor over one of the exterior walls. i_Roofs. sketch the chimney opening. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. the opening that you sketched becomes a void in the roof. 6 Click to select all the walls. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. After you define the roof slope lines and complete the footprint.

11 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 16 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Yes to attach the walls to the roof. sketch a rectangle from the upper left corner of the exterior chimney face to the lower right corner of the exterior chimney face. 14 Select one of the shorter line segments shown in the following illustration. select Defines Slope. 15 On the Options bar. 10 On the View menu. 8 On the Options Bar. click (Default 3D View) to view the new roof in the model. 18 On the View toolbar. 9 Using automatic snaps. click Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit to view the entire floor plan. 17 When you see the informational dialog. select Defines Slope. click (Rectangle). click Lines. 12 Select the uppermost horizontal line. Next. 13 On the Options Bar. click Finish Roof. click Modify. 742 | Chapter 23 Roofs .7 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. add new slope lines to the roof.

Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint In this exercise. 1 In the Project Browser. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 3 On the Options Bar. i_Roofs. clear Defines Slope. you create a hip roof over the rear of a house from a footprint.19 Proceed to the next exercise. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Pick Walls. click Lines. Roof sketches must create a closed loop before you can create the roof. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint | 743 . select Defines slope. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. 7 On the Options Bar. and enter 2' 0'' for Overhang. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint on page 743. 5 Select the exterior edges of the three walls that create the rear addition to the house. 4 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. and double-click Level 2. expand Floor Plans. close the roof sketch. and click (Pick Lines). Verify that a dashed blue line displays on the exterior side of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the walls. expand Views (all). The sketched lines cannot overlap or intersect each other. Next.rvt. 6 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar.

using the following illustration for guidance. 13 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. trim the extra line segments that result from the intersection of the sketch lines. and click OK. Next. 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. and then specify a point near the midpoint of the line that you sketched along the wall of the main building. Make sure you select the segment on the side that you want to keep. select the left vertical slope definition line. click (Trim/Extend). 9 On the Tools toolbar. click Roof Properties. 744 | Chapter 23 Roofs . Next. enter 2' 0'' for Base Offset From Level. click Finish Roof. raise the roof 2' above the current level. The Element Properties dialog is displayed. You must trim these lines to create a valid sketch. verify that the Trim/Extend to Corner option is selected. 11 To trim the first line segment. 10 On the Options Bar.8 Select the exterior edge of the uppermost horizontal wall of the main building. 14 Under Constraints. 12 Repeat the trim procedure on the adjacent corner to create a closed loop without intersections.

Use the Attach Top/Base command to join the walls to the roof. 20 Select the roof to join the wall top to the roof. click (SteeringWheels).16 On the View toolbar. click Modify. and use the Orbit tool to view the remaining walls that support the hip roof. 22 Using the same method that you used previously. Press and hold CTRL to select and join the two remaining walls at the same time. 18 On the Design Bar. join the two remaining walls to the roof. click Attach for Top/Base on the Options Bar. and use the Orbit tool to view the back of the house. 17 On the View toolbar. 21 Click (SteeringWheels). Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint | 745 .) Notice that the walls do not join to the roof. click (Default 3D View) to display the model. 19 Select one of the walls under the hip roof. and then verify that Attach Wall: Top is selected. (Press ESC to close the SteeringWheels.

Next. click (Join/Unjoin Roof). Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint on page 746. i_Roofs.rvt. 25 Proceed to the next exercise. and then select the edge of the main roof to join the roofs. you create a shed roof over the entrance to a house from a footprint. The properly joined roof should resemble the following illustration. 24 Select the edge of the hip roof. Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint In this exercise.Notice that the new hip roof does not properly join to the back of the house. use the Join Roof command to fix the roof. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 23 On the Tools toolbar. 746 | Chapter 23 Roofs .

press TAB. expand Views (all). 4 On the Options Bar. and then select a point near the midpoint of the upper horizontal line you sketched earlier. clear Defines Slope. 11 Repeat the trim procedure on the adjacent corner to create a closed loop without intersections. click (Trim/Extend). Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint | 747 . 9 On the Options Bar. click Pick Walls. and double-click Level 2. select the left vertical roof line. You must trim these lines to create a valid sketch. expand Floor Plans. Next. and then click to select all three of the entry way walls. 5 Place the cursor over one of the exterior walls that defines the entry way. Make sure you select the segment on the side that you want to keep. 8 On the Tools toolbar. Next. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. verify that the Trim/Extend to Corner option is selected. enter 0' 0'' for Overhang.1 In the Project Browser. 3 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 7 Select the exterior face of the main wall to close the sketch. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. you add a slope-defining line. and enter 1' 0'' for Overhang. 6 On the Options Bar. 10 To trim the first line segment. trim the extra line segments that result from the intersection of the sketch lines. Verify that a blue dashed line displays around the exterior side of the walls before clicking to select the walls.

(SteeringWheels). select Defines slope.rvt. 13 On the Options Bar. and use the Orbit tool to rotate the model. and double-click Level 2. 19 On the View toolbar. 1 In the Project Browser. Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof on page 748. and click OK. click Edit to activate the roof footprint sketch. and press ENTER. Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof In this exercise. click Finish Roof to complete the roof.12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. expand Views (all). 18 Click Yes to attach the walls to the roof. expand 3D Views. expand Views (all). click (Default 3D View) to display the model. 4 In the Project Browser. 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. i_Roofs. 16 Under Constraints. Notice the rise value is displayed next to the slope marker. 2 Select the shed roof over the entrance of the house. click Modify. 21 Proceed to the next exercise. 3 On the Options Bar. click 20 On the View toolbar. expand Floor Plans. and double-click 3D. click Roof Properties. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 748 | Chapter 23 Roofs . you add slope arrows to the shed roof. 14 Enter 6" for the rise value to change the roof slope. 17 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. and select the lower horizontal line at the front of the roof. enter -2' 0'' for Base Offset From Level.

you need to split the slope defining line into three segments. 15 Sketch a slope arrow from the reference plane to the midpoint of the lower horizontal roof line: Select the intersection of the left vertical reference plane and the roof line to specify the location of the slope arrow tail. click (Pick Lines).15 to add the second slope arrow. and enter 2' 0'' for Offset. Next. click Ref Plane. 6 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. and then select it to specify the location of the slope arrow head. you need to add two reference planes. and zoom in around the shed roof footprint. change the longest slope line segment (the middle segment) so that it no longer defines slope. 10 Split the slope defining line where the reference planes intersect as shown in the following illustration. 8 Select the two vertical sketch lines. Move the cursor along the roof line until the midpoint displays. 11 On the Design Bar. To help locate the position of each split. Verify that the reference planes are located inside the shed roof sketch. 12 On the Options Bar. clear Defines Slope. click Slope Arrow. add two new slope arrows. Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof | 749 . click Modify. ■ 16 Repeat steps 13 . 13 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. and select the middle segment of the slope defining line. Before you can add slope arrows. 14 On the Options Bar. click Split Walls and Lines.5 On the View menu. 7 On the Options Bar. Next. verify ■ (Draw) is selected. 9 On the Tools menu. click Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region.

2 Select the gable roof over the garage. and then click OK. expand Floor Plans. i_Roofs. on the Options Bar. 9 Select the left vertical eave to use to align the eaves. The eave lines display with a dimension. When aligning eaves. Aligning Roof Eaves on page 750. The head should snap to the midpoint of the line as in the previous steps. (Properties). and click 19 Under Constraints. and double-click Garage Roof. 6 With the two gable end lines selected. (Properties). select both slope arrows. click Modify. 23 Proceed to the next exercise. Aligning Roof Eaves In this exercise. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. select Defines Slope. When eave heights differ. and move the cursor to place the arrow. under Dimensions. 3 On the Options Bar. 5 On the Options Bar. select Slope for Specify. the adjacent eave heights must align. NOTE If the front wall is separated from the roof. When you sketch a hip roof. click Finish Roof to complete the roof. you convert the gable roof over the garage to a hip roof and use the Align Eaves tool to adjust the eave heights. 4 Select the two gable end lines (the lines without slope definition).rvt. use the Attach Top/Base command to join the wall to the roof. 1 In the Project Browser. 20 Under Dimensions. you can use the Align Eaves tool to align them. 18 Press CTRL. and click OK. enter 12'' for Rise/12". 750 | Chapter 23 Roofs . enter 6'' for Rise/12". 21 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. This dimension is the height of the eave measured from the sketch plane. expand Views (all). you must select one eave to use to align both eaves.Begin the tail at the right reference plane. click Edit. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. click Align Eaves. 22 Click (Default 3D View) on the View toolbar to display the model. click 8 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 17 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar.

Next. 13 On the View toolbar. you create a mansard roof by cutting off a hip roof at a specific level and adding another roof on top of it. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 12 On the Design Bar. click Finish Roof. click Training Files. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. 10 On the Options Bar. on the File menu. Notice how the overhang adjusts to match the eave height of the first eave. click (Default 3D View) to display the model. Creating a Mansard Roof In this exercise. 11 Select both the horizontal eave lines. Creating a Mansard Roof | 751 . In the left pane of the Open dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 14 If you want to save your changes. 15 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. Creating a Mansard Roof on page 751.rvt. select Adjust Overhang to align the eaves by adjusting the overhang to match the eave height of the first eave. and open Imperial\i_Mansard_Roof. click Save As. select a method to align the eaves.

select Level 3 for Cutoff Level. click Lines. expand Views (all). under Constraints. click 5 Click OK to cut the top of the roof off at level 3. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. 7 In the Project Browser. 752 | Chapter 23 Roofs . 9 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. (Properties). and double-click North. 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. click Modify. create a new roof that starts at level 3 and completes the mansard roof. and double-click Level 3. expand Elevations. expand Views (all). 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Next.1 In the Project Browser. on the Options Bar. click (Default 3D View) to display the model. expand Floor Plans. you constrain the current roof so it does not rise above Level 3. Notice the model has four defined levels: In the next steps. 3 Select the roof and. 6 On the View toolbar.

click Save As. under Dimensions. 19 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. click Modify. 17 On the View toolbar. Creating a Mansard Roof | 753 . and select the remaining three lines.10 On the Options Bar. 14 On the Options Bar. enter 3'' for Rise/12". click Finish Roof. 11 Select the four edges of the roof cutoff. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. press TAB. click . and then select Defines slope. on the File menu. (Default 3D View) to display the model with the complete 18 If you want to save your changes. and save the exercise file with a unique name. click (Pick Lines). 12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Creating a Low Slope Roof on page 754. click mansard roof. 16 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 13 Select one of the roof cutoff lines. 20 Proceed to the next exercise. and click OK.

you modify the slab to represent roof drains in the low slope roof.Creating a Low Slope Roof In this exercise. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. 754 | Chapter 23 Roofs . In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. After you add the roof. You also modify the structure of the roof slab to more accurately represent the tapered insulation condition used to create the roof drainage system. click Pick Walls. under Floor Plans. Create a flat roof by footprint 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. you add a roof to a building shell. and open Common\c_Low_Slope_Roof. 3 On the Design Bar. NOTE This exercise uses a common training file and Imperial units. double-click Roof. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.

and that Overhang is 0' 0''. select the interior face of the curved wall on the right. 5 In the drawing area. verify that Defines slope is not selected. you cannot use TAB to select the chain of walls. Because the walls are not continuous. click (Trim/Extend). 6 Select the interior face of a wall segment on each side of the building and 1 on either side of the arc wall at the entry. Creating a Low Slope Roof | 755 . Instead you select walls on each side of the building and then use the Trim tool to create a closed loop sketch. 7 On the Tools toolbar.4 On the Options Bar.

and click OK. as shown: 9 On the Design Bar. for Type. double-click the section head to open the section view. click Finish Roof.EPDM.8 Select the walls to create a closed loop. 13 Zoom in to the upper left area of the roof. click Roof Properties. select Steel Truss . 10 In the Element Properties dialog. Open a section view 12 In the drawing area.Insulation on Metal Deck . 11 On the Design Bar. 756 | Chapter 23 Roofs .

click (Draw Split Lines). you alter the shape of the slab to represent a roof drainage layout. under Floor Plans. 15 Use the TAB key to highlight the roof. Add split lines to segment the roof 14 In the Project Browser.The roof has been created. and select the midpoint of the bottom horizontal roof line Creating a Low Slope Roof | 757 . 17 Select the midpoint of the top horizontal roof line. double-click Roof. but it is a flat object with no slope or indication of roof drainage. 16 On the Options Bar. In the next steps. and click to select it. 18 Move the cursor down. You use this tool to split the roof slab into 6 regions so that you can modify the slope independently.

add a second horizontal split line beginning at the top endpoint of the arc. Add elevation points 21 With the roof still selected. 758 | Chapter 23 Roofs . (Add points).You create a split line vertically down the center. 19 Select the lower endpoint of the arc line. 20 Using the same method. move the cursor horizontally to the left. and select a point on the opposite roof line. Next. on the Options Bar. click 22 Click to add a point close to the center of each section. The roof is now divided into 6 sections. you begin to shape the slab by adding points for the roof drains and modifying the elevations of the points and edges.

In this exercise. 23 On the Options Bar. You modify the points individually. 24 Select the point in the upper left region of the roof. exact placement of the points is not important. specify a -2'' dimension for the remaining 5 points. click (Modify Sub-Elements). The dimensional value is relative to the roof plane. Creating a Low Slope Roof | 759 . for the dimension. 25 Using the same method. Layout tools in Revit Structure such as reference planes and dimensions can be used to more accurately place editing points on a roof slab. enter -2''. and press ENTER. You could also select multiple points and change them all at once from the Options Bar.

including the interior edges of the roof regions.The lines on the roof now represent the ridges of the deformed slab shape. as shown: 28 On the Options Bar. and press ENTER. Edit the roof edges 26 On the Options Bar. 27 Press and hold CTRL. enter 4''. 29 On the Design Bar. and select all of the roof edges. click (Modify Sub-Elements). 760 | Chapter 23 Roofs . for Elevation. click Modify.

34 In the Edit Assembly dialog. the slope will be accommodated in the insulation layer. By making the insulation layer variable. for Structure. 36 View the results in the section view. click Edit. leaving the other layers to maintain the original plane of placement for the roof. select Variable. 32 In the Element Properties dialog.Clicking Modify or pressing ESC exits the editing mode and the shape edits are applied to the slab. double-click the section head to view the additional affects of the shape editing. click Edit/New. 31 Select the roof slab. Modify the construction of the slab type 30 In the drawing area. and on the Options Bar. The entire slab is sloped. 33 In the Type Properties dialog. The slab has not responded exactly as intended. Creating a Low Slope Roof | 761 . but in this case you want the insulation layer to create the slope. 35 Click OK 3 times. In some cases this type of slope is desired. under Construction. for the Thermal/Air Layer. You edit the construction of the slab type to achieve this result. click (Properties).

and save the exercise file with a unique name. Creating Fascia. you learn to use the Host Sweep command to create fascia on the roof of a condominium. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 39 Proceed to the next lesson. 3 Press CTRL. After you create a roof. 762 | Chapter 23 Roofs .The insulation now tapers from the edges to the drain in the center.rvt. click Edit/New to access the type properties of the fascia. Creating Roof Fascia In this exercise. click Save As. gutters. click Training Files. Creating Fascia. and click Open. you can easily create its fascia.rfa. Gutters. 37 If you want to save your changes. click (Properties). 6 In the Element Properties dialog. 1 Click File menu ➤ Load From Library ➤ Load Family. and open Imperial\Families\Profiles\Roofs. you learn how to create roof fascia. select Fascia-Built-Up. and Soffits In this lesson. gutters. click Training Files. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Gutters. and Soffits on page 762. and soffits in Revit Structure. 38 Close the exercise file without saving your changes.rfa and Gutter Profile-Cove. and soffits. 5 On the Options Bar. 4 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. and open Common\c_Condominium. click Host Sweep ➤ Roof Fascia. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. on the File menu.

7 In the Type Properties dialog. 14 Proceed to the next exercise. 11 Select the top edge of the roof to place the fascia. 12 Select all of the roof top edges to place the fascia around the building. under Construction. and click OK. click Modify to exit the Fascia command. 8 In the Name dialog. Creating Gutters on page 764. enter Built-up Fascia. Creating Roof Fascia | 763 . 10 Move the cursor to the top edge of the roof. click Duplicate. and click OK twice. 13 On the Design Bar. select Fascia-Built-Up: 1 x 12 w 1 x 8 for Profile. 9 In the Type Properties dialog.

click in the Value field for Material. click (Properties). select Gutter-Bevel: 5'' x 5'' for Profile. click Edit/New. 10 Click to place the gutter. 7 Under Materials and Finishes. and click OK three times. click Host Sweep ➤ Roof Gutter. select Metal-Aluminum for Name. . 6 In the Type Properties dialog. 764 | Chapter 23 Roofs . and then click 8 In the Materials dialog.rvt.Creating Gutters In this exercise. 5 Enter Cove Shape Gutter for Name. 2 On the Options Bar. 4 In the Type Properties dialog. under Construction. you use the Host Sweep command to place a gutter at the bottom edge of the roof on a condominium building model. 9 Move the cursor to the bottom edge of the roof. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 1 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. c_Condominium. click Duplicate. and click OK. 3 In the Properties dialog.

you learn how to place a roof soffit. and double-click Roof. Creating Soffits In this exercise. You add the soffit underneath the roof of the condominium building model that you used in the previous exercise. c_Condominium. 12 Proceed to the next exercise. expand Views. 3 On the Design Bar. 1 In the Project Browser.11 Continue to add gutters to the other roof edges of the building model. expand Floor Plans. click Roof ➤ Roof Soffit. Creating Soffits | 765 .rvt. click Pick Roofs. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Creating Soffits on page 765. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.

766 | Chapter 23 Roofs . and double-click 3D. 6 In the Project Browser. 8 Select the roof. click Join Geometry.4 Select the roof. 5 On the Design Bar. expand 3D Views. and then select the soffit to join them. 7 On the Tools menu. click Finish Sketch. expand Views (all). Notice that the geometry of the roof and the soffit overlap.

10 Close the exercise file without saving your changes.9 If you want to save your changes. and save the exercise file with a unique name. Creating Soffits | 767 . on the File menu. click Save As.

768 .

In this tutorial. you create a model group for a typical kitchen for a condominium unit. It also gives all those with access to the library the ability to load any group from the library into their project drawing. all instances in the building model are updated. you can create reusable entities that represent layouts common to many building projects. You can also nest groups within other groups. you not only simplify their placement.Grouping 24 Using the grouping functionality in Revit Structure. and typical office layouts. You can also update all instances of a group in the building model by editing a single instance of the group and saving the changes. and rotate the other instance to modify the layout position. hotel rooms. In this exercise. and is contained in every instance of the host group that you place in the building model. 769 . you can place instances of the group in the building model using various methods. You mirror one instance of the group. and all new instances that you place contain the modifications. Modifications to the nested group are automatically included in the host group. when you make changes to a single instance of a model group. place. Because existing groups can be duplicated and then customized for another purpose. creating a library of groups for your office can reduce the amount of work needed to create. This functionality ensures consistency within and across projects. the host group is also updated automatically. you add the new model group to a previously created group. you place 2 new instances of the kitchen group in the floor plan. When you make changes to a nested group. For example. By grouping objects. Creating and Placing a Group In this exercise. you learn how to use model groups to collect related elements to simplify placement of repetitive units. The new group is considered nested within the host group. you create a model group for a typical kitchen. and then you nest the kitchen in a 2 bedroom condominium unit group. Examples of the types of units for which groups are intended include condominium units. Modifying. or with those working on a different project. you also simplify the modification process. and Nesting Groups In this lesson. Creating. In another exercise. and modify repetitive units. Saving a group to a library gives you the ability to share the group with other team members working on the same project. After you create a model group. You create the group by selecting drawing objects and grouping them as a single entity.

and open Imperial\i_Groups-Condominium. enter ZR. Create a group for the typical kitchen layout 1 In the Project Browser.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and zoom to the kitchen in the upper-left area of the floor plan. click Training Files. NOTE You may need to scroll the left pane to see the Training Files folder.rvt. 770 | Chapter 24 Grouping . expand Floor Plans. expand Views (all). and double-click First Floor. 2 Click in the drawing area. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

4 On the Edit toolbar.3 Draw a selection box (lower-right corner to upper-left corner) around the kitchen. The objects are now grouped and can be placed in the drawing as a single entity. Creating and Placing a Group | 771 . 5 In the Create Model Group dialog. enter Typical Kitchen. click (Group). and click OK.

8 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. select the center control for the group origin. 772 | Chapter 24 Grouping .Change the origin point for the group 6 In the drawing area. 7 On the Design Bar. click Modify. and drag it to the upper-right corner of the kitchen.

Place instances of the group 9 In the Project Browser. 11 Click in the upper-right corner of the stairwell to place a second instance. Creating and Placing a Group | 773 . 13 Select the first instance of the Typical Kitchen group that you just placed. click Modify. under Groups. 10 Zoom to the center of the floor plan. right-click Typical Kitchen. expand Model. and click the upper-left corner of the lower unit to place the kitchen group. 12 On the Design Bar. and click Create Instance.

click (Mirror). select the group and use the arrow keys on your keyboard to make any minor adjustments. 774 | Chapter 24 Grouping .14 On the Edit toolbar. 15 On the Options Bar. NOTE If the kitchen is not placed exactly as shown in the following image. The kitchen is now positioned correctly in the floor plan. 16 Select the adjacent wall near the sink as the axis of reflection. clear Copy.

and on the Edit toolbar. Creating and Placing a Group | 775 . click (Rotate).17 Select the kitchen in the stairwell. 19 Click above the right area of the kitchen to rotate the placement. 18 Click in the drawing area to the left of the kitchen.

NOTE If the kitchen is not placed exactly as shown in the following images. one mirrored. as shown. select the group and use the arrow keys on your keyboard to make any minor adjustments. 21 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. and one rotated. 776 | Chapter 24 Grouping . You should now have three instances of the Typical Kitchen group in your model: one with the original orientation. 20 On the Design Bar. click Modify.

name the file i_Groups-Condominium_in_progress.Save the training file 22 On the File menu. When you finish editing. 2 Move the cursor over the wall to the left of the kitchen. Modifying a Group In this exercise. i_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. 23 Navigate to your preferred directory. Modifying a Group | 777 . all instances of the same group in the drawing are updated.rvt. click Save As.rvt. press TAB to highlight the wall. you make changes to an instance of a group. Modify visibility of elements in a group 1 Zoom in to the kitchen on the right above the stair. Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. and click to select it. and click Save.

and click to select the wall. Click icon to exclude in this group instance. and click member to group instance. 8 On the Design Bar. click Modify. Click icon to exclude in this group instance. press TAB.). (Restore excluded group 5 Click (Group Member.).3 Click (Group Member. NOTE To display an excluded element. 778 | Chapter 24 Grouping .). 6 Move the cursor over the horizontal wall. 7 Click (Group Member. select the element. Click icon to exclude in this group instance. This element remains in the group but is not visible in the project view for this group instance. and click to select the door. press TAB.). 4 Move the cursor over the door.

move the cursor to the left. select Bifold-4 Panel : 48'' x 84''. and click to draw a horizontal wall that extends to the left vertical wall. click Modify. 11 On the Design Bar. 15 Click in the new wall on the left and on the right to place 2 sets of folding doors for a closet.Add elements for a unique condition 9 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Modifying a Group | 779 . click Wall. 10 Click at the endpoint of the short vertical wall in the kitchen entrance. 12 On the Design Bar. click Door. 13 In the Type Selector. 14 On the Options Bar. clear Tag on Placement.

20 On the Options Bar. 21 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 23 Click near the bottom corner of the wall. 19 Select the Typical Kitchen group. click Edit Group. select the vertical wall to the left of the long counter top. 22 In the drawing area. and the group editor toolbar initially displays in the upper left corner. In edit group mode. 780 | Chapter 24 Grouping . select Opening ➤ Wall Opening. The elements in this instance of the group remain displayed in their object style. All other elements in the model are grayed out. and click near the top corner of the wall to create an opening. click Modify.16 On the Design Bar. 17 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. Modify geometry of a group and have changes display in all group instances 18 Zoom in to the kitchen in the left area of the floor plan. move the cursor up. the background color of the drawing area is pale yellow.

All instances of the Typical Kitchen are updated to reflect the change. 29 Click File menu ➤ Save. which acts as the host. The kitchen group is then nested within the 2 bedroom unit group. click Finish. created in an earlier lesson. When you nest the kitchen in the 2 bedroom unit. click Modify. 28 On the group editor toolbar. click 27 For Base Offset. to the 2 Bedroom Unit group. (Element Properties). Nesting Groups In this exercise. and on the Options Bar. for Unconnected Height.24 On the Design Bar. you add the Typical Kitchen group. and click OK. 25 Select the opening. Nesting Groups | 781 . all instances of the host group are updated to contain the nested group. under Constraints. enter 7'. and the wall and folding doors for the closet. enter 3' 4''. 26 In the Element Properties dialog.

under Floor Plans. click Edit Group. 3 On the Options Bar.Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. 4 On the group editor toolbar. 5 In the drawing area. in the Project Browser. 782 | Chapter 24 Grouping . select the Typical Kitchen group. i_Groups-Condominium_in_progress.rvt. 2 Select the 2 Bedroom Unit group in the top area of the floor plan. double-click First Floor. click (Add to Group). Add elements to an existing group 1 If necessary.

9 Select the 2 bedroom group. click Finish. Nesting Groups | 783 .6 Press TAB. under Floor Plans. Notice that the Typical Kitchen and pantry are nested within the 2 bedroom group. select the wall between the folding doors. 7 On the group editor toolbar. 8 In the Project Browser. double-click Second Floor. and each of the bifold doors.

double-click First Floor. You can add the detail group to other views of the building model. such as door and window tags. you add door tags to a group. You create a detail group in the First Floor plan and add the group to the Second Floor plan of the building model. In the next exercise. and filled regions. you work with groups in order to use them in the most efficient manner within and across projects. Working with Detail Groups In this lesson.10 Click File menu ➤ Save. You then save the region and the text note as a detail group. Draw a filled region 1 In the Project Browser. Creating a Detail Group In this exercise. Attached detail groups are created when you group view-specific elements that are associated with a specific model group. such as text. 2 Zoom in to the stair area in the center of the floor plan. You work with the attached detail group in a different way than you had previously worked with host and nested groups because attached detail groups require more manual manipulation. i_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. Detail groups are created when you group view-specific elements. under Floor Plans.rvt. 784 | Chapter 24 Grouping . and create an attached detail group containing the tags. Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. you sketch and annotate a rectangular filled region that represents an area of tiled flooring in front of the elevators in the building model.

A rectangular region with a diagonal cross hatch pattern is added in front of the elevator doors. 7 On the Design Bar. click to draw a rectangular region. 6 Move the cursor down and to the left. and select a point below the left elevator.3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Filled Region. 4 On the Options Bar. Creating a Detail Group | 785 . click Finish Sketch. 5 Click the upper-right endpoint below the elevators as the start point of the rectangle.

10 Click in the filled region to specify the leader start point. and click OK. 12 Enter Tile. enter Elevator Lobby Tile. 786 | Chapter 24 Grouping . and on the Design Bar. The text note with arc leader is added to the building model. 14 On the Edit toolbar. click to add an arc leader. 11 Click below the filled region to end the leader and specify the text start point. click Text. as shown. click (Group). 17 Move the origin of the group to the corner of the elevator shaft. 9 On the Options Bar. 16 In the drawing area. Create a detail group 13 Press and hold CTRL. 15 In the Create Detail Group dialog. select the instance of the Elevator lobby tile group. and select the text note and the filled region. click Modify.Add a text note 8 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.

right-click Elevator Lobby Tile. you add door tags to the 2 Bedroom Unit group. click Modify 23 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. and click Create Instance. click to place the detail group in front of the elevators. 24 Click File menu ➤ Save. under Floor Plans. click Modify. under Groups. Because the detail group contains variables. and then use the door tags to create an attached detail group. it cannot be added to a group in the same Using Attached Detail Groups | 787 . 20 In the Project Browser. 22 On the Design Bar. 21 In the drawing area. expand Detail. Using Attached Detail Groups In this exercise. Add a group instance to a different view 19 In the Project Browser.18 On the Design Bar. double-click Second Floor.

3 On the Options Bar. draw a selection box (lower-right corner to upper-left corner) around the right area of the floor plan including the door tags. NOTE Your door tag numbers may be different.manner that a drawing component can be added. click Tag ➤ By Category. double-click First Floor. Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. under Floor Plans. Create an attached detail group 6 In the drawing area. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. i_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. click Modify. 5 On the Design Bar. 788 | Chapter 24 Grouping . Place door tags 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. clear Leader. 4 Place door tags (10 total) in the original instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit. you must manually attach it to each instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit group. as shown.

select Door Tags. double-click Second Floor. and click OK. click Check None. expand Groups\Model\2 Bedroom Unit. click (Group). for Attached Detail Group Name. 10 In the Create Model Group and Attached Detail Group dialog. click (Filter Selection). under Floor Plans. 11 In the Project Browser. 9 On the Edit toolbar. and click OK. Using Attached Detail Groups | 789 . and view that Floor Plan: 2 Bedroom Door Tags is attached. enter 2 Bedroom Door Tags. Place a detail group in another group instance 12 In the Project Browser. 8 In the Filter dialog.7 On the Options Bar.

and click OK. Using groups from a library ensures consistency and increases productivity for projects that reuse similar typical layouts for repetitive units. You also convert the group instance to a linked file to replace the group with an alternative unit layout. the doors are numbered based upon the order in which you placed each group. 16 On the Design Bar. This enables you to create a library of groups that can be shared with other team members and used on multiple projects. you can then work with it in the context of the new project. 15 In the Attached Detail Group Placement dialog. therefore. select Floor Plan: 2 Bedroom Door Tags.13 Select the model group 2 Bedroom Unit. you save a typical condominium layout to a library where it can be accessed by other team members for use in other projects. NOTE Component instance numbering is sequential. Saving and Loading Groups In this lesson. click Modify. Saving and Loading Groups In this exercise. Door Tags are placed on the Second Floor instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit group. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save. Training File 790 | Chapter 24 Grouping . click Place Detail. When you load the group from the library into a new project. 14 On the Options Bar. you save a group to a library so that you can use the group in a new project.

You can save a group as a Revit project file (RVT) if you are working in a project. 6 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load File as Group. explaining that duplicate types were found and the types from the new project will be used. In this case. click Desktop. 3 For File name. or a Revit family file (RFA) if you are working in the Family Editor. Saving and Loading Groups | 791 . browse to the Desktop. select 2 Bedroom Unit. i_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. 5 In the New Project dialog. right-click 2 Bedroom Unit. and click OK.Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. click OK. and expand Model. 10 Right-click 2 Bedroom Unit. verify that Project is selected.rvt. and click Create Instance. and click Save Group. Load the group in a new project 4 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. Place an instance of the loaded group 9 In the Project Browser. expand Groups. and click Save. accept the default template file. 11 Click in the drawing area to place the group instance. and click Open. A warning dialog displays. 12 On the Design Bar. under Groups\Model. 13 Zoom in to the 2 Bedroom Unit group.rvt. click Modify. 7 In the Load File as Group dialog. verify that Same as group name is selected. for Create new. 2 In the left pane of the Save Group dialog. 8 In the Duplicate Types dialog. the file is saved as a Revit project file (RVT). Save a group to a library 1 In the Project Browser.

26 Close the file with or without saving it. and click OK. 17 On the Design Bar. and open Common\c_2 Bedroom Unit-Alternate. 792 | Chapter 24 Grouping . 23 In the confirmation dialog. click Training Files. You can remove the linked file from the project by clicking Remove Link. Convert the linked model to a group 19 In the drawing area. or the group instance can be replaced with an existing linked file. click Yes to replace the existing Typical Kitchen group with the alternate Typical Kitchen group. This message indicates that all instances of the linked model will be deleted from the project. click OK. When a group is converted to a link. but the linked model file will still be loaded in the project. or you can remove it at a later time from the Manage Links dialog. click Remove Link.rvt file is added as a link to the project. select the linked Revit model. 16 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Link. 25 The linked file is converted to a new model group stored in the project. 15 In the Convert Group to Link dialog. expand Revit Links. 24 In the message dialog.Convert group instance to a linked file 14 Select the group. verify that Attached Details is selected only. The 2 Bedroom Unit-Alternate. either the selected group can be used to make a new linked file. 22 In the Duplicate Types dialog. click Bind. and the link is removed. 18 In the Project Browser. click Use Existing.rvt. 21 In the Bind Link Options dialog. 20 On the Options Bar. click Modify. and on the Options Bar.

You're Reading a Free Preview

Download
scribd
/*********** DO NOT ALTER ANYTHING BELOW THIS LINE ! ************/ var s_code=s.t();if(s_code)document.write(s_code)//-->